Drypix4000 E05 PDF

FUJI MEDICAL DRY LASER IMAGER
DRYPIX 4000
SERVICE MANUAL
Copyright © 2004-2007 by FUJIFILM Corporation
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced,

stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by means,
electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without
the prior written permission of FUJIFILM Corporation.
Document No. 006-267-05

First Edition Nov. 05, 2004
Revised Edition May 15, 2007
Printed in Japan
0.1
1. HANDLING THIS SERVICE MANUAL 1.3 About Notation in the Manual
 Notation of Cautions, Warning, etc.

1.1 About This Service Manual The notation formats of "WARNING", "CAUTION", "INSTRUCTIONS", "NOTE",
"REMARKS" and "REFERENCE" are shown below.
 Scope
This Service Manual applies to the Fuji Medical Dry Laser Imager DRYPIX 4000.
WARNING
Indicated where failure to observe the instruction given may result in death or
 Notation of Unit Symbols serious injuries.
For notation of unit symbols, metric units set forth in the International Systems of Units
(SI) are used, as a rule. However, some metric units that are not allowed in the SI but
are permitted under the Measurement Law are partially used. CAUTION
Indicated where failure to observe the instruction given may result in light or
1.2 Service Manual Appropriations moderate injuries, or serious malfunction (unrecoverable or difficult to recover)
of the equipment.
1. All rights are reserved by the FUJIFILM Corporation (FUJIFILM).
2. Manual usage is restricted to FUJIFILM equipment related technical and service <INSTRUCTIONS>
personnel.
3. This manual contains information relating to FUJIFILM equipment and is therefore Indicated where failure to observe the instruction given may result in damage to
proprietary. Unauthorized disclosure is prohibited. the equipment, or other problems.
4. FUJIFILM's prior consent is required in regard to the following.
• Manual copying in whole or in part. <NOTE>
• Disclosure of manual contents to unauthorized personnel. Indicated where special attention is required during a work procedure.
• Manual uses for purposes other than technical service.
5. The contents of this manual are subject to changes for product improvement. <REMARKS>
Indicated where description of the term used or supplementary explanation is given.
 Indication of Refer To
The " " mark is used to indicate the chapter or section you should refer to.
Its format is as indicated below.
{MC:1.1_Cover}
006-267-04
10.02.2006 FM4992
DRYPIX 4000 Service Manual 0.1
GENERAL CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTION 0.2
SAFETY PRECAUTION
1. SAFETY PRECAUTION ................. SAFETY PRECAUTION-1

1.1 General Precautions................................SAFETY PRECAUTION-1
1.2 Precautions Against Laser Radiation ......SAFETY PRECAUTION-3
2. LABELS ........................................ SAFETY PRECAUTION-4

2.1 Laser Caution Labels ..............................SAFETY PRECAUTION-4
2.2 Other Labels ............................................SAFETY PRECAUTION-6
2.3 Additional Protective Grounding
Earth Mark ...............................................SAFETY PRECAUTION-9
2.4 Power Cable Caution Label.....................SAFETY PRECAUTION-9
3. PROTECTIVE HOUSING FOR

LASER RADIATION EXPOSURE
PREVENTION ............................. SAFETY PRECAUTION-10
4. CONNECTABLE PERIPHERALS .. SAFETY PRECAUTION-11
5. CLASSIFICATION ....................... SAFETY PRECAUTION-11
006-267-01
02.28.2005 FM4555
GENERAL CONTENTS SPECIFICATIONS 0.3
SPECIFICATIONS
1. SPECIFICATIONS ............................... SPECIFICATIONS-1

1.1 Part Name ........................................................SPECIFICATIONS-1
1.2 List of Optional Parts ........................................SPECIFICATIONS-3
1.3 General Specifications .....................................SPECIFICATIONS-4
1.4 Equipment Dimensions and Weight .................SPECIFICATIONS-6
1.5 Means to Move and Secure Equipment ...........SPECIFICATIONS-7
1.6 Environmental Requirements ...........................SPECIFICATIONS-8
1.7 Electrical Requirements ...................................SPECIFICATIONS-9
1.8 Equipment Installation Space .........................SPECIFICATIONS-10
1.8.1 Installation Space .......................................................SPECIFICATIONS-10
1.8.2 Space Required for Maintenance Work .....................SPECIFICATIONS-10
1.9 Disposing the Equipment ............................... SPECIFICATIONS-11
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
GENERAL CONTENTS DISCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT (MD) 0.4
DISCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT (MD)
1. OUTLINE OF EQUIPMENT .................................. MD-1 3.2 Removal Unit ..........................................................................MD-22

3.2.1 Suction Cup Arm Home Position ........................................................ MD-22
1.1 Functions of Equipment............................................................MD-1
3.2.2 Film Suction ....................................................................................... MD-22
1.2 System Configuration ...............................................................MD-2 3.2.3 Film Flapping Operations ................................................................... MD-23
1.3 Overall Configuration and Names of Parts ...............................MD-4 3.2.4 Film Release ...................................................................................... MD-24
1.3.1 External View ....................................................................................... MD-4 3.2.5 Removal Conveyance ........................................................................ MD-24
1.3.2 Operation Panel ................................................................................... MD-6 3.2.6 Returning to Home Position ............................................................... MD-24
1.3.3 Layout of External Connector .............................................................. MD-7 3.2.7 Magic Arm .......................................................................................... MD-25
1.3.4 Layout of Units ..................................................................................... MD-8 3.3 Conveyor Unit.........................................................................MD-26
1.3.5 Layout of I/O Parts and Description of Functions ................................ MD-9 3.3.1 Conveyance ....................................................................................... MD-26
1.3.6 Layout of Boards ................................................................................ MD-17 3.3.2 Cleaning Roller Detection .................................................................. MD-26
3.3.3 Striking against Stopper ..................................................................... MD-27
2. STARTING UP AND ENDING 3.3.4 Gripping by Conveyor Unit Exit Roller ............................................... MD-27
THE EQUIPMENT ............................................. MD-18 3.3.5 Film Edge Sensor............................................................................... MD-28
2.1 Power ON Operations ............................................................MD-18 3.3.6 Pre-recording Conveyance ................................................................ MD-28
2.2 Error Processing .....................................................................MD-18 3.4 Sub-scanning Unit ..................................................................MD-29
2.3 Power OFF Operations ..........................................................MD-19 3.4.1 Sub-scanning Conveyance ................................................................ MD-29
3.4.2 Recording Conveyance ...................................................................... MD-29
3. DESCRIPTION OF MECHANICAL 3.5 Scanning Optics Unit ..............................................................MD-30
OPERATIONS.................................................... MD-20 3.5.1 Scanner Unit ...................................................................................... MD-30
3.1 Film Loading Unit ...................................................................MD-20 3.5.2 Laser Exposure .................................................................................. MD-30
3.1.1 Film Sizes........................................................................................... MD-20 3.5.3 Density Measurement Section ........................................................... MD-31
3.1.2 Film Pack/Shutter Detection .............................................................. MD-20 3.5.4 Temperature Correction ..................................................................... MD-31
3.1.3 Barcode Reader (BCR) ...................................................................... MD-21 3.6 Heat Development Unit ..........................................................MD-32
3.1.4 Tray Detection/Tray Lock ................................................................... MD-21 3.6.1 Heat Development ............................................................................. MD-32
3.6.2 Temperature Control .......................................................................... MD-32
3.7 Film Release Unit ...................................................................MD-33
3.7.1 Film Discharge ................................................................................... MD-33
3.7.2 High Speed Discharge ....................................................................... MD-33
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
GENERAL CONTENTS DISCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT (MD) 0.5
3.8 Sorter ......................................................................................MD-34 5.3 Normal Processing .................................................................MD-56

3.8.1 Film Conveyance ............................................................................... MD-34 5.3.1 Film Removal ..................................................................................... MD-56
3.8.2 Changeover Guide Switching ............................................................ MD-34 5.3.2 Conveyance ....................................................................................... MD-61
3.8.3 Film Discharge ................................................................................... MD-35 5.3.3 Sub-scanning Unit .............................................................................. MD-62
5.3.4 Heat Development Unit ...................................................................... MD-63
4. DESCRIPTION OF ELECTRICAL CONTROL...... MD-36 5.3.5 Film Release Unit ............................................................................... MD-64
4.1 System Block Diagram ...........................................................MD-36
6. TIME CHART .................................................... MD-65
4.2 Outline of Power Supply .........................................................MD-37
6.1 Removal Unit Time Chart .......................................................MD-65
4.3 Interlock Control .....................................................................MD-39
6.2 Conveyor Unit Time Chart ......................................................MD-66
4.4 Functions of Boards ...............................................................MD-41
4.4.1 MTH Board ......................................................................................... MD-41 6.3 Sub-Scanning Unit Time Chart ...............................................MD-67
4.4.2 PRN Board ......................................................................................... MD-42 6.4 Heat Development Unit Time Chart........................................MD-68
4.4.3 MCT Board ......................................................................................... MD-43 6.5 Film Release Unit Time Chart ................................................MD-69
4.4.4 SND Board ......................................................................................... MD-44
4.4.5 HTD Board ......................................................................................... MD-46 7. PRINTING FORMATS ........................................ MD-70
4.4.6 PNL Board .......................................................................................... MD-47
7.1 Reading the Format Name .....................................................MD-70
4.4.7 Power Supply Unit ............................................................................. MD-48
7.2 Standard Formats...................................................................MD-70
5. MECHANICAL CONTROL FLOW ....................... MD-49 7.3 Mixed Formats ........................................................................MD-71
5.1 Reading the Mechanical Control Flow....................................MD-49
5.2 Initialization Flow ....................................................................MD-50
5.2.1 Upper/Lower Removal Unit Initialization ............................................ MD-51
5.2.2 Conveyor Unit Exit Grip Roller Initialization ....................................... MD-52
5.2.3 Conveyor Unit Stopper Initialization ................................................... MD-53
5.2.4 Remaining Film Discharge ................................................................. MD-53
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
GENERAL CONTENTS TROUBLESHOOTING (MT) 0.6
TROUBLESHOOTING (MT)
1. TROUBLESHOOTING METHOD .......................... MT-1 5. CLEARING FILM JAMS ................................... MT-100
2. ERROR CODE ..................................................... MT-2 6. TROUBLESHOOTING REFERENCE ................ MT-101

2.1 Checking Error Codes .............................................................. MT-2 6.1 Layout of Fuse...................................................................... MT-101
2.2 Format of Detailed Information ................................................ MT-3 6.1.1 PRN Board ........................................................................................MT-101
2.2.1 FLH Related (Conveyance) Errors Detailed Information ......................MT-3 6.1.2 MCT Board ........................................................................................MT-101
2.2.2 MFC Related (Data Setting/System Related) Errors Detailed 6.1.3 SND Board ........................................................................................MT-102
Information ............................................................................................MT-6 6.1.4 HTD Board ........................................................................................MT-102
2.2.3 DEN Related (Internal Densitometer) Errors Detailed Information .......MT-8 6.1.5 Power Supply Unit (PSU24A, PSU24B) ...........................................MT-103
2.2.4 ESN Related (Film Edge Sensor Related) Errors Detailed 6.2 LED Lighting Information ...................................................... MT-104
Information ............................................................................................MT-8 6.2.1 PRN Board ........................................................................................MT-104
2.2.5 DEV Related (Temperature Control Related) Errors Detailed 6.2.2 MCT Board ........................................................................................MT-104
Information ............................................................................................MT-9
6.2.3 SND Board ........................................................................................MT-105
2.3 Error Code Table ....................................................................MT-11
6.3 Print Position of Board Serial Number.................................. MT-106
2.3.1 Printer..................................................................................................MT-12
6.3.1 PRN Board ........................................................................................MT-106
2.3.2 Formatter.............................................................................................MT-53
6.3.2 MCT Board ........................................................................................MT-106
6.3.3 SND Board ........................................................................................MT-106
3. ABNORMAL IMAGES ........................................ MT-81
6.3.4 HTD Board ........................................................................................MT-106
3.1 Troubleshooting from Abnormal Images................................. MT-81 6.3.5 LDD Board ........................................................................................MT-107
3.2 Scratches and Streaks Caused by Guide Plate ..................... MT-92 6.3.6 LED Board.........................................................................................MT-107
3.2.1 Checking Film .....................................................................................MT-92 6.3.7 PDD Board ........................................................................................MT-107
3.2.2 Scratches on Face Applied with Emulsion ..........................................MT-92 6.3.8 MTH Board ........................................................................................MT-107
3.2.3 Scratches on Base Side ......................................................................MT-96 6.4 Film Information.................................................................... MT-108
6.4.1 Film Information when Process Normally Completed .......................MT-108
4. ABNORMAL OPERATIONS ............................... MT-99 6.4.2 Film Information when Process Abnormally Terminated ...................MT-108
4.1 System Freezes without Displaying Error Code Normally...... MT-99
4.2 Error Message at the Startup Sequence ................................ MT-99
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
GENERAL CONTENTS REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT (MC) 0.7
REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT (MC)
PRECAUTIONS ON INSPECTIONS, 4.4 Removal Drive Cam ...............................................................MC-33

REPLACEMENTS, AND ADJUSTMENTS ................... MC-1 4.5 Suction Cup ............................................................................MC-37
4.6 Magic Arm ..............................................................................MC-38
CONTENTS ............................................................... MC-2
4.7 Pump ......................................................................................MC-40
1. COVERS .............................................................. MC-4 4.8 Solenoid Valve ........................................................................MC-41
1.1 Covers ......................................................................................MC-4 4.9 Hose .......................................................................................MC-42
4.10 Removal Unit Conveyance Motor (MB12/MB22) ...................MC-43
2. FRAME ................................................................ MC-7
4.11 Film Removing Motor (MB11/MB21) ......................................MC-44
2.1 BCR Assembly .........................................................................MC-7
4.12 Film Surface Detection Sensor (SB12/SB22).........................MC-45
2.2 Interlock Switch Assembly ........................................................MC-9
4.13 Suction Cup Arm HP Detection Sensor (SB11/SB12) ............MC-46
3. FILM LOADING UNIT ........................................ MC-13 4.14 Suction Cup Arm Upper Dead-Point Detection Sensor
(SB13/SB23) ............................................................................. MC-48
3.1 Removal Unit/Film Loading Unit ..........................................................MC-13
3.2 Tray ........................................................................................MC-15 5. CONVEYOR UNIT ............................................. MC-49
3.3 Tray Detection Switch (SA12/SA22).......................................MC-17 5.1 Conveyor Unit Exit Assembly .................................................MC-49
3.4 Tray Lock Assembly ...............................................................MC-21 5.2 Conveyor Unit Exit Grip Roller Assembly ...............................MC-51
3.5 Rail .........................................................................................MC-22 5.3 Conveyor Unit Exit Guide (Lower) ..........................................MC-52
3.6 Special Screw.........................................................................MC-24 5.4 Stopper Assembly ..................................................................MC-53
3.7 Squeezing Roller (Upper) .......................................................MC-25 5.5 Stopper Solenoid (SOLD1).....................................................MC-54
3.8 Film Pack/Shutter Detection Sensor (SA11/SA21) .................MC-26 5.6 Conveyor Unit Exit Roller (Lower) ..........................................MC-55
5.7 Film Edge Sensor Encoder Plate ...........................................MC-56
4. REMOVAL UNIT ................................................ MC-27
5.8 Upper Conveyor Unit Open/Close Guide ...............................MC-58
4.1 Removal Unit ..........................................................................MC-27
5.9 Conveyor Unit Turn Roller ......................................................MC-59
4.2 Suction Cup Arm ....................................................................MC-29
5.10 Conveyor Right Guide ............................................................MC-60
4.3 Changing Film Size to 20 x 25 cm Size..................................MC-30
5.11 Film Conveyance Motor (MD1) ..............................................MC-61
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
GENERAL CONTENTS REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT (MC) 0.8
5.12 Cleaning Roller Detection Sensor (SD3) ................................MC-62 9. FILM RELEASE UNIT ........................................ MC-97
5.13 Conveyance Gear ..................................................................MC-63 9.1 Film Release Unit ...................................................................MC-97
9.2 Density Measurement Light-Emitting Board (LED15A) ..........MC-99
6. SUB-SCANNING UNIT ...................................... MC-64
6.1 Sub-Scanning Unit/Upper Conveyor Unit ...............................MC-64 10. CONTROLLER................................................. MC-101
6.2 Sub-Scanning Unit Roller .......................................................MC-68 10.1 Operation Panel ...................................................................MC-101
6.3 Sub-Scanning Motor (ME1) ....................................................MC-72 10.2 Controller Unit ......................................................................MC-103
6.3.1 Removal/Reinstallation ...................................................................... MC-72
10.3 HDD ......................................................................................MC-105
6.3.2 Adjusting when Replacing Sub-Scanning Motor ................................ MC-74
10.4 MTH Board ...........................................................................MC-107
6.4 Flywheel .................................................................................MC-75
10.5 MCT Board ...........................................................................MC-108
6.5 Film Leading Edge Detection Sensor (SE1)...........................MC-78
11. SORTER .......................................................... MC-110
7. SCANNING OPTICS UNIT .......................................... MC-82
11.1 Sorter Covers ....................................................................... MC-110
7.1 Scanner Unit...........................................................................MC-82
7.1.1 Removal/Reinstallation ...................................................................... MC-82 11.2 Sorter.................................................................................... MC-112
7.1.2 Adjustments in Replacement of Scanner Unit ................................... MC-84 11.3 Sorter Conveyance Gear...................................................... MC-116
8. HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT ............................................ MC-88 12. INSTALLING THE MAIN UNIT SOFTWARE .... MC-117
8.1 Heat Development Unit Fan Assembly...................................MC-88 12.1 Preparations ......................................................................... MC-117
8.2 Film Cooling Section ..............................................................MC-89 12.2 Installing from the DI Tool ..................................................... MC-118
8.3 Heat Development Rack Assembly .....................................MC-90 12.2.1 Version Upgrade .............................................................................. MC-118
12.2.2 Full Installation ................................................................................. MC-121
8.4 Heat Development Roller .......................................................MC-92
12.2.3 Printer Software Installation ............................................................. MC-126
8.5 Heat Development Unit Conveyance Motor (MG1) ................MC-93
12.3 Installing from the USB Memory...........................................MC-128
8.6 Heat Development Unit Entrance Guide ................................MC-95 12.3.1 Copying the Main Unit Software to the USB Memory ...................... MC-128
8.7 Heat Development Unit Entrance Sensor (SG1) .................MC-95.1 12.3.2 Upgrading the Version from the USB Memory ................................. MC-130
12.3.3 Full Installation from the USB Memory ............................................ MC-131
8.8 Thermal Protector ................................................................MC-95.2
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
GENERAL CONTENTS SERVICE MODE (MU) 0.9
SERVICE MODE (MU)
1. OUTLINE OF SERVICE MODE ...........................MU-1 [14] QC ............................................................................................... MU-12

[14-1] QC TEST PATTERN ......................................................... MU-12
1.1 Transition of Modes in DRYPIX 4000 .......................................MU-1 [14-2] HISTORY .......................................................................... MU-13
[14-2-1] EXTERNAL DENSITOMETER .............................. MU-13
1.2 Note on Executing Service Mode .............................................MU-1
[14-2-2] FORMAT ................................................................ MU-13
1.3 Operations of Each Utility .........................................................MU-1 [14-2-3] ARTIFACTS ........................................................... MU-13
[14-3] SETTINGS ........................................................................ MU-14
2. U-UTILITY (USER-UTILITY) ...............................MU-2 [14-3-1] BUILT-IN DENSITOMETER ................................... MU-14
[14-3-1-1] AUTO............................................................ MU-14
2.1 U-Utility Menu Tree ...................................................................MU-2 [14-3-1-2] MANUAL....................................................... MU-14
2.2 Starting and Ending the U-Utility ..............................................MU-3 [14-3-2] EXTERNAL DENSITOMETER .............................. MU-15
[14-3-3] FORMAT ................................................................ MU-15
2.3 Details of U-Utility Commands .................................................MU-4 [14-4] LUT ................................................................................... MU-15
[1] AUTO F.D.C. ................................................................................. MU-4 [15] MAMMO.QC ............................................................................ MU-15.1
[2] TEST PATTERN ............................................................................ MU-4 2.4 Other Functions ......................................................................MU-16
[3] UNLOCK TRAY ............................................................................. MU-5
2.4.1 Displaying Printing Jobs and Job Operations .................................... MU-16
[4] PRINT QUEUE.............................................................................. MU-5
2.4.2 Acquisition of Log Data by User ......................................................... MU-17
[5] SET COUNTERS .......................................................................... MU-6
[5-1] SET COUNTERS ................................................................ MU-6
[5-2] DISPLAY LIST .................................................................... MU-6
[6] ECONOMY MODE ........................................................................ MU-7
[6-1] SAVE POWER .................................................................... MU-7
[6-2] CALENDAR ........................................................................ MU-7
[6-3] DETAIL................................................................................ MU-8
[6-3-1] TIME OF OFFICE CLOSED .................................... MU-8
[6-3-2] TRANSITION TIME.................................................. MU-8
[6-3-3] SCHEDULER ........................................................... MU-8
[7] SET ALARM .................................................................................. MU-9
[7-1] SET ALARM ........................................................................ MU-9
[7-2] KEY TOUCH TONE ............................................................ MU-9
[8] AUTOMATED F.D.C. ..................................................................... MU-9
[9] SET DATE/TIME ........................................................................... MU-9
[10] SOFTWARE VER. ...................................................................... MU-10
[11] REPRINT .................................................................................... MU-10
[12] ANIMATION ................................................................................ MU-11
[13] REMAINING FILMS .................................................................... MU-11
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
3. M-UTILITY (MAINTENANCE UTILITY) .............MU-18 [1-3] Log Files ........................................................................... MU-32

[1-3-1] Display Error Log ................................................... MU-32
3.1 M-Utility Menu Tree ................................................................MU-18 [1-3-2] Clear ...................................................................... MU-32
[1-3-3] Store Log Files ....................................................... MU-32
3.2 Starting and Ending the M-Utility ............................................MU-21
[1-3-4] Logging by User ..................................................... MU-32
3.3 Details of M-Utility Commands ...............................................MU-23 [1-4] Network ............................................................................. MU-33
[1] System Management .................................................................. MU-23 [1-4-1] Set TCP/IP ............................................................. MU-33
[1-1] System Config. ................................................................. MU-23 [1-4-1-1] IP Address .................................................... MU-33
[1-1-1] Set Date/time ......................................................... MU-23 [1-4-1-2] SubNetMask ................................................. MU-34
[1-1-2] Set Parameters ...................................................... MU-23 [1-4-1-3] Gateway ....................................................... MU-34
[1-1-2-1] Set Tray ........................................................ MU-23 [1-4-1-4] Mac Address ................................................. MU-34
[1-1-2-2] Sorter Setting ............................................... MU-23 [1-4-2] Set DICOM ............................................................ MU-35
[1-1-2-2-1] Sorter Connection ............................... MU-23 [1-4-2-1] AE-title .......................................................... MU-35
[1-1-2-3] Reprint Function ........................................... MU-23 [1-4-2-2] Fine PRT AE-title .......................................... MU-35
[1-1-2-4] Option ........................................................... MU-24 [1-4-2-3] Port No. ........................................................ MU-36
[1-1-2-5] QC ............................................................. MU-24.2 [1-4-2-4] Hostname ..................................................... MU-36
[1-1-2-5-1] Set Target Density ............................ MU-24.2 [1-4-3] Test Network .......................................................... MU-37
[1-1-2-5-2] Enabling Step 4................................ MU-24.2 [1-4-4] Set DICOM log ....................................................... MU-37
[1-1-2-6] Set ML Dmax ................................................ MU-25 [1-4-5] Set Mammo ........................................................ MU-37.1
[1-1-3] Initialize .................................................................. MU-26 [1-5] Set Main Panel ................................................................. MU-38
[1-1-3-1] Recover ........................................................ MU-26 [1-5-1] Select Language .................................................... MU-38
[1-1-3-2] Save Config. ................................................. MU-26 [1-5-2] Size Information ..................................................... MU-38
[1-1-3-3] Initialization ................................................... MU-26 [1-5-3] Set Alarm ............................................................... MU-38
[1-1-3-4] Nonvolatile Memory ...................................... MU-27 [1-5-4] Set Key Touch Tone ............................................... MU-38
[1-1-4] Check Files ............................................................ MU-27 [1-5-5] ANIMATION ........................................................... MU-38
[1-1-5] Check Version ........................................................ MU-28 [1-5-6] Sound Test ............................................................. MU-38
[1-1-6] Set Counters .......................................................... MU-28 [1-5-7] Icon Positioning ..................................................... MU-39
[1-1-7] Load System Files (from USB) .............................. MU-29 [1-5-8] Show Position ........................................................ MU-39
[1-1-8] Reboot ................................................................... MU-30 [1-5-9] Date Format ........................................................... MU-39
[1-1-8-1] EWF ............................................................. MU-30 [1-6] Save/Load Files ................................................................ MU-40
[1-1-8-2] Reboot All ..................................................... MU-30 [1-6-1] Save to USB .......................................................... MU-40
[1-1-9] Reload Software .................................................... MU-31 [1-6-2] Load from USB ...................................................... MU-41
[1-2] Print Queue ....................................................................... MU-31
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
[2] Output Film ................................................................................. MU-42 [5] Check Mechanism ...................................................................... MU-61
[2-1] 24-Steps ........................................................................... MU-42 [5-1] Film Removing .................................................................. MU-61
[2-2] 17-Steps ........................................................................... MU-42 [5-1-1] Unlock Tray ............................................................ MU-61
[2-3] Flat .................................................................................... MU-43 [5-1-2] Set Remain. Films ................................................. MU-61
[2-4] Cleaning ............................................................................ MU-43 [5-1-3] Unit Operation ........................................................ MU-61
[2-5] Grid ................................................................................... MU-44 [5-2] Motor Operation ................................................................ MU-62
[2-6] Film out to Sorter .............................................................. MU-44 [5-2-1] Motor Operation ..................................................... MU-62
[2-7] Uniformity .......................................................................... MU-45 [5-2-2] Adjusting Subscanner ............................................ MU-63
[2-8] SMPTE ............................................................................. MU-45 [5-3] Grip ................................................................................... MU-65
[2-9] User Settable .................................................................... MU-46 [5-4] Other Actuators ................................................................. MU-65
[2-10] Spatial Resolution .......................................................... MU-46.1 [5-5] Sensor Monitor ................................................................. MU-66
[3] F.D.C. .......................................................................................... MU-47 [5-6] Other ................................................................................. MU-67
[3-1] AUTO F.D.C. ..................................................................... MU-47 [5-6-1] Serial I/F ................................................................ MU-67
[3-2] Check Density ................................................................... MU-48 [5-6-2] HDD Test................................................................ MU-67
[3-3] 24-Steps ........................................................................... MU-49 [5-6-3] DPRAM Test .......................................................... MU-68
[3-4] Manual F.D.C. ................................................................... MU-49 [5-6-4] Inter Board Test...................................................... MU-68
[3-5] Densitometer .................................................................... MU-50 [5-6-5] Barcode Test .......................................................... MU-69
[3-5-1] 24-Steps ................................................................ MU-50 [5-7] Sorter Unit ......................................................................... MU-70
[3-5-2] Calibration .............................................................. MU-50 [5-7-1] Solenoids ............................................................... MU-70
[3-5-3] Clear Calib. Table................................................... MU-50 [5-7-2] Sensor Monitor ...................................................... MU-70
[3-5-4] DM Sensor Monitoring ........................................... MU-51 [6] Heat-Developer ........................................................................... MU-71
[3-6] Uniformity .......................................................................... MU-51 [6-1] Temperature ...................................................................... MU-71
[3-6-1] Clear Table ............................................................. MU-51 [6-2] Heating ............................................................................. MU-71
[3-6-2] Input ....................................................................... MU-51 [6-3] Fan Operation ................................................................... MU-72
[4] Check Scanner ........................................................................... MU-52 [6-4] Temp. Control ................................................................... MU-72
[4-1] Polygonal Motor ................................................................ MU-52 [6-5] Set Heater Temp. .............................................................. MU-73
[4-2] LD ..................................................................................... MU-52 [6-6] Power Supply Voltage ....................................................... MU-73
[4-3] Adjusting Main Scanner .................................................... MU-53 [7] Skip Initialize ............................................................................... MU-74
[4-3-1] Scanning Width ...................................................... MU-53 [7-1] Eject Film Remaining ........................................................ MU-74
[4-3-2] Scanning Position .................................................. MU-55 [7-2] Developer ......................................................................... MU-74
[4-3-3] Display Adjustment ................................................ MU-57
[4-3-4] Initialize Scanner ................................................... MU-57
[4-4] Diagnosis .......................................................................... MU-58
[4-4-1] Initial Check ........................................................... MU-58
[4-4-2] PRN Board Test ..................................................... MU-58
[4-4-3] Edge Sensor Monitor ............................................. MU-59
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
4. DI Tool ..............................................................MU-75 [PC1-1-5] MacAddress ......................................................... MU-101

[PC1-2] Config ............................................................................. MU-102
4.1 DI Tool (DPX7 PC Tool Function) Operations.........................MU-76 [PC1-2-1] Version ................................................................. MU-102
4.1.1 Outline of Operations ......................................................................... MU-76 [PC1-2-2] Protocol Information ............................................. MU-103
4.1.2 Operations of the Configuration Setting Screen ................................ MU-77 [PC1-2-2-1] AE-title ........................................................ MU-103
[PC1-2-2-2] Fine PRT AE-title ........................................ MU-103
4.2 Preparations for Using the DI Tool .........................................MU-78 [PC1-2-2-3] Port No. ...................................................... MU-104
4.2.1 PC Environment Required for Installing the DI Tool ........................... MU-78 [PC1-2-2-4] Data Transfer Timeout ................................ MU-104
4.2.2 Installing/Uninstalling/Version Upgrading the DI Tool......................... MU-79 [PC1-2-3] Association Count ................................................ MU-104
4.2.3 Setting the FTP Site Directory of the PC............................................ MU-80 [PC1-2-4] Logging DICOM ................................................... MU-104
[PC1-2-5] Default Client ....................................................... MU-105
4.2.4 Setting Grouping Symbols ................................................................. MU-82
[PC1-2-6] Real Dmax on film ............................................... MU-105
4.3 Flow of DI Tool Operations .....................................................MU-84 [PC1-2-7] Requested Dmax less than 3.6 ......................... MU-105.1
4.3.1 Connecting the PC for Servicing to the Network ................................ MU-84 [PC1-2-8] Printer ............................................................... MU-105.1
4.3.2 Starting the DI Tool (DPX7 PC Tool Function) ................................... MU-85 [PC1-2-9] Option ............................................................... MU-105.2
[PC1-2-9-1] 17-Steps Pattern ..................................... MU-105.2
4.3.3 Connecting DI Tool to the Equipment................................................. MU-85
[PC1-2-9-2] Auto FDC ................................................. MU-105.2
4.3.4 Importing Individual Data ................................................................... MU-87 [PC1-2-9-3] Set Alarm ................................................. MU-105.2
4.3.5 Setting/Changing/Checking Individual Data Using the DPX7 PC [PC1-2-9-4] Set Alarm Tone ........................................ MU-105.2
Tool Function ...................................................................................... MU-87 [PC1-2-9-5] Set Key Touch ............................................ MU-106
4.3.6 Sending Individual Data to the Equipment ......................................... MU-88 [PC1-2-9-6] Set Key Touch Tone.................................... MU-106
4.3.7 Ending the DI Tool (DPX7 PC Tool Function) ..................................... MU-89 [PC1-2-9-7] Language ................................................... MU-106
[PC1-2-9-8] Sorter .......................................................... MU-106
4.4 Registering and Deleting the Establishments and Printers ....MU-90 [PC1-2-9-9] Size information .......................................... MU-107
4.4.1 Registering Establishments ............................................................... MU-90 [PC1-2-9-10] User Settable .............................................. MU-107
4.4.2 Registering Printers............................................................................ MU-91 [PC1-2-9-11] BackupLog ................................................. MU-107
[PC1-2-9-12] QC .............................................................. MU-108
4.5 Registering and Deleting Clients ............................................MU-93 [PC1-2-9-12-1] Enabling Step4.................................. MU-108
4.6 DPX7 PC Tool Function Menu Tree .......................................MU-95 [PC1-2-9-12-2] Set Target Density ............................. MU-108
[PC1-2-9-13] Film Information .......................................... MU-109
4.7 DPX7 PC Tool Function Command Details ..........................MU-100 [PC1-2-9-14] Date Format ............................................... MU-109
[PC1] Setting ....................................................................................... MU-100 [PC1-2-9-15] Mobile ......................................................... MU-109
[PC1-1] Network ........................................................................... MU-100 [PC1-2-9-16] Warning st system start .............................. MU-110
[PC1-1-1] HostName ............................................................ MU-100 [PC1-2-9-17] Spatial Resolution ...................................... MU-110
[PC1-1-2] IP Address............................................................ MU-100 [PC1-2-9-18] MammoQC ..................................................MU-111
[PC1-1-3] SubnetMask ......................................................... MU-101 [PC1-2-9-19] Recognize position on 8x10 (20x25) ...........MU-111
[PC1-1-4] Default Gateway .................................................. MU-101
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
[PC1-2-10] Tray1/Tray2 ........................................................MU-111.1 [PC1-3-3] LUT ...................................................................... MU-121

[PC1-2-11] Sorting by Film Size ...........................................MU-111.1 [PC1-3-3-1] Procedure ................................................... MU-121
[PC1-3] Clients ............................................................................. MU-112 [PC1-3-3-2] Default LUT ................................................ MU-121
[PC1-3-1] Protocol ................................................................ MU-112 [PC1-3-3-2-1] Configuration Information
[PC1-3-1-1] Attribute List Error (0107H Warning) .......... MU-112 (Default LUT#) .................................. MU-121
[PC1-3-1-2] Attribute Value Out of Range [PC1-3-3-3] Adjustment Parameter ................................ MU-122
(0116H Warning) ........................................ MU-112 [PC1-3-3-4] Dmax 3.6 .................................................... MU-123
[PC1-3-1-3] Image Size is Larger than Imagebox [PC1-3-3-5] Illumination ................................................. MU-123
(B604H Warning) ........................................ MU-113 [PC1-3-3-5-1] Default Illumination ........................... MU-123
[PC1-3-1-4] N-Event-ReportRQ ..................................... MU-113 [PC1-3-3-6] Reflective Ambient Light ............................. MU-123
[PC1-3-1-5] Use Extention Format ................................. MU-114 [PC1-3-3-6-1] Default Ambient Light ........................ MU-124
[PC1-3-1-6] Change Film ............................................... MU-115 [PC1-3-4] Output Format ...................................................... MU-125
[PC1-3-1-7] Use System Timeout .................................. MU-115 [PC1-3-4-1] Border Density ............................................ MU-125
[PC1-3-1-8] Presentation LUT ....................................... MU-115 [PC1-3-4-1-1] Default Border Density ...................... MU-125
[PC1-3-1-9] Precede Picking Up .................................... MU-116 [PC1-3-4-2] Polarity(Pos./Neg.) ..................................... MU-125
[PC1-3-1-10] Use Max/Min Density ................................. MU-116 [PC1-3-4-3] Trim Density ............................................... MU-125
[PC1-3-1-11] Logging Client ............................................ MU-116 [PC1-3-4-4] Trim ............................................................ MU-126
[PC1-3-1-12] Reprint ........................................................ MU-116 [PC1-3-4-5] Trim Width .................................................. MU-126
[PC1-3-1-13] Change Base Color (Disable:110H[F]) ....... MU-117 [PC1-3-4-6] Number of Copies ...................................... MU-126
[PC1-3-1-14] Define Film Size of 11x14” ......................... MU-117 [PC1-3-4-6-1] Default Number of Copies ................. MU-126
[PC1-3-2] Magnify ................................................................ MU-118 [PC1-3-4-7] Margin between Image ............................... MU-127
[PC1-3-2-1] Procedure ................................................... MU-118 [PC1-3-4-8] Image Layout .............................................. MU-127
[PC1-3-2-2] Default Smoothing Type ............................. MU-118 [PC1-3-4-9] Default Film Size ........................................ MU-128
[PC1-3-2-3] Adjustment Parameter ................................ MU-118 [PC1-3-4-9-1] Film Size ........................................... MU-128
[PC1-3-2-4] Default Requested Decimate/ [PC1-3-4-10] Default Medium Type ................................. MU-128
Crop Behavior ............................................ MU-119 [PC1-3-4-10-1] Medium Type (base color) ................ MU-128
[PC1-3-2-5] Magnification Type ..................................... MU-120 [PC1-3-4-11] Film Orientation .......................................... MU-129
[PC1-3-2-6] Requested Image Size (0=None) ............... MU-120 [PC1-3-4-12] Mirror .......................................................... MU-129
[PC1-3-2-6-1] Default Requested Image Size ......... MU-120 [PC1-3-4-13] Processing Type ......................................... MU-129
[PC1-3-4-14] Print Priority ................................................ MU-130
[PC1-3-4-15] Resolution .................................................. MU-130
[PC1-3-4-16] Default Film Destination ............................. MU-130
[PC1-3-4-17] Film Destination ....................................... MU-130.1
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
[PC1-3-5] Annotation ............................................................ MU-131 [PC7-6] Uniformity ........................................................................ MU-163

[PC1-3-5-1] Annotation Height ....................................... MU-132 [PC7-6-1] Clear Table ........................................................... MU-163
[PC1-3-5-2] Annotation Font .......................................... MU-132 [PC7-6-2] Input ..................................................................... MU-163
[PC1-3-5-3] Annotation Size .......................................... MU-132 [PC7-7] DM sensor monitor ......................................................... MU-164
[PC1-3-5-4] Upper Left/Upper Center/Upper Right/ [PC8] Check ........................................................................................ MU-165
Lower Left/Lower Center/Lower Right ........ MU-133 [PC8-1] Check Scanner ............................................................... MU-165
[PC2] Data Transfer ............................................................................ MU-134 [PC8-1-1] Initialize Scanner ................................................. MU-165
[PC2-1] Indv ................................................................................. MU-136 [PC8-1-2] Adjusting Main Scanner ....................................... MU-166
[PC2-2] Operation ........................................................................ MU-137 [PC8-1-3] Polygonal Motor LD ............................................. MU-170
[PC2-3] Log .................................................................................. MU-139 [PC8-1-4] Initial Check ......................................................... MU-171
[PC2-4] Files ................................................................................ MU-140 [PC8-1-5] PRN Board Test ................................................... MU-171
[PC2-5] User Settable .................................................................. MU-142 [PC8-2] Check Mechanism .......................................................... MU-172
[PC3] Upgrading ................................................................................. MU-143 [PC8-2-1] Moving ................................................................. MU-172
[PC3-1] Data Disk ........................................................................ MU-143 [PC8-2-1-1] Unit Operation ............................................ MU-172
[PC3-2] To Printer ........................................................................ MU-145 [PC8-2-1-2] Motor Operation ......................................... MU-173
[PC4] Analyzer .................................................................................... MU-148 [PC8-2-1-3] Grip ............................................................. MU-174
[PC5] DICOM Print .............................................................................. MU-149 [PC8-2-1-4] Adjusting Subscanner ................................ MU-175
[PC6] OutPutFilm ................................................................................ MU-150 [PC8-2-1-5] Other Actuators ......................................... MU-177
[PC6-1] 24-Steps ......................................................................... MU-150 [PC8-2-1-6] Solenoids .................................................... MU-177
[PC6-2] 17-Steps ......................................................................... MU-151 [PC8-2-1-7] Sensor Monitor ........................................... MU-178
[PC6-3] Flat .................................................................................. MU-152 [PC8-2-2] Sensor Monitor .................................................... MU-179
[PC6-4] Cleaning .......................................................................... MU-153 [PC8-2-3] Other .................................................................... MU-181
[PC6-5] Grid ................................................................................. MU-153 [PC8-2-3-1] Serial I/F ..................................................... MU-181
[PC6-6] Film out to Sorter ............................................................ MU-154 [PC8-2-3-2] HDD Test .................................................... MU-182
[PC6-7] Uniformity ........................................................................ MU-155 [PC8-2-3-3] DPRAM Test ............................................... MU-182
[PC6-8] SMPTE ........................................................................... MU-156 [PC8-2-3-4] Inter Board Test .......................................... MU-183
[PC6-9] User Settable .................................................................. MU-157 [PC8-2-3-5] LAN Base Test ............................................ MU-183
[PC6-10] Spatial Resolution ........................................................ MU-157.1 [PC8-2-3-6] Status Lamp Test ........................................ MU-184
[PC7] F.D.C. ........................................................................................ MU-158 [PC8-3] Heat-Developer ............................................................... MU-184
[PC7-1] Auto F.D.C. ..................................................................... MU-158 [PC8-3-1] Temperature ......................................................... MU-184
[PC7-2] Check Density ................................................................. MU-159 [PC8-3-2] Heating ................................................................ MU-185
[PC7-3] 24-Steps ......................................................................... MU-160 [PC8-3-3] Fan Operation ...................................................... MU-186
[PC7-4] Manual F.D.C. ................................................................. MU-161 [PC8-3-4] Temp. Control ...................................................... MU-187
[PC7-5] Calibration ....................................................................... MU-162 [PC8-3-5] Set Heater Cond. Temp. ...................................... MU-187
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
[PC9] Control ...................................................................................... MU-188 5. SETTING METHOD BY PURPOSE ..................MU-204

[PC9-1] File Save/Load ................................................................ MU-188
[PC9-1-1] Log Data .............................................................. MU-188 5.1 Registering User ID ..............................................................MU-204
[PC9-1-2] Error Log .............................................................. MU-189
5.2 Setting Reprint......................................................................MU-206
[PC9-1-3] Indv. data ............................................................. MU-189
[PC9-2] System Config ................................................................ MU-190 5.3 Setting Annotation ................................................................MU-207
[PC9-2-1] Set Date/Time. ..................................................... MU-190
5.4 Setting Output of User Settable Images ...............................MU-212
[PC9-2-2] Save Config. ........................................................ MU-190
[PC9-2-3] Initialize ................................................................ MU-191 5.5 Displaying Logs by Client (Filtering DICOM
[PC9-2-4] Reboot ................................................................. MU-192 Communication Logs) ..........................................................MU-214
[PC9-2-5] Set Counters ........................................................ MU-193
[PC9-2-6] Set Remain. Films ............................................... MU-194
5.6 Adjusting LUT Using SAR MAKER ......................................MU-215
[PC9-3] Set Main Panel ............................................................... MU-195 5.7 Acquiring Logs when Equipment is not Started....................MU-218
[PC9-3-1] Sound Test ........................................................... MU-195
[PC9-3-2] Motion Speed ....................................................... MU-195 5.8 Adjusting the Leading Edge Margin .....................................MU-220
[PC9-4] Set Parameter ................................................................. MU-196 5.9 Copying Weekly Settings .....................................................MU-221
[PC9-4-1] Status Lamp ......................................................... MU-196
[PC10] Film Counter ............................................................................. MU-197 5.10 Acquiring Log Files ...............................................................MU-222
[PC11] Print Queue ............................................................................... MU-198 5.11 Creating a New Gamma Table .............................................MU-223
[PC12] Tool ........................................................................................... MU-200
[PC12-1] GetLog ............................................................................ MU-200 5.12 Full Installation of Main Unit Software with Equipment
[PC12-2] HW AutoCheck ............................................................... MU-202 not Started ...........................................................................MU-225
5.13 Settings for Using MammoQC Function After Upgrading
Main Unit Software Version from V2.0 or Earlier to V3.0 .....MU-226
APPENDIX 1 PRECAUTIONS AND SETTINGS

IN THE USE OF Windows XP PC
FOR SERVICING ...........................MU-227
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
GENERAL CONTENTS SERVICE PARTS LIST (SP) 0.16
SERVICE PARTS LIST (SP)
How to Use Service Parts List .................................SP-1 05D CONVEYOR UNIT 4 .........................................SP-17
INDEX ........................................................................SP-2 06A SUB-SCANNING UNIT 1 ..................................SP-18
01A COVER 1 ...........................................................SP-3 06B SUB-SCANNING UNIT 2 ..................................SP-19
01B COVER 2 ...........................................................SP-4 07 SCANNING OPTICS UNIT ...............................SP-20
01C COVER 3 ...........................................................SP-5 08A HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 1 ........................SP-21
01D COVER 4 ...........................................................SP-6 08B HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 2 ........................SP-22
02A FRAME 1 ...........................................................SP-7 08C HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 3 ........................SP-23
02B FRAME 2 ...........................................................SP-8 08D HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 4 ........................SP-24
03A FILM LOADING UNIT 1 .....................................SP-9 09A FILM RELEASE UNIT 1 ...................................SP-25
03B FILM LOADING UNIT 2 ...................................SP-10 09B FILM RELEASE UNIT 2 ...................................SP-26
04A REMOVAL UNIT 1 ...........................................SP-11 10A CONTROLLER 1 ..............................................SP-27
04B REMOVAL UNIT 2 ...........................................SP-12 10B CONTROLLER 2 ..............................................SP-28
04C REMOVAL UNIT 3 ...........................................SP-13 11A SORTER 1 .......................................................SP-29
05A CONVEYOR UNIT 1 .........................................SP-14 11B SORTER 2 .......................................................SP-30
05B CONVEYOR UNIT 2 .........................................SP-15 11C SORTER 3 .......................................................SP-31
05C CONVEYOR UNIT 3 .........................................SP-16 12 FIXTURES .......................................................SP-32

006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
GENERAL CONTENTS SERVICE PARTS LIST (SP) 0.17
13 CABLE .............................................................SP-33
14 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM .........................................SP-34
15 PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE .........................SP-44
16. List of Service Parts for Securing

and Wiring.......................................................SP-47
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
GENERAL CONTENTS PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM) 0.18
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
1. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ITEMS ................ PM-1 3.12 Reinstalling/Cleaning Covers ................................................. PM-25
1.1 List of Preventive Maintenance Items ...................................... PM-1 3.13 Checking the DC Voltage ....................................................... PM-26
1.2 Symbols on Maintenance Cycle ............................................... PM-2 3.14 Final Operation Checks/Checking Images ............................. PM-27
1.3 Precautions on Periodic Maintenance ...................................... PM-2 3.15 Setting Date and Time ............................................................ PM-29
3.16 Checking for Improper Protective Grounding ......................... PM-30
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE FLOW ................. PM-3
3.17 Work Completion Report ........................................................ PM-31
3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ............................ PM-4
3.1 Checking, Saving, and Deleting Error Logs ............................. PM-4
3.2 Printing/Checking Conveyance/Checking Images ................... PM-5
3.3 Checking the Interlock Function ............................................... PM-8
3.3.1 Checking the Upper Front Cover/Upper Right Cover/
Lower Right Cover Interlock ................................................................. PM-8
3.3.2 Checking the Upper Small Cover Interlock ........................................ PM-10
3.3.3 Checking the Film Tray Interlocks ...................................................... PM-10
3.3.4 Checking the Sorter Right Cover Interlock ......................................... PM-11
3.4 Checking the Fan Operations................................................. PM-12
3.5 Checking the Tray Periphery .................................................. PM-13
3.6 Cleaning/Replacing the Cleaning Roller, Removing
the Cover ................................................................................ PM-14
3.7 Cleaning/Replacing Filters ..................................................... PM-15
3.8 Cleaning the Removal Unit, Cleaning Inside
the Equipment ........................................................................ PM-16
3.9 Checking/Cleaning the Rubber Belt, Cleaning
Sub-scanning Conveyance Roller .......................................... PM-18
3.10 Cleaning the Density Measurement Section .......................... PM-23
3.11 Cleaning the Heat Development Unit ..................................... PM-24
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
GENERAL CONTENTS INSTALLATION (IN) 0.19
INSTALLATION (IN)
1. INSTALLATION CONDITIONS ............................. IN-1 5. INSTALLATION .................................................. IN-20

1.1 Equipment Dimensions and Weight ...........................................IN-1 5.1 Removing External Packaging of the Equipment Main Body ...IN-20
1.2 Means to Move and Secure Equipment .....................................IN-2 5.2 Removing Covers .....................................................................IN-20
1.3 Environmental Requirements .....................................................IN-3 5.3 Removing Fixtures ...................................................................IN-21
1.4 Electrical Requirements .............................................................IN-4 5.4 Changing the Film Size ............................................................IN-24
1.5 Other Specifications ...................................................................IN-4 5.4.1 Changing the Film Tray Size ................................................................ IN-24
5.4.2 Changing the Installed Position of the Barcode Reader ..................... IN-25
1.6 Equipment Installation Space .....................................................IN-5
5.4.3 Changing the Suction Cup Arm (20 x 25 cm Size) ............................... IN-26
1.6.1 Installation Space ................................................................................... IN-5
1.6.2 Space Required for Maintenance Work ................................................. IN-5 5.5 Installing Options ......................................................................IN-27
5.6 Connecting Network Cable.......................................................IN-28
2. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FLOW.................... IN-6
5.7 Connecting the Power Cable....................................................IN-29
5.7.1 Checking the Resistance of the Power Cable ...................................... IN-29
3. WORK BEFORE INSTALLATION .......................... IN-9
5.8 Reinstalling Covers ..................................................................IN-30
3.1 Precautions on Installation .........................................................IN-9
3.2 Preparing the DI Tool ................................................................ IN-11
3.3 Cautions on Electromagnetic Waves........................................IN-12
3.3.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) .................................................. IN-12
4. TEMPORARY INSTALLATION ............................ IN-15

4.1 Unpacking and Unloading ........................................................IN-15
4.2 Carrying ....................................................................................IN-17
4.3 Temporary Placement ..............................................................IN-17
4.4 Checking Components .............................................................IN-18
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
6. INSTALLING OPTIONS ...................................... IN-31 8. CHECKING EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS ........... IN-61

6.1 Installing Additional Film Tray ...................................................IN-31 8.1 Checking Automatic Density Correction and Conveyance
6.1.1 Checking Components ......................................................................... IN-31 Operations ................................................................................IN-61
6.1.2 Removing Covers................................................................................. IN-31 8.2 Checking Density .....................................................................IN-62
6.1.3 Removing the Cushioning Material/Changing Film Tray Size .............. IN-33
8.3 Checking Recording Image Format, and for Image
6.1.4 Installing the Barcode Reader .............................................................. IN-33 Unevenness and Scratches .....................................................IN-63
6.1.5 Changing the Suction Cup Arm (For Setting Film Sizes
Other Than 20 x 25 cm) ....................................................................... IN-34 8.4 Checking Conveyance and Scratches on Film Image
When the Sorter is Connected .................................................IN-64
6.1.6 Installing the Lower Removal Unit/Film Loading Unit .......................... IN-38
6.1.7 Installing the Lower Conveyor Unit ...................................................... IN-38 8.5 Checking the Interlock Function ...............................................IN-65
6.1.8 Internal Wirings .................................................................................... IN-40 8.5.1 Checking the Upper Front Cover/Upper Right Cover/
6.1.9 Installing Covers................................................................................... IN-41 Lower Right Cover Interlock ................................................................. IN-65
8.5.2 Checking the Upper Small Cover Interlock .......................................... IN-67
6.2 Installing Additional Image Memory Board ...............................IN-42
8.5.3 Checking the Film Tray Interlocks ........................................................ IN-67
6.3 Installing the Sorter ..................................................................IN-43 8.5.4 Checking the Sorter Right Cover Interlock ........................................... IN-68
8.6 Checking Fan Operations.........................................................IN-69
7. SETTING OF THE EQUIPMENT ......................... IN-51
8.7 Settings for U-Utility..................................................................IN-70
7.1 Power ON and Starting the M-Utility ........................................IN-51
7.1.1 Power ON............................................................................................. IN-51
9. INSTALLATION OF MULTIPLE SETS ................. IN-71
7.1.2 Starting the M-Utility ............................................................................. IN-51
7.2 System Settings .......................................................................IN-52
7.2.1 System Management/System Config. .................................................. IN-52
7.2.2 System Management/Set Main Panel .................................................. IN-54
7.2.3 Heat-Developer/Power Supply Voltage ................................................ IN-56
7.2.4 System Management/Network ............................................................. IN-57
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
10. SETTING CLIENTS ............................................ IN-72 12. INSTALLING THE EQUIPMENT ......................... IN-91
10.1 Connecting the PC for Servicing to the Network ......................IN-72 12.1 Backing Up Individual Data ......................................................IN-91
10.2 Starting the DI Tool/Connecting DI Tool to the Equipment .......IN-74 12.1.1 Saving Individual Data in the Equipment HD ....................................... IN-91
10.2.1 Starting the DI Tool............................................................................... IN-74 12.1.2 Saving Individual Data in the PC for Servicing .................................... IN-92
10.2.2 Connecting DI Tool to the Equipment .................................................. IN-74 12.1.3 Saving Individual Data on the FD ........................................................ IN-92
10.3 Importing Individual Data..........................................................IN-76 12.2 Checking, Saving, and Deleting Error Logs Which Occur at
Installation ................................................................................IN-94
10.4 Settings by Client .....................................................................IN-79 12.2.1 Checking the Error Log ........................................................................ IN-94
10.4.1 Registering Clients ............................................................................... IN-79 12.2.2 Saving Error Logs ................................................................................ IN-95
10.4.2 Client Settings ...................................................................................... IN-80 12.2.3 Deleting Error Logs .............................................................................. IN-95
10.4.3 Settings by Client ................................................................................. IN-86
12.3 Installing the Equipment ...........................................................IN-96
10.4.4 Setting Client [MammoQCTest] ............................................................ IN-86
12.3.1 Installing the Equipment without Using Fixtures .................................. IN-96
10.5 Adding and Registering Printers...............................................IN-87 12.3.2 Installing the Equipment and Securing with Fixtures ........................... IN-97
10.6 Sending Data on Setting to the Equipment ..............................IN-88 12.4 Cleaning the Equipment .........................................................IN-101
10.7 Settings for U-Utility ..................................................................IN-88
10.8 Ending the DI Tool and the Equipment .....................................IN-89
APPENDIX 1 ADDITIONAL PROTECTIVE
GROUNDING .................................. IN-102
11. CHECKING NETWORK CONNECTION............... IN-90
11.1 Checking the Start-up of the Equipment .................................IN-90
11.2 Checking Film Output and Images from Connected
Equipment ................................................................................IN-90
11.3 Checking the Termination of the Equipment .............................IN-90
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
GENERAL CONTENTS PERFORMANCE CHECK (PC) 0.22
PERFORMANCE CHECK (PC)
INSTALLATION OF THE DRYPIX 4000 - Checklist....PC-1
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
0.23
BLANK PAGE
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
CONTROL SHEET
Issue Date Revision Number Reason Pages Affected
11.05.2004 00 New release (FM4426 (1)) All pages

02.28.2005 01 Revised (FM4555) All pages
04.25.2005 02 Revised (FM4589) 1, 4, 6, 10
02.28.2006 03 Revised (FM4704) 5-8
DRYPIX 4000 SERVICE MANUAL 10.02.2006 04 Revised (Change of corporate name and
corporate logo) (FM4992)
5, 7, 8
SAFETY PRECAUTION
006-267-04 DRYPIX 4000 Service Manual

10.02.2006 FM4992
SAFETY PRECAUTION-1
1. SAFETY PRECAUTION  Adjustable Foot Anchorage

As an earthquake measure for the equipment, fasten the adjustable feet to the floor
To avoid accidents, observe the following precautions. surface.
1.1 General Precautions  Optical Parts Handling Precautions

When handling any optical parts, observe the following precautions. Failure to observe
these precautions may result in a deterioration in image quality.
 Power Supply • Never touch the surfaces of optical parts.
• Be sure to turn OFF the power of the main power switch and switch board before • When removing dirt from optical parts, use the specified procedure only.
starting operation. Starting operations with the power ON may result in electric • Scanning optics unit removal must be carried out in a clean environment. Also do
shock, fire hazards, or machine malfunction. Some parts are not fully discharged not remove the scanning optics unit protective housing.
and other parts (e.g. heater) remain heated immediately after power OFF. Be
careful not to touch such parts. When performing steps (e.g. voltage measurement)  Heat Development Unit Handling Precautions
that cannot be completed with the power OFF, observe the instructions set forth in
this manual and operate with care to avoid electric shock and other hazards. A heater is used for the rack. Touching it during operations may result in burns. Turn
• When restarting the machine, turn OFF the power, wait for more than 10 seconds, the power OFF and wait until the heater temperature drops before handling the unit.
and then turn it ON. If the interval from power OFF to ON is too short, the machine
may not be properly started.  Grounding
Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power cable and
 Ventilation of Installation Site additional protective ground wire connections and by securing the parts with retaining
screws. To maintain safety, ensure that the parts and retaining screws removed for
The ventilation of the equipment and film is accompanied by a slight smell. Be sure to
servicing purposes are restored to the original states upon installation. After the
ventilate the room during and after operation.
parts and retaining screws are restored to the above-mentioned states, follow the
procedures set forth in this service manual to verify that the retaining screws are
 Drive Section Inspection securely tightened to properly secure the parts.
To avoid accidents, be sure to turn OFF the power before initiating inspection or
adjustment procedures. When performing an inspection or adjustment procedure  Other General Precautions
that cannot be completed with the power OFF, operate carefully while observing the
• When servicing the board for maintenance, be sure to wear a wrist band to ground
instructions set forth in this manual.
yourself. Failure to do so may result in damage of electronic components on the
board due to static electricity from your body.
 Heavy Weights
• Do not stain or peel off the product nameplates, labels of safety standards, or
When installing or removing heavy weights, complete it with an assistant or a hoisting product No. indications attached on the machine, and do not attach other labels
or other appropriate device. over them.
• After completion of operation, return the protective enclosure, fixing screws, and
 Safety Devices other removed components to the original positions and fix fully.
Ensure that the accident prevention functions of fuses, interlock switches, panels,
covers, and other safety devices are always operative. Also refrain from introducing
such modifications which may impair the safety device functions.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
DRYPIX 4000 Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-1
SAFETY PRECAUTION-2
 Interlock Release Jig

To operate the equipment with the upper front cover, upper right cover, lower right
cover, upper small cover, and/or sorter right cover of the equipment opened, use the
special jig provided with this equipment to release the interlock. To avoid danger, do
not touch rotating parts. Also take precautions against getting your hands, feet, hair,
and clothes caught by the equipment.
After completing servicing return the jig back to its original position.
006-267-01
02.28.2005 FM4555
SAFETY PRECAUTION-3
1.2 Precautions Against Laser Radiation  Laser Output Circuit Interlock

As indicated in the Certification and Identification Label attached on the rear cover of An interlock function is provided for this equipment for turning OFF the laser output
the machine, the machine complies with the “Laser Products – Conformance with IEC circuit to prevent laser exposure when the upper front cover or upper right cover is
60825-1, Am. 2; Final Guidance for Industry and FDA (Laser Notice No. 50)”. Although opened.
a laser (Class 3B, semiconductor laser having a wavelength of 658 nm and emitting In addition, this equipment is provided with an interlock function that turns OFF the
visible red light) having a maximum output of 70 mW is incorporated in the image laser output circuit when the lower right cover is opened. Though, structurally, there is
recorder, exposure to any hazards can be avoided by following the instructions set no danger of laser radiation exposure with this cover open.
forth in this manual. Before turning ON the power with these covers open and performing services, be sure
to release the interlock with the special jig provided. After completion of the service
 How to Avoid Laser Radiation Exposure procedures, return the jig to the original position.
To avoid laser radiation exposure, observe the following precautions.

 Steps Requiring Precautions Against Laser Radiation Exposure
When performing the following procedures, thoroughly comply with the instructions set
forth in this manual to avoid laser radiation exposure.
• Removing the scanning optics unit and accomplishing its reassembly
• Replacing or cleaning the components of the conveyor unit , entrance of the heat
development unit or the sub scanning unit
After completion of the above procedures, restore the removed protective housing
and retaining screws to their original states to prevent the laser beam from leaking out
from the equipment.
 Periodical Maintenance for Keeping Equipment Conditions Compliant
with Standards
To keep the equipment compliant with the laser safety requirements, perform the
preventive maintenance programs at specified intervals (See “Preventive Maintenance
(PM)” Volume.)
 Avoid Laser Radiation Exposure
When performing installation procedures, observe the following precautions to avoid
laser radiation exposure.
• Do not attempt to perform any steps other than those stated in this manual because
laser radiation exposure may result.
• Do not position a mirror or other reflective article in the laser beam optical path.
• Do not change the laser beam optical path.
• Optical axis adjustments must not be made in the field. Although the semiconductor
laser beam is visible red light, no one is allowed to make optical axis adjustments in
the field.
006-267-01
02.28.2005 FM4555
SAFETY PRECAUTION-4
2. LABELS
2.1 Laser Caution Labels
 Locations of Laser Caution Labels

The following illustrates the locations of the protective housing and laser caution labels
specified in “Laser Products – Conformance with IEC 60825-1, Am. 2; Final Guidance
for Industry and FDA (Laser Notice No. 50)”.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
SAFETY PRECAUTION-5
 List of Laser Caution Labels  IEC60825-1:2001/EN60825-1:2002 Class 3B Panel Label #1
 HHS Certification and Identification Label
Old Label
• Serial No. 20351 or earlier • Serial No. 20352 or later
New Label
 IEC60825-1:2001/EN60825-1:2002 Class 3B Panel Label #2
006-267-04
10.02.2006 FM4992
SAFETY PRECAUTION-6
2.2 Other Labels
 Locations of Other Labels
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
SAFETY PRECAUTION-7
 List of Labels  Watch Out Hand Caution Label

Be careful not to catch fingers when closing the cover.
 Rating Indication Label
 Old Label
For 100-120 VAC specification For 200-240 VAC specification
 Cleaning Roller Cleaning Label
 New Label
For 100-120 VAC specification For 200-240 VAC specification
 Jam Removing Label 1
 Manufacturer Label (serial number 20457 or earlier)
 High Temperature Caution Label

Be aware that the temperature may be high in the area where the following label is
affixed.
006-267-04
10.02.2006 FM4992
SAFETY PRECAUTION-8
 Jam Removing Label 2  Jam Removing Label 4
 Sorter Jam Removing Label

 Jam Removing Label 3
 Sorter Caution Label

Do not lean against the sorter bins.
 WEEE Marking Label (serial number 20961 or later)
006-267-04
10.02.2006 FM4992
SAFETY PRECAUTION-9
2.3 Additional Protective Grounding Earth Mark 2.4 Power Cable Caution Label
 Power Cable Caution Label (Only Hospital Grade Power Cable for
U.S.A.)
 Earth Mark (Imprint)
006-267-01
02.28.2005 FM4555
SAFETY PRECAUTION-10
3. PROTECTIVE HOUSING FOR

LASER RADIATION EXPOSURE
PREVENTION
Even if the protective housing is removed for servicing purpose, the laser beam will
not possibly leak out of the equipment unless its optical path is intentionally changed.
However, if the optical path is inadvertently changed during optical system installation,
the service engineer or other persons near the equipment may be exposed to laser
radiation.
Optical system related installation procedures must be carefully performed while
observing the instructions set forth in this manual. After completion of installation,
thoroughly restore the removed protective housing to its original state.
 Protective Housing of Equipment

The following shows laser exposure protective housing parts of the equipment.
 Protective Housing of Scanning Optics Unit
<INSTRUCTIONS>
Never remove the upper cover of scanning optics unit.
006-267-02 DRYPIX 4000 Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-10

04.25.2005 FM4589
SAFETY PRECAUTION-11
4. CONNECTABLE PERIPHERALS 5. CLASSIFICATION

Accessory equipment connected to the analog and digital interfaces must be certified 1) According to the type of protection against electrical shock
according to the respective IEC standards (i.e. IEC60950 for data processing
equipment and IEC60601-1 for medical equipment). Furthermore all configurations CLASS 1 EQUIPMENT
shall comply with the system standard IEC60601-1-1. Everybody who connects 2) According to the degree of protection against electrical shock
additional equipment to the signal input part or signal output part configures a medical
NO APPLIED PART
system, and is therefore responsible that the system complies with the requirements
of IEC60601-1-1. If in doubt, consult the technical services department or your local 3) Protection against harmful ingress of water
representative. IPXO
4) According to the degree of safety of application in the presence of
a flammable anesthetics mixture with air or with oxygen or nitrous
oxide.
Equipment not suitable for use in the presence of a flammable anesthetics
mixture with air or with oxygen or nitrous oxide.
5) According to the mode of operation
CONTINUOUS OPERATION
006-267-01 DRYPIX 4000 Service Manual SAFETY PRECAUTION-11

02.28.2005 FM4555
CONTROL SHEET

04.25.2005 02 Revised (FM4589) 1, 2, 4, 8
02.28.2006 03 Revised (FM4704) 4, 7
DRYPIX 4000 SERVICE MANUAL
SPECIFICATIONS

02.28.2006 FM4704
SPECIFICATIONS-1
1. SPECIFICATIONS
1.1 Part Name

Product Code Contents Parts No. Remarks Product Code Contents Parts No. Remarks
DRYPIX 4000 Overseas specifications main unit 000Y5133 Overseas 100 - 120 V DRYPIX 4000 Overseas specifications main unit 000Y5133 Overseas 200 - 240 V
100V E (VUSA/VF1) specifications 200V E (VEU/VF1) specifications
Film tray: 1 tray Tray can be extended up Film tray: 1 tray Tray can be extended up
Tray setting to 2 trays. (Optional tray) Tray setting to 2 trays. (Optional tray)
• Tray 1: 35 x 43 cm size • Tray 1: 35 x 43 cm size
Power cable (100 - 120 V) 136Y9138 Hospital grade power Power cable (230 V) 136N0449 Power cable for EU
cable for U.S.A.
Buffer memory board: 1 113S0185A 256 MB (*1)
Individual data FD: 1
Scanner unit data FD: 1
Main unit software CD-R: 1
Operation Manual
Operation Manual
DRYPIX 4000 Overseas specifications main unit 000Y5133 Overseas 200 - 240 V
DRYPIX 4000 Overseas specifications main unit 000Y5133 Overseas 100 - 120 V 200V 2T E (VEU/VF2) specifications
100V 2T E (VUSA/VF2) specifications
Film tray: 2 tray
Film tray: 2 tray Tray setting
Tray setting • Tray 1: 35 x 43 cm size
• Tray 1: 35 x 43 cm size • Tray 2: 20 x 25 cm size
• Tray 2: 26 x 36 cm size
Power cable (230 V) 136N0449 Power cable for EU
Power cable (100 - 120 V) 136Y9138 Hospital grade power
cable for U.S.A. Buffer memory board: 1 113S0185A 256 MB (*1)
Buffer memory board: 1 113S0185A 256 MB (*1) Individual data FD: 1
Individual data FD: 1 Scanner unit data FD: 1
Scanner unit data FD: 1 Main unit software CD-R: 1
Main unit software CD-R: 1 Operation Manual
Operation Manual (*1): Memory can be extended up to 512 MB. (Optional memory)
(*1): Memory can be extended up to 512 MB. (Optional memory)
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
DRYPIX 4000 Service Manual SPECIFICATIONS-1
SPECIFICATIONS-2
Product Code Contents Parts No. Remarks

200V UK E (VBSI/VF1) specifications
Film tray: 1 tray Tray can be extended up
Tray setting to 2 trays. (Optional tray)
Power cable (240 V) 136N0450 Power cable for U.K.
Operation Manual
200V UK 2T E (VBSI/VF2) specifications
Film tray: 2 tray
Tray setting
Power cable (240 V) 136N0450 Power cable for U.K.
Operation Manual
(*1): Memory can be extended up to 512 MB. (Optional memory)
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
SPECIFICATIONS-3
1.2 List of Optional Parts

Check the components against the PACKING LIST contained in the carton box. Note
that the interface is hereafter sometimes referred to as I/F and the diagnostics units as
HOST or image generator.
Lists of components are described below.
Product codes ending in # are for domestic use in Japan while those ending in E are
for overseas use.
<NOTE>
The following List of Components enumerate items required for each
configuration, so they do not correspond to units (quantities) of orders or
packages.
Use the product codes (Product Code) indicated only as a reference for
unpacking and follow the order lists provided separately when placing orders.
 List of Options for DRYPIX 4000

Product Code Product Parts No. Remarks
DPX 4000 TRAY Additional option tray 898Y1094 20 x 25 cm size tray set-
#/E ting
DPX 4000 SRT Additional option sorter 809Y0052 -
#/E
DPX BASE FBM Expanded frame buffer memory 113S0185A 256MB (Common to
256MB #/E DRYPIX 7000)
DPX 4000 Fall prevention fixture kit 898Y1126 For securing equipment
FLOOR FIX KIT
#/E
006-267-01
02.28.2005 FM4555
SPECIFICATIONS-4
1.3 General Specifications  Film

 Applicable Types
 Recording Method
DI-HL (blue base)
Laser exposure heat development method DI-HLc (clear base)
DI-ML (blue base: high density type for mammography) ( Only 26 x 36, 25 x 30,
 Laser Light Source and 20 x 25 cm sizes)
Red semiconductor source (658 nm, 70mW x 1)
 Applicable Film Size/Number of Sheets in One Pack
 First Printing Time 35 x 43 cm size : 101 sheets (including one sheet for reducing
dusts)
Approximately 85 seconds (35 x 43 cm size)
26 x 36, 25 x 30, 20 x 25 cm sizes : 151 sheets (including one sheet for reducing
 Processing Ability dusts)
35 x 43 cm size: Approximately 110 films/hour  Number of Supplies

26 x 36 cm size: Approximately 160 films/hour Maximum 2 trays
20 x 25 cm size: Approximately 160 films/hour (Since this equipment holds maximum two trays, the input from the DRYPIX Link
via AD-I/F or E-I/F supports two film sizes.)
 Start-up Time
 Loading Method
Approximately 15 minutes (When ambient temperature is 25 ˚C)
Daylight conditions loading
 Image Quality
 Maximum Ejected Film Capacity (output tray on the upper cover of
 Exposure Resolution the main unit)
14 bits 150 films
 Maximum Density (Dmax)  Input I/F

Select from 2.64, 3.0, 3.3, 3.6 at DI-HL and DI-HLc DICOM Network input only
Select from 3.6 and 4.0 at DI-ML
however, 3.6 and 4.0 are used for mammography  Network Connection
 Recording Pixel Size  DICOM Protocol
100 µm (standard), 50 µm (optional) Direct connection (standard)
 Maximum Number of Recording Pixels  TOSHIBA Protocol
35 x 43 cm size : 3520 x 4280 (in 100 µm recording) Connection via FN-PS551 and DRYPIX Link
: 7040 x 8560 (in 50 µm recording)
26 x 36 cm size : 3600 x 2540 (in 100 µm recording)  FINP Protocol
: 7200 x 5080 (in 50 µm recording)
Connection via FN-PS551 and DRYPIX Link
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
SPECIFICATIONS-5
 Modality Connection  Memory Capacity

Standard 256 MB, maximum 512 MB
 A/D-I/F Connection (Analog/Digital)
Connection via DRYPIX Link  Image Spooling
Applicable equipment: Diagnostic devices such as CT/MRI Spooled to HD (in IDE connection)
 E-I/F Connection
 HD Capacity
Network connection via DRYPIX Link
Applicable equipment: Image reader after FCR 7000, MF-300/MF-300S/MF- 40 GB or above
300L, FN-PS551
 Density Correction
 Image Processing Automatic density correction function (AUTO F. D. C.)
 Interpolation  Optional Sorter

SSM interpolation, A-VR interpolation
 Number of Bins
 Tone Processing 3 bins (The total number of bins is 4 because the output tray on the upper cover
BAR method, SAR method of the main unit is counted as 1 bin.)
 Format  Maximum Number of Films Storable per Bin
30 films per bin
 Standard Format (for all film sizes)
1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 9, 12, 15, 16, 18, 20, 24, 25, 28, 30, 32, 35, 36, 40, 42, 48, 49, 54,  Noise
56, 63, 64, 70, 72, 80 Ready : Approximately 45 dB
 Mixed Format Printing : Approximately 50 dB (excluding transient noises)
35 x 43 cm size portrait mix : six types
26 x 36 cm size portrait mix : one type
26 x 36 cm size landscape mix : four types
006-267-01
02.28.2005 FM4555
SPECIFICATIONS-6
1.4 Equipment Dimensions and Weight
 Dimensions  When Sorter is Mounted

600 mm x 585 mm x 1340 mm (W x D x H)
 DRYPIX 4000
600 mm x 585 mm x 1040 mm (W x D x H)
 Weight
 DRYPIX 4000
Approximately 140 kg (including two trays)
 When Sorter is Mounted
006-267-01
02.28.2005 FM4555
SPECIFICATIONS-7
1.5 Means to Move and Secure Equipment
 Move
Four wheel caster (omni-directional, with no brake)
 Securing
Adjustable feet : 2 (front)
fixtures : 1 set (option)
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
SPECIFICATIONS-8
1.6 Environmental Requirements  Floor (installation surface) Vibration Requirement

Frequency : 10 to 55 Hz
 Temperature, Relative Humidity and Atmospheric Pressure Amplitude : 0.0075 mm or less
 Floor Levelness
 Operating
10 mm/m (1/100 of inclination) or less all around
Temperature/Relative humidity : 15 ˚C (40 to 70 %RH) to 30 ˚C (15 to 70 %RH)
Atmospheric pressure : 700 to 1060 hPa  Floor Flatness
Heat generation : Approximately 1800 kJ (Printing)
10 mm or less
 Static Magnetic Field

DC 100 Gauss or less
 Non-operating
Temperature : 0 to 45 ˚C (No freezing)
Relative humidity : 10 to 90 %RH (No condensation)
Atmospheric pressure : 500 to 1060 hPa
 Transit or Storage
Temperature : -10 to 50 ˚C
 Exhaust Air of Equipment

 Maximum Exhaust Air in Standby State
20 m3/hour
 Maximum Exhaust Air in Printing
23 m3/hour
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
SPECIFICATIONS-9
1.7 Electrical Requirements
 Frequency
50 - 60 Hz
Acceptable variation: ±3%
 Line Voltage
100 - 120/200 - 240 VAC
Single-phase (2 lines or 3 lines)
 Capacity
1.5 kVA
 Rated Current
100 - 120 VAC : 12 A
200 - 240 VAC : 6 A
 Power Consumption
Maximum 1.5 kW
 Electric Energy
Printing : Approximately 500 Wh
Ready : Approximately 280 Wh
Stand-by : Approximately 200 Wh
Sleep mode : Approximately 120 Wh
Remote standby mode : Approximately 10 Wh
 Maximum Heat Generation

Printing : Approximately 1800 kJ
Ready : Approximately 1000 kJ
 Grounding Resistance
100 Ω or less
 Overload Protection
100 - 120 VAC : 15 A
200 - 240 VAC : 10 A
 Power Cable
3m
006-267-01
02.28.2005 FM4555
SPECIFICATIONS-10
1.8 Equipment Installation Space 1.8.2 Space Required for Maintenance Work
 When Not Fixed with Fixtures

1.8.1 Installation Space
<REMARKS>
 When Not Fixed with Fixtures To rotate the equipment, one side requires more than 1000 mm of space.
 When Fixed with Fixtures

 Space for Removing Fixtures
 Maintenance Space after Removing Fixtures

The same space as “ When Not Fixed with Fixtures” is required.
006-267-01
02.28.2005 FM4555
SPECIFICATIONS-11
1.9 Disposing the Equipment

When disposing the equipment, remove the MTH board first. Be sure to return the
removed MTH board to the Service Parts Center.
006-267-01
02.28.2005 FM4555
CONTROL SHEET

04.25.2005 02 Revised (FM4589) 6, 8-11, 17-43
02.28.2006 03 Revised (FM4704) 1, 18, 20-73
02.15.2007 05 Revised (Revision for main unit software version 20
DRYPIX 4000 SERVICE MANUAL V3.0, DI Tool version V3.0, etc.) (FM5080)
DISCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT (MD)

02.15.2007 FM5080
MD-1
1. OUTLINE OF EQUIPMENT
1.1 Functions of Equipment
 Outline of Equipment
• The DRYPIX 4000 is a network printer dedicated to DICOM protocol, and adopts
the laser exposure heat development method.
• Film sizes 35 x 43 cm, 26 x 36 cm, 25 x 30 cm and 20 x 25 cm can be used.
• According to the model, the equipment is standard-equipped with one film tray or
two film trays to supply film. Equipment with one film tray can be added with another
film tray by mounting the optional additional film tray (removal unit/film loading unit
and lower conveyor unit). Use of two film trays allows use of two types of film sizes
as well as use of different film base colors together. Both film trays can also be set
with the same type of film.
• By mounting the optional sorter unit (3 bin) and using it with the ejection film tray on
the equipment, 4-bin film sorting is possible.
• The image resolution is compatible with 20 pix/mm outputs for all film sizes.
However, this will require optional memories to be added.
• The following DICOM protocols are supported.
• Verification SOP Class (SCP)
• Basic Grayscale Print Management SOP Class (SCP)
• Basic Annotation Box SOP Class (SCP)
• Print Job SOP Class (SCP)
• Print Queue Management SOP Class (SCP)
• User Preference LUT SOP Class (SCP)
• The following services can be set using the service tool software installed in the
externally connected PC.
For this equipment, DPX7 PC Tool function contained in DI Tool, an integrated
service tool software package for Fuji medical dry imagers, is used.
• Clients settings
• Setting sorting conditions
• Save/load individual data files and files of data inside the equipment, save log
files, install/upgrade version of software, etc.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
DRYPIX 4000 Service Manual MD-1
MD-2
1.2 System Configuration  System Configuration Example 2
 Connecting with Dicom Compatible Devices

 System Configuration Example 1
006-267-00
02.28.2005 FM4426 (1)
MD-3
 Connecting with Non-dicom Compatible Devices  System Configuration Example 6
006-267-00
02.28.2005 FM4426 (1)
MD-4
1.3 Overall Configuration and Names of Parts  Rear View/Left View
1.3.1 External View
 Front View/Right View
006-267-00
02.28.2005 FM4426 (1)
MD-5
 Front View/Right View (Sorter)  Rear View/Left View (Sorter)
006-267-00
02.28.2005 FM4426 (1)
MD-6
1.3.2 Operation Panel No. Name Color Function
1 Status lamp Green • When lit : Normal
• When blinking : During initialization self-diag-
nosis
• When OFF : Other than above
Orange • When blinking : Film empty/level 0 error/level
1 error has occurred
• When OFF : Other than above
2 Display 320 × 240 dot color touch panel (LCD)
3 Power save lamp Green • When lit : At sleep mode
• When blinking : At power save mode/when
display is OFF
• When OFF : Normal
4 Power lamp Green • When lit : Main power switch is ON.
• When OFF : Main power switch is OFF.
5 Power ON switch Pressing when the equipment is not ON starts
the equipment.
6 Contrast adjustment Used for adjusting the display contrast.
volume (Located at the right bottom of the operation
panel)
7 Buzzer • Film empty (*1) : Repeats 900msec ON and
300 msec OFF
• Level 1 error : Repeats 500 msec ON and
100 msec OFF
• Level 0 error : Repeats 200 msec ON and
100 msec OFF
• Operation reject : Two short buzz. (PiPi)
*1 : When using the same size films on both film
trays, the buzzer will be sounded when both
trays run out of films.
<REMARKS>
Whether the alarm buzzer is sounded continu-
ously and the buzzer volume depend on the
U-Utility or M-Utility settings.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MD-7
1.3.3 Layout of External Connector
006-267-00
02.28.2005 FM4426 (1)
MD-8
1.3.4 Layout of Units
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MD-9
1.3.5 Layout of I/O Parts and Description of Functions Unit Symbol Name Type Remarks
 Film Loading Unit Upper film

loading
SOLA11 Tray lock solenoid (Up-
per)
Linear solenoid Releases tray lock
unit (A1)
SA11 Film pack/shutter detec- Reflection type ON in presence of film
tion sensor (Upper) sensor pack/shutter
SA12 Tray detection switch Microswitch ON when tray is pulled
(Upper)
SA13 Tray lock detection sen- Penetration type ON when tray lock is
sor (Upper) sensor released
(PI: 5mm)
SA14 Barcode reader (Upper) – Detects film pack infor-
mation
Lower film SOLA21 Tray lock solenoid (Low- Linear solenoid Releases tray lock
loading er)
unit (A2)
SA21 Film pack/shutter detec- Reflection type ON in presence of film
tion sensor (Lower) sensor pack/shutter
SA22 Tray detection switch Microswitch ON when tray is pulled
(Lower)
SA23 Tray lock detection sen- Penetration type ON when tray lock is
sor (Lower) sensor released
(PI: 5mm)
Detects film pack infor-
SA24 Barcode reader (Lower) –
mation
<REMARKS>
The ON of each sensor and switch means the following
• Penetration type sensor : Light-tight state
• Reflection type sensor : Film present/Detects actuator
• Microswitch : In a state where there is no continuity between the
internal contacts (N.O. or N.C.) (The operation status of
the switch varies depending on the actuator shape.)
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MD-10
 Removal Unit Unit Symbol Name Type Remarks
Upper re- MB11 Film removing motor 2-phase pulse Drives suction cup arm
moval unit (Upper) motor
( B1)
MB12 Removal unit convey- 2-phase pulse Film conveyance motor
ance motor (Upper) motor at upper removal unit
PB11 Suction pump (Upper) Pump Film suction
SVB11 Solenoid valve (Upper) Vacuum sole-
noid valve
SB11 Suction cup arm HP de- Penetration type ON when suction cup
tection sensor (Upper) sensor arm is at home position.
(PI: 5mm)
SB12 Film surface detection Penetration type ON when suction cup
sensor (Upper) sensor reaches on film/OFF
(PI: 5mm) when detects film suc-
tion
SB13 Suction cup arm upper Penetration type ON when suction cup
dead-point detection sensor arm reaches upper
sensor (Upper) (PI: 5mm) dead-point
Lower re- MB21 Film removing motor 2-phase pulse Drives suction cup arm
moval unit (Lower) motor
( B2)
MB22 Removal unit convey- 2-phase pulse Film conveyance motor
ance motor (Lower) motor at lower removal unit
PB21 Suction pump (Lower) Pump Film suction
SVB21 Solenoid valve (Lower) Vacuum sole-
noid valve
SB21 Suction cup arm HP de- Penetration type ON when suction cup
tection sensor (Lower) sensor arm is at home position.
(PI: 5mm)
SB22 Film surface detection Penetration type ON when suction cup
sensor (Lower) sensor reaches on film/OFF
(PI: 5mm) when detects film suc-
tion
SB23 Suction cup arm upper Penetration type ON when suction cup
dead-point detection sensor arm reaches upper
sensor (Lower) (PI: 5mm) dead-point
<REMARKS>
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MD-11
 Conveyor Unit Unit Symbol Name Type Remarks
Conveyor MD1 Film conveyance motor 2-phase pulse Drives conveyor unit
unit (D) motor rollers, and conveys film
MD2 Conveyor unit exit roller 2-phase pulse Drives conveyor unit exit
gripping release motor motor grip roller up/down
SOLD1 Stopper solenoid Linear solenoid Ups/downs stopper
SD1 Conveyor unit entrance Reflection type ON when film is at upper
sensor sensor conveyor entrance
SD2 Conveyor unit exit sen- Reflection type ON when film is at upper
sor sensor conveyor exit
SD3 Cleaning roller detection Reflection type ON in presence of
sensor sensor cleaning roller
SD4 Stopper release detec- Penetration type ON when stopper is at
tion sensor sensor release position
(PI: 5mm)
SD5 Grip roller position de- Penetration type ON when conveyor unit
tection sensor sensor exit grip roller is at grip-
(PI: 5mm) ping position
SD6 Film edge sensor Photo-interru-
puter
<REMARKS>
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MD-12
 Sub-scanning Unit Unit Symbol Name Type Remarks
Sub-scan- ME1 Sub-scanning motor 5-phase pulse Sub-scans and conveys
ning unit motor film
(E) ME1 driver board comes
as a set with ME1
SE1 Film leading edge detec- Laser detection Detects leading edge
tion sensor (SED16A) sensor and trailing edge of film
006-267-00
02.28.2005 FM4426 (1)
MD-13
 Heat Development Unit Unit Symbol Name Type Remarks
Heat Devel- MG1 Heat development unit 2-phase pulse Heat develops and con-
opment unit conveyance motor motor veys film
(G)
FANG1-3 Cooling fan 1 - 3 DC fan Ventilates and cools
near heat development
unit
HG1, 2 Heater 1, 2 Silicon rubber Heat 1st rack develop-
heater ment heat plate
HG4, 5 Heater 4, 5 Silicon rubber Heat 2nd rack develop-
heater ment heat plate
THG1, 2 Heat development Thermistor Detects 1st rack tem-
thermistor 1, 2 perature
THG4, 5 Heat development Thermistor Detects 2nd rack tem-
thermistor 4, 5 perature
THG10 Film cooling section Thermistor Detects film cooling sec-
thermistor tion temperature
THG11 Film recording seciton Thermistor Detects film recording
thermistor seciton temperature
TPG1, 2 Thermal protector 1, 2 Manual recov- Shuts off power supply
ery type for heaters in overheat-
ing of 1st rack heater
TPG4, 5 Thermal protector 4, 5 Manual recov- Shuts off power supply
ery type for heaters in overheat-
ing of 2nd rack heater
SG1 Heat development unit Reflection ON when film is at heat
entrance sensor type sensor development unit en-
trance
<REMARKS>
006-267-00
02.28.2005 FM4426 (1)
MD-14
 Film Release Unit Unit Symbol Name Type Remarks
Film re- MJ1 Film release unit con- 2-phase pulse Conveys and ejects film
lease unit veyance motor motor
(J)
SJ1 Film release unit en- Reflection type ON when film is at film
trance sensor sensor release unit entrance
SJ2 Film release sensor Reflection type ON when film is at film
sensor release unit exit
SJ3 Upper small cover inter- Microswith ON when upper small
lock switch cover is opened
<REMARKS>
006-267-00
02.28.2005 FM4426 (1)
MD-15
 Frame Unit Symbol Name Type Remarks
Frame (K) SK1, SK2 Upper front cover inter- Microswith ON when upper front
SK3, SK4 Upper right cover inter- Microswith ON when upper right
SK5 Lower right cover inter- Microswith ON when lower right
<REMARKS>
006-267-00
02.28.2005 FM4426 (1)
MD-16
 Sorter (Optional) Unit Symbol Name Type Remarks
Sorter (T) SOLT1 - 3 1st - 3rd bin film release Linear solenoid Switches changeover
solenoid guide
ST1 - 3 2nd - 4th bin film release Reflection type ON when film is at exit
sensor sensor of sorter
ST4 Sorter right cover inter- Microswith ON when sorter right
<REMARKS>
006-267-00
02.28.2005 FM4426 (1)
MD-17
1.3.6 Layout of Boards Name Main function
LED15A (Density measure- Light is emitted for density measurement
ment section light-emitting
board)
LDD16A (Laser drive board) Scanner laser drive
PDD15A (Density measure- Receives penetrating light for density measurement
ment section light-sensing
board)
MTH24A (Mother board) Overall control of equipment, network input, image pro-
cessing
PSU24A/PSU24B (Power Supplies DC power to the equipment/AC power to the
supply unit) HTD board for heat development unit heater
(PSU24A: for 100-120 VAC, PSU24B: for 200 - 240 VAC)
SND24A (Sensor driver Mechanical drive parts drive, I/O parts control, signal
board) counter of film edge sensor signal, thermistor signal/den-
sity measurement section data AD conversion, barcode
reader communication, interlock control
Main power switch Supplies AC power to the power supply unit
HDD Image data spool, saved in main program
DIMM (Memory) Main memory of MTH24A board, one module (256MB) as
standard
MCT16A (Mechanical control Mechanical control, heat development heater control
board)
PRN16A (Print control board) DA converts processed image signals from MTH24A board
and sends to scanner, laser power strength control, expo-
sure output timing control
PNL24B (Volume board) Touch panel contrast adjustment
PNL24C (SW/LED board) Power ON switch, operation panel LED, buzzer
PNL24A (Operatoin panel LCD display/non-display control, touch panel control
board)
PNL24D (SIG board) Status lamp
HTD24A (Heater drive board) Drives heat development unit heaters based on the control
signal from MCT board.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MD-18
2. STARTING UP AND ENDING THE 2.2 Error Processing
EQUIPMENT When errors occur during initialization or in the routine mode, this equipment performs
the following processes.
 When Films Run Out

2.1 Power ON Operations When the remaining number of films counter becomes 0, the equipment determines
The equipment starts up in the following conditions when the main power switch is that films have run out and shows a display prompting replenishing of films. However,
ON. if the equipment has several trays, and trays other than the one that has run out of
films have films of the same size and same base color, the display prompting that
Method Conditions Remarks films be replenished will be shown while printing continues.
Information that films have run out will be sent to externally connected devices at the
Power ON switch on Press power ON switch on op- - point a printing request is made.
operation panel eration panel. The replenishing of films by the user is determined by the opening/closing of film
WakeOnLAN function Receive WakeOnLAN packet The network equipment needs
trays, and by the ON/OFF of the film pack/shutter detection sensor.
from network connected device to correspond to the WakeOn-
LAN function.  When Level 1 Errors Occur
When level 1 errors occur, for errors which can be recovered by the user, displays on
The following screen appears when DICOM input is enabled during initialization. user recovery operations are shown. Initialization was performed after recovery by the
While this screen is displayed, image inputs are accepted but keys cannot be entered. user, and if printing is currently being performed printing will be continued.
If recovered by retry operations of the equipment, only error logs are performed. Error
logs are also only performed for reference information for design analysis.
 Cover Open/Tray Open/Shutter Detection
When these errors are detected, operations of the equipment are stopped, the error
notification screen appears on the operation panel, and operations of the equipment
are continued after errors have been removed by the user.
 When Films Jam
When films jam, printing of films ahead of the jammed position are completed, and the
film jam screen appears.
When film jams in the sorter, printing is stopped immediately and the film jam screen
appears.
Images which have not been printed will be re-output automatically after recover.
 When Sorter is Abnormal
When errors occur in the sorter during printing, the discharge destination of film
<REMARKS> proceeding the sorter is switched to the top of the equipment. At the same time, the
sorter error notification screen appears. Touching the “CONFIRM” button sets the
In the screen display example shown above, the blue frame for film quantity indicates sorter into the degenerated state.
that DI-HL film is loaded, and the gray frame for film quantity indicates that DI-HLc film
loaded, and also the pink frame for film quantity indicates that DI-ML film is loaded. “4.0”
displayed below the tray number indicates that the tone type is set to Dmax 4.0.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-19
 When Level 0 Errors Occur 2.3 Power OFF Operations
When level 0 errors occur, the equipment completes the current process as much as When the power of this equipment is ON, it can be ended in the following conditions.
possible, stops temperature control, and the error display is shown.
The equipment then becomes system down and the power must be turned ON/OFF. It
Method Conditions Remarks
is possible to shift to the M-Utility in this state.
Level 0 errors consists of the following. Shut down button on Touch the shut down bottun on -
• Conveyance system fatal error touch panel the touch panel.
• Temperature control system fatal error Main power switch Turn OFF the main power All power supplies are cut off
• Scanner system fatal error switch. regardless the state of the
• Image processing fatal error equipment.
• Fatal errors determined by the software
• Failed in reading external files when equipment is started. <REMARKS>
• Discovered contradiction of various software environment when equipment is Shut down the software before turning off the power when ending the equipment.
started.
• Discovered contradiction in service settings when equipment is started.
• Discovered malfunction of various electric parts when equipment is initialized.
• Malfunctions of all trays.
• Communication error of formatter (MTH board) and printer (MCT board)
 Degeneration
When the following units malfunction, this is taken as degeneration, and operations
are continued without using the function.
• Tray (only when there are usable trays)
• Density measurement section
• Sorter
 Film Replacement Output

If films with the size and base color specified by externally connected equipment have
not been replenished, films are output from trays which can be used according to
configuration settings of the M-Utility.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MD-20
3. DESCRIPTION OF MECHANICAL The following procedures are required to change the film size.
• Change the position for attaching the guide pin and guide plate in the film tray
OPERATIONS • Change the position for attaching the barcode reader
• To use the 20 x 25 cm film size, change the positions for attaching the suction cup
arm and replace the guide plate in the film tray
• Change the film size at the configuration setting of the M-Utility
3.1 Film Loading Unit
3.1.2 Film Pack/Shutter Detection
<NOTE>
To prevent exposure of films in trays when trays are opened, this equipment is
The following descriptions are based on the upper film loading unit. For the provided with sensors to detect film packs in the trays or the shutter. The tray open
lower film loading unit, the descriptions shall be read by substituting A2 for A1. operation via the operation panel can be received only when reflected light from
<In the case of film pack/shutter detection sensor> the film pack or shutter is detected by the film pack/shutter detection sensor (SA11:
Upper film loading unit: SA11 reflection type sensor).
Lower film loading unit: SA21
3.1.1 Film Sizes

This equipment is compatible with film sizes 35 x 43 cm, 26 x 36 cm, 25 x 30 cm,
and 20 x 25 cm. The following figure shows the arrangement of guide pins and guide
plates for each film size.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MD-21
3.1.3 Barcode Reader (BCR) 3.1.4 Tray Detection/Tray Lock
A barcode label is pasted to the base of the film pack. The barcode reader (BCR) Film tray detection is performed by the tray detection switch (SA12). When a film tray
reads barcode information such as film production lot, size, type, etc. from this label is inserted, SA12 turns OFF, thereby detecting the film tray presence.
when film is loaded. SA12 also serves as an interlock function, which cuts off the +24V power of the film
If change in the film production lot is detected from this barcode information, density removing motor (MB11), removal unit conveyance motor (MB12), suction pump (PB11),
measurement is performed automatically according to the U-Utility setting, and and solenoid valve (SVB11) when tray is opening.
density difference is corrected by updating the density correction table. Also errors are {MD:4.3_Interlock Control}
indicated when a diffirent type of film is loaded by mistake.
If barcode information is not read correctly, BCR is detected as malfunctioning and the Tray lock is released by SOLA11, and the SOLA11 state is detected by the tray lock
previous density correction tables are used continuously. Or the film is detected as detection sensor (SA13).
other brand product. By the tray open operation via the operation panel, SOLA11 turns ON and the tray
lock is released. When SOLA11 turns ON, SA13 goes ON by the actuator attached
to the hook. SA13 prevents the tray from being persistently locked in case SOLA11
malfunctions.
 Example of screen display that appears when a different type of

film is loaded by mistake
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-22
3.2 Removal Unit 3.2.2 Film Suction
The film removing motor (MB11) rotates at high speed in the reverse direction (CCW)
<NOTE> by the removal enable signal, and the suction cup arm starts moving.
The suction cup arm curves according to the groove on the removal unit frame and
The following descriptions are based on the upper removal unit. For the lower passes the upper dead-point. MB11 stops momentarily and starts reversing again
film loading unit, the descriptions shall be read by substituting B2 for B1. when the arm passes the upper dead-point. When the removal unit conveyance roller
<In the case of suction cup arm HP detection sensor> (upper) reaches the film surface turning ON the film surface detection sensor (SB12),
Upper removal unit: SB11 MB11 stops.
Lower removal unit: SB21
3.2.1 Suction Cup Arm Home Position

In the standby state, the suction cup arm is positioned at the suction cup arm home
position. The suction cup arm home position is the position at which the suction
cup arm HP detection sensor (SB11) switches from OFF to ON and the removal
conveyance roller (upper) touches the removal unit conveyance roller (lower).
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-23
Upon the stop of MB11, the suction pump (PB11) turns ON, resuming its reverse 3.2.3 Film Flapping Operations
rotation to press the suction cup onto the film surface. When SB12 turns OFF, MB11
stops. With the film suctioned to the suction cup, MB11 rotates in the normal direction
(CW) and the suction cup arm rises up to where the suction cup arm upper dead-
point detection sensor (SB13) turns ON. From this position, MB11 repeats rotating
in reverse and normal directions to perform flapping operations which repeat rising/
lowering of suction cup arm five times.
Flapping operations supply air to the trailing edge of the film by moving the leading
edge up and down, to prevent improper conveyance due to adherence of the trailing
edges of the films. In addition, the films stuck together due to static are peeled apart
by fanning the lead edge of the film with the pick provided on the loading unit.
Provided in the suction cup is a nozzle connected to the hose from PB11, which
generates negative pressure in the suction cup when PB11 turned ON, allowing the
film to be suctioned.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-24
3.2.4 Film Release 3.2.5 Removal Conveyance
After flapping operations complete, MB11 rotates in the normal direction (CW), and After film separation, the removal unit conveyance motor (MB12) rotates, conveying
moves the film to the removal unit conveyance roller (lower). the film until it stops at the conveyer unit entrance sensor (SD1).
If SB11 turns ON while it is moving, MB11 stops temporarily and rotates in the normal At this time, if SD1 does not turn ON within the specified time, the film is detected as
direction for the specified number of pulses. having been dropped, and an error code is displayed.
When the trailing edge of the preceding film passes the film leading edge detection
sensor (SE1), film conveyance resumes.
Now in this state, PB11 turns OFF and the solenoid valve (SVB11) turns ON
concurrently, thereby causing air leakage to separate the film from the suction cup.
Upon release of film from the suction cup, the removal unit conveyance roller (upper)
falls by its own weight, and the film is gripped by the removal unit conveyance roller
(upper) and removal unit conveyance roller (lower).
3.2.6 Returning to Home Position
When SD1 detects the leading edge of the film via the conveyance operation, MB11
rotates in the normal and reverse direction, returning the suction cup arm to the home
position, and waits for the next removal enable signal.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-25
3.2.7 Magic Arm
As the mechanism for removing film from the bottom of the tray within the film removal
unit that are slimmed down from that of previous models, provided for this equipment
is the “Magic Arm” that extends the suction cup unit.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-26
3.3 Conveyor Unit 3.3.2 Cleaning Roller Detection
Presence/absence of the cleaning roller inside the upper conveyor unit open/close
guide is detected by the cleaning roller detection sensor (SD3).
3.3.1 Conveyance
Upon receiving the conveyance start signal, conveyance into the conveyor unit starts.
The film conveyance motor (MD1) and removal unit conveyance motors (MB12/MB22)
rotates to feed the film until its leading edge is detected by the conveyor unit exit
sensor (SD2). Here, MB22 rotates only when the film is removed from the lower tray.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-27
3.3.3 Striking against Stopper 3.3.4 Gripping by Conveyor Unit Exit Roller
Upon the start of conveyance, the stopper solenoid (SOLD1) turns ON and raises the When the predetermined time has passed since the film struck the stopper, MD1 and
stopper located at the conveyor unit exit. The stopper release detection sensor (SD4) MB12/MB22 stop.
detects whether the stopper is raised or lowered. Then, the conveyor unit exit roller gripping release motor (MD2) rotates in the reverse
direction (CCW), allowing the conveyor unit exit roller to grip the film. The grip roller
position detection sensor (SD5) detects whether the conveyor unit exit roller is in the
gripped or released state.
When the film is completely gripped, SOLD1 turns OFF and the stopper is lowered.
The film that has been temporarily at rest after being detected at SD2 is conveyed at
low speed until it strikes against the stopper. Because the conveyance by the motor
is still continued, the film gets arched to correct skew with respect to the conveyance
direction.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-28
3.3.5 Film Edge Sensor 3.3.6 Pre-recording Conveyance
Film edge sensor (SD6) is provided in the conveyor unit exit to optimize the start After transfer of image data to the print buffer in the formatter, film conveyance to the
position of main scanning/writing (the number of pixels to be skipped). sub-scanning unit is started (pre-recording conveyance).
When the film passes the conveyor unit exit, the edge sensor arm of the film edge In pre-recording conveyance, MD1 is rotated in the reverse direction (CCW) at high
sensor assembly provided on the front side of the conveyor unit is pushed, thereby speed for the specified number of pulses, and is switched to low speed in the reverse
allowing the sector gear concentric to the edge sensor arm to rotate the encoder plate. direction in synchronization with the sub-scanning conveyance roller to send the film
The film edge sensor (SD6) measures the distance from the reference position to the to the sub-scanning unit.
film edge by counting the number of slits on this rotating encoder plate. After conveying the film for the specified time, MD1 is rotated in the normal direction
(CW) to disengage the conveyor gears in the rear of the conveyor unit to free the
conveyor unit exit roller, thereby preventing .
Thereafter, when image recording is started and SD2 goes OFF, the conveyor unit exit
grip roller is released.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-29
3.4 Sub-scanning Unit 3.4.2 Recording Conveyance
When the leading edge of film is detected by the film leading edge detection sensor
(SE1), image recording by means of the laser light from the scanner unit starts.
3.4.1 Sub-scanning Conveyance After Image recording ends, and the film is conveyed for a distance according to the
Upon film conveyance from the conveyer unit, the sub-scanning motor (ME1) rotates film length, ME1 stops.
driving the sub-scanning conveyance roller via the flat belts (rear/front).
When performing service, the sub-scanning motor shall be replaced as a set because
it consists of the pulse motor and ME1 driver board.
{MC:6.3_Sub-Scanning Motor (ME1)}
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-30
3.5 Scanning Optics Unit The laser light reflected from the polygon mirror passes through the scanning lens
and is directed via the reflecting mirror to the surface of the film at the bottom of the
scanning optics unit. The exposed film is conveyed to the heat development unit and
3.5.1 Scanner Unit is heat developed.
The scanning optics unit is composed of the LDD board (laser diode control board),
LDA board(laser diode emission board), SYN board (start-point detection board) of the
scanner unit, SED board of the sub-scanning unit (film leading edge detection sensor:
SE1), polygon motor, LED board and PDD board of the density measurement section.
The LDD board, LDA board, SYN board, and SED board are controlled by the PRN
board, while the polygon motor and density measurement section are controlled by the
SND board. These controls are synchronized with film conveyance to record images.
The digital data sent from the MTH board is D/A converted in the PRN board, and sent
to the LDD board as analog image signal.
3.5.2 Laser Exposure

Red laser of maximum power 70mW/658nm is radiated to the six-face polygon mirror
from the laser diode mounted to the laser unit of the scanner unit.
The laser light scanned in the main scanning direction via the polygon mirror is
synchronized by detecting the scan start timing at the main scanning sync sensor of
the SYN board.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-31
3.5.3 Density Measurement Section 3.5.4 Temperature Correction
The density measurement section measures film density after development, and Film image density varies depending on the cooling temperature after heat
compiles density correction tables to correct image density. development and the temperature of the equipment. For this reason, the temperature
The film (17-steps pattern/24-steps pattern) printed via the density measurement of the film cooling section and temperature near the sub-scanning unit are detected by
menu on the operation panel is read for the light penetration amount when it passes the thermistor, and based on this temperature data, image data before D/A conversion
between the light-emitting side of the LED board and light-sensing side of the PDD are corrected.
board of the film release unit to measure the density data.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-32
3.6 Heat Development Unit 3.6.2 Temperature Control
Provided in the heat development unit are two heat development rack assemblies: 1st
rack and 2nd rack.
3.6.1 Heat Development Temperature control is performed by the temperature detection signal from the
The exposed image on the film conveyed from the sub-scanning unit is heat thermistors (THG) attached to the heat plate of each rack.
developed by passing through the heat plate and heat development roller of the heat In addition, thermal protectors (TPG) are attached to each heat plate as a protection
development unit. against overheating.
Heat development unit fans (FANG) cool down the heat development unit with
The heat development unit conveyance motor (MG1) starts rotating upon the start of their rotation speed modified within the voltage range of +14V to +24V at six steps
removal operation, and the film conveyance state is detected by the heat development depending on the heater temperature.
unit entrance sensor (SG1). <REMARKS>
The film that has undergone the heat development process is uncurled while being
gradually cooled down by the film cooling section, and conveyed to the film release This equipment performs heat development by changing the pulse width of the heater
unit. ON time according to the voltage value selected via the [Power Supply Voltage] of
After the last film is released, MG1 stops. M-Utility.
�
{MU:3.3 [6-6]_Power Supply Voltage}
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-33
3.7 Film Release Unit
3.7.1 Film Discharge

The film that has undergone the heat development is conveyed to the film release unit
and discharged outside the equipment.
When the film release unit entrance sensor (SJ1) turns ON, the film release unit
conveyance motor (MJ1) starts rotating in the normal direction (CW) at low speed.
When the film is discharged and then the film release sensor (SJ2) turns OFF, MG1
and MJ1 stop concurrently.
For main unit software version V2.0 or later, MG1 and MJ1 stop concurrently upon
expiry of the prescribed time from the passage of film trailing edge through SJ1 to the
exit of film trailing edge from the equipment.
3.7.2 High Speed Discharge

When the trailing edge of film passes SJ1 and the following conditions are satisfied,
MJ1 switches to high speed normal rotation to allow the film to be discharged at high
speed.
Conditions High speed shift

Normal film output (film cooling sec-
Shifted to high speed release upon SJ1-OFF
tion temperature is low)
Normal film output (film cooling sec-
tion temperature is high) Shifted to high speed release upon expiry of
the prescribed time after SJ1-OFF
Cleaning film output
Density measurement film output Not available
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-34
3.8 Sorter When the film is discharged to the sorter, the direction of the changeover guide is
switched by turning ON the 1st bin film release solenoid (SOLT1) upon the start of
MJ1 rotation.
3.8.1 Film Conveyance Switching of bins is performed by ON/OFF combinations of the bin film release
solenoids (SOLT2/SOLT3).
Film conveyance at the optional sorter is performed by being driven by the film release
unit conveyance motor (MJ1). Film discharge destination
When the film release unit entrance sensor (SJ1) turns ON, the film release unit
conveyance motor (MJ1) starts rotating in the normal direction (CW) at low speed. 1 bin 2 bin 3 bin 4 bin
SOLT3 OFF OFF ON OFF
3.8.2 Changeover Guide Switching SOLT2 OFF ON OFF OFF
Switching of film discharge destination from the main unit to the sorter, or switching of SOLT1 OFF ON ON ON
the discharge bins is performed by switching the direction of the changeover guide via
turning ON/OFF the film release solenoids (SOLT1 through SOLT3).
For equipments without the sorter, the changeover guide is fixed at the upper panel
discharge position. For equipments with the sorter, the changeover guide is movable
and normally held at the upper panel (bin 1) discharge position under the spring
tension.
<NOTE>
The bin number of the upper panel is 1 and those of the sorter bins are 2
through 4 from the bottom upwards.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-35
3.8.3 Film Discharge
After the film is discharged onto the bin, turning OFF the bin film release sensor (ST1/
ST2/ST3), MJ1 stops in the predetermined time and the solenoid goes OFF.
For main unit software version V2.0 or later, MJ1 stops upon expiry of the prescribed
time from the passage of film trailing edge through SJ1 to the exit of film trailing edge
from the equipment.
<REMARKS>
High speed discharge is performed by the same control as that of the film release unit.
{MD:3.7_Film Release Unit}
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-36
4. DESCRIPTION OF ELECTRICAL
CONTROL
4.1 System Block Diagram
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-37
4.2 Outline of Power Supply
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-38
AC power is supplied to the power supply unit when the main power switch is turned
ON. The power supply unit outputs the following power based on this AC power.
• When AC power is input, the power supply unit outputs +5VS to the MTH board and
for the power lamp on the operation panel, and AC power for the heat development
heater to the HTD board.
• The power supply unit outputs +5V, ±12V, +12VD, +24V, and +3.3V when the power
ON switch is pushed.
• The HTD board outputs AC power to the heat development unit heater by the heater
control signal from the MCT board.
The MTH board has a lithium battery for the clock and backup RAM.
<REMARKS>
Each output block of the power supply unit of this equipment has a protection circuit
for overvoltage and overcurrent. When problems are detected, the present DC output
is stopped.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-39
4.3 Interlock Control
The drive power supply cutoff by the interlock switch of this equipment is shown
below.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-40
 Interlock and Back Electromotive Force Prevention Circuit by  Stop Load by Interlock Switch
Relay When the interlock function operates, the power of the following load is cut off.
: Power cutoff load
<REMARKS>
SK1, SK3, SJ3,
The back electromotive force prevention circuit prevents back electromotive force Unit Symbol Name SA12 SA22
SK2
SK4,
ST4
generated by the rotation of the motor when film is removed due to jam. SK5
MB11 Film removing motor

K1, K2 : Relays which stop the load operation or perform back
electromotive force cutoff of MB11, MB12, MB21 and PB11 Suction pump
Upper removal unit
MB22 when trays are opened. (B1) SVB11 Solenoid valve
K3, K4 : Relays which stop the load operation or perform back
electromotive force cutoff of MD1, MD2, ME1, MG1 and Removal unit convey-
MB12
ance motor
MJ1 when the upper front cover is opened.
K5 : Relays which stop the load operation or perform back MB21 Film removing motor
electromotive force cutoff of MB12, MB22 and ME1 when
PB21 Suction pump
the upper right cover and/or lower right cover are opened. Lower removal unit
K6 : Relays which stop the load operation or perform back (B2) SVB21 Solenoid valve
electromotive force cutoff of MD1 and MD2 when the
Removal unit convey-
upper right cover and/or lower right cover are opened. MB22
ance motor
K7 : Relays which stop the load operation or perform back
electromotive force cutoff of MG1 and MJ1 when the MD1 Film conveyance motor
upper small cover and/or sorter right cover are opened. Conveyor unit exit roller
K8, K9 : Relays which cutoff power supply to the LDD board when Conveyor unit (D) MD2
gripping release motor
the upper front cover, upper right cover and/or lower right
cover are opened. SOLD1 Stopper solenoid
Power supply internal relay : Relays which cutoff ±12 V (for driving laser) to the LDD Sub-scanninig unit
board when the upper front cover, upper right cover and/ ME1 Sub-scanning motor
(E)
or lower right cover are opened.
Heat development Heat develpment unit
MG1
unit (G) conveyance motor
 Disconnection Detection by Photocoupler
Film release unit con-
The ON/OFF state of interlock switches, relays, and fuses are used for software Film release unit (J) MJ1
veyance motor
control after being converted ON/OFF signal by photocoupler.
1st bin film release so-
SOLT1
lenoid
2nd bin film release

Sorter (T) SOLT2
solenoid
3rd bin film release

SOLT3
solenoid
Scanner LDD LDD board
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-41
4.4 Functions of Boards  Main Functions
 CPU
4.4.1 MTH Board
Celeron 1.2GHz (FC-PGA2: FSB=100MHz)
 Outline  LAN
The MTH board performs overall control of the equipment, network input, and image 10/100BASE, with Link/Speed LED
processing.
 IDE-I/F (HDD I/F)
ATA 100 compatible
 DIMM
168 pin, 3.3V Unbuffered DIMM, Non-ECC, SPD, PC133/PC100 compatible
Maximum capacity: 512 MB
Slots: 2
 SIO-I/F (Touch Panel I/F)
Out of 2 ch, 1 is occupied
 CRT-I/F (LCD I/F)
Analog RGB, Display mode: Resolution 640 x 480
 PCI-I/F
PCI2.2 compatible, 4 slots (of which, 2 slots are for the PRN board and MCT board)
 USB (Log Strage, Image Strage, Software Version Up)
Out of 4 ch, 1 is occupied
USB1.1 compatible
 Lithium Battery
For RTC and backup RAM (CR14250SE)
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-42
4.4.2 PRN Board  Main Functions
 Outline (1) LBC block
Performs DMA transfer of image data via the PCI bus, and controls transfer to the
The PRN board converts image data stored in the main memory on the MTH board
frame memory.
from digital to analog via the following blocks, and sends analog image data to the
scanner unit using the coaxial cable. (2) CTG block
Performs image data transfer from the frame memory to line memory, and
controls transfer to the DAC based on the start-point/leading edge detection
signal.
(3) DAC block
Converts image data from the line memory from digital to analog, and controls
the laser light power.
(4) Start-point/leading edge detection signal
Takes in film leading edge detection sensor (SE1) outputs, and generates output
timing to the exposure area. To accurately obtain start-points in the scanning
direction, a PLL synthesizer is mounted.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-43
4.4.3 MCT Board  Boot Program Memory
Flash memory mounting OS VxWorks and device driver software, etc. Can read/write
 Outline by sector. 512k word.
The MCT board performs mechanical/heat development control. Connected to the PCI  Application ROM
bus of the MTH board. Has an interface with the SND board which controls/drives the
actuator. Flash memory storing printer application software. Application software is deployed
and operated on the main memory (SDRAM). Can read/write by sector. 1M word.
 FPGA
Bus error monitoring, decoding, bus control, self-reset register, LED, version register,
software SW lead, SND board I/F, 2-port memory (256B x 2) function.
 RS232C
Connected to PC for debugging.
 PCI Interface
Performs communication with the formatter software. PCI connection in the FPGA.
Performs communication between SH3 and MTH board via the 2-port memory in the
FPGA.
 SND Board Interface
Accesses the address/data 8bit multiplexer via the FPGA.
In data reading from the SND board, takes in data when confirmed as the same data
sent continuously twice. Bus error results when access is delayed because data
cannot be confirmed.
 Main Functions  Heater
Performs ON/OFF control of the heater. Mounts the LED for checking operations.
 Power ON Reset IC
Generates reset signals when the power is turned ON.
 Hardware Reset Switch
Generates the same reset signals as power ON reset.
 Self-reset Circuit
Generates reset signals by reset sequence access.
 CPU
SH3: 7709A (133MHz)
 Main Memory
8M word SDRAM (32 bit width), 33.3 MHz access with SH3.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-44
4.4.4 SND Board
 Outline
The SND board performs I/O control of the equipment by controlling the MCT board.
Control signals from the MCT board are accessed by the address/data 8bit multiplexer
via the FPGA.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-45
 Main Functions  Interlock
 Sensor I/F Relay

• Cover .....................................................................x 4
Sensor input • Tray........................................................................x 2
• PI 5 mm GAP type .................................................x 10
• PI reflection type ....................................................x 13
 Operation Panel I/F
• Interlock state detection.........................................x 6
Status lamp
• Fuse disconnection detection ................................x 8
• LED ON/OFF control .............................................x 4
• Film edge sensor ...................................................x 1
LCD control
A/D conversion
• LCD ON/OFF control
• Thermistor .............................................................x 8
• Backlight ON/OFF control
• Density measurement photo diode ........................x 1
• QVGA display position control
Sensor control
 MCT I/F
• LED lighting control
(Reflection type, film edge sensor) ........................x 14 Bus control
• Density measurement LED lighting control ...........x 1 Accesses address/data by 8bit multiplexer.
Barcode reader Takes in address/data when confirmed as the same address/data sent
continuously twice.
• RS-232C ................................................................x 2
 Log/Voltage Setting Storage
 Drive I/F
Nonvolatile memory
Control Saves logs for analysis and input AC voltage information for heat development
• 2-phase pulse motor control ..................................x 8 control.
• 5-phase pulse motor control ..................................x 1 Capacity: 256Kbit, Used device: Serial EEPROM
• Solenoid control .....................................................x 6 (Power down is 2)  Others
• Polygon motor control............................................x 1
• Solenoid valve control ...........................................x 2 For Analysis
• Pump control .........................................................x 2 • Fuse disconnection detection circuit
• Cooling fan control.................................................x 3 (Voltage control 6-steps) • Sensor/actuator state display 7-segment LED
Drive • Board version information is controlled by the difference of pullup/down
resistance inplementation
• 2-phase pulse motor drive .....................................x 8 • Switching jumper for BCR loop back test
• Solenoid drive ........................................................x 6 (Power down is 2)
• Polygon motor drive...............................................x 1
• Solenoid valve drive ..............................................x 2
• Pump drive ............................................................x 2
• Cooling fan drive....................................................x 3 (Voltage control 6-steps)
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-46
4.4.5 HTD Board
 Outline
The HTD board controls the heater of the heat development unit by control of the MCT
board.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-47
4.4.6 PNL Board  Main Functions
 Outline  LCD Display
The PNL board is a user operation board installed on the operation panel.
Panel displays are controlled by the MTH board and SND board. LCD
• Color 4.7 inch STN LCD
• Display resolution 320 (W) x 240 (H) dots (QVGA)
• Built-in inverter drive backlight and inverter
Control board
• Display color: 64 colors
• Backlight: ON/OFF control
• Contrast: Adjustable by external VR
• I/F: Analog RGB
• Video input: 640 x 480 (VGA)
• Image display: VGA 1/4 display, position selectable
VR board
• Slide VR for contrast adjustment (Phase control SW)
 Touch Panel
Touch panel
• Type: Analog resistance film touch panel
• I/F: RS-232C
 Error Detection
Buzzer
• Film empty/error notified by buzzer
• Reference frequency: 2400 Hz
 Equipment State Display
LED
Displays equipment state by lighting/blinking.
• Power lamp (Green) : Indicates that AC power is supplied
• Power save lamp (Green) : Indicates the power down mode/sleep mode
• Status lamp (Green/orange) : Indicates ready/utility/film empty/error
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-48
4.4.7 Power Supply Unit  Main Functions
 Outline of Power Supply Specifications +5 V power supply monitor
Output of the +5 VS power is started when the main power switch is turned ON,
Input AC voltage and the POK signal (DC 5 V) is output to 200 to 500 ms after the +5 V power is
100 - 120 VAC ±10%/12 A turned ON by control of the power SW controller. (For MTH board)
200 - 240 VAC ±10%/6 A
Output DC voltage Power SW controller
• +5 VS ±4%/0.2 A: Standby power supply STARTRQ: Logic LOW level (ground) start request signal
• +5 V ±4%/6.0 A : Whole control board START: Logic LOW level start signal within signal pulse width 3 seconds (For
MTH board)
• +3.3 V ±4%/3.2 A
: Whole control board PS-ON: By receiving the logic LOW level or ground level power supply ON
• ±12 V ±4%/0.3 A: Analog power supply (Image output, thermistor, density request signal, outputs power supply voltage other than +5 VS (+5 V, ±12 V,
measurement) +12 VD, +24 V, +3.3 V).
• +12 VD ±4%/3.5 A : Drive power supply (HDD, backlight, cooling fan)
• +24 V ±4%/5.0 A : Drive power supply (Motor, solenoid, pump, etc.)
Laser protection interlock
<REMARKS> Turns ON/OFF the ±12VITRLK at the mechanical relay 2 contact for one line by
Only +5 VS is output for the MTH board and operation panel when the main the 24VITRLK signal input via the interlock switch from +24 V.
power switch is turned ON. ±12VITRLK can be output only when +24 V is supplied between 24VITRLK and
GND.
The ±12 V output of the laser power supply is interlock controlled by relay.
Output AC voltage
100 - 120 VAC ±10%
200 - 240 VAC ±10%
<REMARKS>
For the output AC voltage, the input AC power is output via the HTD board for the
heat development heater.
Input frequency
50 - 60 Hz ±3 Hz
Input capacity
1.5 kVA or less
Current leakage
0.2 mA or less
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-49
5. MECHANICAL CONTROL FLOW  ON/OFF Notation
5.1 Reading the Mechanical Control Flow

<NOTE>
To improve the performance of equipments, the contents of mechanical control
flow shown below may vary in detail, such as process flow contents, latency, or
operation time, depending on software version.
Therefore, time details such as latency are omitted here.
 Meaning of Symbols
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-50
5.2 Initialization Flow
 General Flow
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-51
5.2.1 Upper/Lower Removal Unit Initialization
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-52
5.2.2 Conveyor Unit Exit Grip Roller Initialization
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-53
5.2.3 Conveyor Unit Stopper Initialization 5.2.4 Remaining Film Discharge
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-54
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-55
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-56
5.3 Normal Processing 5.3.1 Film Removal
 Tray Check
 General Flow
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-57
 Film Surface Detection  Film Suction
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-58
 Flapping Operation
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-59
 Film Release  Prefeed
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-60
 Return to Suction Cup Arm HP
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-61
5.3.2 Conveyance
 Conveyance Operation
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-62
5.3.3 Sub-scanning Unit
 Recording Conveyance
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-63
5.3.4 Heat Development Unit
 Conveyance of the Heat Development Unit
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-64
5.3.5 Film Release Unit
 Conveyance of the Film Release Unit
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-65
6. TIME CHART
6.1 Removal Unit Time Chart
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-66
6.2 Conveyor Unit Time Chart
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-67
6.3 Sub-Scanning Unit Time Chart
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-68
6.4 Heat Development Unit Time Chart
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-69
6.5 Film Release Unit Time Chart
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-70
7. PRINTING FORMATS 7.2 Standard Formats
This equipment supports the following standard formats for all film sizes.
This chapter describes printing formats such as format names, standard formats, and No. of frames/film: 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 9, 12, 15, 16, 18, 20, 24, 25, 28, 30, 32, 35, 36, 40,
mixed formats. 42, 48, 49, 54, 56, 63, 64, 70, 72, 80
7.1 Reading the Format Name Portrait Landscape

In “STANDARD\c, r”, c and r indicate the following values. STANDARD\1,1 STANDARD\5,5 STANDARD\1,1 STANDARD\6,6
c (Column) : No. of frames in the horizontal direction STANDARD\1,2 STANDARD\5,6 STANDARD\1,2 STANDARD\7,4
r (Row) : No. of frames in the vertical direction
STANDARD\1,3 STANDARD\5,7 STANDARD\2,1 STANDARD\7,5
For example, they are as shown in the following for “STANDARD\3, 4”. STANDARD\2,1 STANDARD\5,8 STANDARD\2,2 STANDARD\7,6
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-71
7.3 Mixed Formats  11” x 14” (26 cm x 36 cm) PORTRAIT MIXED FORMAT
The following shows the frame layout of the mixed formats of each film size supported
by this equipment.
 14” x 17” (35 cm x 43 cm) PORTRAIT MIXED FORMAT
 11” x 14” (26 cm x 36 cm) LANDSCAPE MIXED FORMAT
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-72
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MD-73
BLANK PAGE
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
CONTROL SHEET

02.28.2006 03 Revised (FM4704) 2, 6, 25-27, 39, 39.1, 39.2, 40,
62-66, 81-111
TROUBLESHOOTING (MT)

02.28.2006 FM4704
MT-1
1. TROUBLESHOOTING METHOD
When malfunctions occur in the equipment, analyze them from error codes, abnormal
image, and abnormal operation and perform the required corrections.
 Troubleshooting Methods
The following three troubleshooting methods are available.
 Troubleshooting from Error Codes

When an error code is displayed on the screen, analyze the malfunction from that
error code.
When no error codes are displayed, the malfunction can be analyzed if an error
message is logged in the error log.
When analyzing malfunctions from error codes, refer to “2. ERROR CODE”.
{MT:2_ERROR CODE}
 Troubleshooting from Abnormal Images

When analyzing malfunctions from abnormal images, refer to “3. ABNORMAL
IMAGES”.
{MT:3_ABNORMAL IMAGES}
 Troubleshooting from Abnormal Operations

When analyzing malfunctions from abnormal operations, refer to “4. ABNORMAL
OPERATIONS”.
{MT:4_ABNORMAL OPERATIONS}
When checking the unit in troubleshooting, refer also to “6. TROUBLESHOOTING

REFERENCE”, “SERVICE PARTS LIST, 14. CIRCUIT DIAGRAM”.
{MT:6_TROUBLESHOOTING REFERENCE}
{SP:14_CIRCUIT DIAGRAM}
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
DRYPIX 4000 Service Manual MT-1
MT-2
2. ERROR CODE 3. For details on error codes, refer to “2.3 Error Code Table” for the
meaning of the error which has occurred, suspected cause, and
remedy.
2.1 Checking Error Codes When analyzing an error code, also refer to the detailed code provided.
To differentiate the place of error (printer or formatter), look up
 Display Example the name displayed under “Source” on the error log display in the
following table.
Source Error Type Place of Error

FLH Film conveyance related error
MFC Data setting/system related error
DEN Internal densitometer related error
Temperature control system related
DEV Printer error
error
POL Polygon motor control related error
PNL Panel control related error
ESN Film edge sensor related error
 Checking Error Logs
DICOM DICOM error
The following describes how to check error logs.
Spooler Spooler error
1. Start the M-Utility.
ImgPrc Image processing error
2. [System Management] → [Log Files] → [Display Error Log] Output Output control error
→ The following error log display appears. GUI Operation error
JobMake Test pattern generation error
Formatter error
Main MAIN control error
Decode Decoder error
File transfer error
PCUTL
(Using the PC Tool in normal state)
File transfer error
Satelite (Using the PC Tool during initializa-
tion error)
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MT-3
2.2 Format of Detailed Information 2.2.1 FLH Related (Conveyance) Errors Detailed Information
Perform this check only for analyzing error codes of the printer.  2-A (Sensor Related Errors)
In the usual troubleshooting, find the corresponding error code from the error code
tables, and refer to the suspected causes and remedy methods indicated to resolve Errors occurring in initialization self-diagnosis, removal, recording, constant
the problem. monitoring, etc. (Including mechanism, etc.)
However if the problem persists, or to investigate the problem in further detail, check Convert the hexadecimal 4-digit code to binary, compare the bit maps, and investigate
the following detailed information to analyze the problem. the input state corresponding to each bit.
1=ON (Close), 0=OFF (Open)
 Checking Detailed Information of Error Codes
1. Check the corresponding error code and its detailed information at

the error message display, or at [Display Error Log] of the M-Utility.
2. Check the detailed information format number at “2.3 Error Code  2-A-1 (Conveyance Related Information (Type S1))
Table” and refer to the corresponding format. Displays states of sensors (0/1) when an error occurs.
3. Find the format information from the 4-digit detailed information, and
analyze the problem.
 2-A-2 (Conveyance Related Information (Type S2))

Displays states of sensors (0/1) when an error occurs.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-4
 2-A-4 (Conveyance Related Information (Type S4))  2-B (File I/O Error)
 2-B-1 (Type F)
Error which occurs when a file could not be accessed properly. Displays the number
of the file causing the error and the causes.
 2-A-5 (Electric Related Information (Type E)) File number

201: Conveyance timer file (For mechanism)
202: Conveyance timer file (For size)
203: Conveyance timer file (For M-Utility)
204: Conveyance counter file
205: PM control parameter file (For mechanism)
206: PM control parameter file (For size)
207: PM control parameter file (For M-Utility)
208: Timer file for PM time monitoring
Causes
1: Open error
2: Read error
3: Write error
4: Conversion error
5: Line specification error
6: Column specification error
7: Size specification error
8: External file data error
A: Data range error (Detected by application)
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-5
 2-E (M-Utility Operation Error)  2-F (For Error Analysis)
 2-E-1 (Type U)  2-F-1
Displays the M-Utility command number and parameter of errors which occur when Error occurring during barcode reading. Displays the conveyance parameter number
the removal operation of the M-Utility was not executed as specified. and status when the error occurred.
M-Utility command number Conveyance parameter number

08: Unit Operation .................................................................... (1) Barcode read delay timer value defined for conveyance timer file (for mechanism)
10: Grip (Action:MD2 only)....................................................... (2)
Status
Parameter number
0: Normally read
When (1) 1: No data/reading error
0: Home Positioning 2: Timeout (After reading, read from application after specified time)
1: Film Surface 3: Barcode reader is not connected
2: Film Suction <NOTE>
3: Upper Limit
4: Film Fanning After removing the film pack, the barcode is read again. If affixed, it will be read
5: Film Release normally, so detailed code “0900” will be acquired.
6: Film Convey
7: Removing
When (2)
 2-F-2
0: Home Positioning Displays the specified bin and output bin when the error occurred in sorter malfunction.
3: Grip
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-6
 2-F-4 2.2.2 MFC Related (Data Setting/System Related) Errors
Displays the temperature when an error occurs in subscanning speed correction Detailed Information
calculation. (unit: 1°C)
However, if the temperature is minus (-1 to -99 °C), “F” will be displayed at the first  3-A (File Transfer/Creation Error)
digit.
Displays errors which occur while transferring files or creating files. Displays the file
number with the error.
3000: IOT data file
3010: ISC log file
3020: Nonvolatile memory IOT data file
3030: Nonvolatile memory ISC log file
3040: Nonvolatile memory data file
30A0: ROM image file (PRT load module)
30B0: OS File (OS load module)
30C0: Installer file (Installer load module)
9030: Temperature data file
5010: Density measurement data file
A000: Edge sensor data file
A010: Edge sensor monitoring data file
A020: Edge sensor average value data file
A030: Nonvolatile memory edge sensor data file
 3-B (File Write Error)

Displays error occurring while writing in the FLASH ROM. Displays the type of error
which occurred and installation method.
Type of error
1: Writing size error
2: Installation method error
3: Erase error
Installation method
0: PRT application
1: OS
2: Installer
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MT-7
 3-C (General Error Details)  3-E (Nonvolatile Memory Error)
Displayed when no detailed information. Error of nonvolatile memory READ/WRITE. Displays whether error has occurred in the
past and details of the error.
 3-D (SIO Communication Error)

Error which occurs during SIO communication test. Displays the type of port causing
the error and film tray number.
Whether error has occurred in the past

0: Error has not occurred in the past
1: Error has occurred in the past
Error details
1: H/W access error
2: H/W busy check timeout
3: H/W status check timeout
4: Parameter error
Type of port
2: Barcode reader port
Tray number
1: Tray 1
2: Tray 2
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-8
2.2.3 DEN Related (Internal Densitometer) Errors Detailed 2.2.4 ESN Related (Film Edge Sensor Related) Errors
Information Detailed Information
 4-A (File I/O Error)  8-A (File I/O Error)

Error which occurs when a file could not be accessed properly. Displays the causes. Error which occurs when a file could not be accessed properly. Displays the causes.
 4-B (Insufficient Effective Density Measurement)  8-B (Outside Range Data)

Displays the effective data acquired by AD data analysis in decimal 4-digits when the Displays the error value when the edge sensor data value is abnormal (outside range).
number of effective AD data measured by the density measurement section is less
than the minimum number of effective data (NOTE).
 8-B (No Acquired Data)

NOTE: The number of effective data is 90% of the number of data logically measured. Displays the file number during edge sensor related data file acquisition when the file
The number of effective data required for 24-steps pattern is above 5613, that could not be created due to no data.
for 17-steps pattern is above 4158, and that for QC pattern is above 1300.
File number
0: Edge sensor data file
1: Nonvolatile memory edge sensor data file
2: Edge sensor monitoring data file
3: Edge sensor average value data file
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-9
2.2.5 DEV Related (Temperature Control Related) Errors  9-C (Film Cooling Section, Recording Section Thermistor
Detailed Information Disconnection Error)
Error which occurs when the thermistor of the film cooling section or recording section
 9-A (Temperature Error) is disconnected. Displays the thermistor temperature (A/D value).
Displays the temperature when the temperature is outside the specified range in
heater temperature control. (Unit: 1°C)
However, if the temperature is minus (-1 to -99°C), “F” will be displayed at the second
digit from the left.
 9-D (File I/O Error)

Error which occurs when a file could not be accessed properly. Displays the causes.
 9-B (Heater Thermistor Disconnection Error)  9-E (Heater Control Task Start Error)
Error which occurs when the heater thermistor is disconnected. Displays the heater Displays the heater number when the heater temperature control task start ends in
number and thermistor temperature (A/D value). error.
 9-F (General Error Details)

Displayed when no detailed information.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-10
 9-H (Heat Development Control Parameter Value Error)
Displays the causes when heat development control parameter value errors are
detected.
Code details
Cause
0001: Target temperature setting error
0003: Heater control TCYC1 value error
1004: A system fan control TCYC2 value error
1005: A system fan control DUTY value: fr1 error
0009: Heater control DUTY value error
000A: Photosensing material correction parameter SBC1 value error
000B: Photosensing material correction parameter KBC value error
000C: TRAY number error at photosensing material correction parameter setting
000D: Photosensing material correction parameter SBC4 value error
2004: B system fan control TCYC2 value error
2005: B system fan control DUTY value: fr1 error
000E: Voltage DUTY parameter value error
000F: Equipment voltage parameter value error
001F: Language information parameter value error
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-11
2.3 Error Code Table
Names abbreviated in error code tables are as follows.
Abbreviated Name Formal Name

SND board SND24A board
MTH board MTH24A board
MCT board MCT16A board
PRN board PRN16A board
PNL board PNL24A board
LDD board LDD16A board
LED board LED15A board
PDD board PDD15A board
HTD board HTD24A board
PRT Printer/print mechanism
FMT Formatter
HDD Hard disk drive
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-12
2.3.1 Printer
Error Detailed Information
Error Name Significance Probable Cause and Remedy
Code Format
Conveyance system related external file
access error
Incorrect software installation, malfunction of MCT board, inappropriate data, or
• File read error
Conveyance system file insufficient data.
0201 error
• File write error
1. Re-install the software.
2-B-1
• File conversion error
2. Replace the MCT board.
• File line specification error
• File column specification error
Disconnection of the VCCS sensor power fuse (F5).
Sensor power supply fuse Disconnection of SND board sensor 1. Using the M-Utility, perform monitoring and mechanism adjustments
0215 disconnection power fuse 2. If the problem persists, replace the fuse.
2-A-5
3. If the problem still persists, replace the board.
F24VP SND board 24V disconnection.
SND board 24V 1. Using the M-Utility, perform monitoring and mechanism adjustments
0218 disconnection
Disconnection of SND board 24V
2. If the problem persists, check connectors and cables.
2-A-5
Disconnection of the F24VA film loading unit/removal unit power fuse (F7).
Film loading unit/removal
Disconnection of SND board film loading 1. Using the M-Utility, perform monitoring and mechanism adjustments
0219 unit power supply fuse
unit/removal unit power fuse 2. If the problem persists, replace the fuse.
2-A-5
disconnection
Disconnection of the F24VB ME1/MG1 power fuse (F9).
ME1/MG1 power supply Disconnection of SND board ME1/MG1 1. Using the M-Utility, perform monitoring and mechanism adjustments
0220 fuse disconnection power fuse 2. If the problem persists, replace the fuse.
2-A-5
Disconnection of the F24VC MB12/MB22 power fuse (F11).
MB12/MB22 power supply Disconnection of SND board MB12/MB22 1. Using the M-Utility, perform monitoring and mechanism adjustments
2-A-5
Disconnection of the F24VD MD1/MD2 power fuse (F13).
MD1/MD2 power supply Disconnection of SND board MD1/MD2 1. Using the M-Utility, perform monitoring and mechanism adjustments
2-A-5
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-13
Code Format
Disconnection of the F24VE SOLD1/MJ1/SOLT1, 2, 3 power fuse (F5).
SOLD1/MJ1/SOLT1,
Disconnection of SND board SOLD1/ 1. Using the M-Utility, perform monitoring and mechanism adjustments
0223 2, 3 power supply fuse
MJ1/SOLT1, 2, 3 power fuse 2. If the problem persists, replace the fuse.
2-A-5
disconnection
Malfunction of SA12 sensor or malfunction of SA12 port of SND board.
Attempted to check the upper tray open/
Upper tray detection sen- 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism adjustments.
0224 sor error
close state in initialization and removal,
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
2-A-1
but failed.
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Attempted to check whether the upper
Upper tray shutter detec- 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism adjustments.
0226 tion sensor error
tray shutter is present in initialization and
2-A-1
removal, but failed.
Attempted to check the lower tray open/
Lower tray detection sen- 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism adjustments.
0228 sor error
close state in initialization and removal,
2-A-2
but failed.
Attempted to check whether the lower
Lower tray shutter detec- 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism adjustments.
0230 tion sensor error
tray shutter is present in initialization and
2-A-2
removal, but failed.
Malfunction of the SA13 sensor, or SOLA11 solenoid.
Or malfunction of the SA13 port of the SND board, or malfunction of SOLA11.
Upper tray lock release er- Attempted to open the upper tray, but
0232 ror SA13 did not become OPEN.
1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism adjustments. 2-A-1
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-14
Code Format
Malfunction of the SA23 sensor, or SOLA21 solenoid.
Or malfunction of the SA23 port of the SND board, or malfunction of SOLA21.
Lower tray lock release Attempted to open the lower tray, but
0234 error SA23 did not become OPEN.
Malfunction of SB11 sensor or MB11 motor.
Attempted to deviate the removal arm Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SB11 port of the SND board, or
Upper tray removal unit
from HP (home position) in initialization, malfunction of the MB11 controller.
0237 HP deviation detection
but SB11 does not become OPEN. 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism adjustments.
2-A-1
error
(Retryover) 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
Attempted to return the removal arm to Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SB11 port of the SND board, or
Upper tray removal unit HP (home position) in initialization, but malfunction of the MB11 controller.
0239 HP return detection error SB11 does not become CLOSE. 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism adjustments.
2-A-1
Lower tray removal unit
2-A-2
error
Lower tray removal unit HP (home position) in initialization, but malfunction of the MB21 controller.
2-A-2
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-15
Code Format
Malfunction of the SD5 sensor or MD2 motor.
Attempted to set grip roller to HP (home Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD5 port of the SND board, or
position) in initialization, but SD5 does malfunction of the MD2 controller.
0245 Grip HP detection error
not become OPEN. 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism adjustments.
2-A-4
Attempted to set grip roller from HP
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD5 port of the SND board, or
(home position) to gripping position in
malfunction of the MD2 controller.
0247 Grip detection error initialization, but SD5 does not become
1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism adjustments.
2-A-4
CLOSE.
(Retryover)
Malfunction of the SD4 sensor or SOLD1 solenoid.
Attempted to set stopper plate from
stop position to release position in
Stopper plate release malfunction of the SOLD1.
0249 detection error
initialization, but SD4 does not become
2-A-4
CLOSE.
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensor/solenoid.
(Retryover)
release position to stop position in
Stopper plate detection malfunction of the SOLD1.
0251 error
2-A-4
OPEN.
(Retryover)
Set film trays or check files.
All film trays not-mounted Error when all film trays were set as
0253 error unmounted
1. Using the M-Utility, check settings of film used. FFFF
2. If no problem, check the files.
Attempted to lower the removal arm from
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SB13 port of the SND board, or
HP (home position) to upper deadpoint
Upper tray film upper malfunction of the MB11 controller.
0255 deadpoint detection error
detection position in removal, but SB13
2-A-1
does not become OPEN.
(Retryover)
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-16
Code Format
Lower tray film upper malfunction of the MB21 controller.
2-A-2
(Retryover)
Malfunction of the SB12 sensor or MB11 motor.
upper deadpoint detection position to
Upper tray film surface malfunction of the MB11 controller.
surface detection position in removal, but
2-A-1
SB12 does not become CLOSE.
(Retryover)
Lower tray film surface malfunction of the MB21 controller.
2-A-2
(Retryover)
surface detection position to suction
Upper tray film suction malfunction of the MB11 controller.
2-A-1
(Retryover)
Lower tray film suction malfunction of the MB21 controller.
2-A-2
(Retryover)
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-17
Code Format
Attempted to rise the removal arm from
suction detection position to upper
deadpoint detection position in removal,
2-A-1
but SB13 does not become CLOSE.
(Retryover)
2-A-2
(Retryover)
Upper tray removal unit malfunction of the MB11 controller.
0271 HP rise detection error
HP (home position) in removal, but SB11
2-A-1
does not become CLOSE.
(Retryover)
upper deadpoint detection position to HP
Lower tray removal unit malfunction of the MB21 controller.
0273 HP rise detection error
(home position) in removal, but SB21
2-A-2
does not become CLOSE.
(Retryover)
Attempted to deviate the removal arm
Upper tray removal unit from HP (home position) after removal
malfunction of the MB11 controller.
0275 HP deviation detection operation, but SB11 does not become
2-A-1
error OPEN.
(Retryover)
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-18
Code Format
Attempted to return the removal arm
to HP (home position) after removal
0277 HP return detection error
operation, but SB11 does not become
2-A-1
CLOSE.
(Retryover)
Lower tray removal unit from HP (home position) after removal
2-A-2
error OPEN.
(Retryover)
2-A-2
CLOSE.
(Retryover)
Attempted to set grip roller to HP (home
position) while checking the gripping
0285 Grip HP detection error operation using M-Utility, but SD5 does
2-A-4
not become OPEN.
(Retryover)
Attempted to set grip roller from HP Malfunction of the SD5 sensor or MD2 motor.
(home position) to gripping position while Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD5 port of the SND board, or
checking the gripping operation using malfunction of the MD2 controller.
0287 Grip detection error
M-Utility, but SD5 does not become 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism adjustments.
2-A-4
CLOSE. 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
(Retryover) 3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-19
Code Format
The shutter is inserted in the upper The shutter is inserted (degenerated state).
tray (degenerated state) at startup Or malfunction of the SA11 sensor or SA11 port of the SND board.
Upper tray shutter present
02C0 error at startup
initialization by user operations. Or 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism adjustments. 2-A-1
all trays cannot be used due to the 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
corresponding error. 3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
The shutter is inserted in the lower The shutter is inserted (degenerated state).
tray (degenerated state) at startup Or malfunction of the SA21 sensor or SA21 port of the SND board.
Lower tray shutter present
02C1 error at startup
initialization by user operations. Or 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism adjustments. 2-A-2
all trays cannot be used due to the 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
corresponding error. 3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
After jamming in the removal unit, use
of the tray is disabled by the pressing
Upper tray use of the upper tray disable button by
02C9 discontinued user operations (degenerated state).
Same as left. 2-A-1
Or all trays cannot be used due to the
corresponding error.
After jamming in the removal unit, use
of the tray is disabled by the pressing
Lower tray use of the lower tray disable button by
02D0 discontinued user operations (degenerated state).
Same as left. 2-A-2
Or all trays cannot be used due to the
corresponding error.
Attempted to rotate ME2 in the CLOSE
state of SE2 to open the shutter for
preventing condensation of the mobile
Shutter open/close error type equipment at startup, but the The [Mobile] setting in the [Option] setting menu of the M-Utility has been
02D1 (At startup) expected CLOSE state of SE2 could not changed from the default value [Stationary]. Return the setting to [Stationary].
2-F-3
be detected.
Or, the CLOSE state was detected, but
not open operations.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-20
Code Format
Attempted to open the shutter for
preventing condensation of the mobile
type equipment in the OPEN state of SE2
at startup, but the open/close state could
Shutter open/close error not be confirmed. The [Mobile] setting in the [Option] setting menu of the M-Utility has been
02D2 (At startup) To confirm this state, ME2 was rotated changed from the default value [Stationary]. Return the setting to [Stationary].
2-F-3
but it stopped because the CLOSE
state of SE2 could not be detected, or it
stopped after detecting the CLOSE state
of SE2.
Attempted to rotate ME2 in the CLOSE
state of SE2 to open the shutter for
Shutter open/close error preventing condensation of the mobile The [Mobile] setting in the [Option] setting menu of the M-Utility has been
02D3 (At shut down) type equipment at shut down, but again changed from the default value [Stationary]. Return the setting to [Stationary].
2-F-3
the expected CLOSE state of SE2 could
not be detected.
Setup error of sensor driver, FPMC driver
Error caused by software bug and incorrect settings which essentially does not
02FF Device set error • FPMC time monitoring setting error
occur.
2-D-1
• Message ID specification error
No response from DEV-SS that it has Incorrect software installation error, MCT board malfunction.
0332 DEV-SS start timeout completed start even after a certain 1. Re-install the software. 3-C
period of time. 2. Replace the MCT board.
No response from FL-SS that it has Incorrect software installation error, MCT board malfunction.
0333 FLH-SS start timeout completed start even after a certain 1. Re-install the software. 3-C
period of time. 2. Replace the MCT board.
Incorrect software installation error, MCT board malfunction (DPRAM, FLASH-
ROM, etc..), PC hardware error (PCI bus, HDD, etc.)
FMT unit communication Communication with FMT unit is not 1. Re-install the software.
0334 timeout possible. 2. Replace the MCT board.
3-C
3. Replace the MTH board.
4. Replace the HDD.
Incorrect software installation error, MCT board malfunction (DPRAM, FLASH-
ROM, etc..), PC hardware error (PCI bus, HDD, etc.)
Failed in transferring file between MCT 1. Re-install the software.
0370 File transfer error
<-> PC. 2. Replace the MCT board.
3-A
3. Replace the MTH board.
4. Replace the HDD.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-21
Code Format
Incorrect software installation error, MCT board malfunction.
Failed in writing in FLASH-ROM when
0371 FLASH-ROM writing error
installing.
1. Re-install the software. 3-B
Malfunction of the test tool or SND board
SIO communication test Failed in data transmission to the serial
0380 transmission error port during SIO communication test.
1. Replace the test tool. 3-D
2. Replace the SND board. (When BCR port is specified)
Data sent to/received from the serial Malfunction of the test tool or SND board
SIO communication test
0381 compare error
port during SIO communication test was 1. Replace the test tool. 3-D
incorrect. 2. Replace the SND board. (When BCR port is specified)
Malfunction of the test tool or SND board
SIO communication test Failed in receiving data from the serial
0382 reception error port during SIO communication test.
1. Replace the test tool. 3-D
2. Replace the SND board. (When BCR port is specified)
Malfunction of the MCT board or SND board
Inter-board communication Port read value in inter-board
0385 test error communication test was not correct.
1. Replace the MCT board. 3-D
2. Replace the SND board.
Malfunction of sensor or SND board.
Detected tray error during printing
1. Using M-Utility, check sensors and perform mechanism adjustments.
0390 Tray error during printing (changes in tray lock sensor/ shutter
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensor.
3-C
detection sensor).
Density measurement Software installation error, malfunction of the MCT board
Failed in reading density measurement
0401 control parameter file read
control parameter files at system start.
1. Re-install the software. None
error 2. Replace the MCT board.
Software installation error, malfunction of the MCT board
Polygon control parameter Failed in reading the polygon control
0501 file read error parameter file during system start.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-22
Code Format
Malfunction of the scanner unit, PRN board, or LDD board
Perform re-diagnosis in scanner check of the M-Utility, and if errors are detected,
perform the following.
Detected polygon rotation error for
Polygon error 1. Check and replace the wiring connector between the scanner unit, LDD
0510 (FATAL)
three times continuously during scanner
board, etc. and PRN board.
None
initialization diagnosis.
2. Replace the scanner unit.
3. Replace the PRN board.
4. Replace the LDD board.
Failed in reading the film edge sensor Incorrect software installation error, MCT board malfunction.
Parameter file reading
0810 failure
control parameter file during system 1. Re-install the software. 8-A
startup. 2. Replace the MCT board.
Heat development control Failed in reading the heat development Incorrect software installation error, MCT board malfunction.
0901 parameter file reading control parameter file when the system 1. Re-install the software. 9-D
error was started up. 2. Replace the MCT board.
Failed in TMS driver (temperature Incorrect software installation error, MCT board malfunction.
0902 TMS driver setup error measurement task) setup when system 1. Re-install the software. 9-F
was started up. 2. Replace the MCT board.
Heat development Failed in reading the heat development Incorrect software installation error, MCT board malfunction.
0903 calculation parameter file control parameter file when the system 1. Re-install the software. 9-D
reading error was started up. 2. Replace the MCT board.
Failed in reading the temperature Incorrect software installation error, MCT board malfunction.
Temperature conversion
0904 table file reading error
conversion table file when the system 1. Re-install the software. 9-D
was started up. 2. Replace the MCT board.
Failed in starting the plate control task
0905 Plate setup error
when the system was started up.
1. Re-install the software. 9-E
Failed in starting the fan control task
0906 Fan setup error
when the system was started up.
1. Re-install the software. 9-E
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-23
Code Format
Disconnection of the I/F cable between the SND board and thermistor, or
Detected that the current temperature of malfunction of the thermistor or thermistor port of the SND board.
a heater dropped below -20°C for three 1. Check that the thermistor connector, I/F cable to the thermistor, and
Plate thermistor
0911 disconnection error
times continuously (detection interval: connector of the SND board are set correctly. 9-B
600 ms), and determined that the 2. Replace the thermistor.
thermistor has disconnected. 3. Replace the SND board.
4. Replace the cable between the thermistor and SND board.
The plate temperature is abnormal.
Malfunction of the temperature detection thermistor, disconnection of the heater
or I/F cable between the heater and SND board, reset of heater by the thermal
protector, or malfunction of the heater port of the MCT board.
1. Check that the heater connector, I/F cable to the heater, and connector of the
The temperature of all plates did not
SND board are set correctly, and check that the thermal protector reset has
become the appropriate temperature
been cleared.
(within target temperature ±1°C) even
2. Check the operations of each heater using the M-Utility.
after the specified time from the start of
Check the peripheral temperature of each heater with the hand.
initialization.
If hot, the heater is OK.
The thermistor/MCT/SND board may be faulty. Proceed to step 5.
Note:
If not hot, the heater/MCT/SND board may be faulty. Proceed to step 4.
1. Generally, as the low temperature
3. Check the operations of the heat development unit fan using the M-Utility.
error (2911) and heater disconnection
The FAN is OK if operations are normal.
0920 Initialization time timeout error (0961), etc. occur before this
The film cooling section and recording section thermistors/MCT/SND board
9-F
error, the rate of occurrence of this
may be faulty. Proceed to step 5.
error is low.
If operations are abnormal, the connector or fan is defective.
2. The target temperature (approx. 90°C
Replace the connector and heat development unit fan.
to 130°C) varies according to internal
4. Replace the heater.
conditions.
7. Replace the thermistor.
<Specified time>
100 V model: 30 minutes
8. Replace the cooling section thermistor.
9. Replace the I/F cable between the heater and SND board.
Incorrect software installation or malfunction of the MCT board.

006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-24
Code Format
The plate temperature is high.
Malfunction of the MCT board, temperature detection thermistor, heat
development unit fan, heater, or heater port of the MCT board.
1. Check if the MCT board is controlled properly according to the state LEDs,
etc. (hang up, bus error, etc.).
SND board are set correctly.
The heater/thermistor/SND board may be faulty. Proceed to step 4.
Detected that the current temperature of 4. Check the operations of each heater using the M-Utility.
0951 Overheat 2 error a heater exceeded 138°C for three times Check the peripheral temperature of each heater with the hand. 9-A
continuously (detection interval: 600ms). If not hot, the heater is OK.
The thermistor/SND board may be faulty. Proceed to step 7.
If hot, the heater/MCT/SND board may be faulty. Proceed to step 5.
9. Replace the recording section thermistor.

006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-25
Code Format
The plate temperature is low.
Disconnection of the heater, malfunction of the temperature detection thermistor,
disconnection of the heater or I/F cables between the heater and SND board,
The temperature of a heater remained reset of heater by the thermal protector, or malfunction of the heater port of the
lower than the target temperature MCT board.
even after the specified time from the 1. Check that the heater connector, I/F cable to the heater, and connector of the
start of temperature control (detection SND board are set correctly, and check that the thermal protector reset has
interval: 600ms, measured 2000 times been cleared.
continuously) and did not become the 2. Check the operations of each heater using the M-Utility.
appropriate temperature. Check the peripheral temperature of each heater with the hand.
0961 Heater disconnection error
Note: The thermistor/MCT/SND board may be faulty. Proceed to step 4.
9-A
1. The target temperature (approx. 90 If not hot, the heater/MCT/SND board may be faulty. Proceed to step 3.
°C to 130 °C) varies according to 3. Replace the heater.
internal conditions. 4. Replace the MCT board.
<Specified time> 6. Replace the SND board.
100 V model: 20 minutes 7. Replace the I/F cable between the heater and SND board.
Abnormal heat development control Incorrect software installation error, MCT board malfunction.
Heat development control
09A0 parameter value error
parameter was detected when the 1. Re-install the software. 9-H
system was started up. 2. Replace the MCT board.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MT-26
Code Format
Abnormal rise in the plate temperature.
Connector malfunction, temperature detection thermistor malfunction,
disconnection of the I/F cable between heaters or between the heater and SND
board, heater reset by the thermal protector, or malfunction of the MCT board
heater port.
SND board are correctly set, and the thermal protector reset is cleared.
The average rising temperature of the 2. Check the operations of each heater using the M-Utility.
plate remained less than 10 °C even after Check the peripheral temperature of the each heater with the hand.
5 minutes from system start-up. If hot, the heater is OK.
09B0 Cold start timeout error The thermistor/MCT/SND board may be faulty. Proceed to step 4. 9-F
Note: If not hot, the heater/MCT/SND board may be faulty. Proceed to 3.
Error which occurs when heater control 3. Replace the heater.
fails due to electric malfunctions. 4. Replace the MCT board.

1211 Upper small cover open The upper small cover is open. Close the upper small cover. 2-A-4
1212 Upper front cover open The upper front cover is open. Close the upper front cover. 2-A-4
Upper/Lower right cover The upper and/or lower right cover is

1213 open open.
Close the upper and/or lower right cover. 2-A-4
1214 Sorter right cover open The sorter right cover is open. Close the sorter right cover. 2-A-4
The upper tray was open in initialization

1225 Upper tray open error
and removal.
Close the upper tray. 2-A-1
Upper tray shutter present The shutter was inserted in the upper
1227 error tray in initialization and removal.
Remove the shutter of the upper tray. 2-A-1
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MT-27
Code Format
The lower tray was open in initialization
1229 Lower tray open error
and removal.
Close the lower tray. 2-A-2
Lower tray shutter present The shutter was inserted in the lower tray
1231 error in initialization and removal.
Remove the shutter of the lower tray. 2-A-2
Upper tray shutter Attempted to open the upper tray, but the
1233 uninserted error shutter was not inserted.
After inserting the shutter, open the upper tray. 2-A-1
Lower tray shutter Attempted to open the lower tray, but the
1235 uninserted error shutter was not inserted.
After inserting the shutter, open the lower tray. 2-A-2
Cleaning roller is not inserted.

Attempted to check whether cleaning
Or malfunction of SD3 sensor or malfunction of SD3 port of SND board.
No cleaning roller roller is present in initialization, but SD3
1252 detection error does not CLOSE.
(No cleaning roller)
Film dropped during removal.
Or malfunction of SD1 sensor or MB12 motor.
At completion of removal process, did not
1. Check if film has dropped.
Upper tray removal unit detect normal SD1 CLOSE (film leading
1291 jam error edge detection).
(Retryover)
4. If motors/sensors are normal, check the mounting position of the hose on the
solenoid valve side of the suction cup arm.
{MC:4.8_Solenoid Valve}
Lower tray removal unit detect normal SD1 CLOSE (film leading
1293 jam error edge detection).
(Retryover)
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MT-28
Code Format
Jam occurred during conveyance.
Conveyed film to the conveyor unit, but Open the upper/lower right cover, and remove the jammed film.
did not detect SD2 CLOSE (film leading 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism adjustments.
1295 Conveyor unit jam error
edge detection). SD2, MD1, MB12, MB22
2-A-4
3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board
Jam occurred during recording conveyance.
Open the upper front cover, and remove the jammed film.
Conveyed film to the sub-scanning unit,
Sub-scanning unit jam 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism adjustments.
1296 error
but did not detect SD2 OPEN (film trailing
SD2, MD1, ME1
2-A-4
edge detection).
Jam occurred during recording conveyance.
Conveyed film to the sub-scanning unit,
Sub-scanning unit jam 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism adjustments.
1297 error
but did not detect SG1 CLOSE (film
SG1, MD1, ME1
2-A-4
leading edge detection).
Jam occurred during heat development conveyance.
Conveyed film to the heat development
Heat development unit 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism adjustments.
1298 jam error
unit, but did not detect SG1 OPEN (film
SG1, ME1, MG1
2-A-4
trailing edge detection).
Jam occurred during heat development conveyance.
Conveyed film to the heat development
Heat development unit 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism adjustments.
1299 jam error
unit, but did not detect SJ1 CLOSE (film
SJ1, ME1, MG1
2-A-4
leading edge detection).
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-29
Code Format
Jam occurred during film release conveyance.
Conveyed film to the film release unit,
12A0 Film release unit jam error but did not detect SJ1 OPEN (film trailing
SJ1, MG1, MJ1
2-A-4
edge detection).
Conveyed film to the film release unit, but
12A1 Film release unit jam error did not detect SJ2 CLOSE (film leading
SJ2, MG1, MJ1
2-A-4
edge detection).
Conveyed film to the film release unit,
12A2 Film release unit jam error but did not detect SJ2 OPEN (film trailing
SJ2, MG1, MJ1
2-A-4
edge detection).
Conveyed film to the sorter unit, but did
12A3 Sorter unit jam error not detect ST1 CLOSE (film leading edge
ST1, MG1, MJ1
2-A-4
detection).
12A4 Sorter unit jam error not detect ST1 OPEN (film trailing edge
ST1, MG1, MJ1
2-A-4
detection).
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-30
Code Format
ST2, MG1, MJ1
2-A-4
detection).
ST2, MG1, MJ1
2-A-4
detection).
ST3, MG1, MJ1
2-A-4
detection).
ST3, MG1, MJ1
2-A-4
detection).
The remainder is not discharged normally from the removal unit.
Or malfunction of the SD1 sensor, or MB12 motor.
Conveyed film to the conveyor unit Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD1 ports of the SND board, or
by discharge remainder, but did not malfunction of the MB12 controller.
12A9 jam error (Discharge
detect SD1 CLOSE (film leading edge 1. Check if film has dropped.
2-A-1
remainder)
detection). 2. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism adjustments.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-31
Code Format
The remainder is not discharged normally from the removal unit.
Or malfunction of the SD1 sensor, or MB22 motor.
Conveyed film to the conveyor unit Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD1 ports of the SND board, or
by discharge remainder, but did not malfunction of the MB22 controller.
12B0 jam error (Discharge
detect SD1 CLOSE (film leading edge 1. Check if film has dropped.
2-A-2
remainder)
The remainder is not discharged normally from the conveyor unit.
Or malfunction of the SD2 sensor, or MD1, MB12, MB22 motors.
Conveyed film to the conveyor unit Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD2 port of the SND board, or
Conveyor unit jam error by discharge remainder, but did not malfunction of the MD1, MB12, MB22 controller.
12B1 (Discharge remainder) detect SD2 CLOSE (film leading edge 1. Check if film has dropped.
2-A-4
The remainder is not discharged normally from the sub-scanning unit.
Or malfunction of the SD2 sensor, or MD1, ME1 motors.
Conveyed film to the sub-scanning unit Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD2 port of the SND board, or
Sub-scanning unit jam
by discharge remainder, but did not malfunction of the MD1, ME1 controller.
12B2 error
detect SD2 OPEN (film trailing edge 1. Check if film has dropped.
2-A-4
(Discharge remainder)
The remainder is not discharged normally from the sub-scanning unit.
Or malfunction of the SG1 sensor, or MD1, ME1 motors.
Conveyed film to the sub-scanning unit Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SG1 port of the SND board, or
Sub-scanning unit jam
by discharge remainder, but did not malfunction of the MD1, ME1 controller.
12B3 error
detect SG1 CLOSE (film leading edge 1. Check if film has dropped.
2-A-4
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-32
Code Format
The remainder is not discharged normally from the heat development unit.
Or malfunction of the SG1 sensor, or ME1, MG1 motors.
Conveyed film to the heat development Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SG1 port of the SND board, or
Heat development unit
unit by discharge remainder, but did not malfunction of the ME1, MG1 controller.
12B4 jam error
detect SG1 OPEN (film trailing edge 1. Check if film has dropped.
2-A-4
The remainder is not discharged normally from the heat development unit.
Or malfunction of the SJ1 sensor, or MG1 motor.
Conveyed film to the heat development Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SJ1 port of the SND board, or
Heat development unit
unit by discharge remainder, but did not malfunction of the MG1 controller.
12B5 jam error
detect SJ1 CLOSE (film leading edge 1. Check if film has dropped.
2-A-4
The remainder is not discharged normally from the film release unit.
Or malfunction of the SJ1 sensor, or MG1, MJ1 motors.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SJ1 port of the SND board, or
Conveyed film to the film release unit by
Film release unit jam error malfunction of the MG1, MJ1 controller.
12B6 (Discharge remainder)
discharge remainder, but did not detect
2-A-4
SJ1 OPEN (film trailing edge detection).
Conveyed film to the film release unit Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SJ2 port of the SND board, or
Film release unit jam error by discharge remainder, but did not malfunction of the MG1, MJ1 controller.
12B7 (Discharge remainder) detect SJ2 CLOSE (film leading edge 1. Check if film has dropped.
2-A-4
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-33
Code Format
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SJ2 port of the SND board, or
Conveyed film to the film release unit by
Film release unit jam error malfunction of the MG1, MJ1 controller.
12B8 (Discharge remainder)
2-A-4
SJ2 OPEN (film trailing edge detection).
Malfunction of SOLT1, SOLT2, or SOLT3 solenoids
1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, solenoids, and perform mechanism
Did not output to the destination bin
12C5 Sorter malfunction
properly.
adjustments. 2-F-2
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/solenoids.
The remainder is not discharged normally from the sorter unit.
Or malfunction of the ST1 sensor, or MG1, MJ1 motors.
Or mechanism error, malfunction of the ST1 port of the SND board, or
Conveyed film to the sorter unit by
Sorter unit jam error malfunction of the MG1, MJ1 controller.
12C6 (Discharge remainder)
2-A-4
ST1 OPEN (film trailing edge detection).
2-A-4
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-34
Code Format
2-A-4
4. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board..
Reception of prohibited Internal communication timing error. No correction is required if no abnormal
2104 command
Internal I/F error
phenomenon seen in particular.
3-C
Disconnection of the F12VP sensor power fuse (F1).

Density measurement
Disconnection of SND board density 1. Using the M-Utility, perform monitoring and mechanism adjustments
2216 sensor power supply fuse
measurement sensor power fuse 2. If the problem persists, replace the fuse.
2-A-5
disconnection
Disconnection of the F12VM sensor power fuse (F3).
Density measurement
Disconnection of SND board density 1. Using the M-Utility, perform monitoring and mechanism adjustments
2217 sensor power supply fuse
measurement sensor power fuse 2. If the problem persists, replace the fuse.
2-A-5
disconnection
2-A-1
error
(Currently retrying) 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
Upper tray removal unit HP (home position) in initialization, but malfunction of the MB11 controller.
2-A-1
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-35
Code Format
2-A-2
error
Lower tray removal unit HP (home position) in initialization, but malfunction of the MB21 controller.
2-A-2
Attempted to set grip roller to HP (home Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD5 port of the SND board, or
position) in initialization, but SD5 does malfunction of the MD2 controller.
2244 Grip HP detection error
not become OPEN. 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism adjustments.
2-A-4
Attempted to set grip roller from HP
(home position) to gripping position in
2246 Grip detection error initialization, but SD5 does not become
2-A-4
CLOSE.
(Currently retrying)
stop position to release position in
2-A-4
CLOSE.
release position to stop position in
Stopper plate detection malfunction of the SOLD1.
2250 error
2-A-4
OPEN.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-36
Code Format
2-A-1
2-A-2
Upper tray film surface malfunction of the MB11 controller.
2-A-1
Lower tray film surface malfunction of the MB21 controller.
2-A-2
Upper tray film suction malfunction of the MB11 controller.
2-A-1
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-37
Code Format
Lower tray film suction malfunction of the MB21 controller.
2-A-2
2-A-1
2-A-2
Upper tray removal unit from HP (home position) after removal
2-A-1
error OPEN.
2-A-1
CLOSE.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-38
Code Format
Lower tray removal unit from HP (home position) after removal
2-A-2
error OPEN.
2-A-2
CLOSE.
Although the grip roller is in the HP (home malfunction of the MD2 controller.
2282 Grip HP absent error
position) state, but SD5 is already closed. 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism adjustments.
2-A-4
Although the grip roller is in the gripping malfunction of the MD2 controller.
2283 Grip absent error
state, but SD5 is already open. 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism adjustments.
2-A-4
Attempted to set grip roller to HP (home
2284 Grip HP detection error position) in printing, but SD5 does not
2-A-4
become OPEN.
Attempted to set grip roller from HP (home
2286 Grip detection error position) to gripping position in printing,
2-A-4
but SD5 does not become CLOSE.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-39
Code Format
Attempted to set stopper plate from stop
position to release position in printing,
2-A-4
but SD4 does not become CLOSE.
Attempted to set stopper plate from Or mechanism error, malfunction of the SD4 port of the SND board, or
Stopper plate detection release position to stop position in malfunction of the SOLD1.
2289 error printing, but SD4 does not become 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism adjustments.
2-A-4
OPEN. 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensor/solenoid.
Upper tray conveyor unit detect normal SD1 CLOSE (film leading
2290 entrance detection error edge detection).
2. Using M-Utility, check sensor, motor, and perform mechanism adjustments. 2-A-1
Lower tray conveyor unit detect normal SD1 CLOSE (film leading
2292 entrance detection error edge detection).
2. Using M-Utility, check sensor, motor, and perform mechanism adjustments. 2-A-2
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MT-39.1
Code Format
Jam occurred during conveyance.
Conveyed film to the conveyor unit, but Open the upper/lower right cover, and remove the jammed film.
did not detect SD2 CLOSE (film leading 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism adjustments.
2294 Conveyor unit jam error
edge detection). SD2, MD1, MB12, MB22
2-A-4
Attempted to perform the following items
using the M-Utility, but failed.
22B9 Incorrect operations
1. Unit operations
Be sure to perform homing first, or implement according to the M-Utility tree. 2-E-1
2. Grip operations
Upper tray barcode Barcodes reader is not connected. Or no data or cannot read data.
22C2 reading error
Cannot read the barcode.
(For hardware malfunction analysis)
2-F-1
Lower tray barcode Barcodes reader is not connected. Or no data or cannot read data.
22C3 reading error
Cannot read the barcode.
(For hardware malfunction analysis)
2-F-1
Malfunction of SOLT1, SOLT2, or SOLT3 solenoids

1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, solenoids, and perform mechanism
After sorter degeneration, film is not
22C4 Sorter malfunction
output to the destination bin.
adjustments. 2-F-2
2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/solenoids.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
DRYPIX 4000 Service Manual MT-39.1
MT-39.2
Code Format
A subscanning speed correction The thermistor in the recording section is not in stable operation.
calculation was performed based on Or the machine temperature fluctuates greatly.
Subscanning speed
22D5 correction calculation error
the film recording section temperature 1. Check the recording section thermistor. 2-F-4
before recording, but the result is out of 2. Collect the internal temperature data.
tolerance range of speed. 3. Review the correction calculation.
Conveyed film to the film release unit, A jam occurred during discharge conveyance.
but did not detect SJ1 OPEN (film trailing Open the upper front cover and remove the jammed film.
No film through release edge detection). 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism adjustments.
22D6 entrance retry Performed retry because no subsequent SJ1, MG1, MJ1
2-A-4
film is found in the heat development 2. If the problem still persists, replace sensors/motors.
unit. 3. If the problem still persists, replace the SND board.
Conveyed film to the film release unit, but A jam occurred during discharge conveyance.
did not detect SJ2/ST1/ST2/ST3 CLOSE Open upper front cover and remove the jammed film.
No film to release exit (film leading edge detection). 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism adjustments.
22D7 retry Performed retry because no subsequent SJ2/ST1/ST2/ST3, MG1, MJ1
2-A-4
Conveyed film to the film release unit, but A jam occurred during discharge conveyance.
did not detect SJ2/ST1/ST2/ST3 OPEN Open upper front cover and remove the jammed film.
No film through release (film trailing edge detection). 1. Using M-Utility, check sensors, motors, and perform mechanism adjustments.
22D8 exit retry Performed retry because no subsequent SJ2/ST1/ST2/ST3, MG1, MJ1
2-A-4
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
DRYPIX 4000 Service Manual MT-39.2
MT-40
Code Format
Leading edge detection Did not receive leading edge detection
Internal communication timing error. No correction is required if no abnormal
2310 communication reception notification which must be received in
3-C
error printing other than clean printing.
Did not receive recording completion
Recording completion Internal communication timing error. No correction is required if no abnormal
2311 notification reception error
notification which must be received in
3-C
printing other than clean printing.
Malfunction of the nonvolatile memory on the SND board or initial operations
Cannot read data from the nonvolatile
Nonvolatile memory of the SND board as a system (Immediately after manufacturing assembly or
2320 reading error
memory during start of the equipment. Or
immediately after replacing the SND board)
3-E
the read data is damaged.
1. If this occurs everytime the system is started, replace the SND board.
Nonvolatile memory Failed in writing data to the nonvolatile Malfunction of the nonvolatile memory on the SND board
2321 writing error memory. 1. Replace the SND board.
3-E

Density measurement Failed in software control sequence
2402 sequence error during density measurement.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MT-41
Code Format
The density value measured by the density measurement section is abnormal.
1. Check if the density measurement sections such as density measurement
LED, LED board, PDD board, connectors between boards, density
measurement sensor power fuse, etc. are normal.
The density value measured by the
Density measurement 2. Check if the film sensitivity is normal.
2403 data error
density measurement section is None
abnormal.
Incorrect software installation or malfunction of the SND, MCT boards.
4. Replace the LED board, PDD board, and SND board.
Density measurement Failed in creating files when writing
2404 data write error density measurement AD data.
1. Re-install the software. 4-A
No density measurement No density measurement AD data in the No density measurement data as density measurement was not performed.
2405 data DRAM of the PRT. After performing density measurement, acquire AD data.
None
1. Check if the density pattern of the film is normal.

2. Check if the film conveyance position and speed are correct.
Failed to detect starting point of the
Density measurement
density pattern from the number of
2406 starting point detection
effective AD data measured by the
Incorrect software installation or malfunction of the SND, MCT boards. None
error 3. Re-install the software.
density measurement section.
1. Check if the density pattern of the film is normal.
Failed to detect the ending point of
Density measurement
the density pattern from the number
2407 ending point detection
of effective AD data measured by the
Incorrect software installation or malfunction of the SND, MCT boards. None
error 3. Re-install the software.
density measurement section.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-42
Code Format
The number of effective AD data measured by the density measurement section
is less than the minimum number of effective data (Note).
1. Check if the density of the film is normal.
The number of effective density Incorrect software installation or malfunction of the SND, MCT boards.
Insufficient number
measurement data measured by 3. Re-install the software.
2408 of effective density
the density measurement section is 4. Replace the LED board, PDD board, and SND board.
4-B
measurement data
insufficient. 5. Replace the MCT board.
Note:
The number of effective data is 90% of the number of data logically measured.
The number of effective data required for 24-steps pattern is above 5613, that
for 17-steps pattern is above 4158, and that for QC pattern is above 1300.
Malfunction of scanner unit, PRN board, LDD board.
Check again by scanner check using the M-Utility, and perform the following for
malfunctioned parts.
Polygon error Detected polygon rotation error during 1. Check the connectors between the scanner unit, LDD board, etc. and PRN
2510 (WARNING) scanner initialization diagnosis. board, and replace as necessary.
Number of diagnosis
2. Replace the scanner unit.
3. Replace the PRN board.
4. Replace the LDD board.
Software installation error, malfunction of the MCT board.
Panel control parameter Failed in reading the panel control
270B file read error parameter file during system start.
Film is not conveyed to the correct position, malfunction of the film edge sensor
LED, malfunction of the film edge sensor, malfunction of the SND board.
1. Check the film edge sensor by sensor monitoring.
Edge sensor average The average value read by the film edge
2811 value data error sensor is abnormal (outside range).
2. Replace the film edge sensor if operations are unstable in the above. 8-B
4. If the problem still persists, check the mechanism if film conveyance is
carried out properly.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-43
Code Format
No data or cannot create file when Data file cannot be created because printing was not carried out once or there is
2812 No acquired data acquiring film edge sensor related data no data acquired from the film edge sensor. 8-C
files. After printing, acquire the file.
Failed in data write when creating film
2813 Data write failure
edge sensor related data file.
Value of the PLL initial value data Software installation error, malfunction of the HDD.
PLL initial value illegal
2814 data acquisition
received from the FMT unit during system 1. Re-install the software. 0
start was 0. 2. Replace the HDD.
Value of the PLL current value data Software installation error, malfunction of the HDD.
PLL current value illegal
2815 data acquisition
received from the FMT unit during system 1. Re-install the software. 0
start was 0. 2. Replace the HDD.
Failed in opening the file when creating
2816 File open failure
film edge sensor related data file.
Malfunction of the nonvolatile memory on the SND board or initial operations of
Film edge sensor Film edge sensor data area in the the SND board as a system
2818 nonvolatile memory area nonvolatile memory was damaged during (Immediately after manufacturing assembly or immediately after replacing the FFFF
read failure system start. SND board)
1. If this occurs everytime the system is started, replace the SND board.
Film is not conveyed to the correct position, malfunction of the film edge sensor
LED, malfunction of the film edge sensor, malfunction of the SND board.
1. Check the film edge sensor by sensor monitoring.
Film edge sensor acquired The film edge sensor read value (data)
2819 value data error was abnormal (outside range).
2. If operations are still unstable after the above, replace the film edge sensor. 8-B
4. If the problem still persists, check the mechanism if film conveyance is
carried out properly.
Film edge sensor has not returned to home position.
Film edge sensor
Value was abnormal (outside range) in Or malfunction of film edge sensor LED, film edge sensor, SND board.
acquisition value data
2820 error (Pre-reading home
the home position check before film edge 1. Check the film edge sensor by sensor monitoring. 8-B
sensor data reading. 2. If operations are still unstable after the above, replace the film edge sensor.
position check)
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-44
Code Format
The plate temperature measurement is abnormal.
Malfunction of plate temperature detection thermistor, disconnection of the I/F
cable between the thermistor and SND board.
1. Check that the connectors of the thermistor and SND board are set properly.
2. Check the temperature of each thermistor using the M-Utility.
At system start, the initial measured value
Check the temperature of each thermistor visually.
(average of four) of the temperature of a
Check if the temperature is a feasible value (about 0°C to 130°C).
Temperature heater was outside the -15°C to 150°C
2907 measurement error range approximately 5 seconds after the
The thermistor/SND may be faulty. Proceed to step 3. 9-A
setup of the TMS driver (temperature
measurement task).
5. Replace the I/F cable between the thermistor and SND board.

The plate temperature is low.
disconnection of the heater or I/F cable between the heater and SND board,
The temperature of a heater remained reset of heater by the thermal protector, or malfunction of the heater port of the
lower than the target temperature MCT board.
even after the specified time from the 1. Check that the heater connector, I/F cable to the heater, and connectors of
start of temperature control (detection the SND board are set correctly, and check that the thermal protector reset
interval: 600ms, measured 1000 times has been cleared.
continuously) and did not become the 2. Check the operations of each heater using the M-Utility.
appropriate temperature. Check the peripheral temperature of each heater with the hand.
2911 Low temperature error
Note: The thermistor/MCT/SND board may be faulty. Proceed to step 4.
9-A
1. The target temperature (approx. 90°C If not hot, the heater/MCT/SND board may be faulty. Proceed to step 3.
to 130°C) varies according to internal 3. Replace the heater.
conditions. 4. Replace the MCT board.
<Specified time> 6. Replace the SND board.
100 V model: 15 minutes 7. Replace the I/F cable between the heater and SND.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-45
Code Format
malfunction of the thermistor or thermistor port of the SND board.
Film cooling section The film cooling section thermistor has 1. Check that the thermistor connector, I/F cable to the thermistor, and
2918 thermistor disconnection disconnected (Detected temperature connector of the SND board are set correctly. 9-C
error dropped below -20°C.). 2. Replace the thermistor.
malfunction of the thermistor or thermistor port of the SND board.
Recording section The recording section thermistor has 1. Check that the thermistor connector, I/F cable to the thermistor, and
2919 thermistor disconnection disconnected (Detected temperature connector of the SND board are set correctly. 9-C
error dropped below -20°C.). 2. Replace the thermistor.
disconnection of the heater or I/F cable between the heater and SND board,
reset of heater by the thermal protector, or malfunction of the heater port of the
MCT board.
During temperature control, the 1. Check that the heater connector, I/F cable to the heater, and connectors of
temperature of a heater dropped below the SND board are set correctly, and check that the thermal protector reset
the appropriate temperature range (within has been cleared.
target temperature ±1°C), and did not 2. Check the operations of each heater using the M-Utility.
return to the appropriate temperature Check the peripheral temperature of each heater with the hand.
even after 5 minutes (detection If hot, the heater is OK.
Temperature control
2921 abnormally low error
interval 600ms, measured 500 times The thermistor/MCT/SND board may be faulty. Proceed to step 4. 9-A
continuously). If not hot, the heater/MCT/SND board may be faulty. Proceed to step 3.
Note: 4. Replace the MCT board.
1. The target temperature (approx. 90°C 5. Replace the thermistor.
to 130°C) varies according to internal 6. Replace the SND board.
conditions. 7. Replace the I/F cable between the heater and SND.

006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-46
Code Format
The plate temperature is abnormal.
Disconnection of the plate temperature detection thermistor, disconnection of
the heater or I/F cable between the heater and SND board, reset of heater by
the thermal protector, or malfunction of the heater port of the MCT board.
1. Check that the heater connector, I/F cable to the heater, and connectors of
the SND board are set correctly, and check that the thermal protector reset
has been cleared.
The temperature of all plates did not
become the appropriate temperature
(within target temperature ±1°C) even
after 20 minutes from the start of
The thermistor/MCT/SND board may be faulty. Proceed to step 5.
initialization.
If not hot, the heater/MCT/SND board may be faulty. Proceed to step 4.
Note:
Temperature control The FAN is OK if operations are normal.
2930 timeout
1. Generally, as the temperature control
The film cooling section and recording section thermistor/MCT/SND board
9-F
abnormally low error (2921) and
may be faulty. Proceed to step 5.
heater disconnection error (0961),
etc. occur before this error, the rate of
occurrence of this error is low.
conditions.
8. Replace the film cooling section thermistor.

006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-47
Code Format
Malfunction of the MCT board, heat development unit fan, temperature detection
thermistor, heater, or heater port of the MCT board.
During temperature control, the The FAN is OK if operations are normal.
temperature of a heater exceeded the The heater/thermistor/SND board may be faulty. Proceed to step 3.
appropriate temperature range (within If operations are abnormal, the connector or fan is defective.
target temperature ±1°C), and did not Replace the connector and heat development unit fan.
return to the appropriate temperature 3. Check the operations of each heater using the M-Utility.
even after 5 minutes (detection Check the peripheral temperature of each heater with the hand.
Temperature abnormally
2931 high error
interval 600ms, measured 500 times If not hot, the heater is OK. 9-A
continuously). The thermistor/SND board may be faulty. Proceed to step 6.
Note: 4. Replace the heater.
1. The target temperature (approx. 90°C 5. Replace the MCT board.
to 130°C) varies according to internal 6. Replace the thermistor.
conditions. 7. Replace the SND board.
9. Replace the I/F cable between the heater SND board.

006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-48
Code Format
During temperature control, the The FAN is OK if operations are normal.
temperature of a heater exceeded the The heater/thermistor/SND board may be faulty. Proceed to step 3.
appropriate temperature range (within If operations are abnormal, the connector or fan is defective.
target temperature ±1°C), and did not Replace the connector and heat development unit fan.
return to the appropriate temperature 3. Check the operations of each heater using the M-Utility.
even after 10 minutes (detection Check the peripheral temperature of each heater with the hand.
Temperature control
2932 abnormally high 2 error
interval 600ms, measured 1000 times If not hot, the heater is OK. 9-A
continuously). The thermistor/SND board may be faulty. Proceed to step 6.
Note: 4. Replace the heater.
1. The target temperature (approx. 90°C 5. Replace the MCT board.
to 130°C) varies according to internal 6. Replace the thermistor.
conditions. 7. Replace the SND board.

006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-49
Code Format
The temperature of a heater remained
higher than the target temperature
even after 5 minutes from the start
of temperature control (detection
interval: 600ms, measured 500 times
continuously) and did not become the
2941 Overheat 1 error
appropriate temperature.
If not hot, the heater is OK. 9-A
Note:
conditions.

006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-50
Code Format
The temperature of a heater remained
higher than the target temperature
even after 10 minutes from the start
of temperature control (detection
interval: 600ms, measured 1000 times
continuously) and did not become the
2942 Overheat 1-2 error
appropriate temperature.
If not hot, the heater is OK. 9-A
Note:
conditions.

006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-51
Code Format
The plate temperature measurement is abnormal.
Malfunction of the plate temperature detection thermistor, disconnection of the
I/F cable with the SND board.
1. Check that the connectors of the thermistor and SND board are set properly,
and if the AD converter for temperature measurement is affected by
unidentifiable noise.
2. Check the temperature of each thermistor using the M-Utility.
Check the temperature of each thermistor visually.
Temperature Difference between two continuous
Check that the measured value becomes the feasible value (about 0°C to
2971 measurement noise (Level temperature measurements
130°C) and if there is a difference of 2°C within one second.
9-A
2) (detection interval: 600 ms) > 2°C
The thermistor/SND may be faulty. Proceed to step 3.
5. Replace the I/F cable between the thermistor and SND board.

Failed in creating data file when acquiring
temperature data.
Temperature data writing Note:
2991 error As “Acquiring temperature data” is
1. Re-install the software. 9-D
a function for design and evaluation
(DPX7 PC Tool only), this error does
not occur in actual user operations.
The target temperature is abnormal or the film compensation information
parameter is abnormal, or malfunction of the barcode reader.
1. If the target temperature is abnormal, set the target temperature using the
M-Utility again.
The target temperature (individual data) 2. If the film compensation information parameter (SBC) is abnormal, enter the
Heat development control
29A0 parameter value error
or film compensation information value correct barcode. 9-H
obtained from the barcode are abnormal. 3. If the barcode reader has malfunctioned, replace the barcode reader.

006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-52
Code Format
Details: The temperature control individual data read from the EEPROM is
EEPROM temperature The temperature control individual data outside the effective range.
29A1 control individual data read from the EEPROM is outside the • EEPROM has not been initialized. 9-H
value error effective range during system start. • EEPROM malfunction
• Electric malfunction of EEPROM
Details: Compared the temperature control individual data between the FMT unit
Difference between FMT The temperature control individual data
and EEPROM and detected difference
unit temperature control differed between the FMT unit and
29A2 individual data value and EEPROM when compared during system
• EEPROM has not been initialized. 9-H
• EEPROM malfunction
value read from EEPROM start.
• Electric malfunction of EEPROM
Error caused by software bug and incorrect control timing which essentially does
3202 FPMC error (At start) FPMC motor drive failure
not occur.
2-C-1
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-53
2.3.2 Formatter
 DICOM
Error Detailed
Log Significance Remedy Detailed information
code code
Failed in starting DICOM main Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual
0001 0001 DPM Invoke fail
thread. data, reboot system, and observe conditions.
None
Save equipment individual data (requires Dicom.dat

0001 0002 Invalid Dicom.dat Invalid Dicom.dat contents
analysis).
Tag number with error
Failed in starting DICOM Save equipment individual data (requires Netinf.prm

0001 0003 DPC Invoke fail
communication main thread. analysis).
Port number
1:No file
Save equipment individual data (requires Netinf.prm
0001 0004 Invalid Netinf.prm Invalid Netinf.prm contents
analysis).
2:Non existing keyword
3:Non existing value
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual
0001 FFFF Insufficient memory Insufficient virtual memory
data, reboot system, and observe conditions.
None
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-54
 Spooler
Error Detailed
code code
Error occurred with creating Failed in creating thread. (Internal Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0002 0001 thread.%n%1 error) data, reboot system, and observe conditions. code
Error occurred with posting Failed in sending messages. Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0002 0002 message to thread.%n%1 (Internal error) data, reboot system, and observe conditions. code
Failed in securing memory. (Internal Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0002 0003 Insufficient memory.%n%1
error) data, reboot system, and observe conditions. code
Creation of PrintJob dispatch Failed in creating Print Job objects Acquire error job information ( requires xxx.job/xxx. Place of occurrence in source
0002 0004 driver failed.%n%1 in recovering unprocessed JOBs. flm analysis) code
Acquire error job information ( requires xxx.job/xxx. Place of occurrence in source
0002 0005 PrintJob file read error.%n%1 Failed in reading PrintJob files.
flm analysis). code
Failed in acquiring PrintJob and Acquire error job information ( requires xxx.job/xxx. Place of occurrence in source
0002 0007 Getting to item data failed.%n%1
FILM object data. flm analysis). code
Addition of spooler queue Acquire error job information ( requires xxx.job/xxx. Place of occurrence in source
0002 0008 failed.%n%1
Failed in registering spooler queue.
flm analysis). code
Invalid film object, or insufficient Acquire error job information ( requires xxx.job/xxx. Place of occurrence in source
0002 0009 Film Object is invalid.%n%1
data flm analysis). code
Save equipment individual data (requires log Place of occurrence in source
0002 000A Deleting raw file is failed.%n%1 Failed in deleting RAW data file.
analysis), reboot system, and observe conditions. code
0002 000B Status is invalid.%n%1 Invalid status
analysis), reboot system, and observe conditions. code, status
PrintJob dispatch pointer is Save equipment individual data (requires log Place of occurrence in source
0002 000C invalid.%n%1
Failed in accessing PrintJob.
Film Object Number is Save equipment individual data (requires log Place of occurrence in source
0002 000D invalid.%n%1
Specified Film number is invalid.
PrintJob was not found for Could not find Print Job deleted Save equipment individual data (requires log Place of occurrence in source
0002 000E Delete.%n%1 when requesting queue deletion. analysis), reboot system, and observe conditions. code
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-55
Error Detailed
code code
Specified change priority level is Save equipment individual data (requires log Place of occurrence in source
0002 0010 Change priority is invalid.%n%1
invalid. analysis), reboot system, and observe conditions. code
0002 0013 PrintID is invalid.%n%1 Requested print ID is illegal.
0002 0014 Moving File failed.%n%1 Failed in moving file.
0002 0015 Invalid Case Happen.%n%1 Unexpected case occurred.
2002 0012 File error.%n[%1] Failed in opening and creating files.
analysis). code, file name
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-56
 ImgPrc
Error Detailed
code code
Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0003 0001 System call has failed. %n[%1] Error occurred due to system call.
data, reboot system, and observe conditions. code
0003 0002 Memory allocate failed.%n[%1] Failed in acquiring memory.
Failed in creating image processing Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0003 0003 Object create failed.%n[%1]
objects. data, reboot system, and observe conditions. code
Data to be acquired was not found Save equipment individual data (requires imginf.
Place of occurrence in source
2003 0004 Data not found.%n[%1] in PrintJOB, FILM object, nor image prm analysis), acquire error job information (requires
code
processing parameter. xxx.job/xxx.flm).
Save equipment individual data (requires imginf.
2003 0005 File error.%n[%1] Failed in opening and creating files. prm analysis), acquire error job information (requires
code, file name
xxx.job/xxx.flm).
Save equipment individual data (requires imginf.
Execution of image processing Place of occurrence in source
2003 0006 Image process error.%n[%1]
resulted in error.
prm analysis), acquire error job information (requires
code
xxx.job/xxx.flm).
As the leading edge margin
Equipment individual data save (TOP_MARGIN.txt)
2003 0007 Invalid margin value.%n[%1] parameter is outside the range, use
analysis is required.
Type, outside range value
the default value.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-57
 Output
Error Detailed
code code
Output Invoke failed when Failed in starting output main Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual
0004 1EB1 Create main thread. thread. data, reboot system, and observe conditions.
None
Output Invoke failed when Failed in starting output transfer Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual
0004 1EB2 Create transmit thread. thread. data, reboot system, and observe conditions.
None
Output Invoke failed when Failed in starting output mechanical Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual
0004 1EB3 Create mct16drv thread. driver thread. data, reboot system, and observe conditions.
None
Output Invoke failed when Failed in starting output scanner Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual
0004 1EB4 Create prn16drv thread. driver thread. data, reboot system, and observe conditions.
None
Cannot Initialize device Failed in initializing mechanical Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual
0004 1EB5 mct16drv. driver. data, reboot system, and observe conditions.
None
Cannot Initialize device Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual

0004 1EB6 prn16drv.
Failed in initializing scanner driver.
None
Cannot Set event to device Failed in registering events in Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual
0004 1EB7 mct16drv. mechanical driver. data, reboot system, and observe conditions.
None
Cannot Set event to device Failed in registering events in Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual
0004 1EB8 prn16drv. scanner driver. data, reboot system, and observe conditions.
None
Response Timeout in device Command response timeout from Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual
0004 1F15 mct16drv. mechanical driver. data, reboot system, and observe conditions.
None
Response Timeout in device Command response timeout from Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual
0004 1F16 prn16drv. scanner driver. data, reboot system, and observe conditions.
None
Position in state transition table

Matrix Action failed. Invalid state transition occurred Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual (line, col)
0004 1F79 Position=(%d, %d) internally data, reboot system, and observe conditions. line : (0~6)
col : (0~37)
Unexpected results code was Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual
0004 1F7A Invalid Parameter received.
returned. data, reboot system, and observe conditions.
Results code

0004 1F7C FMT Fatal error. Level 0 error occurred in formatter.
None
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-58
Error Detailed
code code
0004 1F7D PRT Run Timeout. Start timeout of printer.
None
Timeout of command request for Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual
0004 1F7E Printer/Driver Request Timeout.
printer and driver. data, reboot system, and observe conditions.
None
No print ID for print request which

Unmatch Print ID at Print- Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual
0004 1F7F Request and Print-Reqponse.
matches print ID for print end
None
response.
Error occurred with start printer
0004 1F80 PRT Run request failed.
command.
Install the printer from the M-UTL. None
Memory Information failed at Invalid memory information when Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual
0004 1F81 Transmit request. requesting image transfer. data, reboot system, and observe conditions.
None
Could not acquire filename in image Save equipment individual data (requires log
0004 1F82 No File Name when file trans.
transfer. analysis), reboot system, and observe conditions.
None
Failed in storing automatic density Save equipment individual data (requires log
0004 1F83 Density Result File save error.
results file. analysis), reboot system, and observe conditions.
None
Density Calculate Process Density correction calculation Save equipment individual data (requires log
0004 1F84 Failed. results are abnormal. analysis), reboot system, and observe conditions.
None
Unable to continue operations due Save equipment individual data (requires log
0004 1F85 Internal Error. Detail=%s
to internal error. analysis), reboot system, and observe conditions.
None
File not Found.

0004 1F90 [%s]
File does not exist. Check if file is present None
Value set is outside specified value Save equipment individual data (requires log
0004 E201 Invalid Value.
(range). analysis), reboot system, and observe conditions.
None
Save equipment individual data (requires log

0004 E202 Invalid Command. Received unsupported command.
analysis), reboot system, and observe conditions.
Command name

0004 E203 Print-ID is not Exist Specified print ID does not exist.
None
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-59
Error Detailed
code code
Error occurred in file transfer to Save equipment individual data (requires log
0004 E204 Send File Error.
printer. analysis), reboot system, and observe conditions.
None
Error occurred in file reception from Save equipment individual data (requires log
0004 E205 Receive File Error.
printer. analysis), reboot system, and observe conditions.
None
Error occurred in file transfer Save equipment individual data (requires log
0004 E206 File Transmit sequence Error.
sequence to printer. analysis), reboot system, and observe conditions.
None
Received other commands during Save equipment individual data (requires log
0004 E207 File Transmit Error.
file transfer to printer. analysis), reboot system, and observe conditions.
None
Could not secure required volume Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual
0004 E264 Cannot Allocate memory block.
(block) for transfer memory block. data, reboot system, and observe conditions.
None
Communication error with MCT Save equipment individual data (requires log
0004 E265 MCT16A Communication error.
board. analysis), reboot system, and observe conditions.
None
Failed in Top detect when Top detection fault in scanner self- Save equipment individual data (requires log
0004 E266 scanner diagnosis diagnosis. analysis), reboot system, and observe conditions.
None
Failed in Start detect when Starting point detection fault in Save equipment individual data (requires log
0004 E267 scanner diagnosis scanner self-diagnosis. analysis), reboot system, and observe conditions.
None
Failed in Top search power Top search power setting in scanner Save equipment individual data (requires log
0004 E268 when scanner diagnosis self-diagnosis. analysis), reboot system, and observe conditions.
None

0004 E269 File I/O Error in Setting file No setting file or could not read it.
None

0004 E26A File I/O Error in Image file No image file or could not read it.
None
Did not receive temperature

Cannot Receive temperature Save equipment individual data (requires log
0004 E26B Information.
information after instructing start of
None
sub-scanning.
Did not detect top interruption after Save equipment individual data (requires log
0004 E26C Cannot Detect top interrupt.
instructing start of sub-scanning. analysis), reboot system, and observe conditions.
None
Cannot Detect complete Did not detect record completion Save equipment individual data (requires log
0004 E26D interrupt. interruption after detecting top. analysis), reboot system, and observe conditions.
None
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-60
Error Detailed
code code
0004 E26E Image Transmit timeout Image transfer timeout.
None
Command Timeout when File Command timeout occurred in file Save equipment individual data (requires log
0004 E26F transmitting. transfer to printer. analysis), reboot system, and observe conditions.
None
Hardware Error occurred during Hardware error occurred during Save equipment individual data (requires log
0004 E270 record. recording. analysis), reboot system, and observe conditions.
None
Laser could not emit as Save equipment individual data (requires log
0004 E271 expected.
Laser could not emit as expected.
None
Cannot attach print control

0004 E2C8 Cannot execute mct16drv. driver(prnmng.sys) to mecha-driver
None
(mct16drv.sys).
Cannot attach the print control
0004 E2C9 Cannot execute prn16drv. driver (prnmng.sys) to scanner
None
driver (prn16drv.sys).
Connection Failed in PRN16A Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual
0004 E2CA board.
Faulty connection of PRN board
None

0004 E2CB PRN16A Print buffer error. PRN board print buffer error
None

0004 E2CC PRN16A line memory error. PRN board line memory error
None
Connection Failed in MCT16A Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual

0004 E2CD board.
Faulty connection of MCT board
None
DPRAM error for MCT board Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual
0004 E2CE MCT16A DPRAM error
communication data, reboot system, and observe conditions.
None
Check SDRAM capacity. Cannot output film

Insufficient memory under Insufficient mounted memory (less
0004 E2CF 256MB. than 256MB)
normally. However, M-Utility operations can be None
performed.
Check SDRAM capacity. Cannot output film
Insufficient memory under Insufficient mounted memory (less
0004 E2D0 64MB. than 64 MB)
normally. However, M-Utility operations other than None
recording can be performed.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-61
Error Detailed
code code
0004 E2D1 Fuse disconnection. Disconnection of PRN board fuse Check the fuse on PRN board. None

0004 E2D2 Communication Error. PRN board communication error
None

2004 0002 PRT Log Get Error. Failed in acquiring ISC log of PRT.
None
Failed in Top detect when Failed in leading edge detection Save equipment individual data (requires log
2004 E266 scanner diagnosis when scanner self-diagnosis analysis), reboot system, and observe conditions.
None
Failed in Start detect when Failed in start point detection when Save equipment individual data (requires log
2004 E267 scanner diagnosis scanner self-diagnosis analysis), reboot system, and observe conditions.
None
Failed in Top search power Failed in leading edge search power Save equipment individual data (requires log
2004 E268 when scanner diagnosis setting when scanner diagnosis analysis), reboot system, and observe conditions.
None
Laser could not emit as Save equipment individual data (requires log
2004 E271 expected
Laser could not emit as expected
None
Ejected remaining films number

3004 0001 of sheets = %d
Number of ejected films None Number of ejected films
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-62
 GUI
Error Detailed
code code
It is logic error generating at Save equipment individual data (requires log Internal codes of current window
0005 0001 ActionForm.%n%1
[GUI] Theoretical error 1
analysis), reboot system, and observe conditions. and newly displayed window
It is logic error generating at Save equipment individual data (requires log Internal codes of current window
0005 0002 TreatForm.%n%1
[GUI] Theoretical error 2
analysis), reboot system, and observe conditions. and newly displayed window
If the problem cannot be resolved by rebooting the
Memory insufficient
0005 0003 generating.%n%1
[T2GUIFile.dll] Insufficient memory system after checking the individual data, replace Function name of DLL with error
the memory or HDD.
In this case, log cannot be collected from the PC for
servicing.
0005 0004 Parameter error.%n%1 [T2GUIFile.dll] Parameter error system after checking the individual data, replace Function name of DLL with error
the memory or HDD.
servicing.
If the problem cannot be resolved by rebooting the Function name of DLL with error
0005 0005 There is no file.%n%1 [T2GUIFile.dll] File does not exist
system, replace the HDD. File name attempting to access
servicing.
[T2GUIFile.dll] Failed in accessing If the problem cannot be resolved by rebooting the Function name of DLL with error
0005 0006 File access goes wrong.%n%1
file (reading, writing). system, replace the HDD. File name attempting to access
servicing.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MT-63
Error Detailed
code code
Save equipment individual data (requires log or
configuration file analysis), reboot system, and
observe conditions. Function name of DLL with error
The contents of description
[T2GUIFile.dll] Invalid description of If the problem cannot be resolved by rebooting File name attempting to access
0005 0007 unjust generating of a config
configuration file the system despite no illegal description in the Row number, column with illegal
file.%n%1
configuration files, replace the HDD. description
servicing.
observe conditions.
Opening of a file goes Function name of DLL with error
0005 0008 wrong.%n%1
[T2GUIFile.dll] File open error If the problem cannot be resolved by rebooting the
File name attempting to access
system, replace the HDD.
servicing.
observe conditions.
Deletion of a file goes Function name of DLL with error
0005 0009 wrong.%n%1
[T2GUIFile.dll] Deletion failure If the problem cannot be resolved by rebooting the
servicing.
observe conditions.
Function name of DLL with error
0005 000A Copy failure of a file.%n%1 [T2GUIFile.dll] Copy failure If the problem cannot be resolved by rebooting the
servicing.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MT-64
Error Detailed
code code
observe conditions.
Function name of DLL with error
0005 000B Move failure of a file.%n%1 [T2GUIFile.dll] Move failure If the problem cannot be resolved by rebooting the
servicing.
Reboot system, and observe conditions.
0005 000C Internal error.%n%1 [T2GUIFile.dll] Internal error system, replace the HDD. Function name of DLL with error
servicing.
[T2GUIFile.dll] Failed in securing
0005 000D Malloc error.%n%1
memory
system, replace the HDD. Function name of DLL with error
servicing.
Domain reservation If the problem cannot be resolved by rebooting the
[GUI] Failed in securing common
0005 000E (OpenFileMapping) of a common
memory space (OpenFileMapping)
system, replace the HDD. System error code
memory goes wrong.%n%1 In this case, log cannot be collected from the PC for
servicing.
Mapping (MapViewOfFile) of the If the problem cannot be resolved by rebooting the
[GUI] Failed in mapping common
0005 000F address of a common memory
memory address (MapViewOfFile)
system, replace the HDD. System error code
goes wrong.%n%1 In this case, log cannot be collected from the PC for
servicing.
[GUI] Illegal utlRequest command
0005 0010 utlRequest ID Error.%n%1
ID
None Command ID
[GUI] Illegal printRequest command

0005 0011 printRequest ID Error.%n%1
ID
None Command ID
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MT-65
Error Detailed
code code
[GUI] Illegal utlResponsecommand
0005 0012 utlResponse ID Error.%n%1
ID
None Command ID

The start of Beep cannot be [T2GUIBeep.ocx] Can not start
0005 0013 performed. Beep
system, replace the HDD. None
servicing.
The value of frequency is [T2GUIBeep.ocx] Abnormal or configuration file analysis). After correcting
0005 0014 unusual. frequency value configuration file, reboot system, and observe
None
conditions.
The value of time to sound is [T2GUIBeep.ocx] Abnormal beep or configuration file analysis). After correcting
0005 0015 unusual. time value configuration file, reboot system, and observe
None
conditions.
Save equipment individual data (requires analysis of
logs, various configuration files, and resource files).
A character sequence is out of [ResourceControl.ocx] Specified
0005 0016 range.%n%1 character string ID is illegal
If the problem cannot be resolved by rebooting the Character string ID
servicing.
A character was not found in the [ResourceControl.ocx] Could not
0005 0017 resource.%n%1 find character string in resource
If the problem cannot be resolved by rebooting the Character string ID
servicing.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MT-66
Error Detailed
code code
A picture sequence is out of [ResourceControl.ocx] Specified
0005 0018 range.%n%1 image ID is illegal
If the problem cannot be resolved by rebooting the Image ID
servicing.
A picture was not found in the [ResourceControl.ocx] Could not
0005 0019 resource.%n%1 find image in resource
If the problem cannot be resolved by rebooting the Image ID
servicing.
0005 001A infoNotify ID Error.%n%1 [GUI] Illegal infoNotify ID None Command ID

Error code, function name
0005 001B Program Error.%n%1 Execution error If the problem cannot be resolved by rebooting the
detecting error, error massage
servicing.
Specified measured length set
The specified measurement
0006 0001 length is inaccurate.
by the [Adjusting Subscanner] is Re-enter the measured length, and re-execute. None
illegal.
[GUI]Could not find specified job
2005 2001 job ID Error.%n%1 when notified status was other than None JobID, status
unprocessed (registered)
[GUI]Could not find job specified to
2005 2002 Delete Job Error.%n%1
be deleted
None JobID
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MT-67
Error Detailed
code code
[GUI]Cleared information on Film tray number, number of films
2005 2003 Film Count Clear.%n%1
number of films used
None
when cleared
It changed on the screen [GUI] Transitioned to screen for
Film tray number, number of
2005 2004 after the 2nd pickup jam second (onwards) continuous None
removal unit continuous jams
continuation.%n%1 removal unit jam.
It changed on the screen of the [GUI] Transitioned to screen for
2nd pickup jam continuation second (onwards) continuous
2005 2005 immediately after the bar code removal unit jam just after barcode
None Film tray number
reading error.%n%1 reading error.
The specified measurement
2006 2F01 length is inaccurate.
Specified measuring length is illegal Re-enter the measuring length, and execute again. None
Normal range is -118 to 120

Input number of start point pixels is
2006 2F02 Starting Position Length Error.
illegal
Re-enter the start point pixels, and execute again. However the inputtable range is
-120 to 120
Make Uniformity S1 Table Failed in creating Uniformity S1
2006 2F03 Failed. table
Check that E:\Param\UniSm.dat exists. None
Clear Uniformity S1 Table Failed in initializing Uniformity S1

Execute again. None
Make Uniformity S2 Table Failed in creating Uniformity S2

Check that E:\Param\UniSm.dat exists. None
Clear Uniformity S2 Table Failed in initializing Uniformity S2

Execute again. None
Film Count Clear.

Information on number of films used
3005 3001 [Tray Number ] S1
was cleared.
None Tray number, number of films
[Film number of sheets] S2
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-68
Error Detailed
code code
Reprint.
[UserID] 1111
[Date] 2003/06/23 20:55
User ID, date, print ID, AE title,
3005 3002 [PrintID] 2121 Reprinted. None
number of films, number of prints
[AETitle] AE TITLE
[FilmNum] 1
[PrintNum] 1
Login it was done.
3005 3003 [UserID] 1111 Logged in. None User ID function (reprint, QC)
[Function] Reprint
It remained by U-Utility and film
number of sheets was changed. Remaining number of films was Film tray number
3005 3004 [Tray Number] 2 changed using U-Utility.
None
Number of films
[Film number of sheets] 30
Continue was chosen as it is
“Continue” was selected in removal
3005 3005 with pickup jam.
unit jam state.
[Tray Number] 2
The reboot was chosen with
“Reboot” was selected in removal
3005 3006 pickup jam.
unit jam state.
[Tray Number] 2
The disable tray was chosen
“Disable tray” was selected in
3005 3007 with pickup jam.
removal unit jam state.
[Tray Number] 2
The clear remaining films was
“Clear remaining films” was
3005 3008 chosen with pickup jam.
selected in removal unit jam state.
[Tray Number] 2
It remaining from tray open
and film number of sheets was Cleared remaining number of films
3005 3009 cleared. in tray open state.
[Tray Number] 2
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-69
Error Detailed
code code
The continue button was pushed The CONTINUE button was
3005 3010 as it is by set film magazine. pressed with the film magazine None Film tray number
[Tray Number] 2 loaded.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-70
 JobMake
Error Detailed
code code
Error occurred with creating Failed in creating thread (internal Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0007 0001 thread.%n%1 error). data, reboot system, and observe conditions. code
Error occurred with posting Failed in sending message (internal Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0007 0002 message to thread.%n%1 error). data, reboot system, and observe conditions. code
Failed in securing memory (internal Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0007 0003 Insufficient memory.%n%1
error). data, reboot system, and observe conditions. code, request size
Error occured with file Save equipment individual data (requires log Place of occurrence in source
0007 000A access.%n%1
Failed in opening and creating files.
analysis), reboot system, and observe conditions. code, file name
0007 000B Status is invalid.%n%1 Invalid status
analysis), reboot system, and observe conditions. code, status
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-71
 Main
Error Detailed
code code
Failed in securing area for Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0008 0001 Shared memory not allocated.
communication processing. data, reboot system, and observe conditions. code
The mounting memory does not
Mounted memory does not satisfy Place of occurrence in source
0008 0002 fulfill the operation conditions of
operating conditions of the system.
Check SDRAM capacity.
code
a system.
The inaccurate parameter was Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0008 0003 specified.
Invalid parameter was specified.
Calling 'PortOpen' method Failed in DICOM control execution Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0008 0004 failed.%n%1 start request. data, reboot system, and observe conditions. code
Calling 'PortClose' method Failed in communication end Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0008 0005 failed.%n%1 request to DICOM control. data, reboot system, and observe conditions. code
0008 0006 Calling GUI method failed.%n%1 Failed in calling GUI method.
Calling 'OnEndPrint' method Failed in JOB completion Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0008 0007 failed.%n%1 communication processing. data, reboot system, and observe conditions. code
Calling 'AnsOnPrintRequest' Failed in calling the print request Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0008 0008 method failed.%n%1 method. data, reboot system, and observe conditions. code
Calling 'Initialize' method Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0008 0009 failed.%n%1
Failed in image initializing request.
Calling 'ExeImageProcess' Failed in calling image processing Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0008 000A method failed.%n%1 request method. data, reboot system, and observe conditions. code
Calling 'ReLoadLut' method Failed in re-reading instruction of Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0008 000B failed.%n%1 density correction table. data, reboot system, and observe conditions. code
Failed in calling JOB generation
Calling 'MakeTestPattern' Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0008 000C method failed.%n%1
request (SMPTE/execution)
method.
Failed in calling JOB generation
Calling 'MakeScanerPattern' Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0008 000D method failed.%n%1
request (scanner diagnosis)
method.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-72
Error Detailed
code code
Calling 'MakeBetaPattern' Failed in calling JOB generation Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0008 000E method failed.%n%1 request (flat pattern) method. data, reboot system, and observe conditions. code
Calling 'MakeCleaning' method Failed in calling JOB generation Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0008 000F failed.%n%1 request (cleaning) method. data, reboot system, and observe conditions. code
Calling 'AnsSetPrintPriority' Failed in calling JOB priority order Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0008 0010 method failed.%n%1 change completion method. data, reboot system, and observe conditions. code
Calling 'RunRequest' method Failed in initializing output control Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0008 0011 failed.%n%1 unit. data, reboot system, and observe conditions. code
Calling 'UTLRequest' method Failed in calling utility request Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0008 0012 failed.%n%1 method. data, reboot system, and observe conditions. code
Calling 'PowerSaveRequest' Failed in calling energy-saving Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0008 0013 method failed.%n%1 instruction method. data, reboot system, and observe conditions. code
Calling 'PrintRequest' method Failed in calling print request Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
Calling 'TransmitRequest' Failed in calling transfer request Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0008 0015 method failed.%n%1 method. data, reboot system, and observe conditions. code
Calling 'PowerOffRequest' Failed in calling output control end Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0008 0016 method failed.%n%1 instruction method. data, reboot system, and observe conditions. code
Calling 'NextPrintAvailable' Failed in calling removal permission Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0008 0017 method failed.%n%1 notification method. data, reboot system, and observe conditions. code
Calling 'EndPrc' method Failed in calling end request Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
Calling 'PC-UTL' method Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0008 0019 failed.%n%1
Failed in calling PC-Utility method.
Calling 'SetImgPrcEndStatus' Failed in calling image processing Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0008 001A method failed.%n%1 completion setting request method. data, reboot system, and observe conditions. code
Calling 'GetPickupPrcJOB' Failed in calling removal process Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0008 001B method failed.%n%1 JOB acquisition request method. data, reboot system, and observe conditions. code
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-73
Error Detailed
code code
Calling 'GetImgPrcJOB' method Failed in calling image processing Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0008 001C failed.%n%1 JOB acquisition request method. data, reboot system, and observe conditions. code
Calling 'GetRawDataJOB' Failed in calling RAW data transfer Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0008 001D method failed.%n%1 JOB acquisition request method. data, reboot system, and observe conditions. code
Calling 'trayNotify' method Failed in calling tray information Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0008 001E failed.%n%1 renewal notification method. data, reboot system, and observe conditions. code
Calling 'SetFilmPrintEndStatus' Failed in calling output processing Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0008 001F method failed.%n%1 completion notification method. data, reboot system, and observe conditions. code
Calling 'Run' method Failed in spooler control execution Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0008 0020 failed.%n%1 start request. data, reboot system, and observe conditions. code
Calling 'SetRawDataEndStatus' Failed in spooler control transfer Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0008 0021 method failed.%n%1 completion notification. data, reboot system, and observe conditions. code
Calling 'DoSpool' method Failed in calling JOB spool request Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
Calling 'RestorPrintJOB' method Failed in calling unprocessed JOB Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0008 0023 failed.%n%1 recovery request method. data, reboot system, and observe conditions. code
Calling 'SetJOBPriority' method Failed in calling JOB priority order Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0008 0024 failed.%n%1 change request method. data, reboot system, and observe conditions. code
Calling 'DeleteJOB' method Failed in calling deletion request Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
Calling 'initializeRequest' Failed in calling initialization method Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0008 0026 method failed.%n%1 of output control data, reboot system, and observe conditions. code
Calling 'AnsDeleteQueue' Failed in calling Queue deletion Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0008 0027 method failed.%n%1 request results notification method data, reboot system, and observe conditions. code
Calling 'OnStartPrint' method Failed in calling JOB start Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0008 0028 failed.%n%1 notification method data, reboot system, and observe conditions. code
Calling 'AnsOnPrintPrepare' Failed in calling preprint response Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0008 0029 method failed. notification method data, reboot system, and observe conditions. code
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-74
Error Detailed
code code
Calling 'AnsPrinterInfo' method Failed in calling printer information Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0008 002A failed.%n%1 request response method data, reboot system, and observe conditions. code
Calling 'SetImgRcvEndStatus' Failed in calling image reception Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0008 002B method failed.%n%1 completion notification method data, reboot system, and observe conditions. code
Calling 'MakeSystemInfo' Failed in calling system information Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0008 002C method failed.%n%1 printing method data, reboot system, and observe conditions. code
Utility-Mode is Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0008 002D unexpected.%n%1
Request in unexpected mode
Calling 'ReLoadUniformityTbl' Failed in calling uniformity table re- Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0008 002E method failed.%n%1 reading method data, reboot system, and observe conditions. code
Calling 'SetCalibMode' method Failed in calling printer image Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0008 002F failed.%n%1 correction mode setting method data, reboot system, and observe conditions. code
Calling 'TrayStatusChanged' Failed in calling tray state change Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0008 0030 method failed.%n%1 notification method. data, reboot system, and observe conditions. code
Calling 'DeleteAllJOB' method Failed in calling delete all JOB Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0008 0031 failed.%n%1 request method. data, reboot system, and observe conditions. code
Calling 'JobCheckRequest' Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0008 0038 method failed.
Failed in reprint verification request.
Calling 'DoReprint' method Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0008 0039 failed.
Failed in reprint spool request.
Calling 'MakeQCPattern' method Failed in calling QC test pattern Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0008 003A failed. output method. data, reboot system, and observe conditions. code
Calling 'PrintStatusChange' Failed in calling printer state change Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0008 003B mehtod failed. notification method. data, reboot system, and observe conditions. code
2008 003C USB installation error USB installation: USB related error Check MAIN error log
code
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-75
Error Detailed
code code
The path and drive of USB do USB installation: Path or USB drive Place of occurrence in source
2008 003D not exist. does not exist
Check USB connection, and USB drive setup file.
code
USB installation: Insufficient USB Place of occurrence in source
2008 003E USB capacity is insufficient.
capacity
Check USB capacity.
code
USB installation: Insufficient HD Place of occurrence in source
2008 003F HD capacity is insufficient.
capacity
Check HD capacity.
code
There is no candidate for a USB USB installation: No USB load Check USB details. Place of occurrence in source
2008 0041 load. object Cannot acknowledge that it is for installer. code
There is no candidate for USB USB installationn: No USB save Place of occurrence in source
2008 0042 save. object
Check system state.
code
System peculiar information Equipment information: USB related Place of occurrence in source
2008 013C USB error error
Check MAIN error log.
code
The path and drive of USB do Equipment information: Path or Place of occurrence in source
2008 013D not exist. USB drive does not exist
code
Equipment information: Insufficient Place of occurrence in source
USB capacity when saving
Check/add USB capacity.
code
Equipment information: Insufficient Place of occurrence in source
HD capacity
Check HD capacity.
code
There is no candidate for a USB Equipment information: No USB Place of occurrence in source
2008 0141 load. load object
Check USB details.
code
There is no candidate for USB Equipment information: No USB Place of occurrence in source
2008 0142 save. save object
Check system state.
code
USB analysis log information Analysis log information: USB Place of occurrence in source
2008 023C error related error
Check MAIN error log.
code
The path and drive of USB do Analysis log information: Path or Place of occurrence in source
2008 023D not exist. USB drive does not exist
code
There is no candidate for a USB Analysis log information: Insufficient Place of occurrence in source
2008 023E load. USB capacity when saving
code
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-76
Error Detailed
code code
There is no candidate for USB Analysis log information: No USB Place of occurrence in source
2008 0242 save. save object
Check system state.
code
2008 033C USB reprint picture error Reprint image: USB related error Check MAIN error log.
code
The path and drive of USB do Reprint image: Path or USB drive Place of occurrence in source
2008 033D not exist. does not exist
code
Reprint image: Insufficient USB Place of occurrence in source
capacity when saving
code
Reprint image: Insufficient HD Place of occurrence in source
capacity
Check HD capacity.
code
With no specification reprint ID Reprint image: No image of Place of occurrence in source
2008 0340 picture specified print ID
Recheck reprint ID and implement again.
code
There is no candidate for a USB Place of occurrence in source
2008 0341 load.
Reprint image: No USB load object Check USB details.
code
There is no candidate for USB Place of occurrence in source
2008 0342 save.
Reprint image: No USB save object Check system state.
code
Number of films in each tray after
3008 0032 The film was set. Film has been loaded. None
loading
The number of films was Number of films in each tray after
3008 0033 changed.
Number of films has been changed. None
changing
3008 0034 The tray was opened. Tray has been opened. None Tray number which was opened.
3008 0035 The tray was closed. Tray has been closed. None Tray number which was closed.
Solenoid number which was

3008 0036 The solenoid was ON. Solenoid has been turned ON. None
turned ON.
3008 0037 The solenoid was OFF. Solenoid has been turned OFF. None None
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-77
 Decode
Error Detailed
code code
Error occurred with creating Failed in starting decode main Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual
0009 0001 thread.%n[%1] threading data, reboot system, and observe conditions.
None
Error occurred with posting Failed in sending messages Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0009 0002 message to thread.%n[%1] (internal error) data, reboot system, and observe conditions. code
Failed in securing memory (internal Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0009 0003 Insufficient memory.%n[%1]
error) data, reboot system, and observe conditions. code
0009 0004 Status is invalid.%n[%1] Own status is illegal
Error occured with file Save equipment individual data (requires log Place of occurrence in source
0009 0005 access.%n[%1]
Failed in opening and creating files
analysis), reboot system, and observe conditions. code, file name
Error occured with create Check SDRAM capacity, save equipment individual Place of occurrence in source
0009 0006 object.%n[%1]
Failed in creating COM objects
Invalid barcode from film Detected illegal barcodes (film
2009 000B pack.%n[%1] pack)
None Detected barcode
Invalid barcode from Detected illegal barcodes (GUI

2009 000C GUI.%n[%1] input)
Loaded with film pack with base

2009 0010 BaseColor unmatched.%n[%1]
whose color differs from setting.
None Tray number
Can't read barcode from film

2009 0011 pack
Failed in reading barcode None Detected barcode
Error occurred with decode from Failed in interpreting barcode (Film

2009 0012 film pack.%n[%1] pack)
Error occurred with decode from Failed in interpreting barcode (GUI

2009 0013 GUI.%n[%1] input)
The duplicate error of the bar

2009 0014 cord from film pack.%n[%1]
Barcode duplicate error (Film pack) None Detected barcode
The duplicate error of the bar

2009 0015 cord from GUI.%n[%1]
Barcode duplicate error (GUI input) None Detected barcode
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-78
Error Detailed
code code
2009 0016 Adjust process failed.%n%1 Barcode duplicate error (GUI input) None Detected barcode
As the film compensation

Since it has not fitted in 0-4 after
information was not within 0 to 4
2009 0019 rectifying Film Characteristic, a
after compensation, clip processing
value is corrected.
was performed.
Can't read barcode from film Failed in reading barcodes, but
3009 000D pack, but reuse previous using results of previous reading None Previously read barcode
barcode.%n[%1] because of one-time error
OK barcode from film Detected normal barcode (film
3009 000E pack.%n[%1] pack)
Detected normal barcode (GUI

3009 000F OK barcode from GUI.%n[%1]
input)
Film Characteristic after a bar Film compensation information

3009 0017 code decipherment.%n[%1] value after barcode interpretation.
Film Characteristic after Film compensation information

3009 0018 compensation.%n[%1] value after compensation.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-79
 PCUTL
Error Detailed
code code
Check LAN cable and HUB connection, reboot the
200A 0001 FTPTransfer failed.%n%1 Failed in FTP data transfer
equipment, and observe conditions.
Name of file which failed transfer
Check LAN cable and HUB connection, check the

200A 0002 FTPOpen failed.%n%1 FTP port does not open path and user of the FTP directory of the PC for None
servicing, and observe conditions.
Searched for corresponding file but
200A 0003 File not found.%n%1
did not exist
Reinstall or add the corresponding file again. Name of file which failed search
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-80
 Satellite
Error Detailed
code code
Check LAN cable and HUB connection, reboot the
200B 0001 FTPTransfer failed.%n%1 Failed in FTP data transfer
equipment, and observe conditions.
Name of file which failed transfer
Check LAN cable and HUB connection, check the

200B 0002 FTPOpen failed.%n%1 FTP port does not open path and user of the FTP directory of the PC for None
servicing, and observe conditions.
Searched for corresponding file but
200B 0003 File not found.%n%1
did not exist
Reinstall or add the corresponding file again. Name of file which failed search
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MT-81
3. ABNORMAL IMAGES
3.1 Troubleshooting from Abnormal Images

No. Name Abnormal image sample Characteristics Error Part/Object Cause Remedy
1 Unevenness 1.5 mm Sharp unevenness at some Defects such as marks at There are defects such as Replace sub-scanning unit.
from leading edge parts along width center guide of sub-scan- marks (projections) on the slit
ning unit of the center guide at the heat
Location of occurrence development unit side, and the
: 1.5 mm from leading film leading edge gets caught
edge by these and causes uneven-
Darkness difference ness.
: Black
Shape : Horizontal streak
Width : Approx. 0.3 mm
2 Unevenness 2.5 mm • Sharp unevenness • Sub-scanning unit center Occurs due to contact of film Replace and check film
from leading edge • Occurs over whole width when guide leading edge to the chamfered (to determine if film is the
level is poor • Film curl (lower curl) portion of the slit of the center cause).
• If level is good, occurs at some guide at the heat development • Polish the tip of the cham-
parts along width (Location of unit side. fered portion of the slit of
occurrence differs individually) the center guide at the heat
development unit side us-
Location of occurrence ing a #2000 water-resistant
: 2.5 mm from leading paper and check.
edge • If it still occurs, replace the
Darkness difference sub-scanning unit (the heat
: Black development unit side may
Shape : Horizontal streak be higher than a certain
Width : Approx. 0.3 mm height due to the heights
of the surrounding center
guides).
3 Unevenness 18 mm • Area extending from leading • Film curl (upper curl) If the film is curled, becomes Replace and check film
from leading edge edge to 18 to 22 mm point ap- • Sub-scanning unit center black because recorded with (to determine if film is the
pears dark guide the film leading edge in the cause).
• If level is good, horizontal floating state until it bites into • If it still occurs after re-
streaks appear at 21 to 22 mm the subscanning unit roller of placement, replace the
point from leading edge the heat development unit side. sub-scanning unit (the heat
(Conspicuous if upper curl is development unit side may
Location of occurrence large) be lower than a certain
: 18 to 22 mm from height due to the heights
leading edge of the surrounding center
Darkness difference guides).
: Black
Shape : Horizontal band
Width : Inconsistent
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MT-82
4 Unevenness 24 mm Slightly blurry unevenness Sub-scanning unit center As the location of occurrence Clean the center guide sur-
from leading edge guide is equivalent to the curved por- face (wipe with ethanol).
Unevenness 25 mm Location of occurrence tion of the heat development • If it still occurs
from leading edge : 24 to 27 mm from unit side guide, this portion Replace the sub-scanning
Unevenness 27 mm leading edge may be dirty or defective. unit.
from leading edge Darkness difference
: White
Width : Approx. 1 mm
5 Random unevenness • Sharp unevenness Sub-scanning unit entrance Occurs due to transmission Replace the sub-scanning
at leading edge • Occurs one in every several side (conveyor side) roller of some kind of vibration to unit entrance side roller.
pages in continuous printing, failure the film at the conveyor side
and randomly in the area from from the recording side. As
leading edge to 27mm point the source of this vibration is
from leading edge the roller, unevenness should
occur with every one rotation
Location of occurrence of the roller, however because
: Randomly in the film is conveyed using only
range from leading one roller in the area from the
edge to 27 mm point leading edge to the 27 mm
from leading edge point from the leading edge,
Darkness difference unevenness is emphasized.
: Black As unevenness improves
Shape : Horizontal streak when two rollers are used for
Width : Approx. 0.5 mm conveyance, unevenness be-
comes less conspicuous, and it
appears as if the unevenness
occurs randomly at the leading
edge.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MT-83
6 Random unevenness • Sharp unevenness Foreign particles on sub- When there are foreign par- Remove the foreign particles
at leading edge and • Occurs one in every several scanning unit pressure roller ticles on the sub-scanning on the roller.
trailing edge pages in continuous printing, unit roller, unevenness occurs
and randomly in the area from because vibration is transmit-
leading edge to 27mm point ted to the film. Although un-
and 27 mm to 6.5 mm point evenness does occur even
from trailing edge for every one rotation of the
roller, however because film
Location of occurrence is conveyed using only one
: Randomly in the area roller during sub-scanning in
from leading edge the area from the leading edge
to 27 mm point from to the 27 mm point from the
leading edge and 27 leading edge and the 27 mm
mm to 6.5 mm point point from the trailing edge to
from trailing edge the training edge, unevenness
Darkness difference is emphasized. As unevenness
: Black improves when two rollers are
Shape : Horizontal streak used for conveyance, uneven-
Width : Approx. 0.5 mm ness becomes less conspicu-
ous, and it appears as if the
unevenness occurs randomly
at the area of leading edge and
trailing edge.
7 25 mm pitch uneven- • 25 mm pitch sharp uneven- Foreign particles on sub- Same as No. 6 Remove the foreign particles
ness ness scanning unit pressure roller As unevenness level is worse on the roller.
• Does not occur after 6.5 mm than No. 6, can be taken as
point from trailing edge pitch unevenness.
Location of occurrence
: Whole surface exclud-
ing after 6.5mm point
from trailing edge
Darkness difference
: Black
Shape : Horizontal pitch
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MT-84
8 Unevenness 32 mm Slightly blurry unevenness Sub-scanning unit center If center guide surface is dirty, Clean center guide surface.
from leading edge guide surface is dirty conveyance load increases, (wipe with ethanol)
Location of occurrence and unevenness occurs.
: 32 mm from leading
edge * When the film leading edge
Darkness difference reaches the curved portion
: White of the heat development unit
Shape : Horizontal streak entrance guide, conveyance
Width : Approx. 1 mm resistance becomes maxi-
mum. However, when the
center guide and film move-
ment is not smooth, this
resistance increases, move-
ment at the time of release
when this curved portion is
passed becomes large, and
unevenness occurs.
9 Unevenness 155 mm • Sharp unevenness but occur- Foreign particles on heat When foreign particles ad- Clean heat development unit
from leading edge ring at fine pitch development unit en- here to the heat development entrance guide.
• Occurs in all output films with- trance guide (363N2625/ entrance guide (363N2625/
out level difference 363N2626) 363N2626) and the film leading
edge is pushed into the heat
Location of occurrence development unit along this
: 155 mm from leading guide, the film is caught by the
edge foreign particles, resulting in
Darkness difference unevenness.
: Black/white
10 Leading edge white • White spots occur concentrat- Considerable dusts (Inside Considerable dusts inside the Clean the sub-scanning unit.
spots edly sub-scanning unit) sub-scanning unit, especially
• Individual white spots com- adhered to the entrance side
pletely transparent roller and the pressure roller,
etc., and unevenness occurs
Location of occurrence when these dusts are tran-
: Undeterminable scribed onto the film.
Darkness difference
: White
Shape : Spots
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MT-85
11 Unevenness 27 mm Slightly blurry unevenness • Sub-scanning unit center • Center guide and roller clear- As the cause is difficult to
from trailing edge guide ance differentiate in relation to the
Location of occurrence • Sub-scanning unit rubber • Sub-scanning unit rubber belt unevenness in the next item,
: 27 mm from trailing belt defect implement the solution for
edge the next item, and if there are
Darkness difference no improvements, replace
: Black the sub-scanning unit.
Width : Approx. 1 mm
12 Trailing edge slip un- Prominent unevenness • Sub-scanning unit exit • The drive load increases due • Replace the roller.
evenness side (Heat development to bearing defect, etc. of sub- • Degrease the rubber belt
Location of occurrence unit side) roller scanning unit exit side roller, and the rubber belt attach-
: 27 mm from trailing • Oil adhered to rubber belt and when the film trailing ing portion of the pulley.
edge and sub-scanning unit pul- edge passes the entrance
Darkness difference ley side roller, the roller rotation
: Black becomes considerably slow,
Shape : Horizontal band/hori- resulting in unevenness.
zontal streak • When oil adheres to the (two)
Width : Approx. 1 to 27 mm sub-scanning unit pulley and
rubber belt, at the time the
film trailing edge passes the
entrance roller, the rubber
belt and pulley slip, the exit
side roller rotation becomes
considerably slow, resulting
in unevenness.
13 Unevenness 6.5 mm • Sharp unevenness • Film curl (Upper curl) When the film is curling up, Replace and check the film
from trailing edge • Occurs on left or right sides • Sub-scanning unit pres- occurs because the film trailing (to determine if film is the
along the width (looking at sure roller edge moves up when it passes cause).
the image format, the side • Center guide the roller.
with this unevenness is slow),
occurs on the whole output im-
age
: 6.5 mm from trailing
edge
Darkness difference
: Black
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MT-86
14 Trailing edge random • Sharp unevenness • Foreign particles on sub- • Same as No. 6/No. 7 • Remove foreign particles
unevenness • Occurs one in every several scanning unit pressure • Defect of bearing of sub- on the pressure roller.
pages in continuous output, roller scanning unit exist side roller, • Replace the roller on the
and randomly in the area from • Sub-scanning unit exit and at times, vibration that sub-scanning unit exit.
the 27mm point from trailing side (heat development resembles clicking can occur.
edge onwards unit side) roller bearing is This affects the recording,
defective resulting in the unevenness.
Location of occurrence If this is the case, uneven-
: Randomly from the 27 ness will also occur from the
mm point from trailing 6.5 mm point from the trailing
edge onwards edge onwards, thus differ-
Darkness difference entiating it from unevenness
: Black caused by adherence of for-
Shape : Horizontal streak eign particles to the roller.
15 Unevenness 115 mm Sharp unevenness Sliding roller of conveyor Occurs when rotation of the Replace the conveyor exit
from trailing edge exit conveyance roller conveyor exit conveyance assembly.
Location of occurrence roller becomes bad.
: 115 mm point from
trailing edge onwards
Darkness difference
: Black
16 Unevenness 315 to Sharp unevenness Guide plate between upper Occurs when film trailing edge Replace guide plate between
330 mm point from conveyor zig-zag rollers contacts guide plate between upper conveyor zig-zag roll-
trailing edge Location of occurrence upper conveyor zig-zag rollers. ers.
: 315 to 330 mm point
from trailing edge
Darkness difference
: Black
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MT-87
17 0.1 mm pitch uneven- • Unevenness occurs on the • Sub-scanning motor • Sub-scanning motor defect • Replace sub-scanning mo-
ness whole film at the pitch shown • Sub-scanning pulley • Sub-scanning pulley defect tor.
0.8 mm pitch uneven- on the left • Replace sub-scanning pul-
ness • Level changes according to ley.
2.0 mm pitch uneven- output image
ness
3.8 mm pitch uneven- Location of occurrence
ness : Whole surface
8.5 mm pitch uneven- Darkness difference
ness : Black
Width : Approx. 0.1 to 0.5 mm
18 0.25 mm pitch uneven- Unevenness of 0.25 mm pitch Sub-scanning motor driver Sub-scanning motor driver de- Replace sub-scanning motor
ness occurs on the whole film fect driver.
: Whole surface
Darkness difference
: Black
19 0.6 mm pitch uneven- Unevenness of 0.6 mm pitch oc- Optical unit polygon Scratches on reflective surface Replace optical unit.
ness curs on the whole film of polygon
: Whole surface
Darkness difference
: Black
20 11 mm pitch uneven- Unevenness of 11 mm pitch oc- Sub-scanning unit exit side Sub-scanning unit exit side Replace sub-scanning unit
ness curs on the whole film (changes (Heat development unit roller bearing defect exit side roller.
(15 mm pitch uneven- to 15 mm pitch in some cases) side) roller
ness) * 11 mm or 15 mm pitch is
Location of occurrence equivalent to one rotation of
: Whole surface left or right bearings.
Darkness difference
: Black
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MT-88
21 30 mm pitch uneven- Unevenness of 30 mm pitch oc- Sub-scanning unit drive unit Sub-scanning unit drive con- Replace sub-scanning unit
ness curs on the whole film (824Y0117) veyance shaft rotation defect drive transmission shaft
bearing.
: Whole surface
Darkness difference
: Black
22 35 mm pitch uneven- Unevenness of 35 mm pitch oc- Heat development convey- Heat development conveyance • Clean inside heater rack.
ness curs on the whole film ance roller roller rotation defect • Replace bearing.
(322NF005)
: Whole surface
Darkness difference
: Black
23 36 mm pitch uneven- Unevenness of 36 mm pitch oc- Sub-scanning unit rubber Foreign particles on sub-scan- Clean sub-scanning unit rub-
ness curs on the whole film belt ning unit rubber belt ber belt.
: Whole surface
Darkness difference
: Black
24 56 mm pitch uneven- Unevenness of 56 mm pitch oc- Conveyance exit unit drive Drive gear of conveyance exit Adjust gear engagement.
ness curs on the whole film gear engaged too tightly.
: Whole surface
Darkness difference
: Black
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MT-89
25 Spot sensitization un- • Dark black spots Foreign particles (Dusts) Occurs due to recording with Check the pitch, and clear
evenness • When magnified, most have holes punched in the film sur- the roller of the diameter
no centers (when seen under face by hard foreign particles. suspected to be dirty (side
reflected light, some seem to coated with emulsifier)
have scratches in the middle)
• Some occur only once with- * No corrections are required
out regularity, and some recur if it occurs only once.
frequently at a certain pitch
• When recorded with foreign
particles adhered to the film,
they occur only once and do
not recur
• If foreign particles adhere to
the roller before recording, un-
evenness occurs at the pitch
of one rotation of the roller
: Undeterminable
Darkness difference
: Black
Shape : Spot
26 Pitch unevenness • Horizontal lines with fine pitch Foreign particles (Dusts) • When recorded with foreign Remove foreign particles if it
within the limits of 63 occur in the area extending particles between the film recurs.
mm from leading edge from leading edge to 63 mm surface and center guide (Determine the location from
(Pitch unevenness in point or in a round area (normally attached to film sur- the scratch position)
round area) • Size of round area or pitch face), only the areas around
may differ the foreign particles will float, * No corrections are required
• In most cases, black spots can and because the foreign if it occurs only once.
be seen at the center of the particles are dragged, this
round area causes unevenness.
• In some cases, there are also Black spots are seen at the
scratches on the film which center of the round area due
look like dirt towards the trail- to the foreign particles, and
ing edge from the center of the because the foreign particles
round area are dragged, they leave
marks on the film most of
Location of occurrence the time (lines from center of
: Undeterminable round area to trailing edge).
Darkness difference • The greater the size of the
: Black/white foreign particles, the larger
Shape : Horizontal pitch will the round area be, and
Width : Approx. 0.3 mm the larger will the pitch be.
• When the location of occur-
rence is near the trailing edge
along the width, the round
area may not be visible.
Check the black spots at the
center and marks on the film
to determine the cause.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MT-90
27 Pitch unevenness Unevenness occurs in the area Foreign particles on upper Foreign particles on the zig- Clean the zig-zag roller.
within the limits of 100 extending from leading edge to conveyor zig-zag roller zag roller cause unevenness.
mm from leading edge 100 mm point on 35x43 size film
: Undeterminable
Darkness difference
: Black/white
28 White vertical uneven- Blurry unevenness Dusts inside scanner Occurs due to dusts on the Replace the scanner.
ness scanner mirror, lens, etc.
Black vertical uneven- Location of occurrence
ness : Undeterminable
Darkness difference
: Black/white
Shape : Vertical streak
29 Black vertical streak • Slightly thin line of about 10 Due to film Some cause in the film. Replace the film.
mm in length, occurs once in
every few sheets.
• Occurs only once (does not
occur from leading edge to
trailing edge)
: Undeterminable
Darkness difference
: Black
Shape : Vertical streak
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MT-91
30 White diagonal uneven- • Very blurry unevenness Due to film Some cause in the film. Replace the film.
ness • When several continuous
sheets are laid out together,
the streaks on each sheet join
to form one line
: Undeterminable
Darkness difference
: white
Shape : Diagonal streak
31 Random horizontal un- Unevenness of very strong pitch • Due to vibration from • If vibration is caused by No corrections required.
evenness (Unevenness ground construction work in the area
caused by external Location of occurrence • Due to impact on equip- around the place of instal-
vibration) : Undeterminable ment lation, this unevenness is
Darkness difference caused by the effects of this
: Black/white vibration.
Shape : Horizontal pitch • This unevenness can also be
caused when the equipment
is subject to shock when hit
or due to collision.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MT-92
3.2 Scratches and Streaks Caused by Guide 3.2.2 Scratches on Face Applied with Emulsion
Plate The following figure shows guide plates in the equipment which may cause scratches
on the film face applied with emulsion.
The guide plate can caused scratches and streaks on film. Determine the guide causing the scratch from the position of the scratch referring to
If these occur, measure the distance from the film conveyance reference face (towards the image samples provided from the next page onwards and check if that guide plate
the front of the equipment), and locate the guide plate causing the defect. is defective.
3.2.1 Checking Film

Refer to the following diagram, and check the state of scratches occurring on film to
determine the guide plate causing the problem.
Problem Film Cross Section Remarks
White streaks on sur- Scratch are thought to

face applied with emul- have occurred prior to
sion exposure.
Black streaks on sur- Scratch are thought to

face applied with emul- have occurred after ex-
sion posure.
If scratches reach the
Em layer, black streaks
results even before ex-
posure.
(Very clear black streaks)
Scratches on base
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MT-93
■ Scratch directly after Removal Unit Exit (363N2659) ■ Scratch at Middle Conveyor (363N2661)
{SP:05D_CONVEYOR UNIT 4} {SP:05D_CONVEYOR UNIT 4}
■ Scratch at Lower Conveyor (363N2669) ■ Scratch at Upper Conveyor Front Half (363N2628)
{SP:05D_CONVEYOR UNIT 4} {SP:05B_CONVEYOR UNIT 2}
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MT-94
■ Scratch at Upper Conveyor Turn (363N2638) ■ Scratch at Conveyor Exit Metal Roller (334N1187)
{SP:05C_CONVEYOR UNIT 3} {SP:05A_CONVEYOR UNIT 1}
Cannot determine position of occurrence.
■ Scratch at Upper Conveyor Turn (363N2639)

{SP:05B_CONVEYOR UNIT 2} ■ Scratch at Heat Development Unit Entrance (363N2625)
{SP:08A_HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 1}
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MT-95
■ Scratch at Film Release Unit Entrance (363N2647) ■ Scratch at Film Release Unit/Sorter Turn (363N2657)
{SP:09B_FILM RELEASE UNIT 2} {SP:09B_FILM RELEASE UNIT 2}
Cannot determine position of occurrence. {SP:11B_SORTER 2}
■ Scratch at Film Release Unit/Sorter (363N2658/363N2672) ■ Scratch at Sorter (363N2671)

{SP:09B_FILM RELEASE UNIT 2} {SP:11B_SORTER 2}
{SP:11B_SORTER 2}
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MT-96
3.2.3 Scratches on Base Side ■ Scratch at Sub-scanning Unit Center Guide
The following figure shows guide plates in the equipment which may cause scratches
on the base side. Cannot determine position of occurrence.
Determine the guide causing the scratch from the position of the scratch referring to
the image samples provided from the next page onwards and check if that guide plate
is defective.
■ Scratch at Heat Development Unit Heat Plate

006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MT-97
■ Scratch directy after Removal Unit Exit (363N2660/363N2667) ■ Scratch at Upper Conveyor Turn (363N2636)
{SP:05D_CONVEYOR UNIT 4} {SP:05C_CONVEYOR UNIT 3}
■ Scratch at Upper Conveyor Front Half (363N2637) ■ Scratch at Conveyor Exit (363N2633)
{SP:05C_CONVEYOR UNIT 3} {SP:05A_CONVEYOR UNIT 1}
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MT-98
■ Scratch at Heat Development Unit (363N2626)
{SP:08A_HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 1}
■ Scratch at Film Release Unit/Sorter Turn (363N2657)

{SP:09B_FILM RELEASE UNIT 2}
{SP:11B_SORTER 2}
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MT-99
4. ABNORMAL OPERATIONS 4.2 Error Message at the Startup Sequence
If the equipment does not start up due to some reason, “Failed to Startup...” will be
displayed together with error information (6-digit code number). The error information
4.1 System Freezes without Displaying Error means as follows.
Code Normally <NOTE>
When the “Failed to Startup...” error is displayed, replace the HDD.
● Network Conflict Error
Example of display Cause Remedy Error Information Meaning
Network settings (IP (1) Turn OFF/ON the main 0x1000 Failed in acquiring Windows version information
address) are over- power switch, and re- 0x2000 to 0x2B08 Error occurred in disk check processing
lapping with other boot the equipment.
devices. (2) Change the network set- 0x3000 Failed in parameter file check
tings of this equipment 0x4000 to 0x4002 Failed in creating required directory
or other devices. 0x5000 to 0x5002 Failed in changing software version
0x6000 Registry registration (When version is changed)
0x7000 Registry registration (Normal)
0x8000 to 0x8006 Failed in printer driver start
0x9000 to 0x900F Failed in acquiring IP address/subnet mask/gateway address
● Watson Error 0x9100 Failed in setting IP address/subnet mask/gateway address
Example of display Cause Remedy 0xA000 to 0xA001 Failed in starting network driver
The equipment is (1) Turn OFF/ON the main 0xB000 to 0xB003 Failed in acquiring MAC address
unable to operate power switch, and re- 0xC000 Failed in starting main unit application
normally due to boot the equipment.
software errors.
● FMTMAIN Executing Error

Example of display Cause Remedy
The equipment is (1) Turn OFF/ON the main
unable to operate power switch, and re-
normally due to boot the equipment.
software errors.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MT-100
5. CLEARING FILM JAMS ● Jam Removing Label 2 ● Jam Removing Label 3
Refer to the labels pasted on the equipment and clear the film jam. Refer to the
Operation Manual for details.
● Jam Removing Label 4
● Jam Removing Label 1
● Sorter Jam Removing Label
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MT-101
6. TROUBLESHOOTING REFERENCE 6.1.2 MCT Board
6.1 Layout of Fuse

CAUTION
When the fuse melts, please exchange it for new one attached the equipment or
specified as a service part.
Remove the cause which the fuse melted and exchange fuse, before turning ON
the equipment.
Otherwise, a fuse melts again and there is a possibility of damaging a board.
6.1.1 PRN Board
No. Rating Purpose of use

F1 AC/DC 48V 2A Not used

F1 AC/DC 48V 1A +5V power supply fuse for SED Board, LDD board
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MT-102
6.1.3 SND Board 6.1.4 HTD Board

F1 AC250V 10A AC power supply fuse for heaters (HG1, HG5)
F2 AC250V 10A AC power supply fuse for heaters (HG2, HG4)

F1 AC/DC 48V 2A +12V power supply fuse for PDD board
F3 AC/DC 48V 2A -12V power supply fuse for PDD board
F5 AC/DC 48V 2A +5V power supply fuse for sensor, LED board, BCR
F7 AC/DC 48V 5A +24V power supply fuse for SOLA11/21, MB11/21, PB11/21,
SVB11/21
F9 AC/DC 48V 5A +24V power supply fuse for ME1, MG1, Polygon motor
F11 AC/DC 48V 5A +24V power supply fuse for MB12/22
F13 AC/DC 48V 5A +24V power supply fuse for MD1, MD2
F15 AC/DC 48V 5A +24V power supply fuse for SOLD1, MJ1, SOLT1-3
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MT-103
6.1.5 Power Supply Unit (PSU24A, PSU24B)

F1 AC/DC 48V 2A +5V power supply fuse for PNL24A board, PNL24C board,
HTD board
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MT-104
6.2 LED Lighting Information 6.2.2 MCT Board
6.2.1 PRN Board
No. LED Function

No. Purpose Lit OFF Remarks D5 HT1 Light up when Heater HG1 is ON.
D3 Film leading Film leading edge Not detected Momentarily D6 HT2 Light up when Heater HG2 is ON.
edge detection detected lights up when D7 HT3 Not used
detected
D8 HT4 Light up when Heater HG4 is ON.
D4 L_DMA (Recep- Currently starting L_DMA currently Lights up when
tion) L_DMA stopped CTG reception is D9 HT5 Light up when Heater HG5 is ON.
OK
D10 HT6 Not used
D5 Start point de- Currently detecting Start point currently –
tection start point stopped D11 HT7 Not used
D6 Leading edge Currently detecting Leading edge cur- – D12 HT8 Not used
detection leading edge rently stopped D13 HT9 Not used
D7 Local reset Currently imple- Currently clearing – D14 FAN Not used
menting local reset local reset
D15 M1 For checking software operations, M1 and M2 blink alter-
D8 SDRAM access Currently access- SDRAM not ac- – nately during CPU operations.
ing SDRAM cessed
D16 M2 For checking software operations, M1 and M2 blink alter-
D9 L_DMA (Trans- Currently starting L_DMA currently Lights up during nately during CPU operations.
mission) L_DMA stopped actual transfer
D17 US3 For software debugging
D10 FPGA configura- Normal end Executing/Failed –
tion D18 M3 For software debugging
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MT-105
6.2.3 SND Board <D10 lighting information> <D11 lighting information>
Position Status at Lighting Position Status at Lighting Position Status at Lighting Position Status at Lighting
SA11 ON SB11 ON MB11 ON MD1 ON
SA13 ON SB12 ON MB12 ON MD2 ON
SA21 ON SB13 ON MB21 ON ME1 ON
SA23 ON SE2 ON (Mo- MB22 ON MG1 ON

bile type only)
<D12 lighting information> <D13 lighting information>

SB21 ON SD1 ON MJ1 ON SOLD1 ON
SB22 ON SD2 ON Polygon mo- SOLT1 ON

tor ON
SB23 ON SD3 ON SOLA11 ON SOLT2 ON
Not available SD4 ON SOLA21 ON SOLT3 ON
<D14 lighting information> <D15 lighting information>

No. Function
D10-D15 For checking the operation of I/O parts SD5 ON SJ1 ON FANG1/ SVB21 ON
FANG3 ON
D16 For checking software operation of MCT board, D16 blinks during CPU op-
erations. SD6 Output 1 SJ2 ON FANG2 ON PB11 ON
ON
SD6 Output 2 ST1 ON ME2 ON (Mo- PB21 ON

ON bile type only)
SG1 ON ST2 ON SVB11 ON ST3 ON
<NOTE>
The meaning of "ON" in the upper table is as follows.
• Sensor : To detect a subject
• Pulse motor : Outputting Clock
• Other loading part : Outputting Drive signal
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MT-106
6.3 Print Position of Board Serial Number 6.3.3 SND Board
6.3.1 PRN Board
6.3.2 MCT Board
6.3.4 HTD Board
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MT-107
6.3.5 LDD Board 6.3.8 MTH Board
6.3.6 LED Board
6.3.7 PDD Board
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MT-108
6.4 Film Information 6.4.2 Film Information when Process Abnormally
Terminated
6.4.1 Film Information when Process Normally Completed If an image processing error occurs due to unexpected parameters, etc., while
processing an image received via DICOM for printing, the image in question is not
For the purpose of analyzing film, equipment, and image fault, the data of film and printed. Instead, the analysis data of image processing error is printed on the film.
image processing is printed on the leading edge area of the film. Listed below are
the data items and number of characters. (Max. 142 characters, size=5x4 dots,  List of Parameter Data Items Printed at the Time of Image Processing
spacing=1dot) Error Occurrence
Item
Number of
Item
Number of <NOTE>
Characters Characters
The contents of image processing error printed vary depending on the error
1 Factory ID 1 8 Interpolation Parameter 10 status.
2 Emulsion Type 2 9 Reduction Ratio 7
3 Pack Serial Number 4 10 Tone Processing Parameter Max. 58 Item Name Setting Format
4 Lot Number 6 11 Equipment Serial Number 8 Header *** Image Process Error Occurred (Date, Time) *** Tray=Tray
Number
5 Date Loaded 6 12 Date Printed 14
Error Location Error Component=x
Photosensitive Material Setting Value: Format, Mag, Glat, Rotate, RawMake, Calib
6 4 13 Tray Number 1
Correction Data
Image Number/Annotation Error Image Number=x
Cumulative Output Number Position Setting Value: Image=1 to 80, Annotation=101-106
7 Software Version Number 5 14 16
(Trays 1-2) Error Location ID Error Code=xxxxxxxx
Tone Type GLAT Type=x
By default, the data is printed on the area shown below, which can be changed using Setting Value: SAR, BAR
M-Utility. Gamma Number Gamma No.=x
{MU:3.3 [1-1-2-4]_Option/Film Information} Max Density Max Density=x
Min Density Min Density=x
Number of Fine Adjustment Adjust Point=x
Points
Density Value Adjust Density=x
Shift Value Adjust Shift=x
Contrast Value Adjust Contrast=x
Image Correction Density Calib Density=x
Value Setting Value: 2.64, 3.0, 3.3, 3.6, 3.6L
Interpolation Method Mag Type=x
Setting Value: A-VRS, SSM
A Part Setting Flag A Switch=x
Setting Value: OFF, ON
Edge Detection Parameter Edge Parameter=x
Sharpness Parameter Sharpness Parameter=x
Character Color Char Color=x
Setting Value: WHITE, BLACK
Print Job Number PJ=x
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MT-109
Item Name Setting Format Item Name Setting Format
Medium Type Medium Type=x Exist Image Image=x
Setting Value: BLUE, CLEAR Setting Value: EXIST, NO EXIST
Requestor Client ID AE=x Image Name Image File=x
Recording Density RRID= x Rows Rows=x
Setting Value: NORMAL, HIGH Columns Columns=x
Requestor Client IP IP=x Requested Image Size RIS=x
Address
Pixel Aspect Ratio PAR=%d/%d
Reprint ID ReprintID=x
Bits Allocate Allocate=x
Film Inf Number FI=x
Bits Stored Stored=x
Film Size Size=x
Setting Value: 8INX10IN, 10INX14IN, 14INX14IN, 14INX17IN, High Bit High=x
10INX12IN, 11INX14IN Pixel Representation PR=x
Illumination Illumination=x Smoothing Type Smoothing=x
Ambient Light Ambient Light=x Setting Value: SHARP, MEDIUM, SMOOTH
Format ID Format=x LUT Number Lut=x
Film Orientation Orientation=x Max Density Max Density=x
Setting Value: PORTRAIT, LANDSCAPE Min Density Min Density=x
Trim Trim= x Polarity Polarity=x
Setting Value: YES, NO
Photometric Interpretation PI=x
Trim Width Trim Width=x Setting Value: MONOCHROME1, MONOCHROME2
Trim Density Trim Density=x Magnification Mag=x
Border Density Border Density=x Setting Value: CUBIC, NONE
Valid Number of Images Valid Koma Number=x Presentation LUT Shape LUT Shape=x
Setting Value: IDENTITY, LIN OD
Extended Format ID Ext Format=x
Presentation LUT LUT Descriptor=%d/%d/%d
Annotation ID Annotation=x Descriptor
Setting Value: format1 to format4, When no default is set for
the equipment: “None” Presentation LUT Data LUT Data=x
Annotation ID Position Annotation Position=x
Setting Value: Lower Right, Lower Center, Lower Left, Upper
Right, Upper Center, Upper Left
Annotation Font Annotation Font=x
Annotation Pixel Count Annotation%d Rows=x
Annotation Line Count Annotation%d Columns=x
Annotation Aspect Ratio Annotation%d PAR=x/x
Annotation String Str0=x
Frame Number [X]
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MT-110
 Example of Film Information at the Time of Image Processing Error
Occurrence
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MT-111
BLANK PAGE
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
CONTROL SHEET

02.28.2006 03 Revised (FM4704) 1, 3, 7, 9, 14, 17, 20, 21, 30, 31, 63,
84, 85, 98, 105, 106, 117-119,
121-129, 132
107
02.15.2007 05 Revised (Revision for main unit software version 3, 95.1, 95.2, 96, 106, 117, 118
V3.0, DI Tool version V3.0, etc.) (FM5080)
REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT (MC)

02.15.2007 FM5080
MC-1
PRECAUTIONS ON INSPECTIONS, <INSTRUCTIONS>
The diagrams in this manual display the CHECK and FIT ON icons where
REPLACEMENTS, AND ADJUSTMENTS necessary.
When removing/reinstalling, following these icons.
This chapter does not describe parts which require no special note or adjustments in • CHECK icon : When reinstalling removed parts, this is indicated if
removal and installation. reinstalling positions must be checked or adjusted.
For details on the removal of these parts, refer to the Service Parts List. This symbol is shown in illustrations of parts removal
Also follow the precautions below when performing inspections, replacements, and procedures. Whenever this is shown, be sure to refer to “
adjustments of parts. CHECK/Adjusting procedure”.
WARNING • FIT ON icon : When installing parts, this is indicated if alignment to the
boss is required. However, this is not indicated on bosses
To prevent electrical shocks, be sure to turn OFF the power of this equipment used for enhancing assembly and preventing assembly
before starting work. accidents.
WARNING/CAUTION
Observe the warnings and cautions described in “SAFETY PRECAUTION”.
{SAFETY PRECAUTION}
CAUTION
• Be sure to wear a wristband for grounding when performing maintenance of
boards and optical units. Otherwise static electricity in the body may cause
damage to electronic parts on the boards and optical units.
• Never remove the screws painted in red.
• Never remove the upper cover of the optical unit.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
• The screws painted in yellow must be adjusted after the installation of parts.
When installing parts, follow the check/adjustment procedure provided.
• When removing the covers, insert shutter into the film tray to prevent
exposure of film to light.
• Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power
cable and additional protective ground wire connections and by securing
the parts with retaining screws. To maintain safety, ensure that the parts and
retaining screws removed for servicing purposes are restored to the original
states upon installation. After the parts and retaining screws are restored to
the above-mentioned states, follow the procedures set forth in this service
manual to verify that the retaining screws are securely tightened to properly
secure the parts.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
DRYPIX 4000 Service Manual MC-1
MC-2
CONTENTS 4. REMOVAL UNIT 4.
4.1
REMOVAL UNIT
Removal Unit
MC-27
MC-27
4.2 Suction Cup Arm MC-29
4.3 Changing Film Size to 20 x 25 cm Size MC-30
1. COVERS 1. COVERS MC-4 4.4 Removal Drive Cam MC-33
1.1 Covers MC-4 4.5 Suction Cup MC-37
4.6 Magic Arm MC-38
4.7 Pump MC-40
4.8 Solenoid Valve MC-41
4.9 Hose MC-42
4.10 Removal Unit Conveyance Motor
(MB12/MB22) MC-43
FPCC040A.AI 4.11 Film Removing Motor (MB11/MB21) MC-44
4.12 Film Surface Detection Sensor (SB12/SB22) MC-45
4.13 Suction Cup Arm HP Detection Sensor
(SB11/SB12) MC-46
FPCC010A.AI 4.14 Suction Cup Arm Upper Dead-Point
Detection Sensor (SB13/SB23) MC-48
5. CONVEYOR UNIT 5. CONVEYOR UNIT MC-49
2. FRAME 2. FRAME MC-7 5.1 Conveyor Unit Exit Assembly MC-49
2.1 BCR Assembly MC-7 5.2 Conveyor Unit Exit Grip Roller Assembly MC-51
2.2 Interlock Switch Assembly MC-9 5.3 Conveyor Unit Exit Guide (Lower) MC-52
5.4 Stopper Assembly MC-53
5.5 Stopper Solenoid (SOLD1) MC-54
5.6 Conveyor Unit Exit Roller (Lower) MC-55
5.7 Film Edge Sensor Encoder Plate MC-56
5.8 Upper Conveyor Unit Open/Close Guide MC-58
5.9 Conveyor Unit Turn Roller MC-59
5.10 Conveyor Right Guide MC-60
5.11 Film Conveyance Motor (MD1) MC-61
FPCC050A.AI 5.12 Cleaning Roller Detection Sensor (SD3) MC-62
FPCC020A.AI 5.13 Conveyance Gear MC-63
6. SUB-SCANNING UNIT 6. SUB-SCANNING UNIT MC-64

3. FILM LOADING UNIT 3. FILM LOADING UNIT MC-13 6.1 Sub-Scanning Unit/Upper Conveyor Unit MC-64
3.1 Removal Unit/Film Loading Unit MC-13 6.2 Sub-Scanning Unit Roller MC-68
3.2 Tray MC-15 6.3 Sub-Scanning Motor (ME1) MC-72
3.3 Tray Detection Switch (SA12/SA22) MC-17 6.4 Flywheel MC-75
3.4 Tray Lock Assembly MC-21 6.5 Film Leading Edge Detection Sensor (SE1) MC-78
3.5 Rail MC-22
3.6 Special Screw MC-24
3.7 Squeezing Roller (Upper) MC-25
3.8 Film Pack/Shutter Detection Sensor
(SA11/SA21) MC-26
FPCC060A.AI
FPCC030A.AI
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-3
7. SCANNING OPTICS UNIT 7. SCANNING OPTICS UNIT MC-82 10. CONTROLLER 10. CONTROLLER MC-101
7.1 Scanner Unit MC-82 10.1 Operation Panel MC-101
10.2 Controller Unit MC-103
10.3 HDD MC-105
10.4 MTH Board MC-107
10.5 MCT Board MC-108
FPCC070A.AI FPCC100A.AI
8. HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 8. HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT MC-88 11. SORTER 11. SORTER MC-110
8.1 Heat Development Unit Fan Assembly MC-88 11.1 Sorter Covers MC-110
8.2 Film Cooling Section MC-89 11.2 Sorter MC-112
8.3 Heat Development Rack Assembly MC-90 11.3 Sorter Conveyance Gear MC-116
8.4 Heat Development Roller MC-92
8.5 Heat Development Unit Conveyance Motor
(MG1) MC-93
8.6 Heat Development Unit Entrance Guide MC-95
8.7 Heat Development Unit Entrance Sensor
(SG1) MC-95.1
8.8 Thermal Protector MC-95.2
FPCC080A.AI FPCC110A.AI
9. FILM RELEASE UNIT 9. FILM RELEASE UNIT MC-97 12. INSTALLING THE MAIN UNIT 12. INSTALLING THE MAIN UNIT SOFTWARE MC-117
9.1 Film Release Unit MC-97 SOFTWARE 12.1 Preparations MC-117
9.2 Density Measurement Light-Emitting Board 12.2 Installing from the DI Tool MC-118
(LED15A) MC-99 12.3 Installing from the USB Memory MC-128
FPCC090A.AI
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MC-4
1. COVERS <NOTE>
• As the film release unit front cover and film release unit right cover are
secured with screws inside, remove them together.
• Remove the covers in the following order.
(1) Upper small cover: (1)
(2) Upper cover: (1) → (2)
FPCC010A.AI
(3) Film release unit gear cover: (1) → (2) → (3)
1. - 1 Covers
(4) Conveyor unit upper right cover: (4)
(5) Film release unit front cover/film release unit
right cover: (1) → (2) → (4) → (5)
(6) Film release unit rear cover: (1) → (2) → (4) → (5) → (6)
(7) Film release unit upper cover: (1) → (2) → (4) → (5) → (7)
(8) Film release unit cover: (1) → (2) → (4) → (5) → (8)
FPCC0103.AI
 Removing Procedure
1. Insert the shutter into the film tray.
2. Remove the following covers.

• (1) Upper small cover
• (2) Upper cover
• (3) Film release unit gear cover
• (4) Conveyor unit upper right cover
• (5) Film release unit front cover/film release unit right cover
• (6) Film release unit rear cover
• (7) Film release unit upper cover
• (8) Film release unit cover
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-5
3. Remove the following covers. 4. Remove the following covers.
• Rear cover • Lower front cover
• Left cover • Film loading unit cover
• Lower front inside cover
• Controller unit right cover
<NOTE>
For the upper right cover and lower right cover, remove the cover belt as
required and open them wider than normally done to perform replacements/
adjustments.
However, applying excessive force may result in damage.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-6
5. Remove the belt cover.
 Reinstalling Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-7
2. FRAME  Removing the BCR assembly for lower trays
1. Remove the lower removal unit/film loading unit.

{MC:3.1_Removal Unit/Film Loading Unit}
FPCC020A.AI
2. Remove the front lower inside cover.
3.
2. -
Remove the BCR assembly.
1 BCR Assembly <NOTE>
Arrow marks are imprinted at screw attaching position.
FPCC0202.AI
 Removing the BCR assembly for upper trays
1. Remove the upper removal unit/film loading unit.

2. If there are two trays, remove the lower removal unit/film loading unit.
3. Remove the BCR assembly. [See right figure.]
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MC-8
<REMARKS>
Attaching position of BCR
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-9
2. - 2 Interlock Switch Assembly 2. Remove the interlock switch assembly.
FPCC0207.AI

• Upper small cover
• Upper cover
• Conveyor unit upper right cover
• Film release unit front cover/Film release unit right cover
• Belt cover
<NOTE>
To remove the interlock switch assembly, disconnect the connector (faston
terminal) by pressing in the unlocking latch located on the connector as
shown below.
<NOTE>
If the interlock switch has been removed from the interlock switch assembly,
refer to “ CHECK/Adjusting Procedure 1” and adjust the attaching position.
{ CHECK/Adjusting Procedure 1}
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MC-10
 CHECK/Adjusting Procedure 1  Adjusting the Upper Right Cover Interlock Switches (SK3, SK4)
 Adjusting the Upper Front Cover Interlock Switches (SK1, SK2) 1. Remove the interlock release jig.
{SAFETY PRECAUTION}
1. Remove the interlock release jig.
{SAFETY PRECAUTION}
2. Move the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyor unit.
2. Adjust the attaching position of the upper front cover interlock switch.
<NOTE>
When moving the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyor unit, perform up to
<NOTE> step 8-#3 of “6.5 Film Leading Edge Detection Sensor (SE1)”.
• After confirming the clicking sound of the interlock switch, move it {MC:6.5_Film Leading Edge Detection Sensor (SE1)}
forward by another 1 mm.
• When moving the interlock switch forward in #3 below, be sure to move it
horizontally.
3. Adjust the attaching position of the upper right cover interlock switch.
<NOTE>
• After confirming the clicking sound of the interlock switch, move it to the
right by another 1 mm.
• When moving the interlock switch to the right in #3 below, be sure to
move it horizontally.
3. Check the interlock function.

4. Check the interlock function.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-11
 Adjusting the Lower Right Cover Interlock Switch (SK5) 3. Check the interlock function.
1. Move the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyor unit. { CHECK/Adjusting Procedure 2}
<NOTE>
When moving the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyor unit, perform up to
step 8-#3 of “6.5 Film Leading Edge Detection Sensor (SE1)”.
{MC:6.5_Film Leading Edge Detection Sensor (SE1)}
2. Adjust the attaching position of the lower right cover interlock switch.
<NOTE>
• After confirming the clicking sound of the interlock switch, move it to the
right by another 1 mm.
• When moving the interlock switch to the right in #4 below, be sure to
move it horizontally.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-12
 CHECK/Adjusting Procedure 2
If the adjustment of the attached positions of interlock switches (SK1 to SK5) have
been performed, check the interlock function as follows.
1. Attach the interlock switch assembly.
2. Turn ON the power of the equipment, and start the M-Utility during
initialization.
3. [Check Mechanism] → [Sensor Monitor] → [All]
4. Touch the [NEXT]/[BACK] button to display the interlock switch to be

checked.
5. Open/close the cover to be checked and check the interlock function.

<REMARKS>
• Upper front cover interlock switch (SK1, SK2) : Check with [SK1].
• Upper right cover interlock switch (SK3, SK4) : Check with [SK3].
• Lower right cover interlock switch (SK5) : Check with [SK3].
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-13
3. FILM LOADING UNIT 3. When removing the upper removal unit/film loading unit in 2-tray
models, remove the drive conveyance gear assembly.
FPCC030A.AI
3. - 1 Removal Unit/Film Loading Unit
FPCC0315.AI
1. Remove the tray.

{MC:3.2_Tray}
2. Remove the film loading unit cover.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-14
4. Remove the removal unit/film loading unit. <NOTE>
To disconnect the connectors (faston terminal) of SA12/SA22, press in the
unlocking latch located on the connector as shown below.
<NOTE>
When connecting the connectors (faston terminal) of SA12/SA22, ensure that
they are facing as shown below. Otherwise, the faston terminal will be hard to
disconnect when performing periodic maintenance, etc.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MC-15
3. - 2 Tray 3. Remove the tray.
FPCC0316.AI
<NOTE>
When pulling out the tray from the equipment, insert the shutter into the film
tray to prevent exposure of film to light.
2. Remove the rear cover.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-16
CAUTION
After removing the tray, push the rail back into the equipment as it will come in
the way when operating and is also dangerous.
<REMARKS>
Release the latch lever by raising it only slightly because if raised too much, it will lock
again.
However, there is no need to pull out the rail pushed into the equipment.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-17
3. - 3
Tray Detection Switch (SA12/
SA22)
1. Temporarily secure the tray detection switch.

<NOTE>
Temporarily secure with the tray detection switch bracket moved to the very
end.
FPCC0317.AI
1. Remove the removal unit/film loading unit.

2. Remove the tray detection switch (SA12/SA22).
2. Insert the tray into the film loading unit.

<NOTE>
• If the switch clicks with a sound when pushing in the tray, perform steps
3 to 6.
• If it does not click with a sound, perform only step 7.
<NOTE>
To disconnect the connectors (faston terminal) of the tray detection switch
(SA12/SA22), press in the unlocking latch located on the connector as
shown below.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MC-18
3. At the point when the switch clicks with a sound, measure the length 5. Measure the length from the rear end of the tray to the film loading
from the rear end of the tray to the film loading unit frame. unit frame again.
4. Push in the tray and check that it locks, and then pull out the tray.
<REMARKS>
The tray may shake slightly even when locked. To improve the precision of
attaching the tray detection switch, pull out the tray towards the front of the
equipment in the locked state, and then proceed to the next step.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-19
6. Push the tray detection switch in the arrow (A) direction as shown in 7. Push the tray detection switch in the arrow (A) direction as shown in
the following figure, and tighten the screw firmly. the following figure, and tighten the screw firmly.
<NOTE> <NOTE>
• Move the tray detection switch in the arrow (A) direction for the value Tighten the screw after pushing the tray detection switch by another 2 mm
obtained by subtracting the measured value in step 5 from the measured after pushing it in the arrow (A) direction and the actuator releases the
value in step 3, and tighten the screw firmly. switch button with a click sound.
(Example) If the measured value in step 3 is 8 mm and that in step 5 is 6
mm, move the tray detection switch by 2 mm.
• If the subtracted value is 0 or negative value, secure the tray detection
switch firmly at the current position.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-20
 CHECK/Adjusting Procedure
• Check that when the tray is pushed in the locked state, there is still extra actuator
stroke.
• Check that when the tray is pulled in the locked state, the switch does not make a
click sound.
<NOTE>
When connecting the connectors (faston terminal) of the tray detection switch
(SA12/SA22), ensure that they are facing as shown below. Otherwise, the faston
terminal will be hard to disconnect when performing periodic maintenance, etc.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MC-21
3. - 4 Tray Lock Assembly

<NOTE>
When connecting the connectors (faston terminal) of SA12/SA22, ensure that
they are facing as shown below. Otherwise, the faston terminal will be hard to
FPCC0318.AI

2. Remove the tray lock assembly.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MC-22
3. - 5 Rail
 Removing the Film Loading Unit Rail

2. Remove the removal unit.

{MC:4.1_Removal Unit}
3. Remove the film loading unit rail.
FPCC0319.AI
<NOTE>
• The rail consists of a tray rail and film loading unit rail as a set. To ensure that
they move smoothly, be sure to replace them together.
• The attaching screws of the rail are painted in yellow.
 Removing the Tray Rail
1. Remove the tray.

{MC:3.2_Tray}
2. Remove the tray rail.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-23
<NOTE>
Reinstall the tray rail back to the side it was first installed.
1. Reinstall the tray rail while pushing it downwards.
2. Reinstall the film loading unit rail.

<NOTE>
When reinstalling the film loading unit rail to the film loading unit frame (left),
do not use the middle screw hole of the three screw holes in front of the
film loading unit frame.
• After reinstalling the tray rail, insert the tray into the film loading unit, and check that
it moves smoothly.
• Apply bonding to the eight screws securing the tray rail.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-24
3. - 6 Special Screw
<INSTRUCTIONS>
Attach the special screw so that only the ball bearing at the tip of the special
screw protrudes from the tray surface.
<REMARKS>
This special screw is for feeling a click when inserting shutter.
FPCC0321.AI
1. Remove the tray.

{MC:3.2_Tray}
2. Remove the special screw.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-25
3. - 7 Squeezing Roller (Upper) 2. Remove the squeezing roller (upper).
FPCC0323.AI

<NOTE>
• When removing the squeezing roller, be sure to not drop or lose the
roller.
• The number of squeezing rollers installed is 8 on the right and 14 on the
left.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-26
3. - 8
Film Pack/Shutter Detection
Sensor (SA11/SA21)
FPCC0325.AI

2. Remove the film pack/shutter detection sensor (SA11/SA21).
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-27
4. REMOVAL UNIT 2. Remove the removal unit.
FPCC040A.AI
4. - 1 Removal Unit
FPCC0431.AI

006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-28
<NOTE>
When reinstalling the removal unit, first attach the following circled screw.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-29
4. - 2 Suction Cup Arm
FPCC0432.AI

2. Remove the suction cup arm.

<NOTE>
• When removing the suction cup arm for 20 x 25 cm size, start from #1 in
the following figure.
• When removing the suction cup arm for 35 x 43, 26 x 36, 25 x 30 cm size,
start from step #6 in the following figure.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-30
4. - 3
Changing Film Size to 20 x
25 cm Size 4. Install the removal unit conveyance roller (upper) assembly to the
position for 20 x 25 cm size.
FPCC0433.AI
 Removing Procedures
Perform the following procedure to change the film size of the current film tray (35 x
43 cm, 26 x 36 cm, or 25 x 30 cm) to 20 x 25 cm size.


{MC:4.2_Suction Cup Arm} 5. Remove the rear side suction cup unit.
3. Remove the removal unit conveyance roller (upper) assembly. <NOTE>

Be careful not to drop or lose the spring.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MC-31
6. Reattach the straight hose to the 20 x 25 cm size position. 7. Reattach the rear side suction cup unit to the 20 x 25 cm size position.
<NOTE> <NOTE>
Insert the hose into the hose slot completely. Insert the hose into the hose slot of the rear side suction cup unit
completely.
8. Reinstall the suction cup arm.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MC-32
9. If changing the film size from 35 x 43 to 20 x 25 cm size, the attaching
position of the barcode reader (BCR) must also be changed.
{MC:2.1_BCR Assembly}
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-33
4. - 4 Removal Drive Cam 5. Remove the gear fixing cover (front inner).
FPCC0434.AI
1. Remove the removal unit.

{MC:4.1_Removal Unit}
2. Move the suction cup arm to the home position.
3. Remove the removal unit conveyance motor (MB12/MB22).

{MC:4.10_Removal Unit Conveyance Motor (MB12/MB22)}
4. Remove the gear fixing cover (front outer).
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-34
6. Remove the removal drive cam (front) together with the crank.  Reinstalling Procedure
<NOTE> <NOTE>
When removing the removal drive cam (front), be careful not to drop or lose • As the procedure for installing the removal drive cam is the same for the
the magic arm bearing. front and rear, only the installing procedure for the front is described.
• When performing the following procedure, move the suction cup arm to
the home position.
1. Reinstall the removal drive cam to the removal unit together with the
crank.
2. Align the rib positions of gear 1 and gear 2, and install to the gear
fixing cover (front inner).
<NOTE>
At this time, the two holes on gear 1 should be at the following positions
(top).
7. Remove the removal drive cam (rear) in the same way as removal
drive came (front).
<NOTE>
If removing the front and rear removal drive cams together, it will be
necessary to adjust the phases of these cams.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-35
3. Insert the pins into the two holes on gear 1, adjust the phase of the 4. Pull out the pin, and check that the gears are attached correctly.
removal drive cam, and reinstall the gear fixing cover (front inner).
<NOTE>
• The two holes on gear 1 should be aligned to the holes on the removal
drive cam.
• The rib positions of gear 1 and gear 2 should be aligned.
• The  mark on gear 2 and rib position of gear 3 should be aligned.
5. Reinstall the rear removal drive cam.
6. Reinstall the rear gear fixing cover.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-36
7. Rotate the gear of film removing motor with hand, and check that the
suction cup arm moves smoothly.
<NOTE>
If the phases of the front removal drive cam, gear 1, and gear 2 correspond
to those of the rear removal drive cam, gear 1, and gear 2, but the suction
cup arm assembly tilts slightly and does not move smoothly, remove the
bearing and allow the shaft to escape diagonally upwards of the bearing
hole. This will release the gears and correct the tilt.
8. Reinstall the gear fixing cover (front outer).
9. Reinstall the removal unit conveyance motor (MB12/MB22).
After reinstalling the removal drive cam, check that the suction cup arm moves
smoothly.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-37
4. - 5 Suction Cup
FPCC0435.AI

{MC:4.2_Suction Cup Arm}
2. Remove the suction cup.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-38
4. - 6 Magic Arm 2. Remove the suction cup arm assembly.

<NOTE>
• When removing the suction cup arm for 20 x 25 cm size, start from #1 in
the following figure.
• When removing the suction cup arm for 35 x 43, 26 x 36, 25 x 30 cm size,
start from step #6 in the following figure.
• When removing the removal drive cam, be careful not to drop or lose the
magic arm bearing.
FPCC0436.AI
1. Remove the removal drive cam.

{MC:4.4_Removal Drive Cam}
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-39
3. Remove the magic arm.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-40
4. - 7 Pump
<NOTE>
Insert the hose into the hose slot on the pump completely.
FPCC0437.AI

2. Remove the pump.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-41
4. - 8 Solenoid Valve
<INSTRUCTIONS>
When connecting the suction cup unit hose to the solenoid valve (other than 20
x 25 cm size), align the hose parting line (mold parting line) to the protrusion on
the side of the solenoid valve hose slot. If the lines are not aligned properly, the
suction cup unit will tilt, resulting in suction faults.
As the parting line on the hose is thin and vague, if difficult to see, change the
angle of view.
FPCC0438.AI

2. Remove the solenoid valve.
<NOTE>
Insert the hose into the hose slot protruding out from the solenoid valve
completely.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-42
4. - 9 Hose
<NOTE>
• Connect the hose, making sure it is not twisted.
• Insert the hoses into the respective hose slots of the stopper, solenoid valve,
pump, and suction cup unit completely.
• For branched pipes, insert the hose by about 10 mm.
FPCC0439.AI

2. Remove the pump.

{MC:4.7_Pump}
• When attaching the hose to the solenoid valve (other than 20 x 25 cm size),
3. Remove the hose. refer to “ Reinstalling Procedure” of “4.8 Solenoid Valve”.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-43
4. - 10
Removal Unit Conveyance
Motor (MB12/MB22)
FPCC0440.AI

2. Remove the removal unit conveyance motor (MB12/MB22).
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-44
4. - 11
Film Removing Motor (MB11/
MB21)
FPCC0441.AI

2. Remove the film removing motor (MB11/MB21).
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-45
4. - 12
Film Surface Detection Sen-
sor (SB12/SB22)
FPCC0442.AI

2. Remove the film surface detection sensor (SB12/SB22).
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-46
4. - 13
Suction Cup Arm HP Detec-
tion Sensor (SB11/SB12) 3. Remove the suction cup arm HP detection sensor (SB11/SB21).
<NOTE>
Release a clamp and loosen the cable joining the sensor to facilitate
removal of the sensor.
FPCC0443.AI

2. Move the suction cup arm from the home position.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-47
<NOTE>
After installing the sensor, if the cable in the removal unit is loose, pull it outside
slightly without disconnecting the connector, and secure with the clamp.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-48
4. - 14
Suction Cup Arm Upper Dead-Point
Detection Sensor (SB13/SB23) 2. Remove the suction cup arm upper dead-point detection sensor (SB13/
SB23).
FPCC0444.AI

006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-49
5. CONVEYOR UNIT 4. Remove the conveyor unit exit assembly.
FPCC050A.AI
5. - 1 Conveyor Unit Exit Assembly
FPCC0516.AI
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-50
 Reinstalling Procedure  CHECK/Adjusting Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of removal. Check that the hook of the rear gear is hooked onto the groove of the shaft.
<NOTE>
• When installing the conveyor unit exit assembly to the sub-scanning unit/
upper conveyor unit, insert the protrusion on the conveyor unit exit assembly
base into the slide guide hole and slide to the end.
• Attach the rear gear while pressing the shaft shown below from the front of
the equipment.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-51
5. - 2
Conveyor Unit Exit Grip Roll-
er Assembly 2. Remove the conveyor unit exit grip roller assembly.
FPCC0517.AI
1. Remove the conveyor unit exit assembly.

{MC:5.1_Conveyor Unit Exit Assembly}
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-52
5. - 3
Conveyor Unit Exit Guide
(Lower) 3. Remove the conveyor unit exit guide (lower).
FPCC0518.AI

2. Remove the conveyor unit exit grip roller assembly.

{MC:5.2_Conveyor Unit Exit Grip Roller Assembly}
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-53
5. - 4 Stopper Assembly 4. Remove the stopper assembly.
FPCC0519.AI


3. Remove the conveyor unit exit guide (lower).

{MC:5.3_Conveyor Unit Exit Guide (Lower)}
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-54
5. - 5 Stopper Solenoid (SOLD1) 4. Remove the stopper solenoid (SOLD1).
FPCC0520.AI



006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-55
5. - 6
Conveyor Unit Exit Roller
(Lower) 5. Remove the conveyor unit exit roller (lower).
FPCC0521.AI



4. Remove the stopper assembly.
{MC:5.4_Stopper Assembly}
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-56
5. - 7
Film Edge Sensor Encoder
Plate 5. Remove the film edge sensor encoder plate.
FPCC0522.AI



4. Remove the stopper assembly.

{MC:5.4_Stopper Assembly}
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-57
<INSTRUCTIONS>
Engage the gears attached to the edge sensor arm and film edge sensor
encoder plate as shown in the following figure when attaching.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
When attaching the film edge sensor, align the film edge sensor board edge and
bracket edge, and check that the encoder plate is at the center of the film edge
sensor.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-58
5. - 8
Upper Conveyor Unit Open/
Close Guide
FPCC0523.AI
1. Open the upper right cover.
2. Remove the upper conveyor unit open/close guide.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-59
5. - 9 Conveyor Unit Turn Roller

FPCC0524.AI

{MC:5.8_Upper Conveyor Unit Open/Close Guide}
2. Remove the conveyor unit turn roller.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-60
5. - 10 Conveyor Right Guide
FPCC0525.AI

2. Remove the conveyor right guide.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-61
5. - 11
Film Conveyance Motor
(MD1)
FPCC0526.AI


{MC:5.10_Conveyor Right Guide}
3. Remove the rear cover, and remove the film conveyance motor (MD1).
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-62
5. - 12
Cleaning Roller Detection
Sensor (SD3)
FPCC0527.AI


{MC:5.10_Conveyor Right Guide}
3. Remove the cleaning roller detection sensor (SD3).
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-63
5. - 13 Conveyance Gear
FPCC0530.AI
 Engagement Adjustment of the Conveyer Unit Exit Gear

When the bracket of the conveyer unit exit gear has been removed or when the
fixing screws have been loosened, follow the steps below to perform engagement
adjustment of the conveyer unit exit gear.
<REMARKS>
The fixing screws (TP3x6) for the bracket of the conveyer unit exit gear are painted in
yellow.
1. Loosen the fixing screws of the conveyer unit exit gear.
2. Insert a 0.5mm-thick spacer between the conveyer unit exit gear and 3. Remove the spacer. Check that the spacer comes out easily.
the conveyer unit exit assembly gear, and tighten the fixing screws. <REMARKS>
<NOTE> If the spacer does not come out easily, the gear engagement may be too tight.
The spacer must be inserted between the flanges of both gears.
4. After attaching the removed parts, power on the equipment.
<REMARKS>
The thickness of a 150mm steel ruler is 0.5mm.
5. After the equipment started up, output a flat pattern using the M-Utility.
{MU:3.3 [2-3]_Flat}
6. Check that there is no horizontal streak unevenness in 55mm pitch on

the output film.
<NOTE>
The unevenness above is caused by tight gear engagement. If the
unevenness appears, perform the adjustment again.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MC-64
6. SUB-SCANNING UNIT 5. Remove the fixing bracket of heat development rack assembly (lower).
FPCC060A.AI
6. - 1
Sub-Scanning Unit/Upper
Conveyor Unit
FPCC0619.AI

6. Remove the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyance unit fixing brackets.
4. Remove the heat development unit entrance guide.

{MC:8.6_Heat Development Unit Entrance Guide}
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-65
7. Disconnect the connectors.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-66
8. Remove the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyance unit.
<REMARKS>
Move the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyance unit along the slide guide holes on
the unit base by 37 mm to the front and by 57 mm to the heat development unit,
and remove it towards the front.
<NOTE>
When removing the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyance unit, hold the
following areas with both hands.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-67
<NOTE>
When installing the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyor unit, push it in so that
the left side of the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyor unit table passes several
millimeters away from the heat development unit board cover, and then push in
along the rail on the frame.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-68
6. - 2 Sub-Scanning Unit Roller 5. Remove the fixing bracket of heat development rack assembly (lower).
FPCC0620.AI

6. Remove the handle.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-69
7. Remove the flat belt (front). 8. Remove the pulleys (left/right).
<NOTE>
• As the removal procedure of the pulleys is the same for the left and right
sides, only the procedure for the right side is described.
• By rotating the #5 hexagonal bolt, the pulley removing jig and pulley can
be removed together.
• Use the jig only when removing the pulley. It is not required when
reinstalling.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-70
9. Remove the sub-scanning unit entrance roller.  Reinstalling Procedure
<INSTRUCTIONS>
The flat belt has a front and back side. When attaching it to the pulley, place the
marked side out.
10. Remove the sub-scanning unit exit roller.
<NOTE>
• When attaching the sub-scanning unit roller, be careful not to forget to attach
the waveform washer.
• The pulley has a front and back side. Make sure that the tapered side of the
pulley coincides with the tapered side of the shaft attaching portion.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-71
1. After reinstalling, rotate the jam removing handle four or five times
and check that the sub-scanning unit rollers rotate smoothly, and the
flat belt does not disconnect from the pulley.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-72
6. - 3 Sub-Scanning Motor (ME1) 2. Remove the sub-scanning motor (ME1).
FPCC0621.AI
6.3.1 Removal/Reinstallation
<NOTE>
When replacing the sub-scanning motor (ME1), also replace the ME1 driver
board at the same time.
1. Remove the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyor unit.

{MC:6.1_Sub-Scanning Unit/Upper Conveyor unit}
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-73
3. Remove the ME1 driver board.
<NOTE>
Reinstall the sub-scanning motor so that the WP is at the D cut side of the
motor shaft.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-74
6.3.2 Adjusting when Replacing Sub-Scanning Motor
If the sub-scanning motor (ME1) has been replaced, check/adjust the film conveyance
amount as follows.
1. Print the grid pattern.

{MU:3.3 [2-5]_Grid}
2. Measure “F” of the output film and check that it is within the specified
value.
 Specified Value
(Unit: mm)
Position 35 x 43 cm size 26 x 36 cm size 25 x 30 cm size 20 x 25 cm size
F 413.0 ±1.2 226.5 ±1.0 225.5 ±1.0 225.5 ±1.0
3. If the measured value is out of the specified value, perform “Adjusting

Subscanner” of the M-Utility.
{MU:3.3 [5-2-2]_Adjusting Subscanner}
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-75
6. - 4 Flywheel
FPCC0622.AI
4. Remove the flat belt (rear).
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-76
5. Remove the flywheel.  Reinstalling Procedure
<NOTE> Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
• By rotating the #5 hexagonal bolt, the pulley removing jig and flywheel
can be removed together. The flat belt has a front and back side. When attaching it to the flywheel, place
• Use the jig only when removing the flywheel. It is not required when the marked side out.
reinstalling.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-77
<NOTE>
The flywheel has a front and back side. Make sure that the tapered side of the
flywheel coincides with the tapered side of the shaft attaching portion.
1. After reinstalling, rotate the jam removing handle four or five times
and check that the flat belt does not disconnect from the flywheel.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-78
6. - 5
Film Leading Edge Detection
Sensor (SE1) 5. Remove the fixing bracket of heat development rack assembly (lower).
FPCC0623.AI

{MC:8.6_Heat Development Unit Entrance Guide} 6. Remove the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyance unit fixing brackets.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-79
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-80
8. Draw the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyance unit.
<REMARKS>
and draw it towards the front.
<NOTE>
When moving the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyance unit, hold the
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-81
9. Remove the film leading edge detection sensor (SE1).
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-82
7. SCANNING OPTICS UNIT 7.1.1 Removal/Reinstallation
FPCC070A.AI
1. Remove the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyor unit.
{MC:6.1_Sub-scanning Unit/Upper Conveyor Unit}
7. - 1 Scanner Unit
2. Remove the scanner unit.
FPCC0702.AI
CAUTION
• The LD/IC may damage due to static electricity. When removing/reinstalling it,
take anti-static measures by wearing a wrist band, etc.
• Do not remove the upper cover of the scanner unit.
• Do not place your finger inside the laser beam window (at the bottom of the
scanner unit).
• Handle the optical unit gently, making sure not to subject it to shock.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-83
 Reinstalling Procedure  CHECK/Adjusting Procedure
Reinstall in the reverse order of the removing procedure. However perform the • Make sure that there is no gap between the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyor unit
following when installing the scanner unit to the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyor positioning plate and scanner unit positioning parts.
unit. • Make sure that the connectors are connected properly.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
When pushing the scanner unit against the positioning plate, push gently
without subjecting it to shock.
1. Align the scanner unit to the reinstalling position of the sub-scanning

unit/upper conveyor unit, and secure temporarily with the screws.
2. Push the two positioning brackets and protruded part on the scanner
unit against the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyor unit at the
positions shown in the following figure.
3. Secure the scanner unit with the screws.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-84
7.1.2 Adjustments in Replacement of Scanner Unit 3. Import the individual data.
If the scanner unit has been replaced, the data in the scanner unit data FD provided
with the scanner unit needs to be sent to the equipment. “Printer name” → [Data Transfer] → [Indv] → [All] →［Printer => PC］
1. Turn ON the power of the equipment.
2. Prepare the PC for servicing.

{MU:4.3.1_Connecting the PC for Servicing to the Network}
{MU:4.3.2_Starting the DI Tool (DPX7 PC Tool Function)}
{MU:4.3.3_Connecting DI Tool to the Equipment}
<NOTE>
Check that the directory setting of the FTP site is “C:\Program Files\
FujiFilm\DRYPIX”.
{MU:4.2.3_Setting the FTP Site Directory of the PC}
→ The individual data is sent to the PC for servicing. When the data transfer is
completed, the [File transfer is completed.] screen appears.
4. Insert the scanner unit data FD provided with the scanner unit into the
FDD of the PC for servicing.
5. Copy scanner unit data to the PC for sevicing.

“Printer name” → [Data Transfer] → [Indv] → [All] → [Restore]
→ The [Restore] window for selecting the folder containing the scanner unit data
appears.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MC-85
6. Select “Drive A” → [OK]
→ Scanner unit data is copied to the PC for servicing.
→ When completed, the [File transfer is completed.] screen appears.
7. Send the individual data containing the copied scanner unit data to
the equipment.
“Printer name” → [Data Transfer] → [Indv] → [All] →［PC => Printer］
→ The individual data is sent to the equipment, and only the scanner unit data is
updated. When the data transfer is completed, the [File transfer is completed.]
screen appears.
8. End the DPX7 PC Tool function and the DI Tool.
9. If directory settings of the FTP site have been changed, set back to the
original settings.
10. Remove the FD from the PC for servicing.

11. Reboot the equipment, and start the M-Utility.
12. Output the grid pattern using the M-Utility.
{MU:3.3 [2-5]_Grid}
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MC-86
13. Measure “C” of the output film and check that it is within the specified value.
 Specified Value
(Unit: mm)
B 27.0 ±1.0 32.3 ±1.0 51.1 ±1.0 50.5 ±1.0
C 300.0 ±1.2 300.0 ±1.2 200.8 ±1.2 200.0 ±1.2
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-87
14. If the measured value is out of the specified value, change the value of
“[4-3-1] Scanning Width” of the M-Utility.
{MU:3.3 [4-3-1]_Scanning Width}
15. Measure “B” of the output film and check that it is within the specified
value.
16. If the measured value is out of the specified value, change the value of
“[4-3-2] Scanning Position” of the M-Utility.
{MU:3.3 [4-3-2]_Scanning Position}
17. Perform automatic density correction.

{MU:3.3 [3-1]_AUTO F.D.C.}
18. Check the film density.

{MU:3.3 [3-2]_Check Density}
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-88
8. HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 2. Remove the heat development unit fan assembly.
FPCC080A.AI
8. - 1
Heat Development Unit Fan
Assembly
FPCC0816.AI

• Upper small cover  Reinstalling Procedure
• Upper cover Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-89
8. - 2 Film Cooling Section 2. Remove the film cooling section.
FPCC0809.AI
1. Remove the heat development unit fan assembly.

{MC:8.1_Heat Development Unit Fan Assembly}
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-90
8. - 3
Heat Development Rack
Assembly 5. Remove the left inside cover.
FPCC0810.AI

3. Remove the film cooling section.

{MC:8.2_Film Cooling Section}

• Rear cover
• Left cover
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-91
6. Remove the heat development rack assembly.
<NOTE>
When removing the heat development rack assembly, removing the front
and rear fixing pins will separate the heater assembly and roller assembly.
Therefore do not remove these pins.
<NOTE>
Place the removed heat development rack assembly in the direction shown
below.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-92
8. - 4 Heat Development Roller 2. Remove the heat development roller.

<NOTE>
• Heat development rollers and bearings may drop if the heat development
rack assembly is tilted with the heater assembly removed.
• Do not touch the rubber portion of the removed heat development rollers
and heater side of the heater assembly with bare hand.
FPCC0811.AI

{MC:8.3_Heat Development Rack Assembly}
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-93
8. - 5
Heat Development Unit Con-
veyance Motor (MG1) 4. Remove the left inside cover.
FPCC0812.AI


• Rear cover
• Left cover
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-94
5. Remove the heat development unit conveyance motor (MG1).
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-95
8. - 6
Heat Development Unit En-
trance Guide 3. Remove the heat development unit entrance guide.
FPCC0813.AI
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-95.1
8. - 7
Heat Development Unit En-
trance Sensor (SG1)
FPCC0814.AI

2. Remove the heat development unit entrance sensor (SG1).
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
DRYPIX 4000 Service Manual MC-95.1
MC-95.2
8. - 8 Thermal Protector 2. Remove the heater assembly.

<NOTE>
• Heat development rollers and bearings may drop if the heat development
rack assembly is tilted with the heater assembly removed.
• Do not touch the rubber portion of the removed heat development rollers
and heater side of the heater assembly with bare hand.
FPCC0820.AI

{MC:8.3_Heat Development Rack Assembly}
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
DRYPIX 4000 Service Manual MC-95.2
MC-96
3. Remove the thermal protector.  Reinstalling Procedure
<NOTE>
• When attaching the thermal protector, visually check that the tip of the screw
is not protruding out to the film conveyance side. (Reference screw tightening
torque: 0.6Nm = 6kgcm)
• Take note that the attaching direction of the thermal protector connectors
differ between 1st rack assembly and 2nd rack assembly.
• For 1st rack assembly, attach so that the connectors line up in a straight
line.
• For 2nd rack assembly, attach so that connectors line up diagonally.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MC-97
9. FILM RELEASE UNIT
FPCC090A.AI
9. - 1 Film Release Unit
FPCC0903.AI
1. If the sorter is attached, remove it.

{MC:11.2_Sorter}
If the sorter is not attached, remove the covers in the following order.
• (2) Upper cover
• (5) Film release unit front cover/Film release unit right cover
• (8) Film release unit cover
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-98
2. Remove the film release unit. <NOTE>
To disconnect the connectors (faston terminal) of SJ3, press in the
<NOTE> unlocking latch located on the connector as shown below.
If the sorter is attached, disconnect connector CNT1.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MC-99
9. - 2
Density Measurement Light-
Emitting Board (LED15A) 2. Remove the density measurement light-emitting board (LED15A).
FPCC0904.AI
1. Remove the covers in the following order.

• Without sorter
(1) Upper small cover
(2) Upper cover
(3) Conveyor unit upper right cover
(4) Film release unit front cover/Film release unit right cover
(5) Film release unit cover
• With sorter
(1) Bin
(2) Upper small cover
(3) Upper cover
(4) Conveyor unit upper right cover
(5) Film release unit front cover/Film release unit right cover
(6) Film release unit cover
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-100
<INSTRUCTIONS>
Press the LED cover of the density measurement light-emitting board (LED15A)
against the position shown in the figure below, and secure.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-101
10. CONTROLLER 2. Remove the operation panel.

<REMARKS>
Layout of connectors disconnected at step #4
{ Layout of Operation Panel Connectors}
FPCC100A.AI
10. - 1 Operation Panel
FPCC1005.AI

• Upper small cover
• Upper cover
<NOTE>
Tighten the screw (#2 in figure) securing the operation panel to the equipment
after reinstalling the upper cover.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-102
 Layout of Operation Panel Connectors
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-103
10. - 2 Controller Unit 2. Release the clamps.
FPCC1006.AI

• Rear cover
• Left cover
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-104
3. Disconnect the connectors. 4. Remove the controller unit.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-105
10. - 3 HDD
 Replacing Procedure
The service parts HDD is installed with the OS and main unit software.
However, because the main unit software may not be of the latest version, if the HDD
has been replaced, perform full installation of the main unit software and re-installation
of individual data.
Prepare the latest main unit software CD-R when replacing the HDD.
<REMARKS>
FPCC1007.AI
The following describes the full installation procedure using the DI Tool. However the
USB memory can be used instead for installation.
 Removing Procedure {MC:12.3.3_Full Installation from USB Memory}

1. Turn OFF the power of the equipment.
• Lower front cover
• Lower front inside cover 2. Replace the HDD.
2. Remove the HDD. { Removing Procedure/ Reinstalling Procedure}
3. Turn ON the power of the equipment, and check the version of the
main unit software displayed at startup.
4. Start the M-Utility, and set the network settings.

{IN:7.2.4_System Management/Network}
→ When network settings complete, the equipment will reboot automatically.
5. Prepare the PC for servicing.

{MU:4.3.1_Connecting the PC for Servicing to the Network}
{MU:4.3.2_Starting the DI Tool (DPX7 PC Tool Function)}
{MU:4.3.3_Connecting DI Tool to the Equipment}
<INSTRUCTIONS>
If the version of the main unit software in the HD is old: Perform step 6. and
onwards.
If the version of the main unit software in the HD is latest: Perform step 7.
and onwards.
6. Perform full installation of the latest main unit software and

installation of the printer application in the MCT board.
{MC:12.2.2_Full Installation steps 1 to 8}
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MC-106
7. Restore the individual data.
8. Set the system date and time, film counter, and remaining number of
films.
9. Set whether to enable the [User Settable] function, and save the user
settable image to the new HDD when enabled.
{MU:5.4_Setting Output of User Settable Images}
<NOTE>
• For the service parts HDD, the default value of [User Settable] is set to
[Disable].
• For the service parts HDD for the equipment with main unit software
version V3.0 or later, the default image of [User Settable] has been
changed from the SMPTE pattern to the grid pattern for checking
unevenness.

11. If directory settings of the FTP site have been changed, set back the
original settings.
12. Remove the CD-R from the PC for servicing.

13. Shutdown the PC for servicing.
14. Disconnect the network cable of the PC for servicing from the network
to which the equipment is connected.
15. Reboot the equipment, and check that it starts and operates normally.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MC-107
10. - 4 MTH Board
FPCC1008.AI
CAUTION
• Replace the MTH board if the lithium battery has worn out.
• Return the old MTH board to the Parts Center (factory).
• Improper replacement of the battery may result in explosion. When replacing
the lithium battery, use the battery designated by FUJIFILM Corporation or
use an equivalent battery. Dispose the old battery as specified by FUJIFILM
Corporation.
1. Remove the controller unit.

{MC:10.2_Controller Unit}
2. Remove the PRN board, MCT board, and image memory board.
3. Disconnect all connectors on the MTH board.
4. Remove the MTH board.

{SP:10A_CONTROLLER}
006-267-04
10.02.2006 FM4992
MC-108
10. - 5 MCT Board 3. Set the DIPSW (S2) of the new MCT board.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
Turn ON bit7 and bit8 of S2.
FPCC1009.AI
1. Remove the controller unit.

{MC:10.2_Controller Unit}
2. Remove the MCT board.

{SP:10A_CONTROLLER}
 Replacing Procedure 4. Mount the MCT board to the equipment, and turn ON the power.
→ After several minutes, the operation panel will show a menu screen.
If the MCT board has been replaced, it will be necessary to rewrite the software in the
MCT board (printer OS and printer applications) with that in the HD.
However, mounting the MCT board which is a service part to this equipment may
5. Rewrite the printer OS.
disable the equipment from starting due to software problems. Therefore, if the MCT [OS(PRT)] → [ENT] → [YES]
board has been replaced, rewrite the software as follows.
→ The message “Wait for a while.” appears. When rewriting completes normally,
1. Turn OFF the power of the equipment. the message “Completed.” appears.
2. Remove the MCT board. 6. [QUIT]
{ Removing Procedure} 7. Rewrite the printer application.

[APPL(PRT)] → [ENT] → [YES]
→ The message “Wait for a while” appears. When rewriting completes normally,
the message “Completed” appears.
8. [QUIT]
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-109
[Power OFF] → [YES]
10. Remove the MCT board, and set DIPSW (S2) back to its original
settings.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
Turn OFF bit7 and bit8 of S2.
11. Mount the MCT board to the equipment.

12. Reboot the equipment, and check that it starts and operates normally.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-110
11. SORTER <NOTE>

• Remove the bins in the order of bin 4, bin 3, and bin 2.
• Remove the covers in the following order.
(4) Film release unit upper cover: (4)
FPCC110A.AI
(5) Sorter front cover: (4) → (5)
(6) Sorter rear cover: (4) → (6)
(7) Sorter lower right cover: (4) → (6) → (7)
11. - 1 Sorter Covers
FPCC0106.AI

• (1) Bin 4
• (2) Bin 3
• (3) Bin 2
• (5) Sorter front cover
• (6) Sorter rear cover
• (7) Sorter lower right cover
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-111
• (2) Upper cover
• (7) Sorter bin support
<NOTE>
• As the film release unit front cover and film release unit right cover are
secured with screws inside, remove them together.
• Remove covers in the following order.
(1) Upper small cover: (1)
(2) Upper cover: (1) → (2)
(3) Film release unit gear cover: (1) → (2) → (3)
(4) Conveyor unit upper right cover: (4)
(5) Film release unit front cover/film release unit
right cover: (1) → (2) → (4) → (5)
(6) Film release unit rear cover: (1) → (2) → (4) → (5) → (6)
(7) Sorter bin support: (1) → (2) → (3) → (7)
<NOTE>
As the attached and secured part of the bin will move slightly up and down,
reinstall slightly downwards.
After reinstalling, check that each bin is not touching the sorter film release
roller.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-112
11. - 2 Sorter
FPCC1104.AI
1. Remove the covers in the following order.

• (1) Bin 4
• (2) Bin 3
• (3) Bin 2
• (5) Sorter front cover
• (6) Sorter rear cover
• (7) Sorter lower right cover
• (9) Upper cover
• (12) Film release unit front cover/Film release unit right cover
• (14) Sorter bin support
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-113
2. Remove the sorter.
<NOTE>
When removing the solenoid, be careful not to drop or lose springs and
arms, etc.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-114
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-115
 Reinstalling Procedure • Rotate the gear of the film release unit shown in the figure in the arrow
direction, and secure the drive conveyance gear where it touches the flange.
<NOTE>
• When reinstalling the sorter, make sure the cable does not get caught.
• When reinstalling the sorter, insert the pins on the front and rear frames of
the film release unit into the grooves at the base of the sorter unit properly
and secure.
• As the attached and secured part of the bin will move slightly up and down,
reinstall slightly downwards.
After reinstalling, check that each bin is not touching the sorter film release
roller.
<REMARKS>
Assemble the solenoid (SOLT1) as shown below and install to the film release unit
side.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-116
11. - 3 Sorter Conveyance Gear
FPCC1105.AI
 Gear Structure
<NOTE>
When installing gears, install the following gears with flange last.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-117
12. INSTALLING THE MAIN UNIT 12.1 Preparations
SOFTWARE 1. Turn ON the power of the equipment.
The main unit software is supplied on CD-R. The DI Tool is required for installing it. 2. Prepare the PC for servicing.
 Types of Main Unit Software Installations {MU:4.3.1_Connecting the PC for Servicing to the Network}
• Version upgrade: {MU:4.3.2_Starting the DI Tool (DPX7 PC Tool Function)}
The concerned files excluding individual data of the currently installed software are {MU:4.3.3_Connecting DI Tool to the Equipment}
overwritten. <NOTE>
• Full installation:
Check that the directory setting of the FTP site is “C:\Program Files\
The concerned files including individual data of the currently installed software are FujiFilm\DRYPIX”.
overwritten.
• Printer software installation:
The printer programs in the HD of the equipment are installed in the MCT board
(overwritten). <REMARKS>
This manual describes the procedure for connecting the PC for servicing to this
This equipment supports the version upgrade and full installation of the main unit equipment via the network, but it is also possible to directly connect the PC for
software using the USB memory. servicing to this equipment using the 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX crossing cable.
CAUTION
Do not perform settings, etc. of the equipment during the installation of the
main unit software.
<NOTE>
• As performing full installation will clear the individual data in the HD, the
individual data needs to be installed after completing full installation. Use the
latest individual data for installation.
• In version upgrades, individual data will be preserved.
• For the equipment shipped with the main unit software version V3.0 or later,
the grid pattern for checking unevenness is set as the default image of User
Settable pattern. For the equipment with earlier version, the SMPTE pattern is
set.
• For equipment with main unit software version V3.0 or later at shipment,
when equipment data is read, the DPX7 PC Tool screen [Clients:] list shows
“MammoQCTest”. However, if the version has been upgraded from an earlier
version, as this will not be displayed, add and register new clients.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MC-118
12.2 Installing from the DI Tool  Version Upgrading Procedure
<NOTE>
12.2.1 Version Upgrade • For the equipment shipped with the main unit software version V3.0 or later,
 Flow of Data When Version Upgrading Settable pattern. For the equipment with earlier version, the SMPTE pattern is
set.
• Upgrading the main unit software to V3.0 or later will not replace the User
Settable image in the HD.
1. Insert the latest main unit software CD-R in the CD-ROM drive of the
PC for servicing, and copy the main unit software to the FTP folder of
the PC for servicing.
“Printer name” → [Upgrading] → Select “CD-ROM drive” → Select [PC]
at [File Copy To] → [Copy]
→ The main unit software is copied to the FTP folder of the PC for servicing.
When completed, [File Copy Finish!!] screen appears.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MC-119
2. [OK] 3. Select [Upgrading] at [Load System Files].
Then select [PRT APL] and [PRT OS] at [Install] → [Execute]
<NOTE>
[PRT INST] should be selected additionally when changing the version of
the printer installer program or when errors occur.
→ The main unit software is installed (version upgraded) in the equipment, and
the printer OS program and printer applications programs in the HD are
installed in the MCT board.
When installation completed, the [System File Load Finish!!] screen appears.
<REMARKS>
The version of the main unit software is upgraded after the equipment is
rebooted.
4. [OK]
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MC-120
5. Reboot the equipment from the PC for servicing to upgrade the 11. Disconnect the network cable of the PC for servicing from the network
software. to which the equipment is connected.
“Printer name” → [Control] → [System Config] → [Reboot] → [Reboot
All] → [Reset]
12. Check that the equipment whose software version has been upgraded
starts and operates normally.
→ The equipment reboots. As communication is cut off when the equipment is

rebooted, the [LOGIN Failure] screen appears.
6. [OK]
original settings.

006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-121
12.2.2 Full Installation  Full Installation Procedure
 Flow of Data When Performing Full Installation 1. If the PC for servicing does not contain the latest individual data,
import the individual data from the equipment.
“Printer name” → [Data Transfer] → [Indv] → [All] → [Printer=>PC]
→ The individual data is transferred to the PC for servicing. When the data
transfer is completed, the [File transfer is completed.] screen appears.
2. [OK]
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MC-122
3. Insert the latest main unit software CD-R in the CD-ROM drive of the 5. Select [Full] at [Load System Files].
PC for servicing, and copy the main unit software to the FTP folder of
the PC for servicing. Then select [PRT APL] and [PRT OS] at [Install] → [Execute]
“Printer name” → [Upgrading] → Select “CD-ROM drive” → Select [PC] <NOTE>

at [File Copy To] → [Copy] [PRT INST] should be selected additionally when changing the version of
→ The main unit software is copied to the FTP folder of the PC for servicing.
4. [OK]
→ The main unit software is installed (full installation) in the equipment, and
the printer OS program and printer applications programs in the HD are
When installation completed, the [System File Load Finish!!] screen appears.
<REMARKS>
The main unit software is replaced with that of fully installed after the equipment
is rebooted.
6. [OK]
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MC-123
7. Reboot the equipment from the PC for servicing so that the changes 9. After the equipment is rebooted, restore the individual data.
made in the main unit software become effective.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
The individual data needs to be restored if full installation has been
All] → [Reset] performed. To restore, use the latest individual data of the corresponding
printer saved in the PC for servicing or individual data copied at the step 1.
 Installing the Individual Data in the PC for Servicing

(i) “Printer name” → [Data Transfer] → [Indv] → [All] → [PC=>Printer]
<REMARKS>
After the equipment reboots, the PC for servicing and the equipment will be re-
connected when the [Control] menu used for rebooting is changed to this [Data
Transfer] menu.

8. [OK]
→ The individual data in the PC for servicing is sent to the equipment. When the
data transfer is completed, the [File transfer is completed.] screen appears.
(ii) [OK]
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MC-124
 When Restoring the Individual Data Saved on FD (iii) Select “Drive A” → [OK]
If the PC for servicing does not contain the latest individual data, restore the
individual data backed up on the FD.
(i) Insert the FD with the latest individual data in the FDD of the PC for
servicing.
(ii) Copy the individual data saved on FD to the PC for servicing.
“Printer name” → [Data Transfer] → [Indv] → [All] → [Restore]
→ The individual data is copied to the PC for servicing. When the data copy is
completed, the [File transfer is completed.] screen appears.
(iv) [OK]
→ The [Restore] window for selecting the folder containing the individual data
appears.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MC-125
(v) Transfer the copied individual data to the equipment. 11. [OK]
“Printer name” → [Data Transfer] → [Indv] → [All] → [PC=>Printer]
12. After rebooting the equipment, reconnect the PC for servicing and
equipment.
[Data Transfer]
<REMARKS>
After the equipment reboots, as the PC for servicing and equipment are not
connected automatically, change the menu of the DPX7 PC Tool function, and re-
connect the PC for servicing and equipment.
13. Set the system date and time.

“Printer name” → [Control] → [System Config] → [Set Date/Time]
{MU:4.7 [PC9-2-1]_Set Date/Time}
14. Set the film counter.

“Printer name” → [Control] → [System Config] → [Set Counters]
{MU:4.7 [PC9-2-5]_Set Counters}
15. Set the number of remaining films.

“Printer name” → [Control] → [System Config] → [Set Remain. Films]
{MU:4.7 [PC9-2-6]_Set Remain. Films}

→ The copied individual data in the PC for servicing is transferred to the
17. If directory settings of the FTP site have been changed, set back the
original settings.
equipment. When the data transfer is completed, [File transfer is completed.]
screen appears.
(vi) [OK]
10. Reboot the equipment from the PC for servicing so that the changes
of the individual data become effective. 20. Disconnect the network cable of the PC for servicing from the network
All] → [Reset] 21. Check that the equipment which has been fully installed starts and
→ The equipment reboots. As communication is cut off when the equipment is operates normally.
<REMARKS>
The restored individual data is effective after the equipment is rebooted.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MC-126
12.2.3 Printer Software Installation  Printer Software Installation Procedure
 Flow of Data When Performing Printer Software Installation 1. “Printer name” → [Upgrading] → [No File Loading] at [Load System
Files]
Then select [PRT APL] and [PRT OS] at [Install] → [Execute].
<NOTE>
→ The printer OS program and printer applications programs in the HD are

When installation completed, the [Software Install Finish!!] screen appears.
<REMARKS>
The printer software is replaced with that of installed after the equipment is
rebooted.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MC-127
2. [OK] 8. Disconnect the network cable of the PC for servicing from the network
3. Reboot the equipment from the PC for servicing to so that the changes
of the printer software are effective. 9. Check that the equipment whose printer software has been installed
All] → [Reset]

4. [OK]
original settings.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MC-128
12.3 Installing from the USB Memory 5. Insert the CD-R containing the main unit software to be copied in the
CD-ROM drive of the PC for servicing, and copy the main unit software
to the USB memory connected to the PC for servicing.
12.3.1 Copying the Main Unit Software to the USB Memory
“Printer name” → [Upgrading] → Select “CD-ROM drive” → Select [USB
1. Turn ON the power of the PC for servicing. Memory] at [File Copy To] → [Copy]
2. Connect the USB memory to the USB port of the PC for servicing.
<NOTE>
Is not connecting the PC for servicing to the equipment, as the [LOGIN
<NOTE> Failure] screen will be displayed after clicking [Upgrading], click [OK].
USB memory space required for copying the main unit software: More than
85 MB CAUTION
Do not remove the USB memory while copying (while the USB memory access
3. Create a new folder called “DRYPIX4000” in the USB memory drive. lamp is blinking).
<NOTE>
The root directory of other drives of the PC for servicing should not contain
folders with the same name as the “DRYPIX4000” folder created in the USB
memory drive.
4. Start the DI Tool and then startup the DPX7 PC Tool function.
<REMARKS>
To copy the main unit software to the USB memory, there is no need to connect
the network of the PC for servicing and equipment.
→ The main unit software is copied to the “DRYPIX4000” folder of the USB
memory.
6. [OK]
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MC-129
9. Display the [Safely Remove Hardware] screen from the task tray of
the PC for servicing, execute the cancellation procedure of the USB
memory connected to ensure removal can be carried out safely.
10. Remove the USB memory from the PC for servicing.

006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MC-130
12.3.2 Upgrading the Version from the USB Memory 7. Execute the installation of the [OS (PRT)] and [APPL (PRT)] at [Reload
Software] of the M-Utility.
1. Copy the main unit software to be upgraded to the USB memory.
{MU:3.3 [1-1-9]_Reload Software}
{MC:12.3.1_Copying the Main Unit Software to the USB Memory}
<REMARKS>
2. Turn ON the power of the equipment. The main unit software will be upgraded after the equipment is rebooted.
3. Start the M-Utility during initialization.

8. Execute [Reboot All] of the M-Utility and reboot the equipment so that
4. Connect the USB memory copied with the main unit software to the the software is upgraded.
USB cable connector for servicing. {MU:3.3 [1-1-8-2]_Reboot All}
9. Check that the equipment whose software version has been upgraded
5. Execute [Upgrade] at [Load System Files (from USB)] of the M-Utility.

{MU:3.3 [1-1-7]_Load System Files (from USB)}
6. After completing version upgrading, remove the USB memory.

<REMARKS>
After executing M-Utility operations, no commands need to be executed for
removing the USB memory.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-131
12.3.3 Full Installation from the USB Memory 6. Execute [Full Installation] at [Load System Files (from USB)] of the
M-Utility.
1. Copy the main unit software to be fully installed in the USB memory.
{MU:3.3 [1-1-7]_Load System Files (from USB)}
{MC:12.3.1_Copying the Main Unit Software to the USB Memory}
7. After completing full installation, remove the USB memory.
<REMARKS>
3. Start the M-Utility during initialization. After executing M-Utility operations, no commands need to be executed for
removing the USB memory.
4. Execute [Save Config.] of the M-Utility, and save the individual data
before full installation in the HD of the equipment.
{MU:3.3 [1-1-3-2]_Save Config.}
8. Execute the installation of the [OS (PRT)] and [APPL (PRT)] at [Reload
Software] of the M-Utility.
<REMARKS> {MU:3.3 [1-1-9]_Reload Software}
At step 4, individual data can be saved in the USB memory by executing [Save to <REMARKS>
USB] of the M-Utility.
{MU:3.3 [1-6-1]_Save to USB} The main unit software will be replaced with that of fully installed after the
If the latest individual data has already been saved in the USB memory, skip this equipment is rebooted.
step.
5. Connect the USB memory copied with the main unit software to the changes of the main unit software become effective.
USB cable connector for servicing. {MU:3.3 [1-1-8-2]_Reboot All}
<NOTE>
The operation panel display will be in English after the equipment is
rebooted.

11. Execute [Recover] of the M-Utility to recover the individual data saved
prior to the full installation.
{MU:3.3 [1-1-3-1]_Recover}
<REMARKS>
• The individual data recovered after the equipment is rebooted will become
effective.
• At step 11, if individual data was saved in the USB memory in step 4 or if there
exists USB memory already saving the latest individual data, execute [Load
from USB] of the M-Utility to load the individual data to the equipment.
{MU:3.3 [1-6-2]_Load from USB}
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MC-132
the individual data becomes effective.
{MU:3.3 [1-1-8-2]_Reboot All}

14. Execute [Set Date/time] of the M-Utility to set the system date and
time.
{MU:3.3 [1-1-1]_Set Date/time}
15. Execute [Set Remain. Films] of the M-Utility to set the remaining
number of films.
{MU:3.3 [5-1-2]_Set Remain. Films}
16. End the M-Utility.

<NOTE>
Film counter settings cannot be performed on the equipment. (The film
counter is reset during full installation.)
To set the film counter, connect the PC for servicing, and perform settings
from the DI Tool (DPX7 PC Tool function).
17. Check that the equipment which has been fully installed starts and
operates normally.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MC-133
BLANK PAGE
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
CONTROL SHEET

04.25.2005 02 Revised (FM4589) 1-5, 9-223
02.28.2006 03 Revised (FM4704) 4, 5, 10, 12-15, 17-20, 23, 24, 24.1,
24.2, 25, 26, 29, 36, 37.1, 37.2,
DRYPIX 4000 SERVICE MANUAL 46.1, 46.2, 48, 61, 75-82, 84-90,
92-98, 100, 102, 105, 105.1, 105.2,
106-112, 114, 120, 121, 123-126,
128, 130, 130.1, 130.2, 131, 134,
136, 137, 139, 140, 142-145,
147-150, 154, 157.1, 157.2, 158,
159, 165, 188, 196-198, 200,
202-204, 206, 207, 210, 212-215,
217, 218, 220-227
10.02.2006 04 Revised (Change of corporate name and 114, 115
SERVICE MODE (MU) 02.15.2007 05

Revised (Revision for main unit software version 2-5, 15.1, 15.2, 21, 24, 24.1, 46,
V3.0, DI Tool version V3.0, etc.) (FM5080) 75-77, 85-88, 90, 92, 93, 93.1, 93.2,
94, 96, 102, 105.1, 110, 111, 111.1,
111.2, 112, 131, 134, 136, 137, 139,
140, 142-145, 147-150, 165, 188,
197, 198, 200, 202, 204-206,
210-217, 217.1, 217.2, 218, 220,
222-231

02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-1
1. OUTLINE OF SERVICE MODE 1.3 Operations of Each Utility
Each utility is operated by selecting menus displayed on the color LCD touch panel.
Each of these menus has a tree structure classified by function. Selecting a menu
1.1 Transition of Modes in DRYPIX 4000 item at a certain menu displays the menu below.
The service mode provides functions required for troubleshooting and maintenance.  U-Utility Operations
The service mode consists of the following two modes.
 U-Utility (User-Utility) Mode  [EXIT]
Mode for the user to perform normal maintenance operations (density measurement, Touching at the top menu exits the U-Utility.
etc.)  [EXECUTE]
 M-Utility (Maintenance-Utility) Mode For executing the menu displayed. If a lower menu exists, shifts to the next menu.
Mode for performing troubleshooting and maintenance operations of this equipment.  [QUIT]
Other than these service modes, the following four modes are also provided. Shifts to the display before the current menu was executed.
 Initial Processing Mode  [ ↑ ], [ ↓ ]

Mode in which initialization and self-diagnosis are performed when the power is turned For moving up and down amongst the items displayed.
on.
 [1/3], [2/3], [3/3]
 Routine Mode Shifts to the next or previous display of the same menu if there exists more than two
The usual ready state. displays in a menu.
 Abnormal Indication Mode  M-Utility Operations

Indicates errors which have occurred.
 [EXIT]
 Shutdown Processing Mode
Touching at the top menu exits the M-Utility.
Mode for discharging film currently being processed and terminating the equipment.
 [ENT]
1.2 Note on Executing Service Mode For executing the menu displayed and confirming values entered. If a lower menu
exists, shifts to the next menu.
Turning the power OFF while writing in the HD, or while exchanging data with the PC
for servicing or USB memory may damage the data.  [QUIT]
Shifts to the display before the current menu was executed.
 [ ↑ ], [ ↓ ]
For moving up and down amongst the items displayed.
 [BACK], [NEXT]
Shifts to the next or previous display of the same menu if there exists more than two
displays in a menu.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
DRYPIX 4000 Service Manual MU-1
MU-2
2. U-UTILITY (USER-UTILITY) A
The U-Utility functions are intended for both the user and service engineer. [7] SET ALARM (2/3)
<NOTE> [7-1] SET ALARM
• Transition to the U-Utility can be reserved in the routine mode (“Printing” [7-2] KEY TOUCH TONE
display).
• Menus which can be executed differ according to the state before transition. [8] AUTOMATED F.D.C. (2/3)
[9] SET DATE/TIME (2/3)
Other than the U-Utility, there are functions for managing jobs during printing, for the
user to acquire logs, etc. [10] SOFTWARE VER. (2/3)
[11] REPRINT (2/3)
{MU:2.4_Other Functions}
[12] ANIMATION (3/3)
2.1 U-Utility Menu Tree [13] REMAINING FILMS (3/3)

[14] QC (3/3)
<REMARKS> [14-1] QC TEST PATTERN
The numbers on the right side of menu names indicate the tab numbers on the [14-2] HISTORY
operation panel.
[14-2-1] EXTERNAL DENSITOMETER
[14-2-2] FORMAT
U-Utility
[14-2-3] ARTIFACTS
[1] AUTO F.D.C. (1/3)
[14-3] SETTINGS
[2] TEST PATTERN (1/3)
[14-3-1] BUILT-IN DENSITOMETER
[3] UNLOCK TRAY (1/3)
[14-3-1-1] AUTO
[4] PRINT QUEUE (1/3)
[14-3-1-2] MANUAL
[5] SET COUNTERS (1/3)
[5-1] SET COUNTERS
[14-3-3] FORMAT
[5-2] DISPLAY LIST
[14-4] LUT
[6] ECONOMY MODE (1/3)
[15] MAMMO.QC
[6-1] SAVE POWER
[6-2] CALENDAR
[6-3] DETAIL
[6-3-1] TIME OF OFFICE CLOSED
[6-3-2] TRANSITION TIME
[6-3-3] SCHEDULER
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-3
2.2 Starting and Ending the U-Utility  Making U-Utility (Density Correction) Reservations While
Replenishing Film
 Starting the U-Utility Before inserting the film tray when replenishing film, touching the [AUTO F.D.C.]
button reserves transition to the U-Utility. When film is loaded and the film tray is
inserted, the U-Utility starts, enabling density correction.
 Starting from the Initialization Processing Mode After this, all films printed after ending the U-Utility will be subject to density correction,
While the software version number is displayed, touch the [UTILITY] button. The including image data already accumulated. However, density correction will not be
software version number is displayed for about 15 seconds. performed on films processed before reservation.
 Ending the U-Utility

At the U-Utility main menu, touch [EXIT] on the operation panel.
 Starting from the Routine Mode

Touch the [UTILITY] button on the operation panel.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-4
2.3 Details of U-Utility Commands [2] TEST PATTERN
[1] AUTO F.D.C.
<FUNCTION>
Command for printing test patterns (SMPTE, 17-Steps, User Settable, Spatial
<FUNCTION> Resolution).
Command for printing the 24-steps pattern, and calculating 24-steps density correction <NOTE>
from the density data measured by the density measurement section.
• To print 17-Steps/User Settable/Spatial Resolution patterns on this menu,
<REMARKS> set [17-Steps Pattern]/[User Settable]/[Spatial Resolution] to “Enable” at the
• Unloaded film trays are not displayed. [Option] setting of the M-Utility beforehand.
• Degeneration film trays are rejected. {MU:3.3 [1-1-2-4]_Option}
• The number of prints is fixed at one. • The Spatial Resolution pattern is available from main unit software version
V2.0 or later.
<OPERATIONS> the grid pattern for checking unevenness is set as the default image of User
1. Select the film tray. set.
[TRAY1]/[TRAY 2] Settable image in the HD.
<REMARKS> • To output the desired User Settable pattern, save the user settable images in
Multiple film trays can be selected. the equipment beforehand.
2. To change the shift value (Dmax) for high density correction, select
<REMARKS>
[Dmax ↑ ↓].
[4] to [-3] • Unloaded film trays are not displayed.
• Degeneration film trays are rejected.
3. Check the printed results. • The number of prints is fixed at one.
<IMPLEMENTATION OF CHANGES>
<OPERATIONS>
The changes made will be effective immediately.
1. Select the test pattern.
[SMPTE]/[17-Steps]/[User Settable]/[Spatial Resolution]
2. Select the film tray.

[TRAY1]/[TRAY 2]
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-5
3. Select the Dmax. (17-Steps pattern, Spatial Resolution pattern only) [3] UNLOCK TRAY
<REMARKS>
With the 17-Steps pattern and Spatial Resolution pattern, selecting the Dmax <FUNCTION>
starts printing. Command for clearing the tray lock and opening the tray.
<REMARKS>
4. Select the AE Title.
• Unloaded film trays are not displayed.
5. Select the number of printing frames. • If a film tray is not inserted with the shutter, the film tray selection will be rejected.
• Degeneration film trays are rejected.
[1]/[2]/[4]/[6]/[8]/[12]
6. Select the LUT number.

<OPERATIONS>
[LUT1]/[LUT2]/[LUT3]/[LUT4]/[LUT5]/[LUT6]/[LUT7]/[LUT8]
7. Select the interpolation type. 1. Insert the shutter into the film tray, and select the corresponding film
tray.
[SHARP]/[MEDIUM]/[SMOOTH]
[TRAY1]/[TRAY 2]
8. Select the interpolation method.
2. Select whether to clear film counter or not.
[CUBIC]/[NONE]
[YES]/[NO]
9. Check the printing results.
[4] PRINT QUEUE
<FUNCTION>
Command for operating registered print jobs.
<OPERATIONS>
1. To perform priority printing, specify the job, and select [URGENT

PRINT].
2. To delete a registered job, specify the job and select [DELETE].
3. To delete all registered jobs, select [DELETE ALL].
4. Select [YES] or [NO].
5. [YES]
→ The selected item is executed.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-6
[5] SET COUNTERS [5-2] DISPLAY LIST
<FUNCTION>
[5-1] SET COUNTERS Command for displaying the number of films used in the specified range.
<FUNCTION> <OPERATIONS>
Command for displaying the number of films used per film tray, and clearing this count
to zero. 1. Select “Reporting by”.
<REMARKS> [Day]/[Week]/[Month]
• Unloaded film trays are not displayed. 2. Select “Count by”.

• The film count per film tray is displayed in decimal 4-digits, and increased at the end [Tray]/[IP Address]/[AE Title]
of film removal (becomes 0 after 9999).
• The total film count per film tray is displayed in decimal 8-digits, and increased at 3. [EXECUTE]
the end of film removal (becomes 0 after 99999999).
→ The number of films used is displayed.
• The total film count per film tray cannot be cleared to zero.
4. Check the number of films used.
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select [CLEAR TRAY 1] or [CLEAR TRAY 2].
3. [YES]
→ The film count of the selected tray is cleared.
006-267-00
02.28.2005 FM4426 (1)
MU-7
[6] ECONOMY MODE [6-2] CALENDAR
This function consists of three modes; [SCREEN SAVER], [STAND-BY], and [SLEEP]. <FUNCTION>
• [SCREEN SAVER] : Turns OFF the backlight of the operation panel. Command for setting nonconsultation days. The time set at “[6-3-1] TIME OF OFFICE
• [STAND-BY] : [SCREEN SAVER] function, decreases the temperature CLOSED” on days set as nonconsultation days is the economy mode.
level, and turns OFF motor excitation.
<NOTE>
• [SLEEP] : [STAND-BY] function, and turns OFF temperature
adjustment. Nonconsultation days can be set to one year ahead.
<NOTE>
If shifted to the [SLEEP], recovery takes the same time as the start of the <OPERATIONS>
equipment at power ON.
1. Touch the day to be set as a nonconusltation day on the calendar.
<REMARKS> → With each touch, the setting changes from “Red (Whole day closed)”→”Yellow
Under the following conditions, the equipment will recover from the economy mode to (Afternoon closed)”→”Green (Morning closed)”→”Gray (normal consultation
the idle state. day)”.
• When printing is started by client. <REMARKS>
• User operations (Touch of screen)
By selecting the day (Monday, Tuesday, etc.), the same day can be set for the
• When errors occur. whole month.
[6-1] SAVE POWER <IMPLEMENTATION OF CHANGES>

Command to be set when executing [STAND-BY] or [SLEEP] immediately. The changes made will be effective immediately.
<NOTE>
If “[6-3-3] SCHEDULER” has been set, it will be executed with priority.
(Even if the other mode on this menu is set)
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select [STAND-BY] or [SLEEP].

→ The mode selected will be executed immediately.
006-267-00
02.28.2005 FM4426 (1)
MU-8
[6-3] DETAIL [6-3-2] TRANSITION TIME
[6-3-1] TIME OF OFFICE CLOSED <FUNCTION>

Command for setting the transition time to each economy mode from the last
<FUNCTION> operations on this equipment.
Command for setting the time for shifting to the economy mode of the nonconsultation
day set at “[6-2] CALENDAR”.
<OPERATIONS>
Three types of settings are available (whole day closed, afternoon closed, and
morning closed), and the closed hours of sequential days can also be set together (for 1. Select the time to start shift to [Screen Saver] (15 minutes to 120
example, the next day of an afternoon closed day can be set as whole day closed). minutes).
<REMARKS>
2. Select the time to start shift to [Stand-By] (15 minutes to 120 minutes).
• “[6-3-1] TIME OF OFFICE CLOSED” and “[6-3-3] SCHEDULER” can be set
individually, and the closed hours set at either can be set to the economy mode. 3. Select the time to start shift to [Sleep] (15 minutes to 120 minutes).
• If the same time is set in both settings, “[6-3-1] TIME OF OFFICE CLOSED” will be
given priority. <IMPLEMENTATION OF CHANGES>
<OPERATIONS>
[6-3-3] SCHEDULER
1. Touch the time to be changed.
<FUNCTION>
2. Change the time by touching the [↑] and [↓] buttons. Command for setting the economy mode for one week (by day and time).
<IMPLEMENTATION OF CHANGES> <OPERATIONS>

1. Select [ECONOMY MODE] or [NONE ECONOMY].
2. Select the starting time (day/time).
3. Select the ending time (day/time).

<REMARKS>
• “[6-3-1] TIME OF OFFICE CLOSED” and “[6-3-3] SCHEDULER” can be set
individually, and the closed hours set at either can be set to the economy mode.
• If the same time is set in both settings, “[6-3-1] TIME OF OFFICE CLOSED” will be
given priority.
006-267-00
02.28.2005 FM4426 (1)
MU-9
[7] SET ALARM [8] AUTOMATED F.D.C.
[7-1] SET ALARM <FUNCTION>

Command for setting automatic density correction execution.
<FUNCTION>
<DEFAULT>
Command for setting alarm.
[By each film lot No.]
<DEFAULT>
<OPERATIONS>
[Alarm]: ON, [Volume]: HIGH
<OPERATIONS> 1. Select the timing to execute automatic density correction.

[By each film pack.]/[By each film lot No.]/[None]
1. Select the alarm. <REMARKS>
[ON]/[PULSE]/[OFF]
• [By each film pack.] : Automatic density correction is executed when film pack is
2. Select the volume. replaced.
• [By each film lot No.] : Automatic density correction is executed when film lot
[HIGH]/[MEDIUM]/[LOW] number is changed.
The changes made will be effective immediately. <IMPLEMENTATION OF CHANGES>
[7-2] KEY TOUCH TONE
[9] SET DATE/TIME
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting key touch tone.
<FUNCTION>
<DEFAULT> Command for setting the system date and time.
[Key touch tone]: ON, [Volume]: HIGH
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Enter the system date and time (year/month/day/hour/minute).
1. Select the key touch tone.
[ON]/[OFF] <IMPLEMENTATION OF CHANGES>
2. Select the volume.
[HIGH]/[MEDIUM]/[LOW]
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-10
[10] SOFTWARE VER. [11] REPRINT
<FUNCTION> <FUNCTION>
Command for displaying the software version. Command for reprinting images printed in the past.
<NOTE>
<OPERATIONS>
To execute this menu, there is a need to set [Reprint Function] to “Enable” for
1. Check the software version. each modality using the M-Utility or DPX7 PC Tool function beforehand.
{MU:3.3 [1-1-2-3]_Reprint Function}, {MU:4.7 [PC1-3-1-12]_Reprint},
{MU:5.2_Setting Reprint}
<REMARKS>
The image storage area for HDD reprints is 6 Gbyte. (Storage period is about 1 week)
<OPERATIONS>
<NOTE>
Before executing this menu, check that there are no print queues remaining
inside the equipment. If remaining and these images are not required, delete
using [PRINT QUEUE] of the U-Utility.
1. Touch [REPRINT].
→ The date of the oldest image stored is displayed.
2. Enter the user ID.

<REMARKS>
The default user ID is “1111”, and this can be changed using the DPX7 PC Tool
function.
3. Enter the print ID to be reprinted.

<REMARKS>
Enter the print ID printed as the annotation on the film.
4. Set the number of copies.

→ Images are reprinted after the U-Utility ends.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-11
[12] ANIMATION [13] REMAINING FILMS
Command for setting the display speed of animation during film loading and removal Command for setting the number of films remaining.
of jammed film.
<OPERATION>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Touch the [Slow] or [Fast] button and set the display speed.
The display speed can be set in nine levels. 2. Change the number of films remaining.
[+1]/[-1]
2. To check the display speed, touch [PREVIEW].
→ The test window appears and preview animation is displayed. 3. Select [YES] or [NO].
3. [ENTER] 4. [YES]
→ The number of films remaining of the tray selected changes.
The changes made will be effective when the [ENTER] button is touched. <IMPLEMENTATION OF CHANGES>
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-12
[14] QC [14-1] QC TEST PATTERN
<FUNCTION>
<NOTE>
Command for printing test patterns and displaying/saving density values measured by
To execute this menu, there is a need to set [QC] to “Enable” using the M-Utility the built-in densitometer of the equipment.
or DPX7 PC Tool function beforehand.
{MU:3.3 [1-1-2-4]_Option/QC}, {MU:4.7 [PC1-2-9-12]_QC} <OPERATIONS>
<LOGIN METHOD> 1. [QC TEST PATTERN]
1. [QC]
[TRAY 1]/[TRAY 2]
→ [QC Login] screen is displayed.
2. Enter the user ID (4 digits).

3. [EXECUTE]
→ The QC test pattern is printed, and the measured density values are displayed
<REMARKS> on the operation panel.
The default value of the user ID is “1111”, and this can be changed using the
DPX7 PC Tool function.
4. Select [SAVE]/[CANCEL].
• [SAVE] : The measured results are saved, and return to the tray selection
window.
3. [ENTER]
• [CANCEL] : The measured results are not saved, and return to the tray
→ [QC MAIN MENU] screen is displayed. selection window.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-13
[14-2] HISTORY 6. [ENTER]
→ The measured values of the external densitometer set are displayed at the
<FUNCTION> [Result in detail] window. If these new values exceed the established criteria,
Command for displaying the QC measurement results, and correcting these results the background is displayed in red.
based on the printed QC test pattern.
<NOTE>
<OPERATIONS> To use “Density 4”, there is a need to set “Density 4” to “Enable” using the
M-Utility or DPX7 PC Tool function beforehand.
1. Execute “[14-1] QC TEST PATTERN”. {MU:3.3 [1-1-2-5-2]_Enabling Step 4}, {MU:4.7 [PC1-2-9-12-1]_Enabling
Step4}
2. [HISTORY]
3. Select data, and select [SELECT]/[DELETE]. [14-2-2] FORMAT
• [SELECT] : Details of [Result in detail] of the selected data are displayed. <OPERATIONS>
For [Result: FAIL], the background will be displayed in red.
• [DELETE] : The data selected is deleted. 1. Measure [Format A] and [Format B] of the QC test pattern.
4. If [SELECT] is selected, set [EXTERNAL DENSITOMETER], [FORMAT],
2. Enter the 10 times value (mm) of [Format A] measured.
and [ARTIFACTS].

3. Enter the 10 times value (mm) of [Format B] measured.
4. [ENTER]
<OPERATIONS> → The measured values of the external densitometer set are displayed at the
[Result in detail] window. If these new values exceed the established criteria,
1. Measure “Density 0” to “Density 3” of the QC test pattern using the the background is displayed in red.
external densitometer.
[14-2-3] ARTIFACTS
2. Enter the 100 times values of “Density 0” measured using the external
densitometer. <OPERATIONS>
1. Visually check the QC test pattern for artifact.
densitometer.
4. Enter the 100 times values of “Density 2” measured using the external 2. Select [ARTIFACT].
densitometer. [(blank)]/[PASS]/[FAIL]
densitometer.
<REMARKS>
Use the [NEXT]/[BACK] button to switch between pages.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-14
[14-3] SETTINGS [14-3-1-2] MANUAL
Command for setting the baseline values and established criteria, at [BUILT-IN
DENSITOMETER], [EXTERNAL DENSITOMETER], and [FORMAT] for each film tray. 1. [TRAY 1]
[14-3-1] BUILT-IN DENSITOMETER 2. [DENSITY 0]
[14-3-1-1] AUTO 3. Enter the 100 times value of the baseline values of density 0.
<OPERATIONS> 4. Enter the 100 times value of the established criteria of density 0.
1. [TRAY1] → [EXECUTE]
5. Perform the above procedure for [DENSITY 1], [DENSITY 2] and
[DENSITY 3].
→ Three QC test patterns are output, and the average density is displayed.
6. Perform the above procedure for [TRAY 2].
2. Select [SAVE]/[CANCEL].
<NOTE>
• [SAVE] : The output results are stored and return to the [BUILT-IN
DENSIOMETER] screen. To use “Density 4”, there is a need to set “Density 4” to “Enable” using the
• [CANCEL] : The output results are not stored and return to the [BUILT-IN M-Utility or DPX7 PC Tool function beforehand.
DENSIOMETER] screen. {MU:3.3 [1-1-2-5-2]_Enabling Step 4}, {MU:4.7 [PC1-2-9-12-1]_Enabling
Step4}
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-15
[14-3-2] EXTERNAL DENSITOMETER [14-4] LUT
<OPERATIONS> <OPERATIONS>
1. [TRAY 1] 1. Select the tray.
2. [DENSITY 0] [TRAY1]/[TRAY2]
3. Enter the 100 times value of the baseline values of density 0.

2. Select the AE title.
4. Enter the 100 times value of the established criteria of density 0.

3. Select the LUT number (1 to 8).
5. Perform the above procedure for [DENSITY 1], [DENSITY 2] and

4. [EXECUTE]
[DENSITY 3]. → The LUT number of the selected tray is set.

<NOTE>
To use “Density 4”, there is a need to set “Density 4” to “Enable” using the
M-Utility or DPX7 PC Tool function beforehand.
{MU:3.3 [1-1-2-5-2]_Enabling Step 4}, {MU:4.7 [PC1-2-9-12-1]_Enabling
Step4}
[14-3-3] FORMAT
1. [TRAY 1]
2. [FORMAT A]
3. Enter the 10 times value of the baseline values of format A.
4. Enter the 10 times value of the established criteria of format A.
5. Perform the above procedure for [FORMAT B].

<REMARKS>
Format baseline values by film size (Allowable range: 5%)
35x43 cm: Format A; 304.0 mm, Format B; 406.0 mm
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-15.1
[15] MAMMO.QC <OPERATIONS>
<NOTE> 1. Select the test pattern.
This menu is provided in the main unit software version V3.0 or later. <REMARKS>
Selecting NEMA (National Manufacturers Association), EUREF (European
Reference Frame) enables output of the mammo QC pattern complying with the
<FUNCTION> respective standards.
Command for outputting the pattern for Mammo QC. • NEMA : Refer to the separate “Mammo QC Operation Manual” when using.
<NOTE> • EUREF : In the EU, individual standards are set down by country based on
the EUREF standards, use according to the status of the country
• To execute this menu, there is a need to set the Mammo QC function to installed in.
“Enable” using the M-Utility or DPX7 PC Tool function beforehand.
{MU:3.3 [1-1-2-4]_Option/Mammo.QC}, {MU:4.7 [PC1-2-9-18]_MammoQC}
• For equipment with main unit software version V3.0 or later at shipment,  When [NEMA] is Selected for the Mammo QC Function:
“MammoQCTest” is registered as default. If the version has been upgraded [TG18-QC]/ [TG18-PQC]/ [17-Steps]/ [Grid]/ [Spatial Resolution]
from an earlier version, read equipment data and add and register new clients.
{MU:5.13_Settings for Using MammoQC Function After Upgrading Main
 When [EUREF] is Selected for the Mammo QC Function:
Unit Software Version from V2.0 or Earlier to V3.0} [TG18-QC]/ [TG18-PQC]/ [TG18-PQC(HIGH)]/ [TG18-UN80]/ [TG18-UN10]/
[TG18-UNL80]/ [TG18-UNL10]
<REMARKS>
• [TG18-PQC] : 10 pix/mm, no enlargement/reduction
• [TG18-PQC(HIGH)] : 20 pix/mm, no enlargement/reduction
• [Spatial Resolution] : No enlargement/reduction

[TRAY1]/[TRAY2]
<NOTE>
Limit the output size of [TG18-QC] and [17-Steps] to 26x36 cm, 25x30 cm, or
20x25 cm size because an output in 35x43 cm size does not have sufficient
density in its maximum density area (Dmax 3.6).
3. Select the [LUT2].

<REMARKS>
• The LUT number should be selected only when the following is selected:
[TG18-QC]/ [TG18-PQC]/ [TG18-PQC(HIGH)]/ [TG18-UN80]/ [TG18-UN10]/
[TG18-UNL80]/ [TG18-UNL10]
• For [17-Steps]/[Grid]/[Spatial Resolution], the film is output in Dmax=3.6 and
Dmin=0.2, without any tone processing.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
DRYPIX 4000 Service Manual MU-15.1
MU-15.2
4. Check the output results.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-16
2.4 Other Functions 3. Perform the following procedure at the job list screen or job details
screen.
• To perform priority printing, select [URGENT PRINT].
2.4.1 Displaying Printing Jobs and Job Operations • To delete a job, select [DELETE].
Use of this function allows jobs to be displayed and processed from the operation • To update the display to the latest, select [REFRESH].
panel without the use of the U-Utility, even during printing.
Main functions include display of detailed job information, priority printing, and
deletion.
1. If print jobs have accumulated in the equipment, touch the hard disk
icon on the operation panel.
→ Jobs accumulated in the equipment are listed.
2. To display detailed job information, specify the desired job and touch
[DETAIL].
→ Detailed information of the selected job is displayed.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-17
2.4.2 Acquisition of Log Data by User
The user can save log data for equipment analysis in the HD of the equipment.
<NOTE>
To execute this menu, there is a need to set [Logging by User] to “ON” using
the M-Utility or DPX7 PC Tool function beforehand.
{MU:3.3 [1-3-4]_Logging by User}, {MU:4.7 [PC1-2-9-11]_BackupLog}, {MU:4.7
[PC2-3]_Log}
1. With the equipment in the idling state, touch the part on the operation
panel indicated in the following figure for three seconds.
→ The “Under Logging” message appears on the operation panel and log data
is saved in the HDD of the equipment. This may take up to five minutes
according to the log information volume.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-18
3. M-UTILITY (MAINTENANCE A B C
UTILITY) [1-1-8] Reboot

[1-1-8-1] EWF
3.1 M-Utility Menu Tree [1-1-8-2] Reboot All
M-Utility [1-1-9] Reload Software
[1] System Management [1-2] Print Queue
[1-1] System Config. [1-3] Log Files
[1-1-1] Set Date/time [1-3-1] Display Error Log
[1-1-2] Set Parameters [1-3-2] Clear
[1-1-2-1] Set Tray [1-3-3] Store Log Files
[1-1-2-2] Sorter Setting [1-3-4] Logging by User
[1-1-2-2-1] Sorter Connection [1-4] Network
[1-1-2-3] Reprint Function [1-4-1] Set TCP/IP
[1-1-2-4] Option [1-4-1-1] IP Address
[1-1-2-5] QC [1-4-1-2] SubNetMask
[1-1-2-5-1] Set Target Density [1-4-1-3] Gateway
[1-1-2-5-2] Enabling Step 4 [1-4-1-4] Mac Address
[1-1-2-6] Set ML Dmax (For main unit software [1-4-2] Set DICOM
version V2.0 or later) [1-4-2-1] AE-title
[1-1-3] Initialize [1-4-2-2] Fine PRT AE-title
[1-1-3-1] Recover [1-4-2-3] Port No.
[1-1-3-2] Save Config. [1-4-2-4] Hostname
[1-1-3-3] Initialization [1-4-3] Test Network
[1-1-3-4] Nonvolatile Memory [1-4-4] Set DICOM log
[1-1-4] Check Files [1-4-5] Set Mammo (For main unit software version V1.1 or
later)
[1-1-5] Check Version
[1-1-6] Set Counters
[1-1-7] Load System Files (from USB)
A B C D E
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-19
D E F
[1-5] Set Main Panel [3] F.D.C.

[1-5-1] Select Language [3-1] AUTO F.D.C.
[1-5-2] Size Information [3-2] Check Density
[1-5-3] Set Alarm [3-3] 24-Steps
[1-5-4] Set Key Touch Tone [3-4] Manual F.D.C.
[1-5-5] ANIMATION [3-5] Densitometer
[1-5-6] Sound Test [3-5-1] 24-Steps
[1-5-7] Icon Positioning [3-5-2] Calibration
[1-5-8] Show Position [3-5-3] Clear Calib. Table
[1-5-9] Date Format [3-5-4] DM Sensor Monitoring
[1-6] Save/Load Files [3-6] Uniformity
[1-6-1] Save to USB [3-6-1] Clear Table
[1-6-2] Load from USB [3-6-2] Input
[2] Output Film [4] Check Scanner
[2-1] 24-Steps [4-1] Polygonal Motor
[2-2] 17-Steps [4-2] LD
[2-3] Flat [4-3] Adjusting Main Scanner
[2-4] Cleaning [4-3-1] Scanning Width
[2-5] Grid [4-3-2] Scanning Position
[2-6] Film out to Sorter [4-3-3] Display Adjustment
[2-7] Uniformity [4-3-4] Initialize Scanner
[2-8] SMPTE [4-4] Diagnosis
[2-9] User Settable [4-4-1] Initial Check
[2-10] Spatial Resolution (For main unit software version V2.0 or [4-4-2] PRN Board Test
later) [4-4-3] Edge Sensor Monitor
F G
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-20
G
[5] Check Mechanism

[5-1] Film Removing
[5-1-1] Unlock Tray
[5-1-2] Set Remain. Films
[5-1-3] Unit Operation
[5-2] Motor Operation
[5-2-1] Motor Operation
[5-2-2] Adjusting Subscanner
[5-3] Grip
[5-4] Other Actuators
[5-5] Sensor Monitor
[5-6] Other
[5-6-1] Serial I/F
[5-6-2] HDD Test
[5-6-3] DPRAM Test
[5-6-4] Inter Board Test
[5-6-5] Barcode Test
[5-7] Sorter Unit
[5-7-1] Solenoids
[5-7-2] Sensor Monitor
[6] Heat-Developer
[6-1] Temperature
[6-2] Heating
[6-3] Fan Operation
[6-4] Temp. Control
[6-5] Set Heater Temp.
[6-6] Power Supply Voltage
[7] Skip Initialize
[7-1] Eject Film Remaining
[7-2] Developer
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-21
3.2 Starting and Ending the M-Utility  Starting from the Routine Mode
 Starting the M-Utility

 Starting from the Initialization Processing Mode
After turning ON the power of the equipment, the startup display will be displayed
for about 1 minute and 30 seconds, after which the software version number will be
displayed for about 15 seconds.
While the software version number is displayed, touch (1) below, and then [UTILITY].
<REMARKS>
If the equipment is currently printing, the reserved state is set once, after which when
the printing ends, the M-Utility mode is set. M-Utility reservation is canceled if error (level
0/1) occurs during reservation.
 Starting from the Error Indication Mode
<NOTE>
Touching the operation panel after the software version number disappears is
invalid. In this case, restart the equipment, display the software version number,
or enter the routine mode and then start the M-Utility.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-22
 Ending the M-Utility
At the M-Utility top menu, touch the [EXIT] button on the operation panel.
<REMARKS>
• The equipment enters the following mode after M-Utility ends.
• Start from initialization mode : Initial self-diagnosis
• Start from routine mode : Returns to the routine mode after re-initialization
self-diagnosis
• Start from abnormal mode : Returns to the abnormal processing screen for
shutdown
• If mechanical parts are operated, re-initialization self-diagnosis is carried out after
M-Utility ends.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-23
3.3 Details of M-Utility Commands [1-1-2-2] Sorter Setting
[1] System Management [1-1-2-2-1] Sorter Connection
<FUNCTION>
[1-1] System Config. Command for setting whether a sorter is connected.
[1-1-1] Set Date/time <DEFAULT>

Same as “[9] SET DATE/TIME” of the U-Utility. [Without Sorter]
{MU:2.3 [9]_SET DATE/TIME}
<OPERATIONS>
[1-1-2] Set Parameters
1. Select whether to use sorter or not.
[1-1-2-1] Set Tray [With Sorter]/[Without Sorter]
<FUNCTION> <IMPLEMENTATION OF CHANGES>

Command for setting film used per film tray. The changes made will be effective after the equipment is rebooted.
<OPERATIONS> [1-1-2-3] Reprint Function
1. Select the film tray. <FUNCTION>

[TRAY1]/[TRAY 2] Command for enabling/disabling reprinting by client.
2. Select the film size. <OPERATIONS>

[14x17 (35x43cm)]/[14x14 (35x35cm)]/[10x14 (26x36cm)]/[10x12 (25x30cm)]/[8x10
(20x25cm)]/[Disable] 1. Select the client.
<NOTE>
2. Switch between enable/disable using the [ON/OFF] button.
Do not select [14x14 (35x35cm)].
3. Select the film base color. The changes made will be effective after the equipment is rebooted.
[Clear base/HL]/[Blue base/HL]/[Blue base/ML]
<NOTE>
[Blue base/ML] is available from main unit software version V2.0 or later.
The changes made will be effective after the equipment is rebooted.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-24
[1-1-2-4] Option • [Recognize position on 8x10 (20x25)] :
For enabling/disabling the left/right recognize function of the 20x 25 cm size film
<FUNCTION> image (8x10). (For main unit software version V1.1 or later)
Command for setting the software options of the equipment. • [Spatial Resolution] :
For setting whether or not to select Spatial Resolution test printing (20 pix/mm
CAUTION recording verification pattern) at [Test Pattern] of the U-Utility. (For main unit
[Mobile] in the [Option] setting menu is intended for use in Japan only. Do not software version V2.0 or later)
change the default value [Stationary]. • [Mammo.QC] :
If changed, “02D2” error occurs, and the equipment will not start. For setting whether or not to enable Mammo QC function and for setting the value
(NEMA/EUREF) when enabled. (For main unit software version V3.0 or later)
<REMARKS>
• [Automated F.D.C.] : <DEFAULT>
For setting the timing for automatic execution of automatic density correction.
[Automated F.D.C.: By each film lot No.], [17-Steps Pattern: Disable], [User Settable:
• [17-Steps Pattern] : Disable], [Save DICOM Image: Disable], [Operation After Film Loading: Enable], [QC:
For setting whether or not to select 17-Steps Pattern test printing at [Test Pattern] of Enable], [Film Information: Upper Left], [Warning at system start: Enable], [Recognize
the U-Utility. position on 8x10 (20x25): Disable], [Spatial Resolution: Disable], [Mammo.QC:
• [User Settable] : Disable]
For setting whether or not to select test printing of User Settable images at [Test
Pattern] of the U-Utility. <OPERATIONS>
• [Save DICOM Image] :
For setting whether to import User Settable image data. 1. Select [Automated F.D.C.].
The data of the first frame of the first DICOM-printed image after setting to enable [By each film lot No.]/[By each film pack.]/[None]
is imported as User Settable image. After the import, this setting will be disabled
automatically. It is also possible to use the [Data Transfer-User Settable] menu of 2. Select [17-Steps Pattern].
the DPX7 PC Tool function to import User Settable images. [Enable]/[Disable]
{MU:4.7 [PC2-5]_User Settable}
• [Operation After Film Loading] : 3. Select the [User Settable].
For setting whether to enable resetting of films if the set film pack is defferent from [Enable]/[Disable]
the set base color.
• [QC] : 4. Select [Save DICOM Image].
For enabling/disabling the image QC function. [Enable]/[Disable]
• [Film Information] :
For setting the position of the information printed on the film.
5. Select [Operation After Film Loading].
• [Warning at system start] : [Enable]/[Disable]
For setting whether to warn the user of any shutter present during startup prompting
to pull it out, or to continue to boot the equipment disabling the tray in question
without warning. (For main unit software version V1.1 or later)
For the equipment with main unit software version V3.0 or later, the equipment can
be started without disabling use of the film tray because the shutter presence check
can be skipped.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-24.1
6. Select [QC]. 11. Select [Mammo.QC].
[Enable]/[Disable] [Disable]/[NEMA]/[EUREF]
"E"に相当する単語がない。
<NOTE> <REMARKS> 日本語マニュアル参照。
If set to [Enable], there is a need to register the user ID using DPX7 PC Tool Selecting NEMA (National Manufacturers Association), EUREF (European
function. Reference Frame) enables output of the mammo QC pattern complying with the
{MU:5.1_Registering User ID} respective standards.
• NEMA : Refer to the separate “Mammo QC Operation Manual” when using.
• EUREF : In the EU, individual standards are set down by country based on
7. Select [Film Information]. the EUREF standards, use according to the status of the country
[Upper Left]/[Upper Right]/[Lower Left]/[Lower Right] installed in.
8. Select [Warning at system start].

• [Enable] : Warn the user.
• [Disable] : Do not warn the user. The changes made will be effective after the equipment is rebooted.
• [Ignore] : Ignore the shutter.
<NOTE>
When [Ignore] is selected, the equipment will start normally if started with
the shutter inserted. However when print request is sent to the film on the
film tray inserted with the shutter, “Shutter present error” will be displayed.
In this case, removing the shutter clears the error and resumes printing.
9. Select [Recognize position on 8x10 (20x25)].

[Enable]/[Disable]
<NOTE>
When setting [Enable], RMI (Rotate Mammo Image) mode must separately
be set at “[1-4-5] Set Mammo” for each client sending Mammo images.
{MU:3.3 [1-4-5]_Set Mammo}
10. Select [Spatial Resolution].

[Enable]/[Disable]
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-24.2
[1-1-2-5] QC [1-1-2-5-2] Enabling Step 4
[1-1-2-5-1] Set Target Density <FUNCTION>

Command for enabling/disabling “Density 4” in the QC test pattern of the U-Utility.
<FUNCTION>
<NOTE>
Command for setting the density value used during recording by the image QC test
pattern of the U-Utility. “Density 4” is the topmost wedge (density=Dmax).
If disabled, guide number (4) is not printed and density is set to Fog.
<NOTE>
The density step to be set is the middle wedge (1 to 3).
“Density 4” (Dmax) effective for density 4 and “Density 0” (Fog) cannot be set.
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select whether to enable/disable “Density 4”.

<OPERATIONS> • Enable : The “Density 4” wedge is printed on the QC test pattern.
• Disable : The setting is not changed and returns to the previous screen.
1. Select the tray.
[TRAY1]/[TRAY2] <IMPLEMENTATION OF CHANGES>
2. Select the target density step. The changes made will be effective after the equipment is rebooted.
[Density 1]/[Density 2]/[Density 3]
3. Enter the density value applied to the density step.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-25
[1-1-2-6] Set ML Dmax
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to print by tone type (Dmax) of the images sent when
DI-ML film is loaded.
<NOTE>
• This menu is available from main unit software version V2.0 or later.
• This setting is applied to all trays, but not on a tray-by-tray basis.
<DEFAULT>
[Real Dmax on film:3.6], [Requested Dmax less than 3.6: Reject]
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select [Real Dmax on film].

• [3.6]: When printing requests above Dmax3.6 are received, prints at Dmax3.6
on DI-ML films.
• [4.0]: When printing requests above Dmax3.6 are received, prints at Dmax4.0
on DI-ML films.
<REMARKS>
If both DI-HL films and DI-ML films of the same size are loaded and the print
request is less than Dmax3.6, printing will start from DI-HL films.
2. Select [Requested Dmax less than 3.6].

• [Accept] : If the print request is less than Dmax3.6 and there is no DI-HL
film, DI-ML film is used.
• [Reject] : If the print request is less than Dmax3.6, DI-ML film is not used.
<REMARKS>
If both DI-HL films and DI-ML films of the same size are loaded and [Reject] is
selected, the film replenish screen will be displayed when DI-HL film runs out.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-26
[1-1-3] Initialize [1-1-3-2] Save Config.
[1-1-3-1] Recover <FUNCTION>

Command for saving various configuration settings (system state after installation).
<FUNCTION>
<REMARKS>
Command for returning various configuration settings to the saved state using “[1-1-3-2]
Save Config.”. The various configuration settings saved on this menu can be returned to the state
Also used for initializing some data managed by the system. when saved, using “[1-1-3-1] Recover”.
<NOTE>
• To execute this menu, save the various configuration settings beforehand
<OPERATIONS>
using “[1-1-3-2] Save Config.”.
• The initialized data are as follows. 1. Select [YES] or [NO].
• Remaining film count • [YES] : The current system state is saved in the internal HD.
• User counter • [NO] : The selected menu is not executed and return to the previous display.
• Error log
<OPERATIONS> The changes made will be effective after the equipment is rebooted.
1. Select [YES] or [NO]. [1-1-3-3] Initialization
• [YES] : The various configuration settings saved are recovered. <FUNCTION>

• [NO] : The selected menu is not executed and return to the previous display.
Command for executing initialization of various setting information and returning
<IMPLEMENTATION OF CHANGES> default values set at shipment.
<NOTE>
Executing this menu initializes the following data other than the data initialized
using “[1-1-3-1] Recover”.
• Various configuration data
• Data on whether I/O tracer is executed
<OPERATIONS>

• [YES] : Initialization is executed.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-27
[1-1-3-4] Nonvolatile Memory [1-1-4] Check Files
Command for saving a part of equipment individual data used for mechanical control Command for displaying system file list.
in the nonvolatile memory of the SND board. <REMARKS>
<NOTE>
• Only application software files can be displayed.
The data saved is as follows. • Files are displayed in alphabetical order.
• Target temperature (Used in heat development control)
• Power voltage information (Used in heat development control)
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS> 1. Select [Check All] or [Check Individual].
1. Select [YES] or [NO]. → The corresponding files are displayed.
• [YES] : Part of equipment individual data used for mechanical control is  Example of Display
saved in the nonvolatile memory of the SND board.
• [NO] : Data is not saved and returns to the previous screen.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-28
[1-1-5] Check Version [1-1-6] Set Counters
Same as “[5] SET COUNTERS” of the U-Utility.
<FUNCTION> {MU:2.3 [5]_SET COUNTERS}
Command for displaying software/hardware version list.
 Example of Display
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-29
[1-1-7] Load System Files (from USB)
3. [Load System Files (from USB)]
<FUNCTION> 4. Select the installation type.
Command for installing software from the USB memory. [Upgrade]/[Full Installation]
<NOTE>
There is a need to copy the software file using the DI Tool (DPX7 PC Tool
function) to the USB memory beforehand. • [YES] : Installation of the software file in the HD of the equipment from the
To install software from the USB memory, refer to the procedure for installing USB memory is started.
from the USB memory in the section on installing the main unit software of • [NO] : Installation is not started and returns to the previous screen.
REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT (MC).
{MC:12.3_Installing from the USB Memory} 6. If installation is carried out, check that the message “Completed.”
appears before removing the USB memory.
<OPERATIONS> 7. Reinstall the removed cover.
1. Remove the lower front cover and lower front inside cover. <IMPLEMENTATION OF CHANGES>
2. Connect the USB memory to the USB cable connector for servicing.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-30
[1-1-8] Reboot
[1-1-8-1] EWF
<FUNCTION>
Command for enabling or disabling the EWF function.
<REMARKS>
EWF function: Enhanced Write Filter function
<OPERATION>
1. Select [ON] or [OFF].

• [ON] : Enable EWF function
• [OFF] : Disable EWF function
[1-1-8-2] Reboot All
<FUNCTION>
If the equipment needs to be rebooted after completing command settings, execute
this menu and reboot the equipment.
Even if the “Abnormal Operations” errors occurred, execute this menu and reboot the
equipment. (This is possible only when the M-Utility can be operated.)
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select [Reboot All].

• [YES] : After “Wait for a while.” appears, the equipment is rebooted.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-31
[1-1-9] Reload Software [1-2] Print Queue
Same as “[4] PRINT QUEUE” of the U-Utility.
<FUNCTION> {MU:2.3 [4]_PRINT QUEUE}
Command for installing printer software on the HD in the MCT board.
Re-install in the order of “INST (PRT)” (Printer installer) → “OS (PRT)” (Printer OS) →
“APPL (PRT)” (Printer applications).
• Printer applications/Printer OS:
When the software version has been changed or software errors occur in the
conveyor unit, heat development unit, or density measurement section, reload
the software.
• Printer installer:
When the software version of the installer has been changed or software errors
occur before reinstalling the above printer applications/printer OS, reload the
software.
<REMARKS>
The following shows the time required for software installation.
• INST (PRT) : Approx. 20 seconds
• OS (PRT) : Approx. 15 seconds
• APPL (PRT) : Approx. 1 minute
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the installation type.

[APPL (PRT)]/[OS (PRT)]/[INST (PRT)]
2. Select [ENT] or [QUIT].
3. [ENT]

• [YES] : Installation starts.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-32
[1-3] Log Files [1-3-3] Store Log Files
[1-3-1] Display Error Log <FUNCTION>

Command for saving the data files for analysis, which are saved on the MTH board, in
<FUNCTION> the HD.
Command for displaying error log list. <REMARKS>
<OPERATIONS> • The data for analysis which will be saved are as follows.
• Error logs and text files of various setting information
1. Display the error log list. • Communication logs (external input/formatter/formatter to printer/printer ISC)
• The time stamp of the analysis data is not guaranteed, but is of the date of
→ The date of occurrence, place of occurrence, error code, and detailed error code execution.
are displayed.
• The I/O tracer is also saved when jams occur in addition to when this menu is
 Example of Display executed.
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select [EXECUTE].
→ The corresponding files are saved on the HD.
2. Check the results.

→ [Completed] appears.
[1-3-4] Logging by User
<FUNCTION>
Command for saving log data for equipment analysis in the HD of the equipment by
user operations.
[1-3-2] Clear {MU:2.4.2_Acquisition of Log Data by User}
<FUNCTION> <DEFAULT>
Command for deleting error logs. [ON] (Enable)
1. Select [YES] or [NO]. 1. Select [ON] or [OFF].

• [YES] : All logs are deleted. • [ON] : Enables log data acquisition by the user.
• [NO] : The selected menu is not executed and return to the previous display. • [OFF] : Disables log data acquisition by the user.
<IMPLEMENTATION OF CHANGES> <IMPLEMENTATION OF CHANGES>

The settings made will be effective immediately. The changes made will be effective after the equipment rebooted.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-33
[1-4] Network [1-4-1-1] IP Address
[1-4-1] Set TCP/IP <FUNCTION>

Command for setting the IP address used on the network.
CAUTION
• Perform Set TCP/IP menu settings after disconnecting the network cables <DEFAULT>
(equipment side or network equipment side). Re-connect after completing “172.016.001.060”
settings and rebooting the equipment.
If Set TCP/IP menu settings have been performed, the security will be <OPERATIONS>
vulnerable temporarily.
• If changing the Set TCP/IP menu settings (IP address, subnet mask, gateway
address) and enabling those changes, be sure to touch [ENT] on the Set TCP/
1. Enter the IP address (decimal).
IP menu screen to end. <REMARKS>
Touching [ENT] displays the [Updating network settings.] screen, after which • Input range: 000 to 255
the equipment reboots automatically. As a result, changes of the Set TCP/IP
• The following are not accepted.
menu are reflected in the equipment correctly.
• “000.000.000.000”
• After changing the setting items of the Set TCP/IP menu, if [QUIT] is touched
to end, and the equipment is rebooted by power OFF/ON or from the reset • “255.255.255.255”
menu of the equipment, menu changes will not be reflected in the equipment • No value is entered.
correctly.
In this case, the IP address will return to the default value set at shipment
temporarily after the equipment is rebooted, and depending on the network <IMPLEMENTATION OF CHANGES>
environment of the installed site, IP address duplicate error may occur when The changes made will be effective after the equipment is rebooted.
the equipment is started up.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
Confirm details such as IP address and subnet mask with the network
administrator of the installation site.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-34
[1-4-1-2] SubNetMask [1-4-1-3] Gateway
Command for setting the subnet mask used on the network. Command for setting the gateway address used on the network.
<DEFAULT> <DEFAULT>
“255.255.000.000” None
1. Enter the subnet mask (decimal). 1. Enter the gateway address (decimal).
<REMARKS> <REMARKS>
• Input range: 000 to 255 • Input range: 000 to 255
• Out of input range if no value is input. • Invalid input: “255.255.255.255”
• If no value is entered or “000.000.000.000” is entered, it will be taken as
incomplete setting.
[1-4-1-4] Mac Address
<FUNCTION>
The MAC address of the MTH board is displayed.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-35
[1-4-2] Set DICOM [1-4-2-2] Fine PRT AE-title
[1-4-2-1] AE-title <FUNCTION>

Command for setting the name of the printer for 20 pix/mm recording.
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the name of the printer for 10 pix/mm recording. <DEFAULT>
“DRYPIX4000HIGH”
<DEFAULT>
“DRYPIX4000” <OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS> 1. Enter the AE Title (fixed at 16 digits).
1. Enter the AE Title (fixed at 16 digits).

<REMARKS>
• The allowable characters for the AE Title are symbols from 20h to 7Eh of the
<REMARKS> 1-byte code table.
• The allowable characters for the AE Title are symbols from 20h to 7Eh of the • If the number of digits entered does not add up to 16, spaces are set for the
1-byte code table. remaining number of digits.
• If the number of digits entered does not add up to 16, spaces are set for the • The following are not accepted.
remaining number of digits. • All spaces
• The following are not accepted. • Space for the first digit
• All spaces
• Space for the first digit
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-36
[1-4-2-3] Port No. [1-4-2-4] Hostname
Command for setting the port number used on the network. Command for setting the host name used on the network.
<DEFAULT> <DEFAULT>
“104” “drypix4000”
1. Enter the port number (decimal). 1. Enter the host name (maximum 16 digits).
<NOTE> <REMARKS>
Do not set the following port numbers as they are reserved. • The allowable characters for the host name are alphabets (upper and lower
• 23 : Telnet port cases), numbers, and hyphen “-”.
• 135, 445, 5000 : OS port • The following are unaccepted.
• 20051, 20052 : DI Tool port • Space
• Less than 2 characters
<REMARKS> • First character is a number.
Input range: 0 to 65535
<IMPLEMENTATION OF CHANGES> The changes made will be effective after the equipment is rebooted.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-37
[1-4-3] Test Network [1-4-4] Set DICOM log
Command for checking network connection with the connected equipment using Ping. Command for setting the filtering of DICOM communication logs.
{MU:5.5_Displaying Logs by Client (Filtering DICOM Communication Logs)}
<OPERATIONS>
<DEFAULT>
1. Touch the [IP Address] button.
[OFF]
2. Enter the IP address of the equipment to be checked. → [ENT] <OPERATIONS>
<NOTE>
Enter three digits each time for the IP address.
1. Select the client for the filtering using the arrow buttons.
Input example: For “111.22.3.44”, enter “111.022.003.044” 2. Switch between enable/disable using the [ON/OFF] button.
• [ON] : Enables the filtering function.
3. [ENT] • [OFF] : Disables the filtering function.
→ The test to check network connections is executed.
If connection is normal, the following screen (example) is displayed. <IMPLEMENTATION OF CHANGES>
The settings made will be effective after the equipment is rebooted.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-37.1
[1-4-5] Set Mammo
<FUNCTION>
Command which calculates the average density difference between the left and right
areas specified on the image when receives 20x 25 cm size film images (8x10) from
the client, and should the image be determined as the left breast image, rotates the
image by 180 degrees and prints it (RMI (Rotate Mammo Image) mode).
<NOTE>
• To execute this menu, there is a need to set [Recognize position on 8x10
(20x25): Enable” at “[1-1-2-4] Option” beforehand. If set to “Recognize
position on 8x10 (20x25):Disable”, this menu will not be displayed.
{MU:3:3 [1-1-2-4]_Option/Recognize position on 8x10 (20x25)}
• This menu setting is not applied to images other than 20x25 cm (8x10) film
size.
<DEFAULT>
[OFF]
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the client sending the mammo images using the arrow buttons.
2. Using the [SELECT] button, switch the RMI (Rotate Mammo Image)
mode. RMI
• [OFF] : EMI mode not used.

• [HI] : Only high density (20pix/mm recording) images are used.
• [ST+HI] : Both standard (10pix/mm recording) and high density (20 pix/mm
recording) images are used.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-37.2
BLANK PAGE
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-38
[1-5] Set Main Panel [1-5-3] Set Alarm
Same as “[7-1] SET ALARM” of the U-Utility.
[1-5-1] Select Language {MU:2.3 [7-1]_SET ALARM}
<FUNCTION> [1-5-4] Set Key Touch Tone

Command for setting the display language of the operation panel. Same as “[7-2] KEY TOUCH” of the U-Utility.
{MU:2.3 [7-2]_KEY TOUCH}
<DEFAULT>
[1-5-5] ANIMATION
[English]
Same as “[12] ANIMATION” of the U-Utility.
<OPERATIONS> {MU:2.3 [12]_ANIMATION}
1. Select the display language. [1-5-6] Sound Test
[Japanese]/[English]/[German]/[French]/[Italian]/[Swedish]/[Spanish]/[Danish]/ <FUNCTION>
[Norwegian]/[Portuguese]/[Greek]/[Finnish]/[Dutch]/[Chinese (Simplified)]/
[Chinese (Traditional)]/[Korean] Command for testing the buzzer sound function of the operation panel.

[1-5-2] Size Information
2. [ON] → [ENT]
<FUNCTION> → The buzzer sounds.
Command for setting the display type of the film size displayed on the operation panel. 3. [OFF] → [ENT]
<DEFAULT> → The buzzer stops.
[inch]
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the display type.

[inch]/[cm]/[Japanese]
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-39
[1-5-7] Icon Positioning [1-5-8] Show Position
Command for correcting the deviation of the LCD display position of the operation Command for testing the touch coordinates of the operation panel.
panel and touched position on the touch panel.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
Execute this menu if the operation panel has been replaced. 1. Using a pen, etc., touch the operation panel.
Check that “ ” is displayed correctly at the touched position.
<OPERATIONS> If not displayed correctly, execute “[1-5-7] Icon Positioning”.
[1-5-9] Date Format

CAUTION
When executing this menu, it will end in error if the arrow mark displayed at <FUNCTION>
the four corners of the window for correction is not touched within 60 seconds
each.If it ends in error, or if invalid position of the arrow mark displayed was Command for setting the format of the date displayed on the operation panel.
touched, the touched position on the touch panel will deviate considerably <REMARKS>
after this menu is executed, affecting operations thereafter.Therefore, touch the
designated parts of the screen correctly within the given time. This setting is applied to all screens displaying date, and not to the PC for servicing
and file date.
1. Touch [Icon Positioning].

→ The icon positioning program starts, and arrow mark will be displayed at the
<DEFAULT>
top left of the operation panel. [yyyy/MM/dd]
2. Using a pen, etc., touch the tip (red) of the arrow mark displayed. <OPERATION>
<NOTE>
1. Select the date display type.
The program response may be slow in some cases. Do not touch twice in
such cases. [yyyy/MM/dd]/[MM/dd/yyyy]/[dd/MM/yyyy]
→ The arrow mark moves to the top right of the panel.

3. Like step 2, touch the tip of the arrow mark.
4. As the arrow mark will move to the bottom left or bottom right of the
panel, touch the tip at each position.
→ When the arrow mark is touched at the bottom right, icon positioning is
carried out, and the [Set Main Panel] display returns.
5. Execute “[1-5-8] Show Position” and check that the touch coordinates
are displayed correctly.
The settings will be effective immediately.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-40
[1-6] Save/Load Files <OPERATIONS>
[1-6-1] Save to USB 1. Remove the lower front cover and lower front inside cover.
<FUNCTION> 2. Connect the USB memory to the USB cable connector for servicing.
Command for saving equipment internal data to the USB memory. Applicable data are
equipment individual data/analysis data/reprint image.
<NOTE>
USB memory space required for saving data
• Individual data: 1.5 MB or more
• Analysis data: 360 MB or more
• Reprint image: Image data volume + additional information (1 MB) or more
(Image data volume example)
• Example of 35 x 43 cm 20 pix/mm recording CR image
12 bite (2 byte) x 7040 pix. x 8560 line x 1 image = 115 MB
• Example of images such as CT/MR, etc.
10 bit (2 byte) x 1024 pix. x 1024 line x 12 frame format = 24 MB
3. [Save to USB]
4. Select the data type, then [ENT].

[Individual Data]/[Analysis Data]/[Reprint Image]
<NOTE>
If [Reprint Image] is selected, the reprint ID number needs to be entered.
→ The equipment internal data is saved in the USB memory.

<REMARKS>
For [Reprint Image], the additional information is also saved at the same time.
5. Check that the message “Completed.” appears, and remove the USB
memory.
6. Reinstall the removed cover.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-41
[1-6-2] Load from USB
4. Select the data type, then [ENT].
<FUNCTION> [Individual Data]/[Reprint Image]
→ The data in the USB memory is loaded in the equipment.
Command for loading data in the USB memory to the equipment. Applicable data are
equipment individual data/reprint image. <REMARKS>
<NOTE> • For [Reprint Image], the additional information is also loaded at the same time.
Use the USB memory with the individual data/reprint image data saved at “[1-6-1] • The reprint ID number is rewritten if it already exists in the equipment, and
Save to USB”. registered newly if it does not.
<OPERATIONS> 5. Check that the message “Completed.” appears, and remove the USB
memory.
1. Remove the lower front cover and lower front inside cover.
6. Reinstall the removed cover.
2. Connect the USB memory to the USB cable connector for servicing.
3. [Load from USB]
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-42
[2] Output Film [2-2] 17-Steps
<FUNCTION>
[2-1] 24-Steps Command for printing the 17-steps pattern.
<REMARKS>
<FUNCTION>
• The unloaded film tray and degeneration film tray cannot be selected.
Command for printing the 24-steps pattern.
• The film count set will be preserved while the M-Utility is on. (Same as the menus
<REMARKS> related to film output.)
• The film count set will be preserved while the M-Utility is on. (Same as the menus <DEFAULT>
related to film output.)
[Copies]: 1 (At startup of equipment)
<DEFAULT> <OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS> [TRAY1]/[TRAY 2]
1. Select the film tray. 2. Select the Dmax.

[TRAY1]/[TRAY 2] [2.64]/[3.0]/[3.3]/[3.6]
2. Enter the number of films to be printed (1 to 150). 3. Enter the number of films to be printed (1 to 150).
3. Check the printing results. 4. Check the printing results.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-43
[2-3] Flat [2-4] Cleaning
Command for printing the flat pattern. Command for printing the cleaning film.
<REMARKS> <REMARKS>
• The unloaded film tray and degeneration film tray cannot be selected. • The unloaded film tray and degeneration film tray cannot be selected.
• The film count set and flat density value will be preserved while the M-Utility is on. • The film count set will be preserved while the M-Utility is on. (Same as the menus
(Same as the menus related to film output.) related to film output.)
<DEFAULT> <DEFAULT>
[Copies]: 1 (At startup of equipment), [Density]: 120 (At startup of equipment) [Copies]: 1 (At startup of equipment)
1. Select the film tray. 1. Select the film tray.

[TRAY1]/[TRAY 2] [TRAY1]/[TRAY 2]
2. Select the Dmax. 2. Enter the number of films to be printed (1 to 150).

[2.64]/[3.0]/[3.3]/[3.6]
3. Enter the number of films to be printed (1 to 150).
4. Enter the flat density value (1 to 399).
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-44
[2-5] Grid [2-6] Film out to Sorter
Command for printing the grid pattern. Command for printing flat patterns and discharging to the sorter.
<REMARKS> <NOTE>
• The unloaded film tray and degeneration film tray cannot be selected. This command can be executed only when “[1-1-2-2-1] Sorter Connection” is set
• The film count set will be preserved while the M-Utility is on. (Same as the menus to “With Sorter”.
related to film output.) {MU:3.3 [1-1-2-2-1]_Sorter Connection}
<REMARKS>
<DEFAULT>
<OPERATIONS> related to film output.)
• If the start bin number and end bin number are the same, films will be printed to the
1. Select the film tray. same bin. In other cases, films will be discharged to each bin sequentially starting
from the start bin. After discharging to the 4th bin, films will be discharged starting
[TRAY1]/[TRAY 2] from 1st bin again.
• The flat pattern density is fixed at 120 and the Dmax at 3.0.
2. Select the Dmax.
[2.64]/[3.0]/[3.3]/[3.6]
<DEFAULT>
4. Check the printing results. <OPERATIONS>

[TRAY1]/[TRAY 2]
2. Enter the printing start bin number (1 to 4).
3. Enter the printing end bin number (1 to 4).
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-45
[2-7] Uniformity [2-8] SMPTE
Command for printing the uniformity measurement pattern. Command for printing the SMPTE pattern.
<REMARKS> <REMARKS>
• The unloaded film tray and degeneration film tray cannot be selected. • The unloaded film tray and degeneration film tray cannot be selected.
• The film count set will be preserved while the M-Utility is on. (Same as the menus • The film count set will be preserved while the M-Utility is on. (Same as the menus
related to film output.) related to film output.)
<DEFAULT> <DEFAULT>
[Copies]: 1 (At startup of equipment) [Copies]: 1 (At startup of equipment)

[TRAY1]/[TRAY 2] [TRAY1]/[TRAY 2]
<NOTE> 2. Select the AE Title.
Select the film for the maximum main scanning width.
26 x 36 > 35 x 43 > 25 x 30 > 20 x 25 cm size 3. Select the number of printing frames.
[1]/[2]/[4]/[6]/[8]/[12]
2. Select the Dmax.
[2.64]/[3.0]/[3.3]/[3.6]
[LUT1]/[LUT2]/[LUT3]/[LUT4]/[LUT5]/[LUT6]/[LUT7]/[LUT8]
5. Select the interpolation type.
4. Check the printing results. [SHARP]/[MEDIUM]/[SMOOTH]
6. Select the interpolation method.

[CUBIC]/[NONE]
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-46
[2-9] User Settable <OPERATIONS>
<FUNCTION> 1. Select the film tray.
Command for printing User Settable pattern (user data image). [TRAY1]/[TRAY 2]
{MU:2.3 [2]_TEST PATTERN}
<NOTE>
2. Select the AE Title.
• To print User Settable pattern, set [User Settable] to “Enable” at the [Option] 3. Select the interpolation type.
setting of the M-Utility beforehand. [SHARP]/[MEDIUM]/[SMOOTH]
{MU:3.3 [1-1-2-4]_Option/User Settable}
• For the equipment shipped with the main unit software version V3.0 or later, 4. Select the interpolation method.
the grid pattern for checking unevenness is set as the default image of User [CUBIC]/[NONE]
set. <NOTE>
• Upgrading the main unit software to V3.0 or later will not replace the User If [NONE] is selected, images may be reduced according to the selected
Settable image in the HD. film size.
• To output the desired User Settable pattern, save the user settable images in
the equipment beforehand.

<REMARKS>
• The output film is printed with 8-frame images from LUT1 to LUT8 in the order of
top left to bottom right in the landscape format.
<DEFAULT>
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-46.1
[2-10] Spatial Resolution
<FUNCTION>
Command for printing the spatial resolution pattern (20 pix/mm recording verification
pattern).
(MU:2.3 [2]_TEST PATTERN)
<NOTE>
This menu is available from main unit software version V2.0 or later.
<REMARKS>
<DEFAULT>
<OPERATIONS>

[TRAY1]/[TRAY 2]
2. Select the Dmax.

[2.64]/[3.0]/[3.3]/[3.6]
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-46.2
BLANK PAGE
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-47
[3] F.D.C.
[3-1] AUTO F.D.C.
<FUNCTION>
Command for printing 24-steps patterns and calculating the 24-steps density
correction value from the density data measured by the density measurement section.
<REMARKS>
• The number of prints is fixed at 1.
<OPERATIONS>

[TRAY1]/[TRAY 2]
2. To change the shift value for high density correction, select [Dmax ↑ ↓].
[4] to [-3]
3. Check the results of execution.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-48
[3-2] Check Density <OPERATIONS>
Command for printing 17-steps pattern, and displaying 17-steps data measured by the [TRAY1]/[TRAY 2]
density measurement section on the operation panel.
<REMARKS> 2. Select the Dmax.
• The unloaded film tray and degeneration film tray cannot be selected. If set to [Real Dmax on film:4.0] at “[1-1-2-6] Set ML Dmax” using the
• The number of prints is fixed at 1. main unit software version V2.0 or later, select [3.6] from [Dmax].
[2.64]/[3.0]/[3.3]/[3.6]
 Specified Values 3. Check the results of execution.
Step Dmax 2.64 Dmax 3.0 Dmax 3.3 Dmax 3.6

If set to [Real Dmax on film:4.0] at “[1-1-2-6] Set ML Dmax” using the
main unit software version V2.0 or later, check that the density of the
1 fog fog fog fog 17th step is 4.0 or higher using the external densitometer.
2 Density should be between densities of step 1 and step 3. → The measured density of each step of the pattern is displayed.
3 Density should be between densities of step 2 and step 4.
4 0.30±0.05 0.30±0.05 0.30±0.05 0.30±0.05
5 0.48±0.05 0.48±0.05 0.48±0.05 0.48±0.05
6 0.66±0.05 0.66±0.05 0.66±0.05 0.66±0.05
7 0.84±0.05 0.84±0.05 0.84±0.05 0.84±0.05
8 1.02±0.05 1.02±0.05 1.02±0.05 1.02±0.05
9 1.20±0.05 1.20±0.05 1.20±0.05 1.20±0.05
10 1.38±0.05 1.38±0.05 1.38±0.05 1.38±0.05
11 1.56±0.05 1.56±0.05 1.56±0.05 1.56±0.05
12 1.74±0.05 1.74±0.05 1.74±0.05 1.74±0.05
13 1.92±0.05 1.92±0.05 1.92±0.05 1.92±0.05
14 2.10±0.07 2.10±0.07 2.10±0.07 2.10±0.07
15 2.28±0.07 2.40±0.10 2.40±0.10 2.43±0.10
16 2.46±0.07 2.70±0.10 2.70±0.10 2.95±0.10
17 2.64±0.07 3.00±0.10 3.30±0.20 3.60±0.20
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-49
[3-3] 24-Steps [3-4] Manual F.D.C.
Command for displaying the 24-steps density data measured by “[3-1] AUTO F.D.C.” Command for entering the 24-steps density value measured using the external
on the operation panel. densitometer, and creating density correction information.
<NOTE> <REMARKS>
If the equipment is rebooted after executing “[3-1] AUTO F.D.C.”, the 24-steps The unloaded film tray and degeneration film tray cannot be selected.
density data (displayed on the operation panel) will be deleted.
<OPERATIONS>
1. Measure the films printed by “[2-1] 24-Steps” using the external

densitometer.
{MU:3.3 [2-1]_24-Steps}

[TRAY1]/[TRAY 2]
3. Enter the density values (1 to 499) of each step of the pattern

measured at step 1.
<NOTE>
The specified values of the input range for each step of the pattern are as
follows.
• Should be between 0 and 499.
• Should be above the density value of the previous step of the pattern.
4. Check the input value of each step, and start correction.

→ “Wait for a while.” appears.

→ “Completed.” appears on the display.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-50
[3-5] Densitometer [3-5-2] Calibration
[3-5-1] 24-Steps <FUNCTION>

Command for creating densitometer calibration tables for calibrating the built-in
<FUNCTION> densitometer.
Command for printing the 24-steps pattern and measuring the density values. <NOTE>
<REMARKS> To execute this menu, “[3-5-1] 24-Steps” needs to be executed first.
• The number of prints is fixed at 1. <OPERATIONS>
• The measured results are recorded internally for use at “[3-5-2] Calibration”.
1. Measure the films printed by “[3-5-1] 24-Steps” using an external
reference densitometer.
<OPERATIONS>
2. Enter the density values (1 to 499) of each step of the pattern
1. Select the film tray. measured at step 1.
[TRAY1]/[TRAY 2]
3. Check the input value of each step of the pattern, and start correction.
<IMPLEMENTATION OF CHANGES> → “Completed.” appears on the display.
[3-5-3] Clear Calib. Table
<FUNCTION>
Command for initializing the densitometer calibration table linearly.
<OPERATIONS>

• [YES] : The calibration table is cleared.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-51
[3-5-4] DM Sensor Monitoring [3-6] Uniformity
<FUNCTION> [3-6-1] Clear Table

Command for monitoring whether the density sensor of the internal densitometer is
operating normally. <FUNCTION>
Command for clearing the uniformity correction data.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. The state of the density measurement section sensor is displayed in a
constant cycle. 1. Select [YES] or [NO].
Shield the density measurement section sensor with the film, and • [YES] : The calibration table is cleared.
check that the displayed values change. • [NO] : The selected menu is not executed and return to the previous display.
Also check that low values are displayed for high density areas of the <IMPLEMENTATION OF CHANGES>
film and high values for low density areas.
[3-6-2] Input
<FUNCTION>
Command for entering the uniformity correction data.
<OPERATIONS>
1. Repeatedly enter the uniformity measurement patterns measured

using the external densitometer for the required points.
(Points=Low density/high density: 15 points each)
2. Check the input values of each point, and start correction.


006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-52
[4] Check Scanner [4-2] LD
<FUNCTION>
[4-1] Polygonal Motor Command for turning ON/OFF the LD.
Command for turning ON/OFF the polygon motor. [Low]
1. Select the action. 1. Select [Set LD Power] to change the LD power.

[ON]/[OFF]
2. Select the power.
2. Check operations. [High]/[Middle]/[Low]
<IMPLEMENTATION OF CHANGES> 3. Select the action.

The settings will be effective immediately. [ON]/[OFF]
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-53
[4-3] Adjusting Main Scanner  Example of Input
[4-3-1] Scanning Width
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the main scanning width (compression rate in the main scanning
direction).
<OPERATIONS>
1. Output grid pattern using “[2-5] Grid”.

{MU:3.3 [2-5]_Grid}
2. Measure “C” of the output film and check that it is within the specified
value.
{Specified Value (C)}
3. If out of the specified value, enter the main scanning width adjustment
value. (0 to ±120)
<REMARKS>
• As the main scanning length value displayed is subject to rounding, it may not
always be the previously entered value.
• Enter the adjusting values in units of 0.1 mm.
• Entering a negative value reduces the image from the reference position.
• The changes in the value entered can be calculated by: (Value entered) x C x
10 ÷ 37000 (mm)
4. Output and check the grid pattern again.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-54
 Specified Value (C)

C 300.0±1.2 300.0±1.2 200.8±1.2 200.0±1.2
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-55
[4-3-2] Scanning Position  Example of Input
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the scanning position in the main scanning direction.
<OPERATIONS>
1. Output grid pattern using “[2-5] Grid”.

{MU:3.3 [2-5]_Grid}
value.
{Specified Value (B)}
3. If out of the specified value, enter the scanning position adjustment

value. (0 to ±120)
<REMARKS>
Enter the adjusting values in units of 0.1 mm.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-56
 Specified Value (B)

B 27.0±1.0 32.3±1.0 51.1±1.0 50.5±1.0
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-57
[4-3-3] Display Adjustment
<FUNCTION>
Command for displaying the current scanning width adjusting values and scanning
position adjusting values.
<NOTE>
The scanning width value entered the last time will not necessarily be displayed.
<REMARKS>
Measured Width/Starting Position: Displayed ten times the value in mm.
 Example of Display
[4-3-4] Initialize Scanner
<FUNCTION>
Command for initializing the scanning width adjusting values and scanning position
adjusting values.
<OPERATIONS>

• [YES] : Initialization is executed.
The settings made will be effective immediately.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-58
[4-4] Diagnosis <OPERATIONS>
[4-4-1] Initial Check 1. Diagnosis starts.
→ “Wait for a while” appears.
<FUNCTION>
Command for performing self-diagnosis of the scanner. 2. Check the results of execution.
<REMARKS> → “Completed.” appears on the display.
Execution time: Approx. 30 seconds. [4-4-2] PRN Board Test
 Diagnosis Flow <FUNCTION>

For diagnosing leading edge detection, LD, polygon, and start point detection. Command for executing initialization diagnosis of the PRN board, and fuse and
memory check.
<REMARKS>
Execution time: Approx. 1 minute and 30 seconds.
<OPERATIONS>
1. Diagnosis starts.
→ “Wait for a while” appears.

006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-59
[4-4-3] Edge Sensor Monitor <OPERATION>
<FUNCTION>  When Checking the Quantitative Film Tilt Degree During Printing
Command for monitoring changes in the film edge sensor (SD6) used in the
correction of the scanning position. This monitoring of changes allows checking of the 1. Select the tray used [TRAY1] or [TRAY2].
quantitative film tilt degree during printing, and checking of the film edge sensor alone.
<REMARKS> 2. [ENT]
The following are displayed: → The gradation type 3.0 grid pattern is printed and the sensor state is displayed
• Current value (pixel value and counter value, average value during printing) together after printing ends.
• Maximum value (pixel value and counter value: maximum value during monitoring,
value only during printing)
3. Check the quantitative film tilt degree from the difference between the
maximum value and minimum value displayed for the sensor state.
• Minimum value (pixel value and counter value: minimum value during monitoring,
value only during printing) The measurement result is [minimum value] ≤ [average value] ≤
• Starting Position (Reference value) [maximum value].
• Start position adjustment value (Reference value) • The smaller the difference between [maximum value] - [minimum value], the
more the film will be conveyed straightly.
• The greater the difference between [maximum value] - [minimum value], the
 Example of Display more the film will be conveyed at an angle.
<NOTE>
Check the tilt of the recorded images on the grid patterns output.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-60
 When Checking the Operations of the Film Edge Sensor Alone
1. Open the upper right cover, and open the upper conveyor unit open/
close guide.
2. [With no print] → [ENT]

→ The sensor state will be displayed immediately.
3. Insert the film in the sub-scanning unit direction along the conveyance
guide of the conveyor from the right side of the equipment.
<NOTE>
Insert the film until it gently touches the sub-scanning unit entrance roller
at the reference point in front of the equipment.
When the film touches the sub-scanning unit entrance roller, it will have
passed the edge sensor detection starting position by about 40 mm.
4. Check that once the film passes the edge sensor detection starting
position, the sensor state display “Current value” changes between 0
and a random value.
Check that when the film is moved to the back and front of the
equipment, the current value increases/decreases.
Check for the operations of the edge sensor alone by the change in
the [Current value] according to film positioning operations.
<REMARKS>
When the film is moved to the back of the equipment, the [Current value]
decreases. When moved to the front, the value increases.
5. Remove the film after checking, and close the upper conveyor unit
open/close guide and upper right cover.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-61
[5] Check Mechanism [5-1-3] Unit Operation
<FUNCTION>
[5-1] Film Removing Command for performing individual operations of the removal mechanism.
<NOTE>
[5-1-1] Unlock Tray
Error will occur if the individual operations are performed in a different order
Same as “[3] UNLOCK TRAY” of the U-Utility. However, the film remainder count reset from that specified.
function is not available.
{MU:2.3 [3]_UNLOCK TRAY}
<REMARKS>
[5-1-2] Set Remain. Films • Unloaded film trays are not displayed.
• Degeneration film trays can also be operated.
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the number of films remaining on each film tray. <OPERATIONS>
<REMARKS>
• The maximum number of remaining films which can be entered differs according to 1. Select the film tray.
the film size. (35 x 43 cm: 100 films, 26 x 36 cm/25 x 30 cm/20 x 25 cm: 150 films) [TRAY1]/[TRAY2]
• Only film trays which are mounted can be set. (Degeneration film trays can also be
set.) 2. Check individual operations in the order of [Home Positioning] → [Film
• The value immediately after initialization is 0 for each film tray. Surface] → [Film Suction] → [Upper Limit] → [Film Fanning] → [Film
Release] → [Film Convey].
<OPERATIONS>
1. Enter the number of remaining films to be set for film tray 1.
2. If tray 2 is available, enter the number of remaining films in the same

way.
The settings made will be effective immediately.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-62
[5-2] Motor Operation <OPERATIONS>
[5-2-1] Motor Operation 1. Select the conveyor motor.
[MB12]/[MB22]/[MD1]/[ME1]/[MG1]/[MJ1]
<FUNCTION>
Command for performing individual operations of the conveyor motor. 2. Select the Action.
<REMARKS> [STOP]/[CW]/[CCW]
• Not all operations (STOP/CW/CCW) can be selected for some motors. 3. Select the Speed. (Cannot select at ME1.)
• The motor will not stop driving unless [STOP] or re-initialization is performed. [High Speed]/[Low Speed]
4. Check the selected operation.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-63
[5-2-2] Adjusting Subscanner <IMPLEMENTATION OF CHANGES>
<FUNCTION> The settings made will be effective immediately.
Command for adjusting the film conveyance speed of the sub-scanning unit.
<NOTE>
The film size measured is that of the film currently loaded on film tray 1.
<OPERATIONS>
 When [Printed Length] is selected
1. Print the grid pattern.

{MU:3.3 [2-5]_Grid}
2. Select the printed film size.

[14x17 (35x43cm)]/[14x14(35x35cm)]/[10x14(26x36cm)]/[10x12(25x30cm)]/[8x10
(20x25cm)]
<NOTE>
Do not select [14x14 (35x35cm)].
3. Select the image printed.

[Grid]/[Flat]
4. [ENT]
5. Enter the sub-scanning length “F” measured from the grid pattern (4
digits in units of 1/10 mm).
{Specified Value (F)}
6. [ENT]
7. Print the grid pattern and check again.
 When [INITIALIZATION] is selected

• [YES] : The conveyance speed is initialized.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-64
 Specified Value (F)

F 413.0±1.2 226.5±1.0 225.5±1.0 225.5±1.0
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-65
[5-3] Grip [5-4] Other Actuators
Command for performing individual operations of the grip motor. Command for performing individual operations of actuators.
<REMARKS>
<OPERATIONS>
The grip state will continue unless the [Home Position] operation or re-initialization is
performed. 1. Select the actuator.
[SOLA11]/[SOLA21]/[SOLD1]/[PB11]/[PB21]/[SVB11]/[SVB21]
<OPERATIONS>
1. [MD2]
3. Check the selected operations.
2. Check individual operations in the order of [Home Positioning] →
[Grip].
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-66
[5-5] Sensor Monitor Name ON State OFF State
SD1 Conveyor unit entrance sen- Film is at upper con- Film is not at upper con-
<FUNCTION> sor veyor unit entrance veyor unit entrance
SD2 Conveyor unit exit sensor Film is at upper con- Film is not at upper con-
Command for performing sensor monitoring. veyor unit exit veyor unit exit
<REMARKS> SD3 Cleaning roller detection sen- Cleanning roller is Cleaning roller is absent
sor present
The alarm sounds and stops according to whether the sensor is ON/OFF.
SD4 Stopper release detection Stopper is at releasing Stopper is not at releas-
sensor position ing position (Stopper
<OPERATIONS> set)
SD5 Grip roller position detection Grip roller is at grip- Grip roller is at release
1. Select [Single] or [All].
SG1
sensor
Heat development unit en-
ping position
Film is at heat devel-
position
Film is not at heat de-
2. If [Single] is selected:
SJ1
trance sensor
Film release unit entrance
opment unit entrance
Film is at film release
velopment unit entrance
Film is not at film re-
Select the sensor to be monitored. sensor unit entrance lease unit entrance
SJ2 Film release sensor Film is at release unit Film is not at release
→ The state of the sensor selected appears. exit of the output tray unit exit of the output
tray
3. If [All] is selected:
SJ3 Upper small cover interlock Upper small cover is Upper small cover is
→ The states of all sensors appear. switch open closed
SK1 Upper front cover interlock Upper front cover is Upper front cover is
Name ON State OFF State switch open closed
SA11 Film pack/shutter detection Film pack/shutter is No film pack/shutter SK3 Upper right cover interlock Upper right cover is Upper right cover is
sensor (Upper) present switch open closed
SA12 Tray detection switch (Upper) Film tray is pulled out Film tray is pushed in +24V SND board+24V power sup- Power supply cut off Normal
SA13 Tray lock detection sensor Tray lock is released Tray lock is not re- ply
(Upper) leased +24V_A SOLA11/21, MB11/21, Meltdown Normal
SA21 Film pack/shutter detection Film pack/shutter is No film pack/shutter PB11/21, SVB11/21 power
sensor (Lower) present supply fuse (SND board F7)
SA22 Tray detection switch (Lower) Film tray is pulled out Film tray is pushed in +24V_B ME1, MG1, polygon motor Meltdown Normal
power supply fuse
SA23 Tray lock detection sensor Tray lock is released Tray lock is not re- (SND board F9)
(Lower) leased
+24V_C MB12/22 power supply fuse Meltdown Normal
SB11 Suction cup arm HP detection Suction cup arm is at Suction cup arm is not (SND board F11)
sensor (Upper) home position at home position
+24V_D MD1, MD2 power supply fuse Meltdown Normal
SB12 Film surface detection sensor Suction cup is at film Film suction state is (SND board F13)
(Upper) surface detected
+24V_E SOLD1, MJ1, SOLT1-3 power Meltdown Normal
SB13 Suction cup arm upper dead- Suction cup arm is at Suction cup arm is not supply fuse (SND board F15)
point detection sensor (Upper) upper dead-point at upper dead-point
VCCS Sensor, LED15A, BCR power Meltdown Normal
SB21 Suction cup arm HP detection Suction cup arm is at Suction cup arm is not supply fuse (SND board F5)
sensor (Lower) home position at home position
+12V PDD15A power supply fuse Meltdown Normal
(Lower) surface detected
-12V PDD15A power supply fuse Meltdown Normal
SB23 Suction cup arm upper dead- Suction cup arm is at Suction cup arm is not (SND board F3)
point detection sensor (Lower) upper dead-point at upper dead-point
READY Polygon motor Not Ready Ready
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-67
[5-6] Other [5-6-2] HDD Test
[5-6-1] Serial I/F <FUNCTION>

Command for executing the HDD test and checking hard disk operations when errors
<FUNCTION> occur while data is transferred from the MTH board to the hard disk (reading or
If I/F related errors such as SIO communication error occur, executes the loop back writing).
test between the SND board and BCR to check the operation. When HDD test is executed, check disk is performed on the R/W partitions in the hard
disk.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
<REMARKS>
Before executing the loop back test by [Barcode Reader], perform the following
beforehand because jumper pins need to be set for each film tray. • Execution time: Approx. 10 seconds/[Normal], Approx. 15 minutes/[Detail]
• Upper film tray: Short-circuit pins 2 - 3 of J2 and J3 of the SND board. • Applicable drive: Drive 1 to 5/[Normal], Drive 2, 3, 5/[Detail]
(Normally, pins 1 - 2 are short-circuited.)
• Lower film tray: Short-circuit pins 2 - 3 of J4 and J5 of the SND board. <OPERATIONS>
(Normally, pins 1 - 2 are short-circuited.)
1. Select [Normal] or [Detail].
<OPERATIONS> → “Wait for a while” appears.
1. Select the film tray. 2. Check the results of execution for Drive 1 to Drive 5.
[TRAY1]/[TRAY 2]
2. Select [START].
→ If errors are detected, the number of errors is displayed.
3. Select [STOP].
<NOTE>
The loop back test is repeatedly executed until [STOP] is selected.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-68
[5-6-3] DPRAM Test [5-6-4] Inter Board Test
Command for executing the DPRAM test and checking DPRAM operations when Command for executing inter board test and checking control operations when errors
communication errors such as FMT communication timeout error occur. occur in control operations of the MCT board and SND board.
When the DPRAM test is executed, the R/W test of the Dual Port RAM mounted on Executing the inter board test implements the control signal line/address data line
the MCT board is performed. tests between the MCT board and SND board.
1. Select [START]. 1. Select [START].

→ If normal, nothing is displayed. → If errors are detected, the number of errors is displayed.
→ If errors are detected, “Failed.” appears on the display.
2. Select [STOP].
2. Select [STOP].
<NOTE>
The inter board communication test is repeatedly executed until [STOP] is
selected.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-69
[5-6-5] Barcode Test
6. Select [Read Barcode].
<FUNCTION> After reading, check that the value displayed on the operation panel
and the barcode value used for the reading test are the same.
Command for executing the barcode reader reading test and checking operations of
the barcode reader when reading errors of the barcode reader occur.
There are two barcode reader reading tests; one by setting the barcode in the film tray
7. Select [Cancel].
and reading barcodes through the filter, and the other is reading barcodes directly by → Barcode reading ends.
pressing the barcode against the reading area.
 When performing reading test on the barcode reader alone
<INSTRUCTIONS>
For reading tests, use the barcodes pasted on the film pack for this equipment. 1. Select the film tray to be tested.
[TRAY1]/[TRAY 2]
<REMARKS>
Executing the barcode reading test reads the following barcode values. 2. [ENT]
3. Select [Unlock Tray].
4. Remove the film tray from the film loading unit.
5. Press the barcode to be used for the reading test against the reading
area of the barcode reader.
Press the barcode of a used film pack or a new one.
6. Select [Read Barcode].

After reading, check that the value displayed on the operation panel
and the barcode value used for the reading test are the same.
<OPERATIONS> 7. Select [Cancel].

→ Barcode reading ends.
 When setting barcode in the film tray to perform reading tests
1. Select the film tray to be tested.

[TRAY1]/[TRAY 2]
2. [ENT]
3. Select [Unlock Tray].
4. Pull out the film tray, and set the barcode to be tested on the film tray.
Set a used film pack or a new one.
5. Insert the film tray into the equipment and select [Lock Tray].
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-70
[5-7] Sorter Unit [5-7-2] Sensor Monitor
<NOTE> <FUNCTION>
This menu can be executed only when the sorter unit is connected to the Command for performing sensor monitoring of the sorter.
equipment, and also “[1-1-2-2-1] Sorter Connection” is set to “With Sorter”
when the equipment is started. <REMARKS>
{MU:3.3 [1-1-2-2-1]_Sorter Connection} The alarm sounds and stops according to whether the sensor is ON/OFF.
[5-7-1] Solenoids <OPERATIONS>

<FUNCTION> 1. Select [Single] or [All].
Command for performing solenoid operations.
2. If [Single] is selected:
<INITIAL DISPLAY>
Select the monitoring sensor.
Previous ON/OFF state
→ The state of the selected sensor is displayed.
<OPERATIONS> 3. If [All] is selected:
1. Select the solenoid. → The states of all the sensors selected are displayed.
[SOLT1]/[SOLT2]/[SOLT3] Name ON State OFF State

ST1 2nd bin film release sen-
sor
Film is at sorter exit of bin
2
Film is not at sorter exit of
bin 2
3. Check the operations of the selected solenoid.

ST2 3rd bin film release sensor Film is at sorter exit of bin
3
Film is not at sorter exit of
bin 3
ST3 4th bin film release sensor Film is at sorter exit of bin Film is not at sorter exit of
4 bin 4
ST4 Sorter right cover interlock Sorter right cover is open Sorter right cover is
switch closed
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-71
[6] Heat-Developer [6-2] Heating
<FUNCTION>
[6-1] Temperature Command for performing the ON/OFF of each heater.
<FUNCTION> CAUTION
If the upper limit temperature has been detected, the heater is turned OFF by the
Command for performing temperature monitoring of each thermistor.
thermal protector.
<REMARKS>
The displayed temperature is ten times the value and can be displayed to the first <OPERATIONS>
decimal point.
<NOTE>
 Example of Display During temperature control (after starting M-Utility, if [ALL] → [intermittent]
has been selected at “[6-2] Heating”, or [ON] has been selected at “[6-4] Temp.
Control”), check heater operations after stopping all heaters at step (1).
1. Stop all heaters.

[All Off Immediately]
2. Select the heater.

[HG1]/[HG2]/[HG4]/[HG5]/[ALL]
3. Select the Action.

[ON]/[OFF]/[intermittent]

{MU:[6-1]_Temperature}
5. After checking, return temperature control to normal operations.

[ALL] → [intermittent]
<REMARKS>
To return temperature control to normal operations, “[6-4] Temp. Control” can be
set to “ON” instead.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-72
[6-3] Fan Operation [6-4] Temp. Control
Command for performing the ON/OFF operations of the cooling fan. Command for performing ON/OFF control of temperature.
<NOTE> <REMARKS>
• Before executing this menu, be sure to set “[6-4] Temp. Control” to “OFF” • At this menu, to enable individual operations ([6-2] Heating) for resetting, [ON] can
beforehand. be selected even in the ON state.
• After executing fan operations, exiting the M-Utility executes re-initialization • If this equipment was started by “Skip Initialize” setting, operations may not be
and returns normal operations of the fan. performed as intended at the beginning.
1. Set “[6-4] Temp. Control” to “OFF”. 1. Select the operation.

[ON]/[OFF]
2. Select the fan.
[Group A]/[Group B] 2. Check the selected operations.
<REMARKS>
• [Group A]: FANG1, FANG3
• [Group B]: FANG2
3. Select voltage.
[14V]/[16V]/[18V]/[20V]/[22V]/[24V]
4. Select the Action.

[ON]/[OFF]/[intermittent]
5. Check the selected operations.
6. After checking operations, set “[6-4] Temp. Control” to “ON”.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-73
[6-5] Set Heater Temp. [6-6] Power Supply Voltage
Command for setting the default of the targeted temperature of each heater. Command for setting the power voltage of the heater.
<REMARKS> <NOTE>
The displayed temperature is ten times the value and can be displayed to the first • As 100V models are equipped with a different heater from 200V models, even
decimal point. if 200V/220V/230V/240V is set, there is no risk of overheating of the heater.
• If the wrong voltage is set, the equipment may set into the Ready state earlier
or later than expected, resulting in change in recording density for the first
<OPERATIONS> few films immediately after Ready.
1. Select the heater.

<REMARKS>
[HG1]/[HG2]/[HG4]/[HG5]
This equipment performs heat development control by changing the pulse width of the
2. Enter the targeted temperature default (100 to 130 °C) (In units of 0.1 °C) heater ON time according to the voltage selected.

1. Select the input power voltage.
[100V]/[110V]/[120V]/[200V]/[220V]/[230V]/[240V]
2. Select [YES]/[NO].
• [YES] : The power voltage selected is set.
• [NO] : The power voltage selected is not set and returns to the previous
screen.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-74
[7] Skip Initialize [7-2] Developer
<FUNCTION>
<NOTE>
Command for setting skipping temperature control.
Command which is effective only when the equipment is started up. After the
M-Utility is ended, initialization self-diagnosis will be carried out according to <NOTE>
skip settings. The settings are valid until the equipment is rebooted and are • When set to [Skip Init. & Heating Up], if temperature control is currently being
invalid even if re-initialization is executed. performed, it will be stopped.
• After setting to [Skip Init. & Heating Up], temperature control will not start if
“[6-4] Temp. Control” is not set to “ON”.
[7-1] Eject Film Remaining
Command for setting skipping discharge of remaining films. [Go]
<NOTE>
<OPERATIONS>
When set to [Skip], remaining films detected during initialization self-diagnosis
by the sensor will not be discharged.
1. Select the skip type.
• [Skip Initialize] : Skips only temperature control initialization, and
<DEFAULT> does not wait for the appropriate temperature.
[Go] • [Skip Init. & Heating Up] : No temperature control is performed.
• [Go] : Returns to the previous screen without skipping.
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the skip type. <IMPLEMENTATION OF CHANGES>

[Skip]/[Go] The settings made will be preserved until the equipment is rebooted.
The settings made will be preserved until the equipment is rebooted.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-75
4. DI Tool
The DI Tool is a service tool software which has the functions of the DICOM
connection setting tool software and the M-Utility functions of the equipment.
Using the DI Tool allows the following operations and settings to be performed in
addition to the M-Utility functions of the equipment.
• Setup of clients (image output devices) connected to the DICOM network
• Setup of annotations printed on film
• Setup of discharge destination of the sorter by client
• Installation and version upgrade of main unit software
• Backup of individual data
• Saving/loading of equipment data file
• Saving of analysis data
The DI Tool also enables settings of printers installed in hospitals serviced by service
representatives to be managed and saved.
<NOTE>
• DI Tool is an integrated service tool software package for Fuji medical dry
imagers containing “DPX7 PC Tool” and “DPX PC Tools”.
For this equipment, “DPX7 PC Tool” contained in DI Tool is used.
This manual describes the DPX7 PC Tool functions applicable to this
equipment.
• In this manual, the entire service tool software package is referred to as “DI
Tool”, and an individual function used on this equipment is referred to as
“DXP7 PC Tool function” in the descriptions of functions, etc.
• By using the DI Tool, files will be saved in the “Indv” folder and “LOG”
folder in the folder of the selected printer name, which is in the folder of “C:\
Program Files\FujiFilm\DRYPIX\Printers” of the PC for servicing.
In this chapter, these folders are referred to as “Indv” folder and “LOG” folder.
• For equipment with main unit software version V3.0 or later at shipment,
when equipment data is read, the DPX7 PC Tool screen [Clients:] list shows
“MammoQCTest”. However, if the version has been upgraded from an earlier
version, as this will not be displayed, add and register new clients.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-76
4.1 DI Tool (DPX7 PC Tool Function) Operations
4.1.1 Outline of Operations

The detailed functions of the DPX7 PC Tool function are classified into twelve types,
some of which are “Function buttons” on the top of the DPX7 PC Tool function screen
and some can be selected from the menu bar.
{MU:4.6_DPX7 PC Tool Function Menu Tree}
The basic operations of the DPX7 PC Tool function consist of selecting the name of
the printer used for performing maintenance and installation work from [Equipment
list], and selecting the desired function to be performed for this printer from a “Function
button”. This allows various settings, changes, and checks to be performed using the
menus and parameters displayed on the “Function area”.
When performing settings, changes, and checks using the DPX7 PC Tool function,
some functions may require equipment data files to be imported to the DPX7 PC Tool
function before using [File Save/Load] of the [Control] function or [Printer => PC] of
the [Data Transfer] function.
After settings and changes, there is a need to return the changed file to the
equipment.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-77
4.1.2 Operations of the Configuration Setting Screen  Saving and Canceling Settings
The following describes operations at the equipment configuration setting screen Clicking [Update] at the bottom of the “Function area” saves the settings of the
(“[PC1-2] Config”) and client parameter setting screen (“[PC1-3] Clients”). equipment or client at that point. Clicking [Cancel] returns to the settings previously
saved.
 Example of Screen (Client Parameter Setting Screen)
After confirming the value set, clicking other function buttons saves the settings in the
same way as clicking [Update].
 Entering and Selecting Settings

Double-clicking a menu at “Item” or parameter at “Value” enables the values in the
“Value” column to be changed.
Change the value by entering on the PC keyboard, selecting a value from the drop-
down list, or using the / button for changing values.
 Confirming Values Set

After changing a value at “Item”, press the <Enter> key on the PC keyboard or move
the cursor to another item to confirm the value set.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-78
4.2 Preparations for Using the DI Tool 4.2.1 PC Environment Required for Installing the DI Tool
In order to use the DI Tool (DPX7 PC Tool function), the Service Center or Service  Environment of PC for Servicing
Station, etc. must first install the DI Tool in the PC for servicing and set the directory of
the FTP site.
 OS
<NOTE>
Microsoft Windows 2000 (SP4) or Windows XP Professional (SP2)
The 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX straight cable is required for connecting the PC for
servicing.  Accessories
CD-ROM drive
<REMARKS>
 Display
800 x 600 pixels or higher-resolution display
equipment via the network, but it is also possible to directly connect the PC for
servicing to this equipment using the 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX crossing cable.  PC for servicing installing DPX7 PC Tool and DPX PC Tools
before DI Tool
The DI Tool may be installed as it is in the PC for servicing installing the DPX7 PC
Tool or DPX PC Tools before DI Tool.
In this case, the various setup data of the DPX7 PC Tool or DPX PC Tools remaining
in the PC for servicing is succeeded onto the DI Tool.
<NOTE>
After installation of the DI Tool, as the functions of both DPX7 PC Tool and DPX
PC Tools can be used on the DI Tool, delete the shortcut icons of the DPX7 PC
Tool and DPX PC Tools on the desktop and start menu of the PC for servicing.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-79
4.2.2 Installing/Uninstalling/Version Upgrading the DI Tool  Uninstalling Procedure
To uninstall the DI Tool from the PC, perform the following procedure.
 Installing Procedure
Install the DI Tool as follows. 1. Check that the power of the PC is ON.
<NOTE> 2. If there are any applications currently running, end them. Also turn
If the DRYPIX Net Tool is already installed in the PC in which the DI Tool is to be OFF any resident virus software which may be running.
installed, uninstall the DRYPIX Net Tool first.
In this case, save the information which is set with the DRYPIX Net Tool before 3. Click [Start] from the Windows taskbar, then [Settings] → [Control
uninstalling it and use this information when using the DRYPIX Net Tool on the Panel].
PC again in the future.
4. Double-click the [Add/Remove Programs] icon.
1. Check that the power of the PC is ON.
5. From the [Currently installed programs:] list, click [DI Tool Uninstall]
2. If there are any applications currently running, end them. Also turn and then [Change/Remove].
OFF any resident virus software which may be running. → The [Confirm File Deletion] dialog appears to confirm whether to uninstall the
DI Tool.
3. Load the CD-R for installation in the CD-ROM drive.
6. Click [Yes].
→ The installer starts automatically, and the [Choose Destination Location]
dialog for specifying the location for saving the DI Tool appears. → The [Remove Programs From Your Computer] window appears to uninstall
the DI Tool.
4. Click [Next] at the default location shown.
7. Upon completion, click [OK].
→ Installation of the DI Tool starts.
When installation completes normally, the [Setup Complete] screen appears. <NOTE>
<REMARKS> If the message “Some elements could not be removed. ...” is displayed
when deletion completes, click [Details...] and note down the files and
The DI Tool will be saved in the “C:\Program Files\FujiFilm” directory. folders which could not be deleted.
After completing the following steps, delete the files and folders noted
5. Click [Finish]. down.
6. Remove the installation CD-R and close all windows opened on the 8. Close all windows opened on the Windows desktop.
Windows desktop.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-80
 Upgrading the DI Tool Version 4.2.3 Setting the FTP Site Directory of the PC
Upgrade the version of the DI Tool as follows. To perform transmission and reception of various data with the equipment, there is a
The version upgrading procedure is the same as the installation procedure. need to set the FTP site directory of the PC installed with the DI Tool.
Described here is the setting method for an example of Windows 2000.
1. Check that the power of the PC is ON. Settings are performed in the same way basically for Windows XP, however
precautionary items and addition setup items may be provided.
2. If there are any applications currently running, end them. Also turn {MU:Appendix 1_PRECAUTIONS AND SETTINGS IN THE USE OF Windows XP
OFF any resident virus software which may be running. PC FOR SERVICING}
<NOTE>
3. Load the CD-R for installation in the CD-ROM drive.
To set the FTP site directory of the PC, Internet Information Services (IIS)
→ The installer starts automatically, and the [Choose Destination Location] function (one of the Windows components) is required.
dialog for specifying the location for saving the DI Tool appears. This Internet Information Services (IIS) will not be installed in the standard
4. Click [Next] at the default location shown.
installation of Windows 2000. If not installed in the PC used, install it as follows.
→ Installation of the DI Tool starts.

When installation completes normally, the [Setup Complete] screen appears.
 Installing the Internet Information Services (IIS)
<REMARKS>
1. Click [Start] from the Windows taskbar, then [Settings] → [Control
The DI Tool will be saved in the “C:\Program Files\FujiFilm” directory. Panel].
5. Click [Finish].
2. Double-click the [Add/Remove Programs] icon.
6. Remove the installation CD-R and close all windows opened on the
3. Click [Add/Remove Windows Components].
Windows desktop. 4. Select the checkbox of [Internet Information Services (IIS)] from the
[Components:] list, and click [Next].
5. Follow the instructions of the [Windows Components Wizard] dialog

to install the Internet Information Services (IIS).
If the message [Insert Disk] appears halfway through to prompt for the
“Windows 2000 CD-ROM” to be inserted, insert the CD-ROM into the
CD-ROM drive and click [OK].
<REMARKS>
If the [Microsoft Windows 2000 CD] window appears upon inserting the “Windows
2000 CD-ROM”, click [Exit] to close the window.
6. After completing installation, click [Finish].
7. Close all windows opened on the Windows desktop.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-81
 Setting the FTP Site Directory of the PC 9. Set the folder name installing the DI Tool (C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\
DRYPIX) at [Local Path:] , and select the checkboxes of [Read], [Write],
1. Click [Start] from the Windows taskbar, then [Settings] → [Control and [Log visits].
Panel].
<NOTE>
2. Double-click the [Administrative Tools] icon. If the directory of the FTP site is not set to the folder installing the DI Tool
(C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\DRYPIX), the DI Tool will not operate properly. If
3. Double-click the [Internet Services Manager] icon. using other applications on the same PC, after using the DI Tool, return to
the settings noted down at step 8.
4. Double-click the computer name of the PC used from the [Computer] In addition, “C:\inetpub\ftproot” is the default value of Windows 2000 and
list. can be changed.
5. Check that [Default FTP Site] is set to [Running]. If set to [Stopped] or

[Pause], right-click [Default FTP Site] and select [Start].
6. Right-click [Default FTP Site], and click [Properties] from the popup
menu.
7. Click the [Home Directory] tab.
8. Note down the path set at [Local Path:]

<NOTE>
As Windows 2000 has only one home directory for all accounts, if another
directory (folder name) has already been specified for [Local Path:], other
applications may be using it.
10. Click [OK].

006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-82
4.2.4 Setting Grouping Symbols 4. Check that [Decimal symbol] is “ . ” (period).
When the [Regional Options] of the PC installing the DI Tool is not English, check the
setting of the grouping symbol, and change it if different from below.
<NOTE>
If the setting differs, the formatter error “0005” will occur when files are
transferred to this equipment.
 Checking Procedure

Panel].
2. Double-click the [Regional Options] icon.
3. Click the [Numbers] tab.
<NOTE>
If as a result of the above selection, the same symbol is selected for [Digit
grouping symbol] and [Decimal symbol], change the symbol for [Digit
grouping symbol].
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-83
5. Click the [Time] tab. 7. Click the [Date] tab.
6. Check that [Time separator] is “ : ” (colon). 8. Check that [Date separator] is “ / ” (slash).
9. Click [OK].
10. Close the [Control Panel] window.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-84
4.3 Flow of DI Tool Operations 6. Set [IP Address] and [Subnet Mask].
<INSTRUCTIONS>
4.3.1 Connecting the PC for Servicing to the Network Confirm details such as IP address and subnet mask with the network
To connect the PC for servicing to the network, set the IP address and subnet mask of administrator of the installation site.
1. Connect the network cable of the PC for servicing to the network to

which the equipment is connected.
2. Turn ON the power of the PC for servicing.
3. Check that the directory setting of the FTP site is “C:\Program Files\
FujiFilm\ DRYPIX”.
4. From the Windows taskbar, click [Start] → [Settings] → [Control

Panel].
5. Double-click [Network and Dial-up Connections] → Right-click [Local

Area Connection] → [Properties] → Double-click [Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP)].
7. [OK] → [OK]
8. Close all windows.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-85
4.3.2 Starting the DI Tool (DPX7 PC Tool Function) 4.3.3 Connecting DI Tool to the Equipment
Complete the connection of the communication between the DPX7 PC Tool function
1. Click [Start] from the Windows taskbar → [Program] → [Fujifilm] → [DI and this equipment.
Tool].
<NOTE>
→ The DI Tool main screen appears.
If the equipment in which maintenance and installation are to be performed is
already registered to the DPX7 PC Tool function, skip this procedure.
1. Check that the equipment to be connected is in the standby state.
2. Right-click [Hospital Name] → [Add]
2. Click [NET] of “DRYPIX7000/DRYPIX5000/DRYPIX4000”.

→ Start the DPX7 PC Tool function. After starting, the DPX7 PC Tool function
screen will be displayed.
→ The screen for entering the printer name (Host Name) to be registered
appears.
3. Enter the Host Name set for the equipment connected.
4. Select [DRYPIX 4000] for [Model].
5. [OK]
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-86
6. [Network] 8. Click the function button (ex. [Control] button).
→ Communication with this equipment starts. When all connections with this
equipment have completed, the operation panel of this equipment switches
to the following screen, activating the various commands from DPX7 PC Tool
function.
<NOTE>
• If communication fails, the error message [LOGIN Failure] will be
displayed on the DPX7 PC Tool function.
• While “PC-UTL Executing” is displayed, the equipment will not be able to
receive print requests.
→ The [HostInformation] screen appears.
7. Enter the IP Address of the equipment and subnet mask → [OK].

→ This completes preparations for enabling communications between this
equipment and DPX7 PC Tool function.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-87
4.3.4 Importing Individual Data → After import ends, the [File transfer is completed.] message appears, and the
data is saved in the HD in the PC for servicing.
Import individual data from the equipment on which maintenance is to be performed.
<NOTE>
• Some detailed function of the DPX7 PC Tool functions may not need import of
individual data.
{MU:4.7_DPX7 PC Tool Function Command Details}
• The following describes the procedure for importing all the individual data
using [File Save/Load] of the [Control] function. As an alternative to this, 2. [OK]
data files can be imported according to the purpose using the [Data Transfer]
function.
4.3.5 Setting/Changing/Checking Individual Data Using the
{MU:4.7 [PC2]_Data Transfer}
DPX7 PC Tool Function
Refer to “4.7 DPX7 PC Tool Function Command Details”, perform the desired setting,
1. “Printer name importing individual data” → [Control] → [File Save/ changes, or checks.
Load] → [Save from the printer] → [Execute] To obtain log data, refer to “5.10 Acquiring Log Files” and check the acquired log data
→ Reading of individual data starts. files.
{MU:4.7_DPX7 PC Tool Function Command Details}, {MU:5.10_Acquiring Log
Files}
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-88
4.3.6 Sending Individual Data to the Equipment 2. [OK]
Transfer individual data whose settings have been changed to the equipment.
3. Reboot the equipment for the transferred individual data to be valid.
1. “Printer name” → [Control] → [File Save/Load] → [Load to the printer]
→ [Execute] <NOTE>
→ The individual data is sent to the equipment. The equipment may not need to be rebooted for some detailed function of
the DPX7 PC Tool functions.
{MU:4.7_DPX7 PC Tool Function Command Details}

All] → [Reset]
→ The equipment is rebooted.
→ After transfer of individual data ends, the [File transfer is completed.]

message appears, and the individual data is saved in the HD of the equipment.
→ As communication is cut off when the equipment is rebooted, the [LOGIN

Failure] screen appears.
4. [OK]
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-89
4.3.7 Ending the DI Tool (DPX7 PC Tool Function)
1. To end the DPX7 PC Tool function, click [Exit] at the top right of the
DPX7 PC Tool function screen.
<REMARKS>
The button at the top right-hand corner of the screen and [Exit] of the [File]
menu have the same function as the [Exit] button.
→ All settings are saved, and the DPX7 PC Tool function is ended.
2. Click [Exit] on the DI Tool main screen to end the DI Tool.
3. If directory settings of the FTP site were changed at step (3) of “4.3.1
Connecting the PC for Servicing to the Network”, set back the original
settings.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-90
4.4 Registering and Deleting the 2. Enter the establishment name → [OK]
Establishments and Printers → The registered establishment name is added to [Equipment list].
The following shows an example of registering under the name “FUJI
Perform the following procedure to register several establishments and printers to the HOSPITAL”.
The registration and setting of establishments and printers can be performed after
connecting with the equipment at the user or beforehand at the Service Center, etc.
4.4.1 Registering Establishments

<NOTE>
• Names which have already been registered, which exceed 16 characters,
consist of space only, contain two-byte size characters, or start with number
cannot be registered.
• Establishment names cannot be changed once they have been registered. To
change, register the establishment by copy/paste, change the name at this
time, and then delete the copied establishment.
As the establishment name registered as default (Hospital Name) also cannot
be changed, delete it if unnecessary.
• The following describes a procedure performed by right-clicking the mouse.
Registration can also be performed by selecting the corresponding command
from the [Edit] menu.
<REMARKS>
Up to 128 establishments can be registered.
 Registering New Establishments
1. Right-click [Equip Management] of [Equipment list] → [Add]

→ The [Add EstablishmentName] screen for entering the name of the
establishment to be registered appears.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-91
 Registering Establishments by Copy/Paste 4.4.2 Registering Printers
<REMARKS> <NOTE>
Registering an establishment by copy/paste will also copy printers registered for the Names which have already been registered, which exceed 16 characters, consist
copied establishment. of spaceonly, contain two-byte size characters, or start with number cannot be
registered.
1. Right-click the name of the establishment to be copied from [Equipment <REMARKS>

list] → [Copy]
• Up to 32 printers can be registered per establishment.
2. Right-click [Equip Management] → [Paste] • The following describes a procedure performed by right-clicking the mouse.
Registration can also be performed by selecting the corresponding command from
→ The [Paste EstablishmentName] screen for entering the name of the the [Edit] menu.
establishment to be registered appears.
• When a printer is registered, a folder named “Establishment name_Printer name”
3. Enter the establishment name → [OK] will be created in the “C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\DRYPIX\Printers” folder.
→ The establishment name registered by copy/paste will be added to [Equipment
list].
 Deleting Establishments
1. Right-click the name of the establishment to be deleted from

[Equipment list] → [Delete] → [OK]
→ The selected establishment name is deleted from [Equipment list].
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-92
 Registering New Printers  Registering Printers by Copy/Paste
1. Right-click the name of the establishment for which the printer is to be <REMARKS>
registered from [Equipment list] → [Add] Registering a printer by copy/paste will also copy the clients registered for the copied
→ The [Add HostName] screen for entering the name of the printer to be printer.
registered appears.
2. Enter the printer name and select [DRYPIX 4000] for [Model] → [OK]
1. Right-click the name of the printer to be copied from [Equipment list]
→ [Copy]
→ The registered printer name is added to the establishment selected from
[Equipment list]. 2. Right-click the name of the establishment to register the printer →
The following shows an example of registering printers under the name [Paste]
“DPX4000-1” and “DPX4000-2” for the establishment name “FUJI → The [Paste HostName] screen for entering the name of the printer to be
HOSPITAL”. registered by copy/paste appears.
→ The printer name registered by copy/paste will be added to the establishment
selected from [Equipment list].
 Deleting Printers
1. Right-click the name of the printer to be deleted from [Equipment list]

→ [Delete] → [OK]
→ The selected printer name is deleted from [Equipment list].
 Changing the Printer Name
1. Select the name of the printer to be changed from [Equipment list].
2. Click [Network] at [System:] of the [Setting] function screen.
3. Enter the printer name (maximum 16 characters) to be changed in the

[HostName] box → [OK]
→ The printer name selected from [Equipment list] is changed.
{MU:4.7 [PC1-1-1]_HostName}
3. Refer to “4.7 DPX7 PC Tool Function Command Details [PC1-2]

Config” and set the configuration for the registered printer.
{MU:4.7 [PC1-2]_Config}
4. Repeat this procedure for all the printers that need to be registered.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-93
4.5 Registering and Deleting Clients  [Clients:] list
Clients requesting printing to registered printers can be registered or deleted.
<NOTE>
• Names which have already been registered, which exceed 16 characters,
consist of space only, or contain two-byte size characters cannot be
registered.
• It is not possible to register clients with the same name on one printer. Clients
with the same name can be registered on different printers, however if these
printers exist within the same establishment, the settings of additional clients
registered will be the same as existing clients.
Changing the name and settings of one client will make the same changes in
the other clients as well.
The [Clients:] list shows the client names of all currently registered clients. If no
• Importing individual data displays the client name registered and set in the clients are registered, “default”, “FCR-CSL”, “WatchDRYPIXLink”, “QC-TEST” and
printer in the [Clients:] list. “MammoQCTest” will be registered.
CAUTION
<REMARKS>
If DRYPIX Link is client, then “WatchDRYPIXLink” will be the internal AE Title
The maximum number of clients which can be registered is 64 including “default”, used for communication. In this case, do not change it. Changing it will disable
“FCR-CSL”, “WatchDRYPIXLink”, “QC-TEST” and “MammoQCTest”. communication when DRYPIX Link and this equipment are connected.
<NOTE>
For equipment with main unit software version V3.0 or later at shipment,
“MammoQCTest” is registered as default. If the version has been upgraded from
an earlier version, read equipment data and add and register new clients.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-93.1
<REMARKS>
FCR-CSL : Settings provided for connecting CR-IR346CL (console for FCR
XG-1) and CR-IR348CL (console for FCR5000 series). This settings
is applied to the clients of named “FCR-CSL”.
default : Settings for clients other than the above.
QC-TEST : Name of default client (AE Title) used in U-Utility QC test pattern
output.
MammoQCTest : Name of default client (AE Title) used in U-Utility Mammo QC test
pattern output.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-93.2
BLANK PAGE
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-94
 Registering New Clients 3. Refer to “4.7 DPX7 PC Tool Function Command Details [PC1-3] Client”
and set various parameters to the registered client.
1. [Setting] → “Printer name” → [Add] {MU:4.7 [PC1-3]_Client}
4. Repeat this procedure for all the clients that need to be registered.
 Deleting Clients
1. Click the name of the client to be deleted from the [Clients:] list.
<REMARKS>
“default”, “FCR-CSL”, “WatchDRYPIXLink”, “QC-TEST” and “MammoQCTest”
cannot be deleted. (If the main unit software version has been upgraded from
→ The [ProtocolInformation] screen for entering the client name (AE Title) to be V2.0 or earlier to V3.0 or later, it will also not be possible to delete “MammoQCTest”
registered appears. newly registered manually.)
2. Enter the client name → [OK]

→ The new client is added to the [Clients:] list.
2. [Delete] → [OK]
The following shows an example where a client “DICOM-CT” was added. → The selected client is deleted.
 Changing the Client Name
1. Double-click the name of the client to be changed from the [Clients:]

list.
→ The [ProtocolInformation] dialog of the client selected appears.
2. Change the name of the client → [OK]

→ The name of the client selected changes.
<NOTE>
If clients with the same name exist in one establishment, changing the
name of one client also changes the name of the other clients.
<REMARKS>
The names set at “default”, “FCR-CSL”, “WatchDRYPIXLink”, “QC-TEST” and
“MammoQCTest” cannot be changed. (If the main unit software version has been
upgraded from V2.0 or earlier to V3.0 or later, it will also not be possible to delete
“MammoQCTest” newly registered manually.)
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-95
4.6 DPX7 PC Tool Function Menu Tree DPX7 PC Tool
[PC1] Setting
Functions displayed on the DPX7 PC Tool function screen are classified as follows on
the menu tree. [PC1-1] Network
[PC1-1-1] HostName
[PC1-1-2] IP Address
[PC1-1-3] SubnetMask
[PC1-1-4] Default Gateway
[PC1-1-5] Mac Address
[PC1-2] Config
[PC1-2-1] Version
[PC1-2-2] Protocol Information
[PC1-2-2-1] AE-title
[PC1-2-2-2] Fine PRT AE-title
[PC1-2-2-3] Port No.
[PC1-2-2-4] Data Transfer Timeout
[PC1-2-3] Association Count
[PC1-2-4] Logging DICOM
[PC1-2-5] Default Client
[PC1-2-6] Real Dmax on film (For DI Tool software version V2.0
or later)
[PC1-2-7] Requested Dmax less than 3.6 (For DI Tool software

version V2.0 or later)
[PC1-2-8] Printer
A B C
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-96
A B C D E
[PC1-2-9] Option [PC1-3] Clients

[PC1-2-9-1] 17-Steps Pattern [PC1-3-1] Protocol
[PC1-2-9-2] Auto FDC [PC1-3-1-1] Attribute List Error (0107H Warning)
[PC1-2-9-3] Set Alarm [PC1-3-1-2] Attribute Value Out of Range (0116H
[PC1-2-9-4] Set Alarm Tone Warning)
[PC1-2-9-5] Set Key Touch [PC1-3-1-3] Image Size is Larger than Imagebox
[PC1-2-9-6] Set Key Touch Tone (B604H Warning)
[PC1-2-9-7] Language [PC1-3-1-4] N-Event-ReportRQ

[PC1-2-9-8] Sorter [PC1-3-1-5] Use Extention format
[PC1-2-9-9] Size Information [PC1-3-1-6] Change Film
[PC1-2-9-10] User Settable [PC1-3-1-7] Use System Timeout
[PC1-2-9-11] BackupLog [PC1-3-1-8] Presentation LUT
[PC1-2-9-12] QC [PC1-3-1-9] Precede Picking Up
[PC1-2-9-12-1] Enabling Step4 [PC1-3-1-10] Use Max/Min Density
[PC1-2-9-12-2] Set Target Density [PC1-3-1-11] Logging Client
[PC1-2-9-13] Film Information [PC1-3-1-12] Reprint
[PC1-2-9-14] Date Format [PC1-3-1-13] Change Base Color (Disable:110H[F])
[PC1-2-9-15] Mobile [PC1-3-1-14] Define Film Size of 11x14"
[PC1-2-9-16] Warning at system start (For DI Tool [PC1-3-2] Magnify
software version V2.0 or later) [PC1-3-2-1] Procedure
[PC1-2-9-17] Spatial Resolution (For DI Tool software [PC1-3-2-2] Default Smoothing Type
version V3.0 or later) [PC1-3-2-3] Adjustment Parameter
[PC1-2-9-18] MammoQC (For DI Tool software version [PC1-3-2-4] Default Requested Decimate/Crop
V3.0 or later) Behavior
D E
[PC1-2-9-19] Recognize position on 8x10 (20x25) (For [PC1-3-2-5] Magnification Type
DI Tool software version V3.0 or later) [PC1-3-2-6] Requested Image Size (0=None)
[PC1-2-10] Tray1/Tray2 [PC1-3-2-6-1] Default Requested Image Size
[PC1-2-11] Sorting by Film Size
F G
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-97
F G H I
[PC1-3-3] LUT [PC1-3-4] Output Format

[PC1-3-3-1] Procedure [PC1-3-4-1] Border Density
[PC1-3-3-2] Default LUT [PC1-3-4-1-1] Default Border Density
[PC1-3-3-2-1] Configuration Information [PC1-3-4-2] Polarity(Pos./Neg.)
(Default LUT#) [PC1-3-4-3] Trim Density
[PC1-3-3-3] Adjustment Parameter [PC1-3-4-4] Trim
[PC1-3-3-4] Dmax 3.6 [PC1-3-4-5] Trim Width
[PC1-3-3-5] Illumination [PC1-3-4-6] Number of Copies
[PC1-3-3-5-1] Default Illumination [PC1-3-4-6-1] Default Number of Copies
[PC1-3-3-6] Reflective Ambient Light [PC1-3-4-7] Margin between Image
[PC1-3-3-6-1] Default Ambient Light [PC1-3-4-8] Image Layout
[PC1-3-4-9] Default Film Size
H I
[PC1-3-4-9-1] Film Size
[PC1-3-4-10] Default Medium Type
[PC1-3-4-10-1] Medium Type (base color)
[PC1-3-4-11] Film Orientation
[PC1-3-4-12] Mirror
[PC1-3-4-13] Processing Type
[PC1-3-4-14] Print Priority
[PC1-3-4-15] Resolution
[PC1-3-4-16] Default Film Destination
[PC1-3-4-17] Film Destination
[PC1-3-5] Annotation
[PC1-3-5-1] Annotation Height
[PC1-3-5-2] Annotation Font
[PC1-3-5-3] Annotation size
[PC1-3-5-4] Upper Left/Upper Center/Upper Right/
Lower Left/Lower Center/Lower Right
J
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-98
J K
[PC2] Data Transfer [PC7] F.D.C.

[PC2-1] Indv [PC7-1] Auto F.D.C.
[PC2-2] Operation [PC7-2] Check Density
[PC2-3] Log [PC7-3] 24-Steps
[PC2-4] Files [PC7-4] Manual F.D.C.
[PC2-5] User Settable [PC7-5] Calibration
[PC3] Upgrading [PC7-6] Uniformity
[PC3-1] Data Disk [PC7-6-1] Clear Table
[PC3-2] To Printer [PC7-6-2] Input
[PC4] Analyzer [PC7-7] DM sensor monitor
[PC5] DICOM Print [PC8] Check
[PC6] OutPutFilm [PC8-1] Check Scanner
[PC6-1] 24-Steps [PC8-1-1] Initialize Scanner
[PC6-2] 17-Steps [PC8-1-2] Adjusting Main Scanner
[PC6-3] Flat [PC8-1-3] Polygonal Motor LD
[PC6-4] Cleaning [PC8-1-4] Initial Check
[PC6-5] Grid [PC8-1-5] PRN Board Test
[PC6-6] Film out to Sorter [PC8-2] Check Mechanism
[PC6-7] Uniformity [PC8-2-1] Moving
[PC6-8] SMPTE [PC8-2-1-1] Unit Operation
[PC6-9] User Settable [PC8-2-1-2] Motor Operation
[PC6-10] Spatial Resolution (For DI Tool software version V2.0 or later) [PC8-2-1-3] Grip
[PC8-2-1-4] Adjusting Subscanner
K
[PC8-2-1-5] Other Actuators
[PC8-2-1-6] Solenoids
[PC8-2-1-7] Sensor Monitor
[PC8-2-2] Sensor Monitor
L M N
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-99
L M N O P
[PC8-2-3] Other [PC9-4] Set Parameter

[PC8-2-3-1] Serial I/F [PC9-4-1] Status Lamp
[PC8-2-3-2] HDD Test [PC10] Film Counter
[PC8-2-3-3] DPRAM Test [PC11] Print Queue
[PC8-2-3-4] Inter Board Test [PC12] Tool
[PC8-2-3-5] LAN Base Test [PC12-1] GetLog
[PC8-2-3-6] Status Lamp Test [PC12-2] HW AutoCheck
[PC8-3] Heat-Developer
[PC8-3-1] Temperature
[PC8-3-2] Heating
[PC8-3-3] Fan Operation
[PC8-3-4] Temp. Control
[PC8-3-5] Set Heater Cond. Temp.
[PC9] Control
[PC9-1] File Save/Load
[PC9-1-1] Log data
[PC9-1-2] Error Log
[PC9-1-3] Indv. Data
[PC9-2] System Config
[PC9-2-1] Set Date/Time.
[PC9-2-2] Save Config.
[PC9-2-3] Initialize
[PC9-2-4] Reboot
[PC9-2-5] Set Counters
[PC9-2-6] Set Remain. Films
[PC9-3] Set Main Panel
[PC9-3-1] Sound Test
[PC9-3-2] Motion Speed
O P
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-100
4.7 DPX7 PC Tool Function Command Details [PC1-1-1] HostName
[PC1] Setting <FUNCTION>

Command for setting the host name of the equipment.
{MU:3.3 [1-4-2-4]_Hostname}
[PC1-1] Network
<REMARKS>
To communicate with printers connected to the network, first enter the network setting
of the printer at the [HostInformation] screen. • The allowable characters for the host name are alphabets (upper and lower cases),
numbers, and hyphen “-”.
• The following are unaccepted.
• Space
• Name starting with a number.
<OPERATIONS>
1. Enter the host name (maximum 16 digits).
[PC1-1-2] IP Address
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the IP address of the equipment.
{MU:3.3 [1-4-1-1]_IP Address}
<REMARKS>
• Input range: 0 to 255
• Unaccepted: “0.0.0.0”, “255.255.255.255”, no value is entered
<OPERATIONS>
1. Enter the IP address (decimal).
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-101
[PC1-1-3] SubnetMask [PC1-1-5] MacAddress
Command for setting the subnet mask of the equipment. The MAC address of the MTH board is displayed.
{MU:3.3 [1-4-1-2]_SubNetMask} {MU:3.3 [1-4-1-4]_Mac Address}
<REMARKS>
• If no value is entered, it will be unacceptable.
<OPERATIONS>
1. Enter the subnet mask (decimal).
[PC1-1-4] Default Gateway
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the default gateway address of the equipment.
{MU:3.3 [1-4-1-3]_Gateway}
<REMARKS>
• Unaccepted: “0.0.0.0”, “255.255.255.255”
• If no value is entered, it will be taken as incomplete setting.
<OPERATIONS>
1. Enter the default gateway address (decimal).
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-102
[PC1-2] Config [PC1-2-1] Version
Command for setting the configuration of the equipment.
<FUNCTION>
<NOTE>
Command for displaying various versions, serial No., and power supply voltage
• Import individual data from the equipment beforehand. information of the equipment.
{MU:4.7 [PC9-1-3]_Indv. data} {MU:3.3 [1-1-5]_Check Version}
• If settings have been changed, individual data must be transferred to the
equipment, and the equipment must be rebooted. <OPERATIONS>
{MU:4.7 [PC9-2-4]_Reboot}
1. Import individual data beforehand.
2. Import the desired files from the equipment at [Files] of [Data

Transfer].
{MU:4.7 [PC2]_Data Transfer}
3. Click the [+] mark on the left side of [Version].

→ Various version, serial No., and power supply voltage information of the
equipment are displayed.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-103
[PC1-2-2] Protocol Information [PC1-2-2-2] Fine PRT AE-title
[PC1-2-2-1] AE-title <FUNCTION>

<FUNCTION> {MU:3.3 [1-4-2-2]_Fine PRT AE-title}
{MU:3.3 [1-4-2-1]_AE-title} <OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS> 1. Import individual data beforehand.
1. Import individual data beforehand. 2. Enter the AE Title (fixed at 16 digits).

<REMARKS>
• If not performing 20 pix/mm recording, this need not be set.
<REMARKS> • Use a name that is different from the 10 pix/mm recording printer.
• The allowable characters for the AE Title are symbols from 20h to 7Eh of the • The allowable characters for the AE Title are symbols from 20h to 7Eh of the
1-byte code table. 1-byte code table.
• Do not enter upper and lower cases incorrectly. • Do not enter upper and lower cases incorrectly.
• The following are not accepted. • The following are not accepted.
• All spaces • All spaces
• Space for the first digit • Space for the first digit
• First character is a number • First character is a number
3. [Update] 3. [Update]
4. After transferring individual data to the equipment, reboot the 4. After transferring individual data to the equipment, reboot the
equipment. equipment.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-104
[PC1-2-2-3] Port No. [PC1-2-3] Association Count
Command for setting the port number of the equipment. Command for setting the number of associations to be established together for
{MU:3.3 [1-4-2-3]_Port No.} DICOM connection.
1. Import individual data beforehand. 1. Import individual data beforehand.
2. Enter the port number (decimal). 2. Set according to the installation environment.
[1] to [10] (default value: 10)
<REMARKS>
Input range: 0 to 65535 3. [Update]
3. [Update]
4. After transferring individual data to the equipment, reboot the
equipment.
[PC1-2-4] Logging DICOM
equipment.
<FUNCTION>
[PC1-2-2-4] Data Transfer Timeout
Command for setting whether to save the record of communication with the client as
<FUNCTION> log information, and the communication record level.
Command for setting the timeout value for network communication. <OPERATIONS>
1. Import individual data beforehand. 2. Select the value to be set.
2. Enter the timeout value. (Unit: seconds) • [0:none] : No logging of communication record
• [1:normal] : Normal log information
<REMARKS> • [2:detailed] : Detailed log information (default)
• The timeout value is the maximum time limit for the printer to wait for data to <NOTE>
arrive. If data does not arrive within the set time, a timeout occurs.
• Normally, use the default timeout. If this default value does not work properly For details on how to acquire communication record logs from the printer,
for the connected DICOM client, set the value given by the DICOM client. refer to “5.10 Acquiring Log Files”.
• Setting range: 30 to 3600 (default value: 300) {MU:5.10_Acquiring Log Files}
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-105
[PC1-2-5] Default Client [PC1-2-6] Real Dmax on film
Command for setting whether to apply parameters set at [default] in the [Clients:] list Command for setting the printing Dmax in equipment loaded with DI-ML film when
for unregistered clients. printing requests above Dmax are received.
{MU:3.3 [1-1-2-6]_Set ML Dmax}
<OPERATIONS>
<NOTE>
1. Import individual data beforehand. • This menu is available from DI Tool software version V2.0 or later.
• This function is enabled for equipment with main unit software version V2.0
2. Select the value to be set. or later.
• [0:Yes] : Applies the [default] settings. (default) • This setting is applied to all trays, but not on a tray-by-tray basis.
• [1:No] : The [default] settings will not be applied.
<REMARKS> <OPERATIONS>
Selecting [1: No] hides [default] in the [Clients:] list.
3. [Update] 2. Select the value to be set.
4. After transferring individual data to the equipment, reboot the • [0: 3.6] : Prints at Dmax3.6 on DI-ML film. (default)
equipment. • [1: 4.0] : Prints at Dmax4.0 on DI-ML film.
<REMARKS>
If both DI-HL films and DI-ML films of the same size are loaded and the print
request is less than Dmax3.6, printing will start from DI-HL films.
3. [Update]

equipment.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-105.1
[PC1-2-7] Requested Dmax less than 3.6 [PC1-2-8] Printer
Command for setting whether to use DI-ML film in equipment loaded with DI-ML film Command for setting the manufacturing model name and manufacturer name of the
when printing requests below Dmax3.6 are received and at the same time DI-HL film printer.
has run out.
{MU:3.3 [1-1-2-6]_Set ML Dmax} <OPERATIONS>
<NOTE>
• This menu is available from DI Tool software version V2.0 or later.
• This function is effective for equipment with main unit software version V2.0 2. Enter the manufacturing model name and manufacturer name of the
or later. printer.
<NOTE>
• Both the [Model] (manufacturing model name) and [Manufacturer]
<OPERATIONS> (manufacturer name) must be no more than 64 characters long.
• This name is used by the client to acquire the name of the printer on the
1. Import individual data beforehand. network.
• Normally the default for the model and manufacturer names should
2. Select the value to be set. be used (Model: DRYPIX4000, Manufacturer: FUJIFILM Corporation
• [0: Accept] : Uses DI-ML film respectively). Where multiple printers are installed at a single location,
each must be identified by a unique name determined in consultation
• [1: Reject] : DI-ML film not used (default) with the users.
<REMARKS>
If both DI-HL films and DI-ML films of the same size are loaded and [1: Reject] is
selected, the film replenish screen will be displayed when DI-HL film runs out.
3. [Update]

3. [Update] equipment.

equipment.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-105.2
[PC1-2-9] Option [PC1-2-9-3] Set Alarm
Command for setting software options unique to the equipment.
<FUNCTION>
[PC1-2-9-1] 17-Steps Pattern
Command for setting the alarm.
{MU:2.3 [7-1]_SET ALARM}
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to display “17-Steps” at [TEST PATTERN] of the <OPERATIONS>
U-Utility.
{MU:3.3 [1-1-2-4]_Option/17-Steps Pattern} 1. Import individual data beforehand.
<OPERATIONS> 2. Select the alarm.

• [2:PULSE] : Alarm stops after about three seconds.
• [1:ON] : Alarm is sounded.
2. Select the value to be set. • [0:OFF] : No alarm is sounded.
• [1:Enable] : Displayed 3. [Update]

• [0:Disable] : Not displayed
4. After transferring individual data to the equipment, reboot the [PC1-2-9-4] Set Alarm Tone
equipment.
<FUNCTION>
[PC1-2-9-2] Auto FDC
Command for setting the alarm tone.
<FUNCTION> {MU:2.3 [7-1]_SET ALARM}
Command for setting the automatic execution timing of automatic density correction. <OPERATIONS>
{MU:3.3 [1-1-2-4]_Option/Automated F.D.C.}
<OPERATIONS>
2. Select the alarm tone.

• [500:Low]
2. Select the value to be set. • [1200:Medium]
• [2400:High]
• [2:None] : Not performed.
• [1:Everylot] : By each film lot No. 3. [Update]
• [0:Everypack] : By each film pack

equipment.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-106
[PC1-2-9-5] Set Key Touch [PC1-2-9-7] Language
Command for setting the key touch sound. Command for setting the display language of the operation panel.
{MU:2.3 [7-2]_KEY TOUCH TONE} {MU:3.3 [1-5-1]_Select Language}
2. Select the key touch sound. 2. Select the display language.

• [1:ON] [ja:Japanese]/[en:English]/[de:German]/[fr:French]/[it:Italian]/[sv:Swedish]/
• [0:OFF] [es:Spanish]/[da:Danish]/[no:Norwegian]/[pt:Portuguese]/ [el:Greek]/[fi:Finnish]/
[nl:Dutch]/[zh:Chinese (Simplified)]/[tw:Chinese (Traditional)]/[ko:Korean]
3. [Update]
3. [Update]
equipment. 4. After transferring individual data to the equipment, reboot the
equipment.
[PC1-2-9-6] Set Key Touch Tone
[PC1-2-9-8] Sorter
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the key touch tone. <FUNCTION>
{MU:2.3 [7-2]_KEY TOUCH TONE} Command for setting whether a sorter is connected.
{MU:3.3 [1-1-2-2-1]_Sorter Connection}
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
2. Select the key touch tone.
• [500:Low] 2. Select whether to use sorter or not.
• [1200:Medium] • [1:Enable] : Sorter is used.
• [2400:High] • [0:Disable] : Sorter is not used.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-107
[PC1-2-9-9] Size information [PC1-2-9-11] BackupLog
Command for setting the display type of the film size displayed on the operation panel. Command for enabling/disabling the function for acquiring logs by user operations.
{MU:3.3 [1-5-2]_Size Information} {MU:3.3 [1-3-4]_Logging by User}
2. Select the film size to be displayed. 2. Select the required settings.

• [1:Cm] : Displayed in cm. • [1: ON] : Enables acquisition of log data by the user
• [2:Inch] : Displayed in inches. • [0: OFF] : Disables acquisition of log data by the user
• [3:Japanese] : Displayed in Japanese (Japan only)
3. [Update]
3. [Update]
4. After transferring the individual data to the equipment, reboot the
4. After transferring individual data to the equipment, reboot the equipment.
equipment.
[PC1-2-9-10] User Settable
<FUNCTION>
Command for enabling/disabling User Settable output at [Test Pattern] of the U-Utility.
<OPERATIONS>
2. Select the required settings.

• [1: Enable] : Enable
• [0: Disable] : Disable
3. [Update]

equipment.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-108
[PC1-2-9-12] QC [PC1-2-9-12-2] Set Target Density
Command for enabling/disabling the image QC function of the U-Utility. Command for setting the target density of each film tray.
{MU:3.3 [1-1-2-4]_Option/QC} {MU:3.3 [1-1-2-5-1]_Set Target Density}
2. Select the required settings. 2. Select the film tray.

• [1: Enable] : Enable
• [0: Disable] : Disable
3. Set the density value.
• [Density1] : Density of the first step (Range: 20 to 250 (<Density 2))
3. [Update] • [Density2] : Density of the second step (Range: 20 to 250 (<Density 3))
• [Density3] : Density of the third step (Range: 192 to 250)
equipment. 4. [Update]
[PC1-2-9-12-1] Enabling Step4 5. After transferring the individual data to the equipment, reboot the
equipment.
<FUNCTION>
Command for enabling/disabling step edge pattern [Density 4].
{MU:3.3 [1-1-2-5-2]_Enabling Step 4}
<OPERATIONS>
2. Select the value to be set.

• [1: Enable] : Enabled
• [0: Disable] : Disabled
3. [Update]

equipment.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-109
[PC1-2-9-13] Film Information [PC1-2-9-14] Date Format
Command for setting the printing position of film information. Command for setting the date display format displayed on the operation panel.
{MU:3.3 [1-1-2-4]_Option/Film Information} <REMARKS>
<OPERATIONS> This setting is applicable to all screens displaying date, but not to the PC for servicing
and file date.
{MU:3.3 [1-5-9]_Date Format}
2. Select the value to be set. <OPERATIONS>
• [1: Upper Left] : Film upper left
• [2: Upper Right] : Film upper right 1. Import individual data beforehand.
• [3: Lower Left] : Film lower left
• [4: Lower Right] : Film lower right 2. Select the value to be set.
• [0: yyyy/MM/dd] : Year/month/date
3. [Update]
• [1: MM/dd/yyyy] : Month/day/year
4. After transferring individual data to the equipment, reboot the • [2: dd/MM/yyyy] : Day/month/year
equipment. 3. [Update]

equipment.
[PC1-2-9-15] Mobile
CAUTION
[Mobile] in the [Option] setting menu is intended for use in Japan only. Do not
change the default value [0: Stationary].
If changed, “02D2” error occurs, and the equipment will not start.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-110
[PC1-2-9-16] Warning st system start [PC1-2-9-17] Spatial Resolution
Command for setting whether to warn the user of any shutter present during startup Command for setting whether to display “Spatial Resolution” at [TEST PATTERN] of
prompting to pull it out, or to continue to boot the equipment disabling the tray in the U-Utility.
question without warning. {MU:3.3 [1-1-2-4]_Option/Spatial Resolution}
For the equipment with main unit software version V3.0 or later, the equipment can be
started without disabling use of the film tray because the shutter presence check can <NOTE>
be skipped. This menu is provided in DI Tool software version V3.0 or later, and effective for
{MU:3.3 [1-1-2-4]_Option/Warning at system start} equipment installing software version V2.0 or later.
<NOTE>
• This menu is available from DI Tool software version V2.0 or later. <OPERATIONS>
• This function is effective for equipment with main unit software version V1.1
or later. 1. Import individual data beforehand.

<OPERATIONS>
• [1:Enable] : Displayed
• [0:Disable] : Not displayed
3. [Update]
• [2: Ignore] : Ignore the shutter. 4. After transferring individual data to the equipment, reboot the
• [1: Enable] : Warn the user. equipment.
• [0: Disable] : Do not warn the user.
<NOTE>
3. [Update]

equipment.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-111
[PC1-2-9-18] MammoQC [PC1-2-9-19] Recognize position on 8x10 (20x25)
Command for enabling/disabling the Mammo QC function and for setting the value Command for enabling/disabling the left/right recognize function of the 20x25 cm size
(NEMA/EUREF) when enabled. film image (8x10).
{MU:3.3 [1-1-2-4]_Option/Mammo.QC} {MU:3.3 [1-1-2-4]_Option/Recognize position on 8x10 (20x25)}
<NOTE> <NOTE>
This menu is provided in DI Tool software version V3.0 or later, and effective for This menu is provided in DI Tool software version V3.0 or later, and effective for
equipment installing software version V3.0 or later. equipment installing software version V1.1 or later.
2. Select the required settings. 2. Select the required settings.

• [2:EUREF] : European Reference Frame • [1:Enable] : Enable
• [1:NEMA] : National Electrical Manufacturers Association • [0:Disable] : Disable
• [0:Disable] : Disable <NOTE>
<REMARKS> When setting [1:Enable], RMI (Rotate Mammo Image) mode must separately
Selecting NEMA, EUREF enables output of the mammo QC pattern complying be set at “[1-4-5] Set Mammo” for each client sending Mammo images.
with the respective standards. {MU:3.3 [1-4-5]_Set Mammo}
• NEMA : Refer to the separate “Mammo QC Operation Manual” when using.
• EUREF : In the EU, individual standards are set down by country based on
the EUREF standards, use according to the status of the country 3. [Update]
installed in.
equipment.
3. [Update]

equipment.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-111.1
[PC1-2-10] Tray1/Tray2 [PC1-2-11] Sorting by Film Size
Command for setting the film to be used. Command for setting whether or not to implement sorting by film tray.
{MU:3.3 [1-1-2-1]_Set Tray} <NOTE>
<OPERATIONS> This setting has priority over “[PC1-3-4-16] Default Film Destination” and
“[PC1-3-4-17] Film Destination”.
1. Import individual data beforehand. {MU:4.7 [PC1-3-4-16]_Default Film Destination}, {MU:4.7 [PC1-3-4-17]_Film
Destination}
[Tray1]/[Tray2] <OPERATIONS>
3. Select the film size. 1. Import individual data beforehand.
• [0:OFF] : Not used
• [1:14*17] : 35cm x 43cm 2. Select the value to be set.
• [2:14*14] : 35cm x 35cm • [0: Disable] : Disabled (Default value)
• [3:10*14] : 26cm x 36cm • [1: Enable] : Enabled
• [4:10*12] : 25cm x 30cm
• [5:8*10] : 20cm x 25cm
3. If [1: Enable] is selected, select where to eject for each film tray.
• [1: Bin#1] : Bin 1 (Ejection tray at the top of the equipment, default)
<NOTE>
• [2: Bin#2] : Bin 2
Do not select [2: 14*14]. • [3: Bin#3] : Bin 3
• [4: Bin#4] : Bin 4
4. Select the film base color.
4. [Update]
• [blue:blue (HL)] : DI-HL
• [clear:clear (HL)] : DI-HLc 5. After transferring individual data to the equipment, reboot the
• [ML:blue (ML)] : DI-ML equipment.
<NOTE>
The [ML:blue (ML)] selection item is available from DI Tool software version
V2.0 or later, and is effective for equipment with main unit software version
V2.0 or later.
5. [Update]

equipment.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-111.2
BLANK PAGE
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-112
[PC1-3] Clients [PC1-3-1] Protocol
Command for setting the various parameters for the client (image output device).
[PC1-3-1-1] Attribute List Error (0107H Warning)
<NOTE>
• Import individual data from the equipment beforehand. <FUNCTION>
{MU:4.7 [PC9-1-3]_Indv. data} Command for setting how unexpected data received should be treated.
• If settings have been changed, individual data must be transferred to the
equipment, and the equipment must be rebooted. <OPERATIONS>
• Do not change the settings of “WatchDRYPIXLink”. 1. Import individual data beforehand.
• Some of the [Protocol] parameters of “default” client cannot be changed.
• [AutoConfig] is currently not available. 2. Select the value to be set.
• [0:not indicate] : Ignore the warning
<REMARKS> • [1:indicate] : Send error message
The parameters related to the image processing of each client set here apply when
image processing parameters are not set for the image data sent by the client.
3. [Update]

equipment.
[PC1-3-1-2] Attribute Value Out of Range (0116H Warning)
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting how data out of range should be treated.
<OPERATIONS>

• [0:not indicate] : Ignore the warning
• [1:indicate] : Send error message
3. [Update]

equipment.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-113
[PC1-3-1-3] Image Size is Larger than Imagebox (B604H Warning) [PC1-3-1-4] N-Event-ReportRQ
In the BIB N-SET mode (when image data is received in frames), images are reduced Command for setting how N-Event-Report Requests (report of events to clients)
if they are too large to fit the image frame. Select whether to notify that the image has should be treated.
been reduced.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
• [0:disabled] : No report sent
• [0:not indicate] : Ignore the warning • [1:enabled] : Send report
• [1:indicate] : Send error message
3. [Update]
3. [Update]
equipment.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-114
[PC1-3-1-5] Use Extention Format
3. If [1: Yes] is selected, the [ID] and [Use Default Annotation] in the
lower tree level can be set. Set referring to the table below.
<FUNCTION> • [ID]
Command for setting whether to use the exclusive extension format for specific Enter the ID to differentiate the extension format used by the client.
clients. • [Use Default Annotation]
<OPERATIONS> Select whether to use “Annotation” set at “[PC1-3-5] Annotation”.
{MU:4.7 [PC1-3-5]_Annotation}
1. Import individual data beforehand. • [0:No] : Not used
• [1:Yes] : Used
<NOTE>
• [0:No] : Not used
Select [0:No] if “CR” is set for [ID]. Image processing error will result if CR
• [1:Yes] : Use extension format and annotation are used together.
<NOTE>
• The “FCR-CSL” registered as default is set to [1: Yes]. Manufactuter Model ID Use Default Annotation
• If the specific clients shown in the table below are not connected, select [0: Siemens - SM If user requires Annotation output
No]. set using DPX7 PC Tool function,
select [Yes], otherwise select [No].
Philips Easy Vision EV No
HITACHI Medico DR2000 Series HM No
Clavis View HM If user requires Annotation output
set using DPX7 PC Tool function,
select [Yes], otherwise select [No].
FUJIFILM HI-C655QA CR No
HI-C655D CR No
CR-IR346CL CR No
(Console for FCR XG-1)
CR-IR348CL CR No
(Console for FCR 5000
seires)
Synapse CR No
4. [Update]

equipment.
006-267-04
10.02.2006 FM4992
MU-115
[PC1-3-1-6] Change Film [PC1-3-1-7] Use System Timeout
If the film size/base color specified by the client differ from that of the printer, set If problems occur when the association of clients which are continuously connected is
whether to change film. disconnected at the timeout value set at the printer, set to ignore timeout.
For details, refer to “Modality Connection List”.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
2. Select one of the following.
• [0:0116H (W)]
Enables film to be changed. Details of errors which occur when the film is • [0:No] : Ignore timeout
changed can be set whether to send to the client or not by setting [Attribute • [1:Yes] : Enable timeout
List Error (0107H Warning)], [Attribute Value Out of Range (0116H Warning)], <NOTE>
[Image Size is Larger than Imagebox (B604H Warning)].
• [272:0110H (F)] Select [0: No] (ignore timeout) for equipment resulting in problems.
Details of errors are sent to the client, without changing the film.
• [21317: 5345H (F)] 3. [Update]
Details of errors (unique values for FUJIFILM systems) are sent to the client,
without changing the film. 4. After transferring individual data to the equipment, reboot the
<REMARKS> equipment.
Set the following according to the client system. [PC1-3-1-8] Presentation LUT
QA-WS771 • For QA-WS771 software version A05 or later: [21317:5345H
(F)] <FUNCTION>
• For QA-WS771 software version A04 or earlier: [272:0110H
(F)] Command for setting whether to use LUT information sent from the client.
HI-C655 • For HI-C655 software version A08/B00 or later: [21317:5345H
(F)]
<OPERATIONS>
• For HI-C655 software version A07 or earlier: [272:0110H (F)]
CR-IR346CL (Console [21317:5345H (F)]
for FCR XG-1)
CR-IR348CL (Console [21317:5345H (F)]
for FCR5000 series) • [0:No] : LUT sent from the client is not used.
Synapse [0:0116H (W)] • [1:Yes] : LUT sent from the client is used.
Other modalities Set according to operating environment of installation site. 3. [Update]


equipment.
006-267-04
10.02.2006 FM4992
MU-116
[PC1-3-1-9] Precede Picking Up [PC1-3-1-11] Logging Client
Command for setting whether to use the pre-removal function for starting removal Command for setting the filtering of DICOM communication logs.
operations immediately after receiving the output request to increase the printing {MU:3.3 [1-4-4]_Set DICOMlog}
speed. {MU:5.5_Displaying Logs by Client (Filtering DICOM Communication Logs)}
1. Import individual data (Dicom.dat) beforehand.
• [0:No] : The pre-removal function is not used.
• [0: No] : Disables filtering.
• [1:Yes] : The pre-removal function is used.
• [1: Yes] : Enables filtering.
3. [Update]
3. [Update]
4. After transferring the individual data (Dicom.dat) to the equipment,
equipment.
reboot the equipment.
[PC1-3-1-10] Use Max/Min Density
[PC1-3-1-12] Reprint
Command for setting whether to use the minimum density value and maximum density
Command for enabling/disabling the image reprint function.
value of the equipment or client.
{MU:3.3 [1-1-2-3]_Reprint Function}
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
• [0:printer] : Printer side
• [0: No] : Disables the reprint function.
• [1:modality] : Client side
• [1: Yes] : Enables the reprint function.
3. [Update]
3. [Update]
equipment.
equipment.
<NOTE>
For the user to reprint, the user ID needs to be registered.
{MU:5.1_Registering User ID}
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-117
[PC1-3-1-13] Change Base Color (Disable:110H[F]) [PC1-3-1-14] Define Film Size of 11x14”
Command for enabling/disabling base color change function. Command for setting whether to define 11x14” size as 25.7x36.4 cm or 27.9x35.6 cm.
<NOTE>
<OPERATIONS>
27.9x35.6 cm is currently not available.
<OPERATIONS>
• [0: Disable] : Disables the base color change function 1. Import individual data beforehand.
• [1: Enable] : Enables the base color change function
3. [Update]
• [0: 27.9x35.6 cm] : 27.9x35.6 cm
4. After transferring individual data to the equipment, reboot the • [1: 25.7x36.4 cm] : 25.7x36.4 cm
equipment.
3. [Update]

equipment.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-118
[PC1-3-2] Magnify [PC1-3-2-3] Adjustment Parameter
Command for setting the default value for enlargement/reduction processing.
<FUNCTION>
[PC1-3-2-1] Procedure
If A-VR method is selected, set the [Adjustment parameter] (fine tuning) for each the
three modes [SHARP], [MEDIUM], and [SMOOTH].
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the enlargement/reduction processing. <OPERATIONS>
1. Import individual data beforehand. 2. Select the value to be set.

• [Edge Detection]
Select [0: OFF] if not performing edge enlargement/reduction processing, or [1:
[0:A-VR]/[1:SSM] ON] if performing.
• [Detection Level]
3. [Update]
Set the edge detection level value in the range of 1 to 1023.
4. After transferring individual data to the equipment, reboot the • [Sharpness]
equipment. Set the sharpness adjustment parameter in the range of -70 to 300.
• [Character Color]
[PC1-3-2-2] Default Smoothing Type Select [0:White] or [1:Black] for the continuous emphasis density settings flag
(the color specified for characters).
<FUNCTION>
3. [Update]
Command for setting the default smoothing type.
<OPERATIONS>
equipment.

[1:SHARP]/[2:MEDIUM]/[3:SMOOTH]/[4:modality] (Follows the parameters
specified by the client)
3. [Update]

equipment.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-119
[PC1-3-2-4] Default Requested Decimate/Crop Behavior  Enlargement/Reduction Processing
<FUNCTION> Setting Processing Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3
Command for setting the default values if the client does not send the Requested Response status 0000H(S) B60AH(W) *1 0116H(W)
Decimate/Crop Behavior tag (image reduction treatment). Enlargement/re- Reduces image by Taking Ignoring (2020,
duction interpolation (CUBIC (2010,0060)=CUBIC, 0030), enlarges/re-
<OPERATIONS> DECI- interpolation). reduces image by duces image to fit
MATE interpolation (CUBIC into image box. If
interpolation ). reducing, reduces
1. Import individual data beforehand. image by interpola-
tion (CUBIC interpo-
2. Select the required settings. lation).
• [1: DECIMATE] : Reduces images by interpolation to fit into the image box Response status 0000H(S) B609H(W) *1 B609H(W) *1
• [2: CROP] : Cuts away the outer perimeter taking the image center as Enlargement/re- Cuts away unneces- Cuts away unneces- Centers image en-
the origin. duction sary parts after cen- sary parts after cen- larged/reduced (CU-
tering the specified tering the specified BIC interpolation) at
• [3: FAIL] : Rejects reception because the image does not fit into the CROP image and image image and image the size specified by
image box. box. box. (2020,0030) with the
• [4: modality] : Follows the parameters specified by the client image box, and cuts
away unnecessary
3. [Update] parts.
Response status 0000H(S) C603H(F) C603H(F)
4. After transferring the individual data to the equipment, reboot the FAIL Enlargement/re- Reduces image by Images are not re- Images are not re-
equipment. duction interpolation (CUBIC ceived. ceived.
interpolation).
However, conditions are as follows.

• Condition 1: (2010,0060)=CUBIC. When image is larger than the image box, and
image is reduced.
• Condition 2: (2010, 0060)=NONE. When image is larger than the image box.
• Condition 3: When size specified by (2020,0030) is larger than the image box.
The meanings of response status are as follows.

B609H(W) : Image size is larger than the Image Box size. The Image has been
cropped to fit.
B60AH(W) : Image size or Combined Print Image size is larger than the Image Box
size.
Image or Combined Print Image has been decimated to fit.
*1: If B604H(W) is ignored at Protocol setting, 0000H (S) is returned.

{MU:4.7 [PC1-3-1-3]_Image Size is Lager than Imagebox (B604H Warning)}
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-120
[PC1-3-2-5] Magnification Type [PC1-3-2-6-1] Default Requested Image Size
Command for setting the magnification type. Command for setting whether to use the Requested Image Size of the equipment or
the client.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
• [1: NONE] : No magnification is implemented
• [2: CUBIC] : Magnification is implemented • [0: printer] : Printer side
• [3: modality] : Follows the parameters specified by the client • [1: modality] : Client side
[PC1-3-2-6] Requested Image Size (0=None)
<FUNCTION>
Command for specifying the length of the image line printed in one image frame.
<OPERATIONS>
2. Select the length. (Range: 0 to 8800)
3. [Update]

equipment.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-121
[PC1-3-3] LUT [PC1-3-3-2-1] Configuration Information (Default LUT#)
Set the default values for the tone correction processing parameters.
<REMARKS>
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to use the LUT number of the equipment or the client.
If performing fine adjustments of LUT for registered clients, the changes made in
parameter values will also be made at the equipment even if individual data is not <OPERATIONS>
transferred for every fine adjustment.

[PC1-3-3-1] Procedure
<FUNCTION> • [0: printer] : Printer side
Command for setting the tone correction processing method. • [1: modality] : Client side
<OPERATIONS> 3. [Update]
1. Import individual data beforehand. 4. After transferring individual data to the equipment, reboot the
equipment.
2. Select the tone correction processing method.
[0:SAR]/[1:BAR]
3. [Update]

equipment.
[PC1-3-3-2] Default LUT
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the default LUT number.
<OPERATIONS>

[1] to [8]
3. [Update]

equipment.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-122
[PC1-3-3-3] Adjustment Parameter
3. [Update]
<FUNCTION> 4. After transferring individual data to the equipment, reboot the
Command for setting the following parameters for each LUT number (LUT1 to LUT8) equipment.
in the lower menu items.
<OPERATIONS>
2. Set the following parameters.

• [γ Table No.]
For SAR: 11 to 99
For BAR: 1 to 20 (set within 1 to 10)
• [Max. Density]
For SAR, set the maximum density in multiples of 100 x actual value. (Range:
0 to 300, 330, 360)
For BAR, set the maximum density by percentage. (Range: 0 to 100)
• [Min. Density]
For SAR, set the minimum density in multiples of 100 x actual value. (The
value of the minimum density must be lower than that of the maximum
density.) (Range: 0 to 300)
For BAR, Min. Density setting is not required.
• [Contrast:]
Set the contrast in multiples of 100 x actual value. (Range: 10 to 400)
This contrast setting does not exist for the SAR method.
For the SAR method, the following settings are also required for the
tone correction curve tuning (if used).
• [Number of Tuning Points]
Set the number of tuning points in the range of 0 to 5. The following values
must be set for each tuning point when the number of tuning points is set to 1
or more.
• [Density]
Set the tuning density in multiples of 100. (range: 1 to 300)
Follow the rule of Min. Density<Density<Max. Density.
• [Shift]
Set the shift density in multiples of 100. (range: -100 to 100)
Follow the rule of Min. Density<Density ± Shift<Max. Density.
• [Contrast]
Set the contrast at the tuning point in multiples of 100. (range: 10 to 400)
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-123
[PC1-3-3-4] Dmax 3.6 [PC1-3-3-5-1] Default Illumination
Command for setting the tone type of Dmax. Command for setting whether to use the illumination settings of the equipment or the
client.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
2. Set the tone type.
[0:Standard]
• [0: printer] : Printer side
3. [Update] • [1: modality] : Client side
4. After transferring individual data to the equipment, reboot the 3. [Update]

equipment.
[PC1-3-3-5] Illumination equipment.
<FUNCTION> [PC1-3-3-6] Reflective Ambient Light

Command for setting illumination.
<FUNCTION>
<OPERATIONS> Command for setting reflective ambient light.
1. Import individual data beforehand. <OPERATIONS>

2. Select the value to be set. (Range: 0 to 65535) 1. Import individual data beforehand.
<NOTE>
2. Select the value to be set. (Range: 0 to 65535)
The total of the “[PC1-3-3-5] Illumination” and “[PC1-3-3-6] Reflective
Ambient Light” values should be within 4000. <NOTE>
The total of the “[PC1-3-3-6] Reflective Ambient Light” and “[PC1-3-3-5]
3. [Update] Illumination” values should be within 4000.
4. After transferring individual data to the equipment, reboot the 3. [Update]

equipment.
equipment.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-124
[PC1-3-3-6-1] Default Ambient Light
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting whether to use the reflective ambient light of the equipment or
the client.
<OPERATIONS>

• [1: modality] : Client side
3. [Update]

equipment.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-125
[PC1-3-4] Output Format [PC1-3-4-2] Polarity(Pos./Neg.)
Command for setting the client-dependent default settings for the output format.
<FUNCTION>
[PC1-3-4-1] Border Density
Command for setting whether to reverse the black/white of the image.
Command for setting the border density.
<OPERATIONS>
2. Select whether to reverse the black/white of the image.
1. Import individual data beforehand. • [1:normal(Pos.)] : Black/white reversal off
• [2:reverse(Neg.)] : Black/white reversal on
2. Set the border density in multiples of 100 x actual value. (range = 0 to
300) 3. [Update]
3. [Update] 4. After transferring individual data to the equipment, reboot the

equipment.
equipment. [PC1-3-4-3] Trim Density
[PC1-3-4-1-1] Default Border Density <FUNCTION>

<FUNCTION> Command for setting the image trim density.
Command for setting whether to use the border density of the equipment or the client. <OPERATIONS>
1. Import individual data beforehand. 2. Set the image trim density in multiples of 100 x actual value. (range =
0 to 300)
• [0: printer] : Printer side 3. [Update]

equipment.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-126
[PC1-3-4-4] Trim [PC1-3-4-6] Number of Copies
Command for setting whether to print trimming. Command for setting the default number of print copies.
2. Select whether to print trimming. 2. Set number of print copies in the range of 1 to 99.
• [0:OFF] : Without trim
• [1:ON] : With trim
3. [Update]
• [2:modality] : Follows the parameters specified by the client 4. After transferring individual data to the equipment, reboot the
4. After transferring individual data to the equipment, reboot the [PC1-3-4-6-1] Default Number of Copies
equipment.
<FUNCTION>
[PC1-3-4-5] Trim Width Command for setting whether to use the number of copies setting of the equipment or
the client.
<FUNCTION>
<OPERATIONS>
Command for setting the trim width.
<NOTE> 1. Import individual data beforehand.
If the setting of the “[PC1-3-4-4] Trim” is [0: OFF] the value set for the “[PC1-3-4-5]
Trim Width” will be invalid. 2. Select the value to be set.
<OPERATIONS> • [1: modality] : Client side
3. [Update]
2. Set the width of the trim in pixels. (range = 1 to 9) equipment.
3. [Update]

equipment.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-127
[PC1-3-4-7] Margin between Image [PC1-3-4-8] Image Layout
Command for setting the margin between image frames on the film. Command for setting how image frames are arranged.
<NOTE>
<OPERATIONS>
Normally, the default value for the margin between image frames should be
used. Do not change the default setting unless requested by a user because of
layout problems.
2. Select how image frames are arranged.

<OPERATIONS> • [0:concentration]:
Sets the image frames in the center of the film (secures the setting value of
1. Import individual data beforehand. [Margin Between Image]).
• [1:spread]:
2. Set the margin between image frames on the film in the range of 0 to Sets the image frames in the center within each of the remaining image blocks
50. (unit: pixel) that are secured by the setting value of [Margin Between Image].
3. [Update] <NOTE>
For [concentration], all images on the film must be of the same size. In
4. After transferring individual data to the equipment, reboot the the following cases, images will be arranged by [spread] even if set to
equipment. [concentration] because image sizes vary.
• When images of different sizes are included on one film.
• When the output image size (width of image) on the film is specified
(Requested Image Size) in the image data sent from the client.
3. [Update]

equipment.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-128
[PC1-3-4-9] Default Film Size [PC1-3-4-10] Default Medium Type
Command for setting the film size priority level. Command for setting the film base color priority level.
2. Select the value to be set. 2. Select the value to be set.

• [0: printer] : Printer side • [0: printer] : Printer side
• [1: modality] : Client side • [1: modality] : Client side
[PC1-3-4-9-1] Film Size [PC1-3-4-10-1] Medium Type (base color)
Command for setting the default film size. Set the default film base color.
2. Select the film size. 2. Select the film base color.

[1:8IN*10IN]/[2:10IN*14IN]/[3:14IN*14IN]/[4:14IN*17IN]/[5:10IN*12IN] [1:blue]/[2:clear]
<NOTE> 3. [Update]
Do not select [3:14IN*14IN].
equipment.
3. [Update]

equipment.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-129
[PC1-3-4-11] Film Orientation [PC1-3-4-13] Processing Type
Set the film orientation. Command for setting the density processing calculation method.
2. Select the film orientation. 2. Select the value to be set.

[1:PORTRAIT]/[2:LANDSCAPE]/[3:modality] (Follows the parameters specified • [0: Type 1]
by the client) • [1: Type 2]
3. [Update] <REMARKS>
Type 1: Density processing calculation method which interpolates the measured
4. After transferring individual data to the equipment, reboot the density. (Same as DRYPIX 7000 main unit software version V4.2/V10.2 or
equipment. earlier)
Type 2: Density processing calculation method with smoother tonal representation
[PC1-3-4-12] Mirror than Type 1. Tonal conversion continuity is better in low density areas
below density of 0.4.
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting film surface/back. 3. [Update]
<OPERATIONS> 4. After transferring individual data to the equipment, reboot the
equipment.
2. Select film surface/back.

• [0:OFF(Normal)] : Glossy side to back
• [1:ON(Mirror)] : Glossy side to front
3. [Update]

equipment.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-130
[PC1-3-4-14] Print Priority [PC1-3-4-16] Default Film Destination
Command for setting the print priority level. Command for setting the priority of discharge destination of the film when using the
sorter.
<OPERATIONS> <NOTE>
1. Import individual data beforehand. In the sorter settings, “[PC1-2-11] Sorting by Film Size” has priority over this
setting.
2. Select the value to be set. This setting is related to the “[PC1-3-4-17] Film Destination” setting.
{MU:4.7 [PC1-2-11]_Sorting by Film Size}
• [1: HIGH]
• [2: MEDIUM]
• [3: LOW] <OPERATIONS>
• [4: modality] : Follows the parameters specified by the client
3. [Update]
equipment.
[PC1-3-4-15] Resolution 3. [Update]
<FUNCTION> 4. After transferring individual data to the equipment, reboot the

Command for setting the resolution (whether high density or not). equipment.
<OPERATIONS>

• [0: Standard] : Standard (10 pix/mm recording)
• [1: High] : High density (20 pix/mm recording)
• [2: modality] : Follows the parameters specified by the client
3. [Update]

equipment.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-130.1
[PC1-3-4-17] Film Destination <OPERATIONS>
<FUNCTION> 1. Import individual data beforehand.
Command for setting the discharge destination of the film when using the sorter.
<NOTE>
2. After selecting [PROCESSOR] or [Bin No. 1] to [Bin No. 4], set the
discharge destination of the film.
In the sorter settings, “[PC1-2-11] Sorting by Film Size” has priority over this
• [0: not use] : Discharge destination is not set from the corresponding client
setting.
This setting is related to the “[PC1-3-4-16] Default Film Destination” setting. • [1: use] : Discharge destination is set from the corresponding client
{MU:4.7 [PC1-2-11]_Sorting by Film Size} <NOTE>
Film ejection bin priority order: Though the film destination can be set to more than one of [Bin No.1] to [Bin
(1) [Sorting by Film Size]=[Enable] No.4], select only one of them.
Outputs to the bin specified at [Sorting by Film Tray 1/2] regardless of the [Default When multiple destinations are set, the actual discharge destination is the
Film Destination] and [Film Destination] settings and whether or not the bin is bin with the lowest number.
specified by the client.
(2) [Sorting by Film Size]=[Disable] <REMARKS>
Outputs to the bin when [modality] is selected at [Default Film Destination] When [PROCESSOR] is set as the discharge destination, film will be discharged
and the bin number is specified by the client (Also applies to [PROCESSOR] to the output film tray on this equipment. At this time, it will not be possible to set
specification. Note that when the specified bin number is 5 or above, the other bins as the discharge destination.
destination is the same as when [PROCESSOR] is selected because the sorter When set to [Bin No. 1], films will be discharged to the same destination as when
of this equipment is a 4-bin specification model). set to [PROCESSOR].
(3) [Sorting by Film Size]=[Disable]
Outputs to the bin specified at [Film Destination] when the [modality] is selected 3. [Update]
at [Default Film Destination] but the bin number is not specified by the client, or
when [printer] is selected at [Default Film Destination]. 4. After transferring individual data to the equipment, reboot the
equipment.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-130.2
BLANK PAGE
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-131
[PC1-3-5] Annotation
Set and enter the character string of the annotation to be printed on film.
For details on the setting procedure, refer to “5.3 Setting Annotation”.
{MU:5.3_Setting Annotation}
The following three types of annotations are printed by this equipment.
(1) Annotations specified by the client.
(2) Annotations by client set on this equipment.
(3) Annotations fixed for the printer set on this equipment.
Perform the above (2) and (3) settings as follows.
 To set annotations by client
1. Select the client to which the annotation is to be set from the [Clients:]
list.
2. Perform [Annotation] settings.
 To set annotations fixed for the printer
1. Select the [default] client from the [Clients:] list.
2. Perform [Annotation] settings.
<NOTE>
• If the same annotation print settings are set for the same position on the film,
the output priority order will be (1) → (2) → (3).
• If the CR extension format is set, do not set annotation.
{MU:4.7 [PC1-3-1-5]_Use Extention Format}
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-132
[PC1-3-5-1] Annotation Height [PC1-3-5-3] Annotation Size
Command for setting the extension of the printing area of annotations along the Command for setting the size of the annotation font.
height of the characters. Execute this setting command to increase the character size
according to the needs of the hospital. <OPERATIONS>
1. Import individual data beforehand. 2. Select the size of the annotation font. (Unit: point)
2. Select the height of the area for printing annotations. [8]/[9]/[10]/[11]/[12]/[14]/[16]/[18]/[20]/[22]/[24]/[26]/[28]/[36]/[48]/[72]

<NOTE>
• [1:1] : Area is not extended
• [2:2] : Extended two times along height • The character size when the [System] font is selected at “[PC1-3-5-2]
• [3:3] : Extended three times along height Annotation Font” is set at [14] point. Other sizes can be selected, but the
value is fixed at [14] points.
• [4:4] : Extended four times along height
• With 20 pix/mm recording, annotation characters are printed smaller than
• [5:modality] : Follows the parameters specified by the client 10 pix/mm recording.
3. [Update]

3. [Update]

[PC1-3-5-2] Annotation Font equipment.
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the font type of the annotation.
<OPERATIONS>
2. Select the font.

• [System] : Font used by the equipment’s system.
• [MS_Gothic] : MS Gothic font
• [MS_Mincho] : MS Mincho font
<NOTE>
Be sure to select [System].
3. [Update]
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-133
[PC1-3-5-4] Upper Left/Upper Center/Upper Right/Lower Left/Lower <NOTE>
Center/Lower Right
• If annotations are set, the image area will be smaller than when
annotations are not set, and image will be printed in reduced size.
<FUNCTION> • Though annotations can be printed anywhere (upper/lower, left/ center/
Select the place for entering the annotation text, and enter the annotation text right of the film), they may be missing at some locations. Therefore when
character. printing annotations at several locations, check that none is missing
during printing.
<OPERATIONS> {MU:5.3_Setting Annotation/ Rules on Location of Annotations}

3. Enter the annotation text character string in the [Value].
2. Select the place for entering the annotation text. <REMARKS>
• [Upper Left] : Character string printed on the upper left corner of the film • Up to 64 one-byte size characters can be entered.
• [Upper Center] : Character string printed on the top of the film in the center • In addition to standard characters, macros are also available.
• [Upper Right] : Character string printed on the upper right corner of the film • If the annotation character string becomes long after macro conversion, make
• [Lower Left] : Character string printed on the lower left corner of the film sure that no characters are missing.
• [Lower Center] : Character string printed on the bottom of the film in the center {MU:5.3_Setting Annotation/ List of Macro Definitions}
• [Lower Right] : Character string printed on the lower right corner of the film
4. [Update]

equipment.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-134
[PC2] Data Transfer  Button Operations
The following shows functions of buttons used at [Data Transfer]. Some buttons
Transfer data files of the equipment between the equipment and PC for servicing, and cannot be implemented according to the function selected.
save/load data files using the FD. The USB memory can also be used instead of FD.
Button Name Function
<REMARKS>
[PC => Printer] Transfers data files from the PC for servicing to the equipment.
Save: Saves data in the PC for servicing on the FD (Backup) [Backup] Transfers individual data files (*1) saved in the PC for servicing to
Load: Imports data saved on the FD to the PC for servicing (Restore) a folder on the PC for servicing.
(Used mainly for saving on FDs)
[Restore] Transfers individual data files saved in a folder to the folder in the
PC for servicing (*1).
(Used mainly for loading from FDs.)
[Printer => PC] Transfers data files from the equipment to the PC for servicing.
(*1): C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\DRYPIX\Printers\Establishment name_Printer name\
Indv
<NOTE>
As data files on FDs cannot be transferred to the equipment directly, transfer in
the following order, “FD” → “PC for servicing” → “Equipment”.
 Selecting the Transfer Destination/Transfer Source

When [Backup] or [Restore] is selected, the window for selecting the transfer
destination or transfer source appears. After selecting, click [OK] to transfer the files.
 When [Backup] is selected  When [Restore] is selected
Window for selecting transfer destination Window for selecting transfer source
[Data Transfer] consists of five functions, according to the data file to be transferred.
The files corresponding to each function are as follows.
• [Indv] : Individual data files
• [Operation] : Equipment operation data files
• [Log] : Log data files
• [Files] : Manually selected data files
• [User Settable] : User settable image data file
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-135
 Configuration of Storage Folders
The following shows the configuration of folders storing files used at [Data Transfer]. A B
C:\Program Files\FujiFilm GUI
Config GUI log file
Dicom.dat PRT
Imginf.prm Backup
netinf.prm Edge
DRYPIX Edge sensor log file (backup)
Printers IOT
Establishment name_Printer name IOT log file (backup)
Indv ISC
Individual data file ISC log file (backup)
Operation Mem
FilmCount Nonvolatile memory log file (backup)
Film count file Den
Maintenance Density A/D conversion data file
Maintenance data file Edge
QCData Edge sensor log file
QC data file IOT
Log IOT log file
AnalysisDirectory ISC
yymmddhhmmss (date/time) ISC log file
DICOM Mecha
DICOM log file Mechanism log file
Client Temp
Client DICOM log file Temperature data file
Output Startup
Output control log file Startup log file
Spooler Backup
Spooler log file Backup log file
Event AutoChk
Event log file CHKLST
PCUTL HW AutoCheck setting file
PCUTL log file Result
Driver HW AutoCheck execution result file
Driver log file
Main
Main control log file
A B
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-136
[PC2-1] Indv → File transfer starts.
<FUNCTION>
Command for transferring individual data files.
<OPERATIONS>
1. If using a FD, insert the FD in the FDD of the PC for servicing (drive A).
2. Select the type of file to transfer.

• [All] : All individual data
• [Dicom.dat/Imginf.prm] : “Dicom.dat” and “Imginf.prm” files
• [gamma2.prm] : “gamma2.prm” file
3. Execute transfer.
• [PC => Printer] : Data files are transferred from PC for servicing to equipment
• [Backup] : Data files are transferred from PC for servicing to selected
folder (FD)
• [Restore] : Data files are transferred from selected folder (FD) to PC for
servicing
• [Printer => PC] : Data files are transferred from equipment to PC for servicing
<NOTE>
When [Backup] or [Restore] is selected, a window for selecting the transfer
destination or transfer source appears. After selecting, click [OK]. → When file transfer is completed, the [File transfer is completed.] screen will be
displayed.
4. [OK]
5. If using a FD, remove it from the FDD.
6. If files were transferred to the equipment, reboot the equipment so

that the settings of the transferred file are made effective.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-137
[PC2-2] Operation <Transfer Files>
<FUNCTION> <REMARKS>
Command for transferring operation data files. Refer to the next page for the file format of each file.
{ Operation File Format}
<OPERATIONS>
• [Film Count]
1. Select the type of file to be transferred. • Film count (film_stat*dat)/(film_stat_YYYY_MM_DD.csv)
• [All] : All equipment operation data <REMARKS>
• [Film Count] : Film count data After transferring “film_stat.dat”, the files on number of films used are aggregated,
• [Maintenance Data] : Maintenance data and the “film_stat_YYYY_MM_DD.csv” file is generated. “YYYY_MM_DD” is the
• [QC Data] : QC data date the file was generated. If an aggregation file with the same name exists in
the folder generated in, this file is overwritten.
2. Execute transfer.
• [Maintenance Data]
[Printer => PC] : Data files are transferred from equipment to PC for
servicing • Conduction time file (running_time.csv)
• Start/initialization diagnosis results file (PRT_diagnosis.csv)
→ File transfer starts.
• Barcode data file (barcode.csv)
• Error information file (error_info.csv)
• Density measurement data file (density.csv)
• Event log (EventLog.txt)
• [QC Data]
• QC results storage file (QC_Result.csv)
→ When file transfer is completed, the [File transfer is completed.] screen will be
displayed.
3. [OK]
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-138
 Operation File Format error_info.csv
File format : YYYY/MM/DD, hh:mm:ss, Error Code, Detail, Comment
 Film count • YYYY/MM/DD : Date
• hh:mm:ss : Time
film_stat_YYYY_MM_DD.csv (YYYY_MM_DD is the date the file was generated)
File format : kind, date, n1, n2, n3, • • • , n31 • Error Code : Error Code
• kind : The category values of statistical information on the number of • Detail : Detailed code
films used are “tray1”, “tray2”, AE Title, IP address. • Comment : Comment (Information recorded separately from error code)
• date : The year and month of aggregation of the statistical information
density.csv
on the number of films used.
File format : YYYY/MM/DD, hh:mm:ss, Item, Data (This file is recorded in a 3-rows
• 1-31 : Number of files used between 1st and 31st. (maximum 31) set.)
• YYYY/MM/DD : Date (Common to all rows)
 Maintenance data • hh:mm:ss : Time (Common to all rows)
running_time.csv • Item : Data category (1/3: Density, 2/3: Gain, 3/3: Dmax Adjusted)
File format : YYYY/MM/DD, hh:mm:ss, Status • Data : Density information (1/3: 24-steps density data of built-
• YYYY/MM/DD : Date in densitometer, 2/3: tonal gain parameter after density
• hh:mm:ss : Time measurement, 3/3: Dmax adjustment parameter)
• Status : Category (“Boot up” at startup and “Shut Down” at shutdown)
EventLog.txt
PRT_diagnosis.csv Error log information acquired during log acquisition
File format : YYYY/MM/DD, hh:mm:ss, Operation, Result, Time, Laser Power, Check
Disk
• YYYY/MM/DD : Date
• hh:mm:ss : Time
• Operation : Operation (“Initialization” or “Re-initialization”)
• Result : Results (“Completed” or results code notified from the PRT)
• Time : Initialization time (mm: Minute, ss: Seconds, “---” if initialization
time is not notified)
• Laser Power : Laser search power (Search power value notified from driver
during LD diagnosis, “---” is notified when LD diagnosis is
canceled.)
• Check Disk : Whether check disk is executed or not (“Executed” when check
disk is executed by the OS at startup, and “Nothing” when not
executed)
barcode.csv
File format : YYYY/MM/DD, hh:mm:ss, Tray, Detail, Barcode
• YYYY/MM/DD : Date
• hh:mm:ss : Time
• Tray : Tray number (Trays 1 or 2 in which film was replaced)
• Detail : Detailed code (Same code as event log recording)
• Barcode : Barcode (Barcode data read)
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-139
[PC2-3] Log 2. Execute transfer.
[Printer => PC] : Data files are transferred from equipment to PC for servicing
<FUNCTION>
Command for transferring log data files.
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select the type of log file to be transferred.

• [All] : Acquires all log file
• [Select Log Type] : Acquires individual logs
• [Backup Log] : Acquires user acquired logs
<NOTE>
Clicking [Clear] deselects the log file selected at [Select Log Type].
→ When file transfer is completed, the [File transfer is completed.] screen will be
displayed.
3. [OK]
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-140
[PC2-4] Files 4. Select the files to be transferred.
<FUNCTION> <NOTE>
Command for manually selecting the required data files one at a time and transferring Always take the three files “Dicom.dat”, “Imginf.prm”, and “netinf.prm” as
them. one set.
<OPERATIONS> <REMARKS>
• To select several files, select them while pressing the <Ctrl> or <Shift> key.
 General Procedure • If using a FD, all individual data will be saved/loaded regardless of the files
selected.
1. If using a FD, insert the FD in the FDD of the PC for servicing (drive A).
2. Select the place storing the files to be transferred.

• [PC] : HD of the PC for servicing
• [Printer] : HD of the equipment
3. Display the files to be transferred.

• [Indv. Files] : Displays individual data files
• [All Files] : Displays all data files
<NOTE>
• Normally, select [Indv. Files]. If the files to be transferred are not
displayed by this selection, select [All Files].
• If using a FD, do not select [All Files].
<REMARKS>
The files displayed will differ between [PC] and [Printer] selected at step 2.
Because files not related to the editing function of the DPX7 PC Tool function are
not displayed, less files will be displayed with [PC]. However there are some files
displayed only by [PC].
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-141
5. Execute transfer.  Loading Individual Data Saved on FD
• [PC => Printer] : Data files are transferred from PC for servicing to equipment
• [Backup] : Data files are transferred from PC for servicing to selected 1. Insert the FD saving individual data in the FDD of the PC for servicing
folder (FD) (drive A).
• [Restore] : Data files are transferred from selected folder (FD) to PC for
servicing 2. Register the establishment name and printer name of the printer saved
• [Printer => PC] : Data files are transferred from equipment to PC for servicing on the FD.
{MU:4.4_Registering and Deleting Establishments and Printers}
<NOTE>
When [Backup] or [Restore] is selected, a window for selecting the transfer 3. “Printer name” → [Data Transfer] → [Files] → [PC] → [Indv. Files] →
destination or transfer source appears. After selecting, click [OK]. [Restore]
→ The [Restore] screen for selecting the folder (transfer source) appears.
When file transfer ends normally, the [File transfer is completed.] screen will 4. “drive A” → [OK]
be displayed. → The individual data will be copied from the FD to the PC for servicing.
<REMARKS> <NOTE>
Other than the selected files, files required for specifying the printer will also be When registering the printer name, make sure the establishment name and
transferred. printer name are entered correctly.
Otherwise, the correct printer name will be registered newly, and individual
6. [OK] data on the FD will not be incorporated by the printer additionally registered
but in the printer with the incorrect name.
7. If using a FD, remove it from the FDD. In this case, delete both printers, and start from step 2.
8. If files were transferred to the equipment, reboot the equipment so

that the settings of the transferred file are made effective.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-142
[PC2-5] User Settable 5. [PC => Printer]
→ The image data is transferred to the equipment.
<FUNCTION>
Command for transferring image data output by the “User Settable” of the U-Utility.
<OPERATIONS>
1. “Printer Name”
2. Select the drive with the image file.
3. Select the folder with the image file.
4. Select the image file.

<NOTE>
• Transfer image files one file at a time.
• Files that are applicable to “User Settable” are bitmap files below 8 bits.
• Black/white
• 4-bit bitmap (Compressed format)
• 4-bit bitmap (Non-compressed format)
• 8-bit bitmap (Compressed format)
• 8-bit bitmap (Non-compressed format)
• The bitmap size (number of pixels, number of lines) is 1 at minimum and
8800 at maximum. Bitmaps exceeding this will result in transfer error
during conversion.
• The last image file transferred to the equipment is output by “User → When file transfer is completed, the [File transfer is completed.] screen will be
Settable”. displayed.
6. [OK]
<REMARKS>
Clicking [Preview] starts “Paint” (mspaint.exe), allowing the image files selected
to be checked.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-143
[PC3] Upgrading
Perform full installation or version upgrading of the main unit software, and installation
of the printer software saved in the HD of the equipment to the MCT board.
[PC3-1] Data Disk
<FUNCTION>
Command for transferring software files in the main unit software CD-R to the PC for
servicing or USB memory.
 Copying main unit software to the PC for servicing
<OPERATIONS>
<NOTE>
set.
1. Insert the main unit software CD-R in the CD-ROM drive of the PC for
servicing.
→ When completed, the [File Copy Finish!!] screen appears.
2. “Printer name” → [Upgrading] → Select “CD-ROM drive” → Select [PC]
at [File Copy To] → [Copy] 3. [OK]
→ The main unit software will be copied in the FTP folder (C:\Program Files\
FujiFilm\DRYPIX).
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-144
 Copying the Main Unit Software to the USB Memory
<OPERATIONS>
1. Connect the USB memory to the USB port of the PC for servicing.
<NOTE>
USB memory space required for copying the main unit software: More than
84 MB.
2. Create a new folder called “DRYPIX4000” in the USB memory drive.

<NOTE>
The root directory of other drives of the PC for servicing should not contain
folders with the same name as the “DRYPIX4000” folder created in the USB
memory drive.
3. Insert the main unit software CD-R in the CD-ROM drive of the PC for
servicing.
4. “Printer name” → [Upgrading] → Select “CD-ROM drive” → Select [USB

Memory] at [File Copy To] → [Copy]
<NOTE>
• When not connecting the PC for servicing to the equipment, as the [LOGIN
Failure] screen will be displayed after clicking [Upgrading], click [OK]. → When completed, the [File Copy Finish!!] screen appears.
• Do not remove the USB memory until the [File Copy Finish!!] screen is
displayed. 5. [OK]
→ The main unit software will be copied to the “DRYPIX4000” folder of the USB
memory.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-145
[PC3-2] To Printer 5. [Execute]
→ The printer software is installed (version upgrade or full installation) in the
<FUNCTION> equipment, and the printer OS program and printer application programs in
Upgrade the version or perform full installation of the equipment using the main unit the HD are installed in the MCT board.
software copied to the FTP folder of the PC for serving. (Upgrading/Full)
Or install the printer software saved in the HD of the equipment to the MCT board. (No
File Loading)
CAUTION
During version upgrading, full installation, or installation of the printer software,
do not perform other procedures like equipment settings, etc.
 Upgrading/Full Installation
<OPERATIONS>
1. When performing full installation, save individual data first.

{MU:4.7 [PC2-1]_Indv}
2. “Printer name” → [Upgrading]
3. Select the installation type.

• [Upgrading] : Version upgrading
• [Full] : Full installation
4. Select [PRT APL] and [PRT OS] at the installation type.

• [PRT APL] : Printer application
• [PRT OS] : Printer OS
• [PRT INST] : Printer installer
<NOTE> → When installation completed, the [System File Load Finish!!] screen appears.
[PRT INST] should be selected additionally when changing the version of 6. [OK]
made in the main unit software become effective.
All] → [Reset]
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-146
8. [OK]
9. If [Full] (full installation) has been performed, perform the following

procedure as well.
(i) Restore the individual data.
{MU:4.7 [PC2-1]_Indv}
(ii) Reboot the equipment from the PC for servicing.
(iii) Set the system date and time.
{MU:4.7 [PC9-2-1]_Set Date/Time.}
(iv) Set the film counter.
(v) Set the number of remaining films.
{MU:4.7 [PC9-2-6]_Set Remain. Films}
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-147
 Printer Software Installation (No File Loading) 3. [Execute]
→ The printer OS program and printer application programs in the HD are
<OPERATIONS> installed in the MCT board.
1. “Printer name” → [Upgrading] → [No File Loading]
2. Select [PRT APL] and [PRT OS] at the installation type.

• [PRT APL] : Printer application
• [PRT OS] : Printer OS
• [PRT INST] : Printer installer
<NOTE>
→ When installation completed, the [System File Load Finish!!] screen appears.
4. [OK]
of the printer software are effective.
All] → [Reset]
6. [OK]
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-148
[PC4] Analyzer 2. To display logs by client, select [Client.log], and select the client name
from the dropdown list.
<FUNCTION> 3. [View]
Monitors the operating state of the software on the equipment in DICOM → The DICOM communication log of the selected client is displayed.
communication (communication between software tasks, calculation results, etc.).
<NOTE>
Use this function only for the purpose of analyzing design when problems
occur. Do not set nor operate it in normal maintenance and installation work.
Use as instructed only when requested by the Service headquarters.
<OPERATIONS>
1. “Printer name” → [GET LOG]

→ The operation state of the software (dicom.log) is displayed.
Communication with the equipment is terminated when monitoring and
display starts.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-149
[PC5] DICOM Print 5. [Run]
→ The test print data is transferred to the selected printer and the film is
printed.
<FUNCTION>
Perform test printing for the connected printers via the network.
Use the [DICOM Print] function for checking and adjusting the tone correction parameter
(LUT) and enlargement/reduction processing parameter (Magnify) set for each client
during installation.
With the [DICOM Print] function, one film of 8-frame format SMPTE pattern
corresponding to the set LUT1 to LUT8 is test printed under the printing conditions set
in the configuration settings of the client selected.
Film is output from the tray set at “[PC1-3-4-9-1] Film Size”.
{MU:4.7 [PC1-3-4-9-1]_Film Size}
<NOTE>
Execute [DICOM Print] when the printer is in the standby state or during printing.
<OPERATIONS>
1. Import individual data.
{MU:4.7 [PC9-1-3]_Indv. data}
2. Select the name of the printer to perform test printing.
3. Select the client name (AE Title).

<NOTE>
If [DICOM Print] is already selected when several printers are registered → When data transfer ends normally, the [Test printing is completed.]
and the printer name is selected at step 2, the AE Title display may not be information is displayed.
updated.
In this case, select other functions first using [Setting] etc. and then select 6. [OK]
again.
<REMARKS>
<REMARKS> The output film is printed with 8-frame images from LUT1 to LUT8 in the order of
Test printing is performed under the various printing conditions set for the above top left to bottom right in the landscape format.
selected client.
4. Select one condition of the enlargement/reduction processing

parameter set for the selected client to perform test printing from
[Sharp], [Smooth], [Medium], and [None].
<REMARKS>
With [None], no enlargement/reduction processing is performed.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-150
[PC6] OutPutFilm [PC6-1] 24-Steps
<FUNCTION>
CAUTION
Command for printing the 24-steps pattern.
If errors occur at the equipment while executing [OutPutFilm], reboot the {MU:3.3 [2-1]_24-Steps}
<NOTE>
When executing [OutPutFilm], be sure to import individual data from the
equipment beforehand.
<OPERATIONS>


[TRAY1]/[TRAY2]
4. [OUTPUT]
→ The 24-steps pattern is printed.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-151
[PC6-2] 17-Steps <OPERATIONS>
<FUNCTION> 1. Import individual data.
Command for printing the 17-steps pattern. {MU:4.7 [PC9-1-3]_Indv. data}
{MU:3.3 [2-2]_17-Steps}
[TRAY1]/[TRAY2]
4. Select the Dmax.

[2.64]/[3.0]/[3.3]/[3.6]
5. [OUTPUT]
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-152
[PC6-3] Flat <OPERATIONS>
Command for printing the flat pattern. {MU:4.7 [PC9-1-3]_Indv. data}
{MU:3.3 [2-3]_Flat}
[TRAY1]/[TRAY2]
4. Select the Dmax.

[2.64]/[3.0]/[3.3]/[3.6]
5. Enter the flat density value (1 to 399).
6. [OUTPUT]
→ The flat pattern is printed.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-153
[PC6-4] Cleaning [PC6-5] Grid
Command for printing the cleaning film. Command for printing the grid pattern.
{MU:3.3 [2-4]_Cleaning} {MU:3.3 [2-5]_Grid}
1. Import individual data. 1. Import individual data.

{MU:4.7 [PC9-1-3]_Indv. data} {MU:4.7 [PC9-1-3]_Indv. data}

[TRAY1]/[TRAY2] [TRAY1]/[TRAY2]
3. Enter the number of films to be printed (1 to 150). 3. Enter the number of films to be printed (1 to 150).
4. [OUTPUT] 4. Select the Dmax.

→ The cleaning film is printed. [2.64]/[3.0]/[3.3]/[3.6]
5. [OUTPUT]
→ The grid pattern is printed.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-154
[PC6-6] Film out to Sorter <OPERATIONS>
Command for printing flat patterns and discharging to the sorter. {MU:4.7 [PC9-1-3]_Indv. data}
{MU:3.3 [2-6]_Film out to Sorter}
<REMARKS>
[TRAY1]/[TRAY2]
Executable only when set to “[PC1-2-9-8] Sorter: Enable”.
{MU:4.7 [PC1-2-9-8]_Sorter} 3. Enter the number of films to be printed (1 to 150).
4. Enter the printing start bin number [First Output Bin #] (1 to 4).
5. Enter the printing end bin number [Final Output Bin #] (1 to 4).
6. [OUTPUT]
→ The flat pattern is printed to the sorter.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-155
[PC6-7] Uniformity <OPERATIONS>
Command for printing the uniformity measurement pattern. {MU:4.7 [PC9-1-3]_Indv. data}
{MU:3.3 [2-7]_Uniformity}
[TRAY1]/[TRAY2]
4. Select the Dmax.

[2.64]/[3.0]/[3.3]/[3.6]
5. [OUTPUT]
→ The uniformity measurement pattern is printed.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-156
[PC6-8] SMPTE <OPERATIONS>
Command for printing the SMPTE pattern. {MU:4.7 [PC9-1-3]_Indv. data}
{MU:3.3 [2-8]_SMPTE}
<REMARKS>
[TRAY1]/[TRAY2]
The differences between this function and “[PC5] DICOM Print” are that this function
allows specification of the number of output frames and specification of the tray. The
LUT of the pattern output is the same.
{MU:4.7 [PC5]_DICOM Print} 4. Select the client name (AE Title).

<REMARKS>
Test printing is performed under the various printing conditions set for the above
selected client.
5. Select [Image Matrix] (Number of frames).

[1]/[2]/[4]/[6]/[8]/[12]
6. Select [LUT Number].

[LUT1] to [LUT8]
7. Select [Interpolaton type].

[SHARP]/[SMOOTH] /[MEDIUM]
8. Select [Interpolation algorithm/method].

[NONE]/[CUBIC]
9. [OUTPUT]
→ The SMPTE pattern is printed.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-157
[PC6-9] User Settable <OPERATIONS>
Command for printing the User Settable pattern. {MU:4.7 [PC9-1-3]_Indv. data}
{MU:3.3 [2-9]_User Settable}
[TRAY1]/[TRAY2]
4. Select the client name (AE Title).

<REMARKS>
Test printing is performed under the various printing conditions set for the above
selected client.
5. Select [Interpolation type].

[SHARP]/[SMOOTH]/[MEDIUM]
6. Select [Interpolation algorithm/method].

[NONE]/[CUBIC]
7. [OUTPUT]
→ The User Settable pattern is printed.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-157.1
[PC6-10] Spatial Resolution <OPERATIONS>
Command for printing the spatial resolution pattern (20pix/mm recording verification {MU:4.7 [PC9-1-3]_Indv. data}
pattern).
{MU:3.3 [2-10]_Spatial Resolution} 2. Select the film tray.
<NOTE> [TRAY1]/[TRAY2]
• This menu is available from DI Tool software version V2.0 or later. 3. Select the Dmax.
• This function is effective for equipment with main unit software version V2.0
[2.64]/[3.0]/[3.3]/[3.6]
or later.
4. [OUTPUT]
→ The spatial resolution pattern is printed.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-157.2
BLANK PAGE
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-158
[PC7] F.D.C. [PC7-1] Auto F.D.C.
<FUNCTION>
Command for printing 24-steps patterns and calculating the 24-steps density
correction value from the density data measured by the density measurement section.
The corrected 24-steps density data can also be displayed on the DPX7 PC Tool
function.
{MU:3.3 [3-1]_AUTO F.D.C.}
<OPERATIONS>

[Tray1]/[Tray2]
2. [Execute]
→ The 24-steps pattern is output and automatic density correction is executed.
• To display the correction values, click [Display].
→ The measured density value of each pattern is displayed.
• To change the shift value for high density correction, select [Adjust
Dmax] and adjust.
[4] to [-3]
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-159
[PC7-2] Check Density 4. Check the results of execution.
<FUNCTION> If set to print at Dmax:4.0 at “[PC1-2-6] Real Dmax on film” using

the software version V2.0 or later in both the DI Tool and equipment,
Command for printing 17-steps pattern, and displaying 17-steps density data check that the density of the 17th step is 4.0 or higher using the
measured by the density measurement section on the DPX7 PC Tool function. external densitometer.
{MU:3.3 [3-2]_Check Density}
5. [OK]
 Specified Values

1 fog fog fog fog
4 0.30±0.05 0.30±0.05 0.30±0.05 0.30±0.05
5 0.48±0.05 0.48±0.05 0.48±0.05 0.48±0.05
6 0.66±0.05 0.66±0.05 0.66±0.05 0.66±0.05
7 0.84±0.05 0.84±0.05 0.84±0.05 0.84±0.05
8 1.02±0.05 1.02±0.05 1.02±0.05 1.02±0.05
9 1.20±0.05 1.20±0.05 1.20±0.05 1.20±0.05
10 1.38±0.05 1.38±0.05 1.38±0.05 1.38±0.05
11 1.56±0.05 1.56±0.05 1.56±0.05 1.56±0.05
12 1.74±0.05 1.74±0.05 1.74±0.05 1.74±0.05
<OPERATIONS> 13 1.92±0.05 1.92±0.05 1.92±0.05 1.92±0.05
14 2.10±0.07 2.10±0.07 2.10±0.07 2.10±0.07
1. Select the film tray. 15 2.28±0.07 2.40±0.10 2.40±0.10 2.43±0.10
[Tray1]/[Tray2] 16 2.46±0.07 2.70±0.10 2.70±0.10 2.95±0.10
2. Select the Gradation Type. 17 2.64±0.07 3.00±0.10 3.30±0.20 3.60±0.20
If set to print at Dmax:4.0 at “[PC1-2-6] Real Dmax on film” using

the software version V2.0 or later in both the DI Tool and equipment,
select [3.6] from [Gradation Type].
[2.64]/[3.0]/[3.3]/[3.6]
3. [Execute]
→ The 17-steps pattern is printed, and the 17-steps data is displayed on the
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-160
[PC7-3] 24-Steps
<FUNCTION>
Command for outputting the 24-steps pattern using the current setting value.
{MU:3.3 [3-5-1]_24-Steps}
<OPERATIONS>

[Tray1]/[Tray2]
2. [Execute]
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-161
[PC7-4] Manual F.D.C. <OPERATIONS>
<FUNCTION> 1. Output 24-steps pattern at “[PC7-3] 24-Steps”.
Command for entering the 24-steps pattern measured by an external densitometer, {MU:4.7 [PC7-3]_24-Steps}
and creating density correction information.
{MU:3.3 [3-4]_Manual F.D.C.} 2. Select the tray.
[Tray1]/[Tray2]
3. Measure the film output at step 1 using an external densitometer, and

enter the density values of each step (1 to 399).
<NOTE>
The specified values for the input range of each step are as follows.
• Should be between 0 and 399.
• Should be above the density value of the previous step.
4. [Execute]
→ Correction is executed.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-162
[PC7-5] Calibration <OPERATIONS>
<FUNCTION>  Creating Calibration Tables
Command for creating density calibration table for calibrating the internal densitometer
and initializing the densitometer calibration table. 1. Output 24-steps pattern at “[PC7-3] 24-Steps”, and measure the
{MU:3.3 [3-5-2]_Calibration} density value of each step using an external reference densitometer.
{MU:3.3 [3-5-3]_Clear Calib. Table} {MU:4.7 [PC7-3]_24-Steps}
<NOTE> 2. Enter the density value of each measured step (1 to 399).
Perform “[PC7-3] 24-Steps” beforehand, otherwise the [Calibration] function will
not be effective. 3. [EXT. DEN Calibration]
{MU:4.7 [PC7-3]_24-Steps} → The calibration table is created.
 Clearing the Calibration Table
1. [Clear Calib. Table]

→ The calibration table is initialized.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-163
[PC7-6] Uniformity [PC7-6-2] Input
[PC7-6-1] Clear Table <FUNCTION>

Command for entering uniformity correction data.
<FUNCTION> {MU:3.3 [3-6-2]_Input}
Command for clearing the uniformity correction data to zero.
{MU:3.3 [3-6-1]_Clear Table}
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS> 1. Measure the uniformity measurement pattern output at “[PC6-7]

Uniformity” using an external densitometer, and repeatedly enter the
1. [Execute] required number of measurement data.
→ The correction data is cleared. (Number=Low Density/High Density: 15 each)
{MU:4.7 [PC6-7]_Uniformity}
2. [Execute]
→ Correction is executed.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-164
[PC7-7] DM sensor monitor
<FUNCTION>
Command for monitoring whether the density measurement sensor of the internal
densitometer is operating normally or not.
{MU:3.3 [3-5-4]_DM Sensor Monitoring}
<OPERATIONS>
1. [Start]
→ The state of the density measurement sensor is displayed in a certain cycle.
2. Block the density measurement section sensor with a film, and check
that the displayed value changes. Check that a low value is displayed
for high density parts of the film, and a high value for low density
parts.
3. [End]
→ The display stops.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-165
[PC8] Check [PC8-1-1] Initialize Scanner
<FUNCTION>
[PC8-1] Check Scanner Command for initializing the main scanning width adjustment value and main scanning
starting position adjustment value.
{MU:3.3 [4-3-4]_Initialize Scanner}
<OPERATIONS>
1. [Execute]
→ Initialization is executed.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-166
[PC8-1-2] Adjusting Main Scanner
4. If out of the specified value, check the [Measurement Width (XXmmx10)]
checkbox, and enter the main scanning width adjustment value. (0 to ±
<FUNCTION> 120)
Command for setting the main scanning width (compression rate in main scanning <REMARKS>
direction) and main scanning position (starting position in main scanning direction).
{MU:3.3 [4-3-1]_Scanning Width} • Enter the adjusting values in units of 0.1 mm.
{MU:3.3 [4-3-2]_Scanning Position} • Entering a negative value reduces the image from the reference position.
• The changes in the value entered can be calculated by: (Value entered) x C x
10 ÷ 37000 (mm)
5. [Execute]
 Example of Input
<OPERATIONS>
 Adjusting the Main Scanning Width

{MU:4.7 [PC9-1-3]_Indv.data}
2. Output grid pattern using “[PC6-5] Grid”.

{MU:4.7 [PC6-5]_Grid}
3. Measure “C” of the output film and check that it is within the specified
value.
{Specified Value (C)}
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-167
 Specified Value (C)

C 300.0±1.2 300.0±1.2 200.8±1.2 200.0±1.2
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-168
 Adjusting the Main Scanning Position  Example of Input

2. Output grid pattern using “[PC6-5] Grid”.

{MU:4.7 [PC6-5]_Grid}
value.
{Specified Value (B)}
4. If out of the specified value, check the [Starting Position (XXmmx10)]

checkbox, and enter the starting position adjustment value. (0 to ±120)
<REMARKS>
Enter the adjustment value in units of 0.1 mm.
5. [Execute]
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-169
 Specified Value (B)

B 27.0±1.0 32.3±1.0 51.1±1.0 50.5±1.0
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-170
[PC8-1-3] Polygonal Motor LD <OPERATIONS>
<FUNCTION>  [Polygonal Motor]
Turn ON and then OFF the polygon motor and the laser diode (LD).
{MU:3.3 [4-1]_Polygonal Motor} 1. [Polygonal Motor]
{MU:3.3 [4-2]_LD}
2. [ON]
→ The polygon motor rotates.
3. [OFF]
→ The polygon motor stops.
 [LD]
1. [LD]
2. Select the [Optical Power] (optical value).

[High]/[Middle]/[Low]
3. [Execute]
→ The LD value set is transferred to the equipment.
4. [ON]
→ The LD lights up.
5. [OFF]
→ The LD light goes off.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-171
[PC8-1-4] Initial Check [PC8-1-5] PRN Board Test
Command for performing self-diagnosis of the scanner unit. Command for performing diagnosis in the initialization of the PRN board, and
{MU:3.3 [4-4-1]_Initial Check} implementing fuse and memory check.
{MU:3.3 [4-4-2]_PRN Board Test}
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. [Execute]
→ Diagnosis is carried out in the order of polygon, LD, start point detection, and
1. [Execute]
leading edge detection. (About 30 seconds) → Diagnosis starts. (About 1 minute 30 seconds)
If problems occur, the [Error!!] screen is displayed. If problems occur, the [Error!!] screen is displayed.
<REMARKS> <REMARKS>
When self-diagnosis ends, the [Execute] button becomes active. When the PRN board check ends, the [Execute] button becomes active.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-172
[PC8-2] Check Mechanism <OPERATIONS>
Command for checking mechanism operations of the equipment.
1. Select the tray to be used.
[PC8-2-1] Moving
[Tray1]/[Tray2]
[PC8-2-1-1] Unit Operation 2. Check individual operations in the order of [Home Positioning] → [Film
Surface] → [Film Suction] → [Upper Limit] → [Film Fanning] → [Film
<FUNCTION> Release] → [Film Convey].
Command for performing individual operations of the removal mechanism. <REMARKS>
{MU:3.3 [5-1-3]_Unit Operation}
Can be returned to the home position from any position.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-173
[PC8-2-1-2] Motor Operation
2. Select [Operation type].
<FUNCTION> [CW]/[CCW]
Command for performing individual operations of the conveyance motor.

{MU:3.3 [5-2-1]_Motor Operation}
<REMARKS>
• It may not be possible to select all operation types (CW/CCW) for some motors.
• After the motor is started, it will continue driving unless it is stopped or
communication is terminated.
3. Select [Speed Condition]. (Cannot select at ME1.)

[High Speed]/[Low Speed]
<OPERATIONS>
4. [Moving]
1. Select [Motor type]. → The selected motor rotates.
[MB12]/[MB22]/[MD1]/[ME1]/[MG1]/[MJ1] 5. Select [Operation type].
[Stop]
6. [Moving]
→ The selected motor stops.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-174
[PC8-2-1-3] Grip <OPERATIONS>
<FUNCTION> 1. Select [Motor Type].
Command for performing individual operations of the grip motor. [MD2]
{MU:3.3 [5-3]_Grip}
<REMARKS>
2. Check individual operations in the order of [Home Positioning] →
[Grip].
After completing operations, it will remain in the gripped state unless [Home
Positioning] is performed or communication is terminated.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-175
[PC8-2-1-4] Adjusting Subscanner <OPERATIONS>
<FUNCTION>  When [Printed Length] (setting) is selected
Adjust the film conveyance speed (pps) of the sub-scanning unit.
{MU:3.3 [5-2-2]_Adjusting Subscanner} 1. Import individual data beforehand.
2. Output grid patterns at “[PC6-5] Grid”.

{MU:4.7 [PC6-5]_Grid}
<NOTE>
Output from film tray 1.
3. Select the film size of the output grid pattern.

[14x17(35x43cm)]/[14x14(35x35cm)]/[10x14(26x36cm)]/[10x12(25x30cm)]/[8x10
(20x25cm)]
4. Select the output image.

[Grid]
5. Enter the subscanning length “F” (in units of 1/10 mm) at [Printed
Length (XXmmx10)].
{Specified Value (F)}
6. [Execute]
→ The conveyance speed is adjusted.
7. Output the grid pattern again, and check that the subscanning length
satisfies the specified value.
 When [Initialize] is selected
1. [Execute]
→ The conveyance speed is initialized.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-176
 Specified Value (F)

F 413.0±1.2 226.5±1.0 225.5±1.0 225.5±1.0
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-177
[PC8-2-1-5] Other Actuators [PC8-2-1-6] Solenoids
Command for performing individual operations of each actuator. Command for performing individual operations of the sorter bin switching solenoids
{MU:3.3 [5-4]_Other Actuators} (SOLT1 to SOLT3).
{MU:3.3 [5-7-1]_Solenoids}
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select [Unit type].
[SOLA11]/[SOLA21]/[SOLD1]/[PB11]/[PB21]/[SVB11]/[SVB21] 1. Select the solenoid.
[SOLT1]/[SOLT2]/[SOLT3]
2. [ON]
→ The selected actuator operates. 2. [ON]
→ The selected solenoid operates.
3. Check the operations of the solenoid.
4. [OFF]
→ The selected actuator stops. 4. [OFF]
→ The selected solenoid stops.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-178
[PC8-2-1-7] Sensor Monitor Name ON State OFF State
ST1 2nd bin film release sen- Film is at sorter exit of bin Film is not at sorter exit of
<FUNCTION> sor 2 bin 2
Command for performing sensor monitoring of the sorter. ST2 3rd bin film release sensor Film is at sorter exit of bin Film is not at sorter exit of
3 bin 3
{MU:3.3 [5-7-2]_Sensor Monitor}
ST3 4th bin film release sensor Film is at sorter exit of bin Film is not at sorter exit of
4 bin 4
ST4 Sorter right cover interlock Sorter right cover is open Sorter right cover is
switch closed
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select [Single]/[All].
If [Single] is selected, select the monitoring sensor.
[ST1]/[ST2]/[ST3]/[ST4]
2. [ON]
• If [Single] is selected : The state of the sensor selected is displayed.
• If [All] is selected : The state of all sensors is displayed.
3. [OFF]
→ Sensor monitoring stops.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-179
[PC8-2-2] Sensor Monitor
<FUNCTION>
Command for performing sensor monitoring of the equipment.
{MU:3.3 [5-5]_Sensor Monitor}
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select [All]/[Single].
If [Single] is selected, select the monitoring sensor.
2. [ON]
• If [All] is selected : The state of all sensors is displayed.
• If [Single] is selected : The state of the sensor selected is displayed.
3. [OFF]
→ Sensor monitoring stops.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-180
Name ON State OFF State Name ON State OFF State
SA11 Film pack/shutter detection Film pack/shutter is No film pack/shutter SK3 Upper right cover interlock Upper right cover is Upper right cover is
sensor (Upper) present switch open closed
SA12 Tray detection switch (Upper) Film tray is pulled out Film tray is pushed in +24V SND board+24V power sup- Power supply cut off Normal
ply
SA13 Tray lock detection sensor Tray lock is released Tray lock is not re-
(Upper) leased +24V_A SOLA11/21, MB11/21, Meltdown Normal
PB11/21, SVB11/21 power
SA21 Film pack/shutter detection Film pack/shutter is No film pack/shutter supply fuse (SND board F7)
sensor (Lower) present
+24V_B ME1, MG1, polygon motor Meltdown Normal
SA22 Tray detection switch (Lower) Film tray is pulled out Film tray is pushed in power supply fuse
SA23 Tray lock detection sensor Tray lock is released Tray lock is not re- (SND board F9)
(Lower) leased +24V_C MB12/22 power supply fuse Meltdown Normal
SB11 Suction cup arm HP detection Suction cup arm is at Suction cup arm is not (SND board F11)
sensor (Upper) home position at home position +24V_D MD1, MD2 power supply fuse Meltdown Normal
(Upper) surface detected +24V_E SOLD1, MJ1, SOLT1-3 power Meltdown Normal
SB13 Suction cup arm upper dead- Suction cup arm is at Suction cup arm is not supply fuse (SND board F15)
point detection sensor (Upper) upper dead-point at upper dead-point VCCS Sensor, LED15A, BCR power Meltdown Normal
SB21 Suction cup arm HP detection Suction cup arm is at Suction cup arm is not supply fuse (SND board F5)
sensor (Lower) home position at home position +12V PDD15A power supply fuse Meltdown Normal
(Lower) surface detected -12V PDD15A power supply fuse Meltdown Normal
SB23 Suction cup arm upper dead- Suction cup arm is at Suction cup arm is not (SND board F3)
point detection sensor (Lower) upper dead-point at upper dead-point READY Polygon motor Not Ready Ready
SD1 Conveyor unit entrance sen- Film is at upper con- Film is not at upper con-
sor veyor unit entrance veyor unit entrance
SD2 Conveyor unit exit sensor Film is at upper con- Film is not at upper con-
veyor unit exit veyor unit exit
SD3 Cleaning roller detection sen- Cleanning roller is Cleaning roller is absent
sor present
SD4 Stopper release detection Stopper is at releasing Stopper is not at releas-
sensor position ing position (Stopper
set)
SD5 Grip roller position detection Grip roller is at grip- Grip roller is at release
sensor ping position position
SG1 Heat development unit en- Film is at heat devel- Film is not at heat de-
trance sensor opment unit entrance velopment unit entrance
SJ1 Film release unit entrance Film is at film release Film is not at film re-
sensor unit entrance lease unit entrance
SJ2 Film release sensor Film is at release unit Film is not at release
exit of the output tray unit exit of the output
tray
SJ3 Upper small cover interlock Upper small cover is Upper small cover is
switch open closed
SK1 Upper front cover interlock Upper front cover is Upper front cover is
switch open closed
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-181
[PC8-2-3] Other <OPERATIONS>
[PC8-2-3-1] Serial I/F 1. Select [Barcode Reader].

If I/F related errors such as SIO communication error of BCR occur, executes the loop [Tray1]/[Tray2]
back test between the SND board and BCR to check the operation.
{MU:3.3 [5-6-1]_Serial I/F} 3. [START]
<INSTRUCTIONS> → The loopback test starts.
Before executing the loop back test by [Barcode Reader], perform the following 4. [STOP]
beforehand because jumper pins need to be set for each film tray.
• Upper film tray: Short-circuit pins 2-3 of J2 and J3 of the SND board. → If problems are detected, the abnormal count is displayed at “Abnormal
Count:”.
(Normally, pins 1-2 are short-circuited.)
• Lower film tray: Short-circuit pins 2-3 of J4 and J5 of the SND board. <NOTE>
(Normally, pins 1-2 are short-circuited.) The loopback test is repeated until [STOP] is selected.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-182
[PC8-2-3-2] HDD Test [PC8-2-3-3] DPRAM Test
Command for executing the HDD test and checking hard disk operations when errors Command for executing the DPRAM test and checking DPRAM operations when
occur while data is transferred from the MTH board to the hard disk (reading or communication errors such as FMT communication timeout error occur.
writing). When the DPRAM test is executed, the R/W test of the Dual Port RAM mounted on
When HDD test is executed, check disk is performed on the R/W partitions in the hard the MCT board is performed.
disk. {MU:3.3 [5-6-3]_DPRAM Test}
{MU:3.3 [5-6-2]_HDD Test}
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. [START]
1. Select [Normal]/[Detail].
→ DPRAM test starts.
• [Normal] : Normal
• [Detail] : Detail 2. [STOP]
<REMARKS> → If problems are detected, the number of errors occurred is displayed at “Number
of errors:”.
• Execution time: Approx. 10 seconds/[Normal], Approx. 15 minutes/[Detail]
• Applicable drive: Drive 1 to 5/[Normal], Drive 2, 3, 5/[Detail]
→ HDD test starts.
2. Check the results of execution for Drive 1 to Drive 5.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-183
[PC8-2-3-4] Inter Board Test [PC8-2-3-5] LAN Base Test
Command for executing inter board test and checking control operations when errors Command for performing LAN port tests.
occur in control operations of the MCT board and SND board.
Executing the inter board test implements the control signal line/address data line
tests between the MCT board and SND board.
{MU:3.3 [5-6-4]_Inter Board Test}
<OPERATIONS>
1. [TEST]
<OPERATIONS> → LAN port tests are started. If errors are detected, details are displayed at
“Diagnosis:”.
1. [START]
→ Inter board test starts.
2. [STOP]
→ If problems are detected, the number of errors occurred is displayed at “Number
of errors:”.
<NOTE>
The inter board communication test is repeated until [STOP] is selected.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-184
[PC8-2-3-6] Status Lamp Test [PC8-3] Heat-Developer
<FUNCTION> [PC8-3-1] Temperature

Command for performing status lamp tests of the equipment.
<FUNCTION>
Command for performing temperature monitoring of each thermistor.
{MU:3.3 [6-1]_Temperature}
<OPERATIONS>
1. Select lamp operations to be tested.

• [ON] : Lit <OPERATIONS>
• [BLINK] : Blinking
• [OFF] : Off 1. [START]
→ The measured temperature of each thermistor is displayed ten times larger.
2. [START]
The measured value is updated every 1.2 seconds.
→ Status lamp lighting tests start.
2. [STOP]
3. [STOP]
→ Temperature monitoring stops.
→ The status lamp goes off.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-185
[PC8-3-2] Heating <OPERATIONS>
<FUNCTION> 1. Stop all heaters.
Command for performing ON/OFF operations of each heater. [ALL] → [OFF]
{MU:3.3 [6-2]_Heating}
CAUTION
2. Select a heater.
[HG1]/[HG2]/[HG3]/HG4]/[HG5]/[HG6]/[ALL]
When the upper limit temperature is reached, the heater is turned OFF by the
thermal protector. <NOTE>
As [HG3] and [HG6] are not available, do not select them.
3. [ON]
→ The selected heater heats up.
4. Stop this heater.

[OFF]
5. Return all heaters to normal temperature control operations.

[ALL] → [INTERMITTENT]
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-186
[PC8-3-3] Fan Operation <OPERATIONS>
<FUNCTION> 1. Select [Group A] or [Group B].
Command for performing ON/OFF operations of the cooling fan.
<REMARKS>
{MU:3.3 [6-3]_Fan Operation}
• [Group A] : FANG1, FANG3
• [Group B] : FANG2
2. Select the drive voltage.

[14V]/[16V]/[18V]/[20V]/[22V]/[24V]
3. [ON]
→ The fan rotates.
4. [OFF] → [intermittent]
→ The fan returns to normal operations.
<REMARKS>
The conditions for the fan to return to normal operations are as follows.
• Selecting [intermittent] from the above menu operations.
• Rebooting the equipment
• Quitting M-Utility
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-187
[PC8-3-4] Temp. Control [PC8-3-5] Set Heater Cond. Temp.
Command for controlling ON/OFF of the heater temperature control. Command for setting the initial value of the targeted temperature of each heater.
{MU:3.3 [6-4]_Temp. Control} {MU:3.3 [6-5]_Set Heater Temp.}
1. Select the operation type. 1. Select the heater.

• [ON] : Temperature control is performed. [HG1]/[HG2]/[HG3]/[HG4]/[HG5]/[HG6]
• [OFF] : Temperature control is not performed. <NOTE>
<REMARKS> As [HG3] and [HG6] are not available, do not select them.
Rebooting the equipment returns the setting to [ON].
2. Enter the initial targeted temperature value (100 to 130 °C). (In units of
0.1 °C)
3. [SET]
→ The initial value of the targeted temperature of each heater changes.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-188
[PC9] Control [PC9-1-1] Log Data
<FUNCTION>
[PC9-1] File Save/Load Command for saving data files for analysis stored in the equipment’s MTH board in
the HD, and transfer to the PC for servicing.
{MU:3.3 [1-3-3]_Store Log Files}
<REMARKS>
• The saved analysis data is shown below.
• Text file of error logs and various settings information
• Communication logs (external input, formatter, FMT to PRT, printer ISC)
• The error log data is saved under the filename “AppEvt.txt”.
execution.
• The analysis data transferred to the PC for servicing are saved in the “LOG” folder.
<OPERATIONS>
1. [Save IOT Log] → [Execute]

→ At this point, data files for analysis are saved in the HD of the equipment.
When the data is saved, the [Save ITO Log completed.] screen is displayed.
2. [Transfer Analysis Log] → [Execute]

→ Data files for analysis saved in the HD of the equipment are saved in the PC
for servicing. When the data transfer is completed, the [Transfer Analysis Log
completed.] screen is displayed.
<NOTE>
Executing [Transfer Analysis Log] saves the latest data files for analysis at
this point in the PC for servicing.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-189
[PC9-1-2] Error Log [PC9-1-3] Indv. data
Command for displaying error log lists and deleting error logs. Command for transferring individual data.
{MU:3.3 [1-3-1]_Display Error Log} <REMARKS>
{MU:3.3 [1-3-2]_Clear}
The individual data transferred to the PC for servicing is saved in the “Indv” folder.
<OPERATIONS>
<OPERATIONS>
1. [Display Error Log] → [Execute]
→ The error log list is displayed. 1. [Save from the printer] → [Execute]
<REMARKS> → The individual data is transferred to the PC for servicing.
Executing [Display Error Log] creates a folder named with the date and time of When transfer ends, the [File transfer is completed.] screen is displayed.
log acquisition in the C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\DRYPIX\Printers\Establishment
name_Printer name\LOG\Analysis Directory folder. Error log data (AppEvt.txt) will
2. Change and backup the individual data.
be saved in the “EventLog” folder in this folder.
3. [Load to the printer] → [Execute]
→ The individual data is transferred to the equipment.
2. [Clear Error Log] → [Execute]
When transfer ends, the [File transfer is completed.] screen is displayed.
→ The error log is deleted.
4. Reboot the equipment.
All] → [Reset]
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-190
[PC9-2] System Config [PC9-2-2] Save Config.
[PC9-2-1] Set Date/Time. <FUNCTION>

Command for saving the various configuration settings.
<FUNCTION> {MU:3.3 [1-1-3-2]_Save Config}
Command for setting the system date and time. <REMARKS>
{MU:3.3 [1-1-1]_Set Date/time}
Configuration settings saved on this menu can be recovered by [Recover] of “[PC9-2-3]
Initialize”.
{MU:4.7 [PC9-2-3]_Initialize}
<OPERATIONS>
1. Enter the system date and time (year/month/day hour:miniute).

<OPERATIONS>
2. [Set]
→ The system date and time entered will be set. 1. [Recover] → [Memory]
→ The current various configuration settings are saved in the HD of the
equipment.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-191
[PC9-2-3] Initialize <OPERATIONS>
<FUNCTION> 1. Select the initialization type.
Command for returning the various configuration settings to the state saved in • [Initialize (manufacture)] : Returns to the state at factory shipment.
“[PC9-2-2] Save Config.” or setting at shipment, and initializing some of the data
• [Recover] : Returns to the state saved in “[PC9-2-2] Save
managed by the system.
Config.”
{MU:3.3 [1-1-3-1]_Recover}
• [Nonvolatile Memory] : Clears the PRT log saved in the equipment’s
{MU:3.3 [1-1-3-3]_Initialization} EPROM
<NOTE>
• The following are data initialized when [Recover] is executed.
2. [Set]
→ Initialization is executed.
• Number of remaining film
• User counter
• Error log
• Executing [Initialize (manufacture)] initializes the following data in addition to
the above.
• Various configuration data
• Whether I/O tracer is executed or not
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-192
[PC9-2-4] Reboot <OPERATIONS>
<FUNCTION> 1. Select the reset type.
If the equipment needs to be rebooted after completing settings, execute this menu to • [Power OFF] : Turns OFF the power of the equipment.
reboot it.
• [Reboot All] : Reboots the equipment.
{MU:3.3 [1-1-8-2]_Reboot All}
2. [Reset]
<NOTE>
Executing “[PC9-2-4] Reboot” turns OFF the power of the equipment and
displays the [LOGIN Failure] screen because communication is cut off.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-193
[PC9-2-5] Set Counters <OPERATIONS>
<FUNCTION> 1. Click [Set Counters].
Check the number of films used on each film tray, set the total number of films to be → The cumulative count of each film tray after it has been cleared to zero the
used per film tray, and clear the total counter to zero. previous time and total counter are displayed for each film tray.
<NOTE>
If the total counter has not been cleared to zero after installation, [Cumulative
2. To clear [Cumulative Count] to zero, click [TrayX UserCounter Clear].
Count] and [Total Counter] will show the same values. → The number of films used on the equipment is cleared to zero.
{MU:3.3 [1-1-6]_Set Counters}

3. To set the total number of films used, enter the desired value in the
[Total Counter].
4. [Set]
→ The total counter value of the equipment changes.
<REMARKS>
If the value entered at [Total Counter] is smaller than that at [Cumulative Count],
it will be replaced with the value of [Cumulative Count].
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-194
[PC9-2-6] Set Remain. Films <OPERATIONS>
<FUNCTION> 1. Enter the number of films remaining in each film tray.
Command for setting the number of film remaining in each film tray.
{MU:3.3 [5-1-2]_Set Remain.Films} 2. [Set]
→ The file of “film_sheets.txt” is transferred to the equipment, and the number of
films remaining in the equipment is changed.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-195
[PC9-3] Set Main Panel [PC9-3-2] Motion Speed
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the animation display speed during film loading and removal of
jammed film.
{MU:3.3 [1-5-5]_ANIMATION}
<OPERATIONS>
1. Set the display speed.

• [Slow] : Speed becomes slower
• [Fast] : Speed becomes faster
2. [Execution]
→ The settings are transferred to the equipment.
[PC9-3-1] Sound Test
<FUNCTION>
Command for testing the buzzer sound function of the operation panel.
{MU:3.3 [1-5-6]_Sound Test}
<OPERATIONS>
1. [ON]
→ The buzzer of the operation panel sounds.
2. [OFF]
→ The buzzer stops.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-196
[PC9-4] Set Parameter <OPERATIONS>
[PC9-4-1] Status Lamp 1. Import individual data.
<FUNCTION>
Command for setting the status lamp display. 2. Click [Set Parameter].
→ The equipment’s status lamp settings are displayed.
Status Remarks Default value

Routine States in which the user can operate the equip- Lit in green
ment such as idling or printing.
Stand-by Power save state (Power saving mode) All off
Sleep Sleep state (Power saving mode) All off
User Utility U-Utility mode All off
PC-UTL M-Utility mode or DPX7 PC Tool function connect- All off
ed state
Initializing Currently initialization self-diagnosis Blinking in green
Film Empty Film empty state Blinking in orange
Error User mediation error (Recoverable error occurred Blinking in orange
in the equipment)
3. Set the lighting state from the dropdown list.

• [ON] : Lit
• [BLINK] : Blinking
• [OFF] : Off
4. [Execute]
→ The settings are transferred to the equipment and are effective after the
equipment is rebooted.
5. To return the settings to default, click [Reset].
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-197
[PC10] Film Counter 4. If [by date] is selected, click ▼, and specify the calendar displayed
from the date.
• [Start] : From when
<FUNCTION>
• [End] : Till when
This function allows the film output by this equipment to be counted by film tray, AE
Title, IP address, and film size/base color. 5. Click ▼, select the items counted, and click [ADD].
<OPERATIONS> • [Tray] : By selected film tray

• [AE Title] : By selected AE Title
1. Import individual data. • [IP Address] : By selected IP address
• [film color_size] : By selected film size/base color
→ The selected item is displayed in the [List] box at the bottom left of the [Film
2. [Film Counter] Counter] screen.
→ The [Film Counter] screen is displayed. <REMARKS>
<REMARKS> To delete an item displayed in the [List] box, select the item and click [DELETE].
Though [Film Counter] starts from the DPX7 PC Tool function, it will operate
independently from the DPX7 PC Tool function after starting because it is a
different application. (Example: Even if the DPX7 PC Tool function is ended after 6. [OK]
displaying the [Film Counter] screen, [Film Counter] does not end.) → The output film count is displayed.
<REMARKS>
3. Select [Mode]. Click [CLEAR] to clear the displayed count.
• [by date] : Specify the date range.
• [Total] : Total count 7. [Close]
→ [Film Counter] ends.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-198
[PC11] Print Queue  Ending [Print Queue]
1. Click the button at the top right of the [PrintJobList] or select [Exit]
<FUNCTION> from the [File] menu.
This function displays the state of print jobs having the following functions. → [Print Queue] ends.
• Acquires the state of print jobs from this equipment print queue and displays it.
• Deletes print jobs from this equipment print queue.  [PrintJobList] Screen
• Change the priority order of print jobs in this equipment print queue. The following shows the displayed contents of the [PrintJobList] screen.
<OPERATIONS>
 Displaying Print Jobs
1. Click the printer name whose print job is to be displayed → [Print

Queue]
→ The [PrintJobList] screen displayed.
<NOTE>
[Print Queue] cannot be started if the equipment is currently starting the
M-Utility or U-Utility, or communicating with the DPX7 PC Tool function. Row Details Display
AE Title AE Title name
<REMARKS>
Entry Time Print job reception date and time
• Though [Print Queue] starts from the DPX7 PC Tool function, it will operate
Status Print job state PRINTING
independently from the DPX7 PC Tool function after starting because it is a FAILURE
different application. (Example: Even if the DPX7 PC Tool function is ended DONE
after displaying the [PrintJobList] screen, [Print Queue] does not end.) (Not displayed): Unprocessed
• As communication is carried out via the DICOM interface, the equipment will Priority Print job output priority order HIGH
not set into the offline state even if [Print Queue] is started. MEDIUM
LOW
Number of Copies Number of output requests (1 to 99)
<REMARKS>
• Clicking the row name [AE Title], etc. sorts in the ascending or descending order at
the character string of the row.
• By selecting [Refresh] of the [View] menu, the display can be updated to the latest
state.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-199
 Deleting Jobs
1. Select the job to be deleted at the [PrintJobList] screen. (Several can

be selected)
2. Select [Delete] or [Delete All] from the [Edit] menu.

→ The selected job is deleted, and the [PrintJobList] screen is updated.
<NOTE>
Jobs which can be deleted are those which are not displayed in the [Status]
column (not processed) and those indicated as “FAILURE” (error occurred)
in the [Status] column.
 Changing the Output Priority Order of Print Jobs
1. Double-click the job whose priority order in printing is to be changed

on the [PrintJobList] screen.
→ The [Change Priority] screen is displayed.
<NOTE>
Applicable jobs for changing priority are those not displayed in the [Status]
column (not processed).
<REMARKS>
After selecting a job whose priority order in printing must be changed on the
[PrintJobList] screen, [Priority] can be selected from the [Edit] menu.
2. Change the priority order in printing.

• [High] : Priority order in printing is set to “High”
• [Medium] : Priority order in printing is set to “Medium”
• [Low] : Priority order in printing is set to “Low”
3. [OK]
→ The priority order in printing is changed, and the [PrintJobList] screen is
updated.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-200
[PC12] Tool 3. Select the type of log data to be acquired.
Selection Type Details
[PC12-1] GetLog DICOM DICOM log
OutPut Output control log
<FUNCTION>
Spooler Spooler log
This function is a log acquisition tool for acquiring logs while this equipment is running
(including after transitioning to the routine mode/during utility mode). Event Event log (Text file)
<OPERATIONS> PCUTL PC interface

Driver Driver log
1. Click the name of the printer for which log is to be acquired.
Main Main log
2. Select [GetLog] from the [Tool] menu. GUI GUI log

→ The [Get Log] screen for selecting the log data type is displayed. PRT PRT log (IOT and ISC files saved the last in this equip-
ment HD. Acquire the latest files using [Save ITO Log]
of the [Control] function.)
Startup Startup log
4. [Get]
→ The log data is transferred to the PC for servicing.
When transfer ends normally, the [File Transfer completed.] screen is
displayed.
<REMARKS>
The log data transferred to the PC for servicing is saved in the “C:\Program
Files\FujiFilm\DRYPIX\Printers\Establishment name_Printer name\Log\
AnalysisDirectory\date time of log acquisition” folder.
5. [OK] → [END]
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-201
 List of Acquired Files
File name Remarks
EventLog.txt Event log
dcm[date/time].log Communication log with client
dcm[Client][date/time].log Communicaiotn log with client
out[date/time].log Output control log
man[date/time].log MAIN control log
gui[date/time].log GUI log
spl[date/time].log Spooler log
drv[date/time].log Win driver log
pcu[date/time].log PC-UTLif log
sat[date/time].log Satellite log
[date/time].iot PRT IO tracer
[date/time].isc PRT subsystem inter-communication log
Tmp[date/time].csv Temperature measurement data file
Den[date/time].txt Temperature measurement raw data file
ESN[date/time].csv Edge sensor raw data file
AVES[date/time].csv Edge sensor average value data file
[date/time].mch Mechanical log data file
BK[date/time].iot Backup PRT IO tracer
BK[date/time].isc Backup PRT subsystem inter-communication log
BKESN[date/time].csv Backup edge sensor raw data file
BKM[date/time].dat Backup non-volatile memory
MONESN[date/time].csv Edge sensor monitoring data file
Startup.log Startup log
Startuplog.bak Startup log (backup)
drwtsn.log Dr. Watson log
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-202
[PC12-2] HW AutoCheck 3. From [Selected Items], select the test items to be performed.
<FUNCTION> <NOTE>
This is an automatic checking tool that performs selected hardware-related test items • Test items not applicable to the specifications of the target printer should
for the equipment and displays the results as normal or abnormal termination. not be selected.
<NOTE> • When Dmax for DI-ML film is set to 4.0 on an equipment running main unit
software version V2.0 or later, the test items of this tool, [Check Density
When using this tool, ensure that the equipment is in an idling status (status in Dmax=3.0] and [Check Density Dmax=3.6], should not be performed
which routine window is displayed). Unless the equipment is in an idling status, (selected) because the density measurement results will be incorrect.
this tool cannot be used. In this case, output the 17-steps density measurement pattern
individually and check that the density of the 17th step is 4.0 or higher
using the external densitometer.
<OPERATIONS>
{MU:4.7 [PC7-2]_Check Density}
1. Click the name of the printer to be checked. • When performing a test of [Serial IF(Barcode Reader)], the jumper pin
setting of the SND board must be changed to loopback test setting
2. Select [HW AutoCheck] from the [Tool] menu.
beforehand.
{MU:4.7 [PC8-2-3-1]_Serial I/F}
→ The [H/W Auto-Check] initial screen is displayed.
• When it is necessary to change the default value (0.20) of [17-Steps Fog]
at [Parameters], enter a number (value multiplied by 100).
<REMARKS>
Clicking [Apply] at [Save Selection] saves the change made to the test item
selection for [Selected Items] and the change takes effect at the next execution.
However, any change to the value of [17-Steps Fog] at [Parameters] will not be
saved and returns to default at the next execution.
4. Click [Start].
→ Check starts and displays the checking status sequentially in the [Results]
field.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-203
5. After checking, details of normal completion or abnormal completion  List of HW AutoCheck Test Items
are displayed in the [Result] field. Test Item Test Contents and Related Reference Evaluation
Example of normal completion Example of abnormal completion Temperature Comparison of the heat development unit tempera- Pass if the temperature
ture measured at each thermistor with the criteria is as follows:
temperature for each heater given in the right col- THG1/2: 110±10°C
umn. THG4/5: 125±5°C
{MU:4.7 [PC8-3-1]_Temperature},
{MU:4.7 [PC8-3-5]_Set Heater Cond. Temp.}
Check Density 17-steps density measurement pattern output of tone Pass if the density data
Dmax=3.0 type Dmax 3.0 from film tray 1 measured at the density
{MU:4.7 [PC7-2]_Check Density} measurement section is
within specifications.
Check Density 17-steps density measurement pattern output of tone As above.
Dmax=3.6 type Dmax 3.6 from film tray 1
{MU:4.7 [PC7-2]_Check Density}
TestPrint(Grid) Grid pattern output from film tray 1 Pass if no problem is
Tray1 {MU:4.7 [PC6-5]_Grid} found in completing film
output.
<REMARKS>
TestPrint(Grid) Grid pattern output from film tray 2 As above.
When abnormally ended, the check is ended at the point error is detected. Test Tray2 {MU:4.7 [PC6-5]_Grid}
items after error detection are not implemented. TestPrint(Flat) Flat pattern output from film tray 1 As above.
Tray1 {MU:4.7 [PC6-3]_Flat}
6. Click of the [H/W Auto-Check] screen. TestPrint(Flat) Flat pattern output from film tray 2
Tray2
As above.
{MU:4.7 [PC6-3]_Flat}
→ HW AutoCheck ends.
Scanner Initial Self-diagnostic function at initialization of scanner Pass if no problem is
<NOTE> Check {MU:4.7 [PC8-1-4]_Initial Check} found in various scan-
ner self checks.
When the [Serial I/F (Barcode Reader)] test is performed, return the SND
board jumper pin setting to the normal use state. Sensor Check Sensor check of the equipment main unit Pass if no problem is
{MU:4.7 [PC8-2-2]_Sensor Monitor} found in the sensor idle
{MU:4.7 [PC8-2-3-1]_Serial I/F} status as compared with
the theoretical value.
7. When abnormally ended, error analysis of the targeted items is Sorter Sensor Sensor check of the sorter
Check {MU:4.7 [PC8-2-1-7]_Sensor Monitor}
As above.
performed.
Serial I/F (Bar- Serial I/F loopback test of the SND board Pass if no problem is
code Reader) {MU:4.7 [PC8-2-3-1]_Serial I/F} found in the loopback
test.
DPRAM Test DPRAM R/W test of the MCT board Pass if no problem is
{MU:4.7 [PC8-2-3-3]_DPRAM Test} found in the DPRAM
R/W test.
Inter Board Inter board communication test between the MCT Pass if no problem is
Test board and SND board. found in the inter board
{MU:4.7 [PC8-2-3-4]_Inter Board Test} communication test.
LAN Base Test LAN port test Pass if no problem is
{MU:4.7 [PC8-2-3-5]_LAN Base Test} found in establishing
communication via the
LAN port.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-204
5. SETTING METHOD BY PURPOSE 4. [Edit] → [Add]
5.1 Registering User ID

Set the user ID entered by the user to execute the image QC function or reprint
function.
 Setting Procedure
1. For printers already registered with the user ID, import individual data
(User.id).
→ The [UserID] screen appears.
2. If currently communicating with the equipment, click [Setting] to
cancel the communication. 5. Enter the user ID.
3. “Printer Name” → [Option] → [User ID] Enter using 4-digit numbers.
6. Select the checkbox of the function used.

<NOTE>
Be sure to check [QC] or [Reprint] or both.
<REMARKS>
[Comment] can be entered as required.
→ The [User.id] screen appears.

<NOTE>
The “1111” user ID is registered as a default.
7. [OK]
→ The settings made are displayed at the [User.id] screen.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-205
8. To register other user IDs, repeat steps 4. to 7.
<REMARKS>
• By deleting all user ID, entering the user ID can be omitted. To delete user ID,
select [Delete] from the [Edit] menu after selecting registered user ID.
• In the above screen, settings can be changed by double-clicking the desired
setting or selecting [Change] from the [Edit] menu after selecting that desired
setting to display the [UserID] screen.
9. Click the of the [User.id] screen.

→ The screen for checking the data saved appears.
10. [OK]
→ The settings are saved in the “User.id” file. This file is saved in the “C:\
Program Files\FujiFilm\DRYPIX\Printers\Establishment name_Printer
name\Indv” folder.
11. After transferring the individual data (User.id) to the equipment, reboot
the equipment.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-206
5.2 Setting Reprint 4. [Setting] → “Printer name” → “Client name” → [Annotation]
Set as follows to enable the reprint function.
• Set the reprint function to “Enable”.
5. Register macro (%REPRINT%) in annotation settings.
• Register macro (%REPRINT%) in annotation settings. 6. [Update]
• Register the user ID
2. [Setting] → “Printer name” → “Client name” → [Protocol]
3. Set [Reprint] to “Yes” to enable the reprint function.
7. Register the user ID.


equipment.
<REMARKS>
The reprint function can also be set to enable/disable using the M-Utility.
[System Management] → [System Config.] → [Set Parameters] → [Reprint
Function]
{MU:3.3 [1-1-2-3]_Reprint Function}
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-207
5.3 Setting Annotation 6. Select the position to be printed annotation, and enter the character
string.
 Setting Procedure <NOTE>
Set annotation to be printed on film as follows. • If annotations are set, the image area will be smaller than when
<NOTE> annotations are not set, and images will be printed in reduced size.
• Though annotations can be printed anywhere (upper/lower, left/ center/
As the use of CR extension format and annotation will result in image right of the film), they may be missing at some locations. Therefore when
processing error, do not set annotation. (CR extension format: use of whole film printing annotations at several locations, check that none is missing
as image area) during printing.
{MU:4.7 [PC1-3-1-5]_Use Extention Format}
{ Rules on Location of Annotations}
• Up to 64 one-byte size characters can be entered.
1. Import individual data beforehand. • In addition to standard characters, macros are also available.
• If the annotation character string becomes long after macro conversion,
2. If currently communicating with the equipment, click [Setting] to make sure that no characters are missing.
cancel the communication. { List of Macro Definitions}
3. Select the client for setting annotation.

• To set by each client : Select the client for setting annotation from the 7. [Update]
[Clients:] list.
• To fix the printer in setting : Select the [default] client from the [Clients:] list. 8. After transferring the individual data to the equipment, reboot the
equipment.
4. Select the font type of the annotation character.
{MU:4.7 [PC1-3-5-2]_Annotation Font}
9. Print the film, and check that no characters are missing.
<NOTE>
5. Set the annotation character size.
If characters are chipped along the height, extend the annotation print area.
{MU:4.7 [PC1-3-5-3]_Annotation Size}
{MU:4.7 [PC1-3-5-1]_Annotation Height}
<NOTE>
• The character size for the [System] font is fixed at [14] points.
• For 20 pix/mm recording, images are printed smaller than 10 pix/mm
recording.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-208
 Rules on Location of Annotations <REMARKS>
The printing area will be set to “no division”, “two-part division”, and “three-part For hospitals switching between portrait and landscape when printing images, set
division” as shown below according to the annotation location set. When long [Annotation] using the portrait. As the printing area is formatted smaller with portrait,
annotation character strings are set, etc., make sure no characters are missing. missing characters can be prevented by adjusting the printing area with portrait
beforehand.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-209
 List of Macro Definitions <NOTE>
The following macros are available on this equipment. • If the annotation character string becomes long after macro conversion, make
sure that no characters are missing.
Macro Significance Output example • To print the print ID, there is a need to set [Reprint] to “Yes”.
%YYYY% 4-digit year in image reception 2005 {5.2_Setting Reprint}
%MM% 2-digit month in image reception 05

<REMARKS>
%MON% Month in English in image reception MAY For example, to print the hospital name, print request date and time information as
%DD% 2-digit day in image reception 12 follows, enter as indicated.
FUJIFILM<sp>HOSPITAL<sp>2005.05.12<sp>09:51
%TIME% Time in image reception 09:51 “FUJIFILM<sp>HOSPITAL<sp>%YYYY%.%MM%.%DD%<sp>%TIME%”
%IPADDR% IP address of client 192.168.1.225 (Note: <sp> designates a space.)
%AET% AE Title of client Fujifilm
For details on printing client alias in the annotation character string, refer to “ Setting
%ALIAS% Alias of client FUJIFILM Client Alias”.
{ Setting Client Alias}
%REPRINT% Print ID used in the reprint function 1234
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-210
 Setting Client Alias 5. Enter the following items:
Perform the following procedure to print client alias in annotations. • [IP Address] : IP address of client
<REMARKS> • [AE Title] : AE Title of client
Client alias is a name related to the client IP address and AE Title. • [Alias Name] : Alias of client
<NOTE>
1. For printer already registered with the client alias, import individual Entering the IP address or AE Title incorrectly will disable printing of
data (IP Address_Alias.txt). annotations.
2. If currently communicating with the equipment, click [Setting] to <REMARKS>

cancel the communication.
[Comment] can be entered as required.
3. “Printer name” → [Option] → [IP Address Alias]
6. [OK]
→ The settings made are displayed at the [IPAddress_Alias] window.
→ The [IPAddress_Alias] screen appears.
4. [Edit] → [Add]
→ The [IPAddress Alias] screen appears.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-211
7. To assign an alias to other clients, repeat steps 4. to 6.
<REMARKS>
In the above screen, settings can be changed by double-clicking the desired
setting or selecting [Change] from the [Edit] menu after selecting the desired
setting to display the [IP Address Alias] window.
8. Click at the [IPAddress_Alias] window.

→ The window for checking the saved data appears.
9. [OK]
→ The settings are saved in the text format “IPAddress_Alias.txt” in the “C:\
Program Files\FujiFilm\DRYPIX\Printers\Establishment name” folder.
<REMARKS>
“IPAddress_Alias.txt” is saved as individual data.
10. After transferring the individual data (IPAddress_Alias.txt) to the

equipment, reboot the equipment.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-212
5.4 Setting Output of User Settable Images
Set as follows to enable output of user settable images.
• Set the user settable image output function to “Enable”.
• Transfer user settable image files (user data) to the equipment.
• Execute test printing and check the results.
<NOTE>
set.
• To output the desired User Settable pattern, save the user settable images in
the equipment beforehand.
• With this equipment, user settable images can be saved in the equipment by
the following two methods.
• Transfer from the PC for servicing using “[PC2] Data Transfer” of DPX7 PC
Tool function.
{MU:4.7 {[PC2-5]_User Settable}
• Save DICOM-printed images using “[1-1-2-4] Option/Save DICOM Image” of
the M-Utility.
{MU:3.3 [1-1-2-4]_Option/Save DICOM Image}
4. [Update]
 Setting Procedure 5. Transfer the individual data to the equipment.
2. [Setting] → “Printer name” → [Config] → [Option]
3. Set [User Settable] to “Enable” to enable the user settable image

output function.
{MU:4.7 {[PC1-2-9-10]_User Settable}
<REMARKS>
The user settable image output function can also be set to Enable/Disable using
the M-Utility.
[System Management] → [System Config.] → [Set Parameters] → [Option] →
[User Settable]
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-213
6. To output the desired user settable image, save them in the equipment  To save DICOM-printed image
first by the following procedure.
(i) “System Management” → [System Config.] → [Set Parameters] →
 To transfer using [Data Transfer] [Option]
{MU:3.3 [1-1-2-4]_Option}
(i) “Printer name” → [Data Transfer] → [User Settable]
(ii) Set [Save DICOM Image] to “Enable”.
{MU:4.7 {[PC2-5]_User Settable}
<REMARKS>
(ii) Select the drive with the image file.
After setting to “Enable”, the data of the first frame of the first DICOM-printed
(iii) Select the folder with the image file. image will be imported as user settable image. After importing, this setting will
automatically be set back to “Disable”.
(iv) Select the image file.
(v) [PC=>Printer] 7. Reboot the equipment.
→ The image data is transferred to the equipment.
8. To use the DICOM-printed image, print one user settable image from a
network device connected to this equipment.
9. Check the operations.

“Printer name” → [OutPutFilm]
10. Select [User Settable] and execute the test printing of the user settable
image and check.
<REMARKS>
Test printing can be performed using the U-Utility or M-Utility.
{MU:2.3 [2]_TEST PATTERN}
{MU:3.3 [2-9]_User Settable}
→ When file transfer is completed, the [File transfer is completed.] screen is

displayed.
(vi) [OK]
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-214
5.5 Displaying Logs by Client (Filtering DICOM  Displaying Procedure
Communication Logs) 1. “Printer name” → [Analyzer]
Perform the following procedure to display and analyze DICOM logs by client.
2. [GET LOG]
 Setting Procedure → The DICOM communication log is displayed.
1. Import individual data (Dicom.dat).
2. [Setting] → “Printer name” → “Client name” → [Protocol]
3. Set [Logging Client] to “Yes” to enable the setting of the filtering of

DICOM communication logs.
{MU:4.7 [PC1-3-1-11]_Logging Client}
3. Select [Client.log], and select the client name from the dropdown list.
4. [View]
→ The DICOM communication log of the selected client is displayed.
4. [Update]
5. Transfer individual data (Dicom.dat) to the equipment.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-215
5.6 Adjusting LUT Using SAR MAKER → The SAR MAKER screen appears.
Perform the following procedure to adjust LUT using the SAR MAKER.
• Start the SAR MAKER and adjust LUT.
• Perform the changes for the adjustments made in the DPX7 PC Tool function.
 Adjusting Procedure
<INSTRUCTIONS>
Do not display the screen for setting client of [Setting] while using the SAR
MAKER. If displayed, adjustment values may not be reflected, but reflected in
other clients.
2. [Option] → [SarMaker]
3. Click [Mode] from the menu bar.

→ The [Mode] screen appears.
<NOTE>
[4.0] of [Density] (Dmax4.0) is provided in DI Tool software version V3.0 or
later, and effective for equipment installing software version V3.0 or later.
4. Select [Density] (maximum density) and [Color] (film base color).
5. [OK]
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-216
6. Select [GAMMA No.]. 10. [Adjust]
→ The tone curve (gamma curve) is drawn. (dark red) → The input data is reflected, and the converted tone curve is drawn. (bright red)
7. Select the fine adjustment point number at [tuning point]. <REMARKS>

Two tone curves can be drawn at the same time. The second tone curve is
8. Enter [DMAX] (maximum density) and [DMIN] (minimum density). drawn in blue. Note, however, that only the LUT data adjusted last is saved to
“sar_savedata.txt”.
9. Enter the [density], [shift], [contrast] for the number of times selected
at [tuning point].
11. [Save]
<NOTE> → The [save complete] screen is displayed, and the converted LUT data is saved
Even when [4.0] is selected at [Density] in the [Mode] screen, the maximum under the filename “sar_savedata.txt”. This file is saved in the folder “C:\
density value that can be fine-adjusted at the fine adjustment points is 3.6. Program Files\FujiFilm\DRYPIX”.
<REMARKS>
“sar_savedata.txt” saves the data creation date/time, GAMMA No., DMAX, DMIN,
fine adjustment points and QL values at 48 points, and density values.
This ends the adjustment of LUT.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-217
12. [POST] 16. [Setting] → “Printer name” → “Client name” → [LUT] → [Adjustment
→ The [Post] screen appears. Parameter]
13. At the [Post] screen, select the printer name, client name, and LUT
number for reflecting the values adjusted using SAR MAKER.
14. [Execute]
→ The [Post Completed] screen is displayed, and the adjustment values are
reflected in the LUT number of the selected client.
15. Click to close SAR MAKER. 17. Check that the adjustment values are reflected in the LUT number
selected at step 13.
18. Transfer the individual data to the equipment.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-217.1
 Other Functions
 [QL >> D] Button
Allows you to find the density difference before and after the adjustment.
1. Enter the desired QL value in [QL].
2. [QL >> D]
→ The density value before adjustment is displayed in [Density (before)] and
the density value after adjustment is displayed in [Density (after)]. (100-fold
value)
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-217.2
BLANK PAGE
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-218
5.7 Acquiring Logs when Equipment is not 2. Select the folder transferred from at [Printer Target Directry].
Started <NOTE>
If the DPX7 PC Tool function cannot be communicated with the equipment due to fatal The selectable folder is limited. For details on selectable folders, refer to “
errors of the equipment, acquire logs for analysis by connecting the DPX7 PC Tool List of Directories”.
function as follows. { List of Directories}
 Acquiring Log Files from the Equipment

3. [from the printer] → [OK]
1. “Printer name” → [Option] → [Data Trans-forInitialError] → The selected folder is transferred.
→ The [Data Trans] screen appears. When file transfer is completed, the [File transfer is completed.] screen will be
displayed.
• [PC Target Directry] : The directory of the DPX7 PC Tool function
corresponding to the selection made at [Printer
Target Directry] is displayed.
• [Printer Target Directry] : The directory of the equipment is displayed.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-219
 List of Directories
Drive Lower directory Access Remarks Drive Lower directory Access Remarks
drive E: Temp Not applicable Used in internal processing
BackupDir Reference only Temporary directory in version upgrading UniTemp Not applicable Used in internal processing
Driver Reference only Same as above VersionupDir Reference, Update -
Image Reference only Same as above Driver Reference, Update -
PanelDriver Reference only Same as above Image Reference, Update -
Param Reference only Same as above PanelDriver Reference, Update -
Program Reference only Same as above param Reference, Update -
BackupLog Reference only For log file (Used in backup of logs) program Reference, Update
DICOM Reference only Same as above drive F:
Client Reference only Same as above (Used for DICOM filtering BackupDir Reference only Temporary directory in version upgrading
function) Driver Reference only Same as above
Driver Reference only Same as above Param Reference only Same as above
EventLog Reference only Same as above Program Reference only Same as above
GUI Reference only Same as above BackupLog Reference only For log file (Used in backup of logs)
Main Reference only Same as above Driver Reference, Update (Currently not used)
Output Reference only Same as above Log Reference only Log file
PCUTL Reference only Same as above param Reference, Update (Current individual data)
Spooler Reference only Same as above Custom Reference, Update (Directory for saving individual data during
CalTemp Not applicable Used in internal processing installation)
Driver Reference, Update - Install Reference, Update (Directory for saving default individual
Image Reference, Update - data)
List Reference, Update (Individual data list file) Manufacture Reference, Update (Directory for saving individual data at fac-
Log Reference only Log file tory)
DICOM Reference only Same as above program Reference, Update -
Client Reference only Same as above (Used for DICOM filtering Remote Reference only (Operation information)
function) VersionupDir Reference, Update -
Driver Reference only Same as above Dirver Reference, Update -
EventLog Reference only Same as above param Reference, Update -
GUI Reference only Same as above Program Reference, Update -
Main Reference only Same as above drive G:
Output Reference only Same as above Image Reference, Update -
PCUTL Reference only Same as above Job Reference, Update -
Spooler Reference only Same as above Raw Reference, Update -
PanelDriver Reference, Update - Backup Reference, Update Directory for reprint
param Reference, Update (Current individual data) Image Reference, Update -
Custom Reference, Update (Directory for saving individual data during Job Reference, Update -
installation) drive H:
Install Reference, Update (Directory for saving default individual Log Reference only Temporary directory in version upgrading
data) Acquisition of Watson log
Manufacture Reference, Update (Directory for saving individual data at fac- BackupLog Reference only For log file (Used in backup of logs)
tory)
program Reference, Update -
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
MU-220
5.8 Adjusting the Leading Edge Margin 4. Open and edit “PRT_MARGIN.txt” using the text editor such as
Notepad.
Perform the following procedure to adjust the leading edge margin (margin at the
leading edge along the film conveyance direction). <NOTE>
• Import the leading edge margin definition file
For all film sizes, set the range of leading edge margin values to 5 to 60 for
• Editing of leading edge margin definition file 10 pix/mm recording and 10 to 120 for 20 pix/mm recording.
• Transfer of definition file to equipment. If the leading edge margin exceeds the above values, it is defined as the
default 5 (10 in 20 pix/mm recording).
1. “Printer name” → [Data Transfer] → [Files] → [Printer] → [Indv. Files]
2. Select “PRT_MARGIN.txt”.
5. Overwrite and save “PRT_MARGIN.txt”.
6. “Printer name” → [Data Transfer] → [Files] → [PC] → [Indv. Files]
7. Select “PRT_MARGIN.txt”.
8. [PC => Printer]

→ The leading edge margin definition file (PRT_MARGIN.txt) is transferred to
3. [Printer => PC] the equipment.
→ The leading edge margin definition file (PRT_MARGIN.txt) is transferred to 9. Reboot the equipment.
“PRT_MARGIN.txt” is saved in the “C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\DRYPIX\
Printers\Establishment name_Printer name\Indv” folder.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-221
5.9 Copying Weekly Settings 4. Copy the weekly settings related files of printer 1 to the “Indv” folder
of printer 2.
Perform the following procedure to copy weekly settings (SCHEDULER) set using the
U-Utility to other equipment. <REMARKS>
{MU:2.3 [6-3-3]_SCHEDULER} Weekly settings related files:
“closed.txt”, “eco_idle.txt”, “eco_weekly1.txt” to “eco_weekly7.txt”, “timetable.txt”
 Outline of Procedure
• Import individual data of the equipment (printer 1) which was set with weekly
settings to the PC for servicing.
• Import the individual data of the equipment (printer 2) for making copies to the PC
for servicing.
• Replace the files related to weekly settings using the DPX7 PC Tool function (printer
1 → printer 2).
• Transfer individual data to the equipment (printer 2).
 Copying Procedure
1. Import individual data of equipment (printer 1) set with weekly

settings.
“Printer name (printer 1)” → [Data Transfer] → [Indv] → [All] → [Printer
=> PC]
2. Import the individual data of the equipment (printer 2) for making

copies.
“Printer name (printer 2)” → [Data Transfer] → [Indv] → [All] → [Printer
=> PC]
3. Open Windows Explorer.

[Start] → [Programs] → [Accessories] → [Explorer]
5. Transfer the individual data of printer 2 from which weekly settings

were copied to printer 2.
“Printer name (printer 2)” → [Data Transfer] → [Indv] → [All] → [PC =>
Printer]
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
MU-222
5.10 Acquiring Log Files  To Perform Periodic Maintenance:
Acquire logs using the [Save from the printer] of [Control] function.
The following describes four methods of acquiring log files using the DPX7 PC Tool
function. Use as appropriate according to the log acquisition state and type of log
acquired.  To Analyze DICOM Logs on the Spot when Problems Occur:
 To Acquire Logs without Stopping Printer Output when Problems Acquire logs using the [Analyzer] function.
Occur: {MU:4.7 [PC4]_Analyzer}
Acquire logs using the [GetLog] function.
{MU:4.7 [PC12-1]_GetLog}
 To Acquire All Log Information Files:

Acquire logs using the [Transfer Analysis Log] of [Control] function.
{MU:4.7 [PC9-1-1]_Log Data}
Function Name Function Details Login File Name File Type Folder Saved in
GetLog Saves log files for analysis in the No EventLog.txt Event log C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\
PC for servicing. dcm[date/time].log Communication log with client DRYPIX\Printers\Establishment
Can be acquired even while the dcm[Client][date/time].log Communicaiotn log with client name_Printer name\LOG\Analy-
equipment is starting a utility or out[date/time].log Output control log sis Directory\Date and time of log
outputting. man[date/time].log MAIN control log acquisition folder
gui[date/time].log GUI log
Transfer Analysis Log Saves log files for analysis in the Yes spl[date/time].log Spooler log
PC for servicing. drv[date/time].log Win driver log
pcu[date/time].log PC-UTLif log
Save from the printer Saves log files for analysis at the Yes sat[date/time].log Satellite log
same time as saving individual [date/time].iot PRT IO tracer
data in the PC for servicing. [date/time].isc PRT subsystem inter-communication log
Tmp[date/time].csv Temperature measurement data file
Den[date/time].txt Temperature measurement raw data file
ESN[date/time].csv Edge sensor raw data file
AVES[date/time].csv Edge sensor average value data file
[date/time].mch Mechanical log data file
BK[date/time].iot Backup PRT IO tracer
BK[date/time].isc Backup PRT subsystem inter-communication log
BKESN[date/time].csv Backup edge sensor raw data file
BKM[date/time].dat Backup non-volatile memory
MONESN[date/time].csv Edge sensor monitoring data file
Startup.log Startup log
Startuplog.bak Startup log (backup)
drwtsn.log Dr. Watson log
Analyzer For design analysis when errors Yes dicom.log DICOM log
occur. dicom.bak DICOM log (Backup)
Logs off when the monitor is dis-
played.
Display Error Log Error log view Yes AppEvt.txt Event log (Text)
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-223
5.11 Creating a New Gamma Table 4. Click [Gamma Creator] in the menu bar.
Gamma tables can be created and created gamma tables can be changed using → The [Gamma Creator] screen appears.
[Gamma Creator].
To create with the same tone (gamma table) as the 11-point density of the SMPTE
pattern output from another printer, perform the following procedure.
<NOTE>
This menu is effective for DI Tool software version V3.0 or later.
2. Check that the target printer for the gamma table is selected in
[Equipment list] of DPX7 PC Tool.
3. Start SAR MAKER.

[Option] → [SarMaker]
→ The [SAR MAKER] screen appears.
5. Select a desired gamma number from [Gamma No.].
<NOTE>
[Gamma No.] can be selected in the range of 80 to 99. When an already-
registered gamma number is selected, the comment registered in [Comment]
is displayed.
6. Select the maximum density value from [Dmax].

<REMARKS>
[Dmax] can be selected from 300, 330, 360, and 400.
7. Enter the density values in [OD] column.

<REMARKS>
• Entry value range: 0 ≤ entry value ≤ Dmax.
• Enter a 100-fold value of the density value.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-224
8. In [Comment], enter a comment for the gamma number to be created. 9. Select [OK].
→ The [Gamma Creator] screen closes and a GAMMA curve is drawn in the [SAR
MAKER] window, while “gamma2.prm” in the “Indv” folder of the printer
selected in step 2. is updated.
<NOTE>
When an already-registered gamma number is selected, a message [Select
gamma number is already exist. Overwrite gamma number?] to confirm
whether you want to overwrite the existing gamma number.

→ The gamma number created can be specified at the [γ Table No.] setting of
each LUT.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-225
5.12 Full Installation of Main Unit Software with 2. [Recover].
Equipment not Started → Full installation is executed, and the main unit software and configuration
settings are set back to default.
If the equipment does not start due to main unit software error, etc., connect the DPX7 When full installation completes normally, the [Completed] screen appears.
PC Tool as follows, and perform full installation of the main unit software.
<NOTE> 3. [OK]
• This menu is effective for DI Tool software version V2.0 or later. 4. After rebooting the equipment, transfer the individual data to the
• There is a need to copy (store) the main unit software and latest equipment equipment.
data in the FTP folder of the PC for servicing.
5. Reboot the equipment again.
 Acquiring Log Files from the Equipment
1. “Printer name” → [Option] → [Data Trans-forInitialError]

→ The [Data Trans] screen appears.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-226
5.13 Settings for Using MammoQC Function 3. Enter the “MammoQCTest” as a new client name.
After Upgrading Main Unit Software Version 4. [OK]
from V2.0 or Earlier to V3.0
5. Set the following values for LUT1 of client [MammoQCTest].
If using the mammo QC function in equipment whose main unit software version has γ Table No. : 19
been upgraded from V12.0 or earlier to V3.0, perform the following procedure. Max. Density : 360
<NOTE> Min. Density : 20
• This menu is effective for DI Tool software version V3.0 or later.
• This function is effective for equipment whose main unit software version is
V3.0 or later.
• Added client [MammoQCTest] cannot be deleted.
1. Import the individual data.
2. Register a new client.

[Setting] → “Printer name” → [Add]
6. Set LUT2 to 8 of client [MammoQCTest].

For LUT2, set the same value as the LUT of the mammo system used in the
hospital. If there are several mammo systems in the hospital, set the LUT value of
one of these systems to LUT2, and those of the other systems to LUT3 to LUT8
respectively.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-227
APPENDIX 1 PRECAUTIONS AND 2. Check that the checkmark is selected in the [File Transfer Protocol
(FTP) Service] checkbox from the [Subcomponents of Internet
SETTINGS IN THE USE Information Services (IIS):] list. If not selected, select the checkmark,
and click [OK].
OF Windows XP PC FOR <NOTE>
SERVICING If [File Transfer Protocol (FTP) Service] is not selected at the
[Subcomponents of Internet Information Services (IIS):] list, [Default FTP
Site] will be disabled, disabling directory settings of the FTP site hereafter.
When using the Windows XP (SP2) PC for servicing, the following precautions and
additional settings are required for operating the service tool software.
■ Precautions on Installing Internet Information Services (IIS)

Like the Windows 2000 PC for servicing, the Windows XP PC for servicing also
requires the Internet Information Services (IIS) function of the Windows components.
If it has not been installed in the Windows XP PC for servicing to be used, perform the
additional install in the same way.
Also, during the installing procedure, check the following.
1. Select the checkmark in the [Internet Information Services (IIS)]

checkbox from the [Components:] list at [Add/Remove Windows
Components], and click [Details...].
3. Proceed with the installation procedure according to the instructions

displayed.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-228
■ Windows Firewall Settings 8. Click [Cancel].
Like the Windows 2000 PC for servicing, implement FTP site directory settings,
Windows XP will also require additional setting of the TCP Port number used by the 9. Close all windows opened on the Windows desktop.
[Default FTP Site] to the Windows Firewall Exceptions. Set as follows.
Panel].
1. Click [Start] from the Windows taskbar, then [Settings] →[Control
Panel]. 11. Double-click the [Windows Firewall] icon.
2. Double-click the [Administrative Tools] icon. 12. Click the [Exceptions] tab.
3. Double-click the [Internet Information Services] icon.
4. Double-click the computer name of the PC used from the [Computer]

list.
5. Double-click the [FTP Sites] folder from the [Name] list.
6. Right-click [Default FTP Site], and select [Properties].
7. At the [FTP Site] tab, note down the number displayed at [TCP Port:]
of [Identification] (“21” in the following screen example).
13. Click [Add Port...].
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-229
14. Enter “FTP” in [Name:], and enter the number noted down at step 7. in 16. Check that the checkmark of the [FTP] checkbox has been added in
[Port number:] (“21” in the following screen example). the [Programs and Services:] list of the [Exceptions] tab.
<REMARKS>
The contents of the [Programs and Services:] list of the [Exceptions] tab of
the Windows Firewall shown below are just an example, and actual contents
displayed will differ according to the state of use of the PC for servicing (different
programs and service names may be registered).
15. Click [OK].
17. Click [OK].
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-230
■ Precautions on Selecting the User Name when Starting the PC
for Servicing
At the user name selection screen when the Windows XP PC for servicing is started
after installing the service tool software, the user name [dryprinter] will be added. Do
not select it. Also do not change the settings of this user name. Selecting or changing
the settings of [dryprinter] will disable normal operations of the PC for servicing.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
MU-231
BLANK PAGE
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
CONTROL SHEET

11.20.2005 03 Revised (FM4703 (1)) 1, 4-7, 9, 10, 12-18, 20, 22-24, 27,
28, 30, 32, 33, 44-53
34-43
02.15.2007 05 Revised (FM5079) 1, 3, 4, 6, 8, 14, 16, 19, 21, 23-25,
27, 28, 31, 33, 44-46
SERVICE PARTS LIST (SP)

02.15.2007 FM5079
SP-1
How to Use Service Character Significance
Consumable parts or parts
For software page of the reference section where the
related information is in.
The alphabet denotes a difference in
Parts List A that will be replaced at short
intervals.
the specifications. Parts differing in  RECOMMENDED QUANTITIES
the suffix are not compatible with each
Parts that may become faulty other. Version number is omitted in the OF SPARE PARTS
B accidentally and have a
 RANK relatively high failure rate. list. It is recommended as a rough guide to
Parts that have a sufficiently keep in stock a certain quantity of parts
 Handling RANK characters long MTBF, but are expected
 PART NAME according to the rank (A, B, C, D, E)
C
to have a relatively high failure PART NAME represents a general name assigned to the parts, as follows. For
(Parts that are handled in a special rate. periodically replaced parts, keep them
manner during parts management, such of a part.
Parts that have a sufficiently in stock separately. Adjust the stock
as replacement) D long MTBF, but are expected to
become faulty.
 QTY. quantity of service parts depending on
Character Under Warranty Out of Warranty the number of working units (N).
Must be Parts that are necessary for QTY. denotes the quantity of parts used Quantity used in a single system : Q
R Repairable fault analysis, or parts that may in each unit.
returned.
Must be E be needed in case of unex- A part whose quantity is suffixed with N=1
returned. pected accidents such as man- -S represents a small part that is Rank A = 1 + Q × 0.3
Q Not repairable induced damage. Rank C = 1 + Q × 0.05
(We use for shipped in packs of 50. (Even if such a
analysis.) part is ordered in quantity of 1, a pack Rank D = 1 + Q × 0.02
<The RANK guide>
Must not be containing 50 pieces of that part is
returned. The Fault RANK characters, Handling 2 ≤ N ≤ 10
RANK characters, and Export supplied.) Rank A = 2 + N × Q × 0.3
(Consumable
T part. Not Not repairable regulation-applicable character are Rank C = 2 + N × Q × 0.05
applicable to assigned in that order.  REMARKS Rank D = 1 + N × Q × 0.02
free-of-charge Thus, at least one character or up to The REMARKS column indicates a
warranty.) 11 ≤ N ≤ 300
three characters are assigned in the unique name or relevant information of
without Must not be Rank A = 3 + N × Q × 0.3
Not repairable RANK column. each part.
R, Q, T returned. Rank C = 3 + N × Q × 0.05
 REF. NO. Rank D = 2 + N × Q × 0.02
 Export regulation-applicable
 SERIAL NUMBER
character REF. NO. is a part number indicated in The units may contain different parts  PRECAUTIONS TO BE
the Service Parts Exploded Views. For depending on their shipment control OBSERVED WHEN RETURNING
(Parts with the following character are parts having different functions, they are number. SERIAL NUMBER indicates
controlled by Export regulation.) clearly distinguished in the REMARKS the shipment control number to which
PARTS FOR REPAIR
Character Significance and SERIAL NUMBER columns. the relevant parts are applicable. If the When returning a component for repair,
+
Parts applicable to export SERIAL NUMBER column is blank, the pack it in the same manner as for the
regulations.  PART NUMBER parts are applicable to all the relevant supplied substitute, using the substitute
PART NUMBER is a code number that units. The shipment control number is packing materials.
 Fault RANK characters represented by lower five digits of eight- The use of different packing materials or
is unique to each part. An alphabetic
(Which provide reference for letter at the rightmost position of the digit number indicated on the rating packing methods may incur damage to
determining the recommended stock code number has the following meaning. indication label. packed component during transit.
quantity)
All parts are assigned with one of For hardware  REFER TO
characters A through E. The alphabet denotes the version The "REFER TO" column shows
number of a part. If parts have different reference sections concerning the part.
version numbers, they are upward- Clicking the reference section in the
compatible. “REFER TO” column jumps to the top
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5079
DRYPIX 4000 Service Manual SP-1
SP-2
INDEX
INDEX 01 INDEX 02 INDEX 03 INDEX 10 INDEX 11 INDEX 12

● カバー ● フレーム ● 装填部 ● 制御部 ● ソータ ● 装置固定部材
COVER FRAME FILM LOADING UNIT CONTROLLER SORTER FIXTURES
FPCC010A.AI FPCC020A.AI FPCC030A.AI FPCC100A.AI FPCC110A.AI

FPCZ1211.AI
INDEX 04 INDEX 05 INDEX 06 INDEX 13 INDEX 14 INDEX 15

● 枚葉部 ● 搬送部 ● 副走査部 ● ケーブル ● 回路図 ● 部品番号検索表
REMOVAL UNIT CONVEYOR UNIT SUB-SCANNING UNIT CABLE CIRCUIT DIAGRAM PARTS NOS. SEARCH
TABLE
FPCC040A.AI FPCC050A.AI FPCC060A.AI
INDEX 07 INDEX 08 INDEX 09 INDEX 16

● 光学部 ● 熱現像部 ● 排出部 ● 締結用および配線用の
SCANNING OPTICS UNIT HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT FILM RELEASE UNIT サービス部品一覧表
List of Service Parts for
Securing and Wiring
FPCC070A.AI FPCC080A.AI FPCC090A.AI
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
SP-3
01A カバー 1
COVER 1
カバー 1
COVER 1 01A
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS SERIAL NO. REFER TO
D 1 350Y1751 カバー Cover 1 -
D 2 405Y100014 銘板 Label 1 -
D 3 316S3132 ラッチ Latch 6 -
D 4 366N0066A アクチュエータ Actuator 2 -
FPCZ0111.AI
D 5 363N2670A ガイド Guide 1 -
D 6 314N0075B 蝶番 Hinge 1 -
D 7 376N0238 エアフィルタ Air Filter 1 {PM:3.7}
D 8 350N2935B カバー Cover 1 -
E 9 345N1746D 遮板 Shield Plate 1 -
D 10 332N0600 ストッパ Stopper 1 {Safety:1.1}
D 11 899Y0298 保守部品 Accessory 1 {Safety:1.1}
D 12 899Y0299 保守部品 Accessory 1 {Safety:1.1}
D 13 356N10085D ブラケット Bracket 1 -
D 14 356N10084A ブラケット Bracket 1 -
D 15 345N1481 シールド材 Shield Plate 1 -
D 16 350N2986B カバー Cover 1 {IN:6.1.9}
D 17 350N2936C カバー Cover 1 -
D 18 388N1236A 圧縮コイルばね Compression Spring 4-8 {IN:6.1.9}
D 19 350N2987B カバー Cover 1-2 -
D 20 345N1754C 遮板 Shield Plate 1-2 -
D 21 382N1743 スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 2-4 -
A 22 393N0011 刃物 Cutter 1 -
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5079
SP-4
01B カバー 2
COVER 2
カバー 2
COVER 2 01B
D 1 350N2928D/E カバー Cover 1 -
D 2 345Y0341A ルーバ Louver 1 {PM:3.7}
D 3 345N1823A/B ルーバ Louver 1 -
D 4 376N0238 エアフィルタ Air Filter 1 -
FPCZ0112.AI
D 5 350N3158A/B カバー Cover 4 -
D 6 316N0506 止め具 Stopper 2 {MC:1.1}
D 7 382N1738 スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 4 -
D 11 382N1740A スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 1 -
D 12 346N1490C 補強板 Reinforcement Plate 1 -
D 13 405N3279 銘板 Label 1 -
D 14 314N0073B 蝶番 Hinge 4 -
D 15 350Y1757 カバー Cover 1 -
D 16 356N9976C ブラケット Bracket 2 -
D 17 316S3142 キャッチ Catch 2 -
D 18 316S3097 ラッチ Latch 1 -
D 19 356N9977B ブラケット Bracket 1 -
D 21 382N1742A スポンジテープ Sponge Tape 1 -
D 22 346N1491A 補強板 Reinforcement Plate 1 -
D 23 405N3250 銘板 Label 1 -
D 24 350Y1766 カバー Cover 1 -
D 26 316S3142 キャッチ Catch 1 -
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5079
SP-5
01C カバー 3
COVER 3
カバー 3
COVER 3 01C
D 1 356N9945F/G ブラケット Bracket 1 -
D 2 350N2938D カバー Cover 1 {MC:1.1}
D 3 350N2940C カバー Cover 1 {MC:1.1}
E 4 356N8994B ブラケット Bracket 1 -
FPCZ0113.AI
D 5 350N3017C カバー Cover 1 {MC:1.1}
D 6 350N3004B カバー Cover 1 {MC:1.1}
D 7 350N2941C カバー Cover 1 {MC:1.1}
D 8 350N3003C カバー Cover 1 {MC:1.1}
D 9 350N3002C カバー Cover 1 {MC:1.1}
D 10 350N2939B カバー Cover 1 {MC:1.1}
E 11 350N3005C カバー Cover 1 {MC:1.1}
D 12 405N3299 銘板 Label 1 -
006-267-03
11.20.2005 FM4703 (1)
SP-6
01D カバー 4
COVER 4
カバー 4
COVER 4 01D
D 1 350N3019B カバー Cover 1 -
D 2 350N3158A/B カバー Cover 14 -
D 3 343N0088 フック Hook 4 -
D 4 398Y0065 シャッタ Shutter 2 -
FPCZ0114.AI
D 5 364N0124 ガード Guard 2 -
D 6 364N0125 ガード Guard 2 -
D 7 405N2980 銘板 Label 2 -
D 8 398N0070B/C シャッタ Shutter 2 -
D 9 350N2926C/D カバー Cover 1 -
D 10 350N2927G/H カバー Cover 1 -
D 11 345N1823A/B ルーバ Louver 1 {PM:3.7}
D 12 350N2930D/E カバー Cover 1 -
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5079
SP-7
02A フレーム 1
FRAME 1
フレーム 1
FRAME 1 02A
D 1 852N0025F 読取り部 Reader Unit 1 SA14, SA24 {MC:2.1}
D 2 345N1662A 遮板 Shield Plate 1 -
D 3 360N0526A ケーシング Casing 1 -
D 4 128Y0317 スイッチ Switch 1 {MC:2.2}
FPCZ0211.AI
D 5 347N1988A 調整板 Adjustment Plate 3 -
SK1, SK2,SK3,
D 6 128S0971 マイクロスイッチ Micro-Switch 5 -
SK4, SK5
D 7 366S0006 アクチュエータ Actuator 4 -
D 8 363N2453B ガイド Guide 1 -
E 9 356N9869H/J ブラケット Bracket 1 -
D 10 314Y0010B 蝶番 Hinge 1 -
D 11 345N1755C 遮板 Shield Plate 1 -
D 12 369F3710E ダクト Tube Duct 2 -
D 13 356Y0408A ブラケット Bracket 1 -
D 14 345F0606 ルーバ Louver 2 -
D 15 405N3299 銘板 Label 1 -
D 16 388N5396D/E 板ばね Leaf Spring 1 -
D 17 363N2665C ガイド Guide 1 -
D 18 314Y0008E 蝶番 Hinge 1 -
D 19 314Y0009D 蝶番 Hinge 1 -
D 20 382N1705 テープ Tape 1 -
D 21 382N1706A テープ Tape 1 -
D 22 382N1702 テープ Tape 1 -
D 23 382N1701A テープ Tape 1 -
D 24 367S2066 脚 Foot 2 {IN:12.3}
D 25 367S1109/A キャスタ Caster 2 -
006-267-03
11.20.2005 FM4703 (1)
SP-8
02B フレーム 2
FRAME 2
フレーム 2
FRAME 2 02B
D 1 115Y0041A サーミスタ Thermistor 1 THG11 -
D 2 356N9087 ブラケット Bracket 1 -
E 3 345N1730C 遮板 Shield Plate 1 -
D 4 382N1696 テープ Tape 1 -
FPCZ0212.AI
D 5 382N1700 テープ Tape 2 -
D 6 382N1699A テープ Tape 2 -
D 7 382N1697 テープ Tape 1 -
D 8 382N1704 テープ Tape 2 -
D 9 382N1703 テープ Tape 1 -
D 10 382N1724 テープ Tape 1 -
D 11 352N0685D パネル Panel 1 -
D 12 382N1709 テープ Tape 1 -
D 13 382N1708 テープ Tape 2 -
D 14 304S1001230 六角ボルト Bolt 2 -
D 15 367S1109/A キャスタ Caster 2 -
D 16 363N2648 ガイド Guide 4 -
E 17 405N3039A 銘板 Label 1 -
E 18 405N2505/A 銘板 Label 1 -
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5079
SP-9
03A 装填部 1
FILM LOADING UNIT 1
装填部 1
FILM LOADING UNIT 1 03A
D 2 128S0971 マイクロスイッチ Micro-Switch 1 SA12, SA22 {MC:3.3}
D 3 366S0011 アクチュエータ Actuator 1 -
D 4 356Y0364C ブラケット Bracket 1 -
FPCZ0311.AI
D 5 388N2583C 引張りコイルばね Tension Spring 1 -
SOLA11,
D 6 107Y0184 ソレノイド Solenoid 1 {MC:3.4}
SOLA21
D 7 146S0029/A ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 1 SA13, SA23 -
D 8 362N0810D 受 Support 4 -
D 9 388N5395B 板ばね Leaf Spring 1 -
D 11 365N0106A レール Rail 2 {MC:3.5}
D 13 319N4172A 軸 Shaft 1 -
D 14 334N2397A 樹脂ローラ Resin Roller 22 {MC:3.7}
D 16 319N4173B 軸 Shaft 1 -
D 17 146N0010A ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 1 SA11, SA21 {MC:3.8}
006-267-03
11.20.2005 FM4703 (1)
SP-10
03B 装填部 2
FILM LOADING UNIT 2
装填部 2
FILM LOADING UNIT 2 03B
D 1 343N0067C フック Hook 1 -
D 2 363N2651C ガイド Guide 2 -
D 3 363N2650E ガイド Guide 1 -
D 4 363N2649F ガイド Guide 1 {IN:5.4.1}
FPCZ0312.AI
D 5 359Y0062 容器 Case Assembly 1-2 {MC:3.2}
D 6 363N2654C ガイド Guide 4 {IN:5.4.1}
D 7 319N4186B 軸 Shaft 4 {IN:5.4.1}
D 8 308S0511 特殊ねじ Special Screw 1 -
D 9 364N0127 ガード Guard 1 -
For DI-ML
REF. 5 に含ま
D 10 405N3434 銘板 Label 1 れない -
Not included in
REF. 5
D 11 340Y0044 取手 Knob 1 -
D 12.1 405N2972 銘板 Label 1 大角 -
D 12.2 405N2973 銘板 Label 1 35 x 35 -
D 12.3 405N2974 銘板 Label 1 半切 -
D 12.4 405N2975 銘板 Label 1 35 X 43 -
D 12.5 405N2976 銘板 Label 4 B4 -
D 12.6 405N2977 銘板 Label 1 26 X 36 -
D 12.7 405N2978 銘板 Label 1 四切 -
D 12.8 405N2979 銘板 Label 1 25 X 30 -
D 12.9 405N3006 銘板 Label 1 六切 -
D 12.10 405N3007 銘板 Label 4 20 X 25 -
For DI-ML
B4, 六切
D 12.11 405Y0182 銘板 Label 1 -
25x30, 26x36,
20x25
D 13 603N0253C フィルタ Filter 1 {PM:1.3}
D 15 334Y0098 ローラ Roller 1 -
D 16 363N2666A ガイド板 Guide Plate 4 -
For DI-ML
REF. 5 に含ま
D 17 405N3433 銘板 Label 1 れない
Not included in
REF. 5
006-267-03
11.20.2005 FM4703 (1)
SP-11
04A 枚葉部 1
REMOVAL UNIT 1
枚葉部 1
REMOVAL UNIT 1 04A
E 1 345N1737E 遮板 Shield Plate 1 -
D 2 319Y1172 軸 Shaft 1 -
D 3 334N3634B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 -
FPCZ0411.AI
D 5 322N1003 軸受 Bearing 4 -
D 6 322N1020B すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 4 -
D 7 388N2579B 引張りコイルばね Tension Spring 2 -
D 8 327N0215B 歯車 Gear 2 {MC:4.4}
D 9 356Y0360B ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:4.4}
D 10 327N1083401A 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 -
D 11 356Y0362 ブラケット Bracket 1 -
D 12 327N1083801B 平歯車 Spur Gear 5 -
MB11, MB21, {MC:4.11}
D 13 118SX208/A パルスモータ Stepping Motor 2
MB12, MB22 {MC:4.10}
D 15 341N1144C アーム Arm 4 {MC:4.4}
D 16 341N1145E アーム Arm 4 {MC:4.4}
D 17 327N1103613A 平歯車 Spur Gear 2 {MC:4.4}
D 18 334N3633D ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 -
D 21 356Y0387 ブラケット Bracket 1 {MC:3.1}
D 22 327N1081804A 平歯車 Spur Gear 5 {MC:3.1}
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
SP-12
04B 枚葉部 2
REMOVAL UNIT 2
枚葉部 2
REMOVAL UNIT 2 04B
D 1 341Y0351 アーム Arm 2 {MC:4.2}
D 2 356Y0345 ブラケット Bracket 2 {MC:4.6}
D 3 329N0174A カム Cam 1 -
D 4 329N0175A カム Cam 1 -
FPCZ0412.AI
D 5 341Y0350D アーム Arm 2 -
D 6 334N2396C 樹脂ローラ Resin Roller 2 -
D 7 388N2605B 引張りコイルばね Tension Spring 1 -
D 9 322SP217 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 4 -
D 10 356Y0344D ブラケット Bracket 1 -
D 12 341N1146C アーム Arm 2 -
D 13 347N1946C スペーサ Spacer 2 -
E 14 366N0063B アクチュエータ Actuator 1 -
A 16 133Y2034B/C 電動ポンプ Electric Pump 1 PB11, PB21 {MC:4.7}
D 18 134S0058/A 電磁バルブ Solenoid Valve 1 SVB11, SVB21 {MC:4.8}
D 19 341N1147B アーム Arm 1 -
D 20 322SY223 軸受 Bearing 8 -
D 21 392Y0025 吸着盤 Suction Cup 2 {MC:4.3}
D 22 388N1233A 圧縮コイルばね Compression Spring 2 -
D 23 316N0484C 止め具 Retainer 1 -
D 24 392N0012B 吸着盤 Suction Cup 1 {MC:4.5}
D 25 371N0123A ノズル Nozzle 1 -
E 26 390N0041A ウエイト Plate 3 -
D 27 316N0485C 止め具 Retainer 1 -
D 28 334N3637C ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 2 -
D 29 334Y3221 ゴムローラ SUB ASSY Rubber Roller Sub-Assy 1 -
D 30 334Y3220 ゴムローラ ASSY Rubber Roller Assy 1 {MC:4.3}
D 32 146S0029/A ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 2 SB12, SB22 {MC:4.12}
D 33 370NB032 ホース Hose 1 {MC:4.9}
D 34 370N0405 ホース Hose 1 {MC:4.9}
D 35 372N0008 分岐管 Tube Fitting 1 {MC:4.9}
D 36 370NB084 ホース Hose 1 {MC:4.9}
D 37 372S0280 管継手 Tube Fitting 1 {MC:4.9}
D 38 370N0406 ホース Hose 1 {MC:4.9}
D 39 317N5011B 栓 Cap 2 {MC:4.9}
006-267-03
11.20.2005 FM4703 (1)
SP-13
04C 枚葉部 3
REMOVAL UNIT 3
枚葉部 3
REMOVAL UNIT 3 04C
D 1 363N2623G ガイド Guide 1 -
D 2 363N2624G ガイド Guide 1 -
D 3 363N2690D ガイドレール Guide Rail 1 -
D 4 363N2691C ガイドレール Guide Rail 1 -
FPCZ0413.AI
SB11, SB21, {MC:4.13}
D 6 146S0029/A ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 2
SB13, SA23 {MC:4.14}
D 7 363N2692A ガイドレール Guide Rail 1 -
D 9 363N2693A ガイドレール Guide Rail 1 -
D 10 328N0061A 爪 Click 2 -
D 11 308S0320 特殊ねじ Special Screw 6 -
D 12 347S0281A スペーサ Spacer 4 -
D 13 332N0667C ストッパ Stopper 4 -
006-267-03
11.20.2005 FM4703 (1)
SP-14
05A 搬送部 1
CONVEYOR UNIT 1
搬送部 1
CONVEYOR UNIT 1 05A
D 1 327N0226A 歯車 Gear 2 -
D 2 388Y5009 板ばね Leaf Spring 2 -
D 3 322N1026C すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1 -
FPCZ0511.AI
D 5 319N4149B 軸 Shaft 1 -
D 6 313Y0060D ステー Stay 1 -
D 7 322N1025C すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1 -
D 8 334N1187B 金属ローラ Metallic Roller 1 -
D 9 322N1006C 軸受 Bearing 2 -
D 10 363N2633G ガイド板 Guide Plate 1 {MC:5.3}
D 11 322N1024A すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 2 -
D 12 334N3626E ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 {MC:5.6}
D 13 332Y0057E ストッパ Stopper 1 {MC:5.4}
D 14 146S0029/A ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 2 SD4, SD5 -
D 15 327N1101906B 歯車 Gear 1 {MC:5.1}
D 16 348N1290F 側板 Side Plate 1 -
D 17 355N0731E フレーム Frame 1 -
D 18 341N1148C アーム Arm 1 -
D 19 107Y0185 ソレノイド Solenoid 1 SOLD1 {MC:5.5}
D 20 356Y0381B ブラケット Bracket 1 -
E 22 313N1267C ステー Stay 1 -
D 23 118SX202B パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MD2 -
D 25 348Y0171E 側板 Side Plate 1 -
D 26 327N0227A 歯車 Gear 1 -
D 28 327N0228A 歯車 Gear 1 -
D 29 356Y0393 エッジセンサ ASSY Edge Sensor Assembly 1 SD6 {MC:5.7}
D 31 146N0010A ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 1 SD2 -
D 32 362N0841A 受 Support 2 -
D 33 322N1038B 軸受 Bearing 2 -
D 34 334Y3225 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 -
D 35 388N1253 圧縮コイルバネ Compression Spring 2 -
D 36 322SP213 ころがり軸受 Ball bearing 2
D 37 388N2591B 引張りコイルバネ Tension Spring 1
D 38 388N1242A 圧縮コイルバネ Compression Spring 1
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5079
SP-15
05B 搬送部 2
CONVEYOR UNIT 2
搬送部 2
CONVEYOR UNIT 2 05B
D 3 356Y0382A ブラケット Bracket 2 -
D 4 334N3630E ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 2 {MC:5.9}
FPCZ0512.AI
D 5 327N1102101D 歯車 Gear 2 -
D 7 388N0044A ばね Spring 2 -
D 9 334N0072C ローラ Roller 4 -
D 10 340N0267A 取手 Handle 1 -
D 11 118SX210 パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MD1 {MC:5.11}
D 12 355N0732F フレーム Frame 1 {MC:5.8}
D 13 360N0531B ケース Housing 1 -
D 14 327N1084201B 歯車 Gear 4 -
D 15 327N0229A 歯車 Gear 2 -
D 16 327N1082502B 歯車 Gear 2 -
D 17 327N1085001B 歯車 Gear 1 -
D 18 341N1175B アーム Arm 1 -
D 20 356Y0349D ブラケット Bracket 1 -
D 21 405N3248 銘板 Label 1 -
D 22 405N3247 銘板 Label 1 -
D 23 405N3249 銘板 Label 1 -
D 24 356Y0456 ブラケット Bracket 1 -
006-267-03
11.20.2005 FM4703 (1)
SP-16
05C 搬送部 3
CONVEYOR UNIT 3
搬送部 3
CONVEYOR UNIT 3 05C
D 1 342N0150 レバー Lever 2 -
D 2 363N2635 ガイド Guide 1 -
D 4 334N1191 金属ローラ Metallic Roller 1 -
FPCZ0513.AI
D 5 334N2404A 樹脂ローラ Resin Roller 4 -
D 7 341N1164C アーム Arm 1 -
A 8 334Y0097F クリーニングローラ Roller 1 -
D 10 341N1162D アーム Arm 1 -
D 11 363N2634C ガイド Guide 1 -
D 12 363N2638A ガイド Guide 4 -
D 13 363N2636C ガイド Guide 4 -
E 14 313N1269C ステー Stay 1 -
E 15 313N1288D ステー Stay 1 -
D 16 363N2637B ガイド Guide 4 -
D 18 146S0086 ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 2 SD1, SD3 {MC:5.12}
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5079
SP-17
05D 搬送部 4
CONVEYOR UNIT 4
搬送部 4
CONVEYOR UNIT 4 05D
D 1 313N1292C ステー Stay 3 -
D 4 363N2659A ガイド Guide 8 -
FPCZ0514.AI
D 5 345N1753B 遮板 Shield Plate 2 -
D 7 334N1189A 金属ローラ Metallic Roller 1 -
D 10 334N3636C ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 -
D 11 345N1794 遮光布 Cloth,Light Shelding 1 -
1-tray models
D 12.1 356N10051 ブラケット Bracket 1 {IN:6.1.7}
only
2-tray models
D 12.2 350N2999C カバー Cover 1 -
only
D 13 363N2667B ガイド Guide 4 -
D 14 348N1304D 側板 Side Plate 1 -
D 15 348N1303D 側板 Side Plate 1 -
D 16 363N2669C ガイド Guide 4 -
D 17 334Y0099 ローラ Roller 4 -
D 18 363N2661A ガイド Guide 7 -
006-267-03
11.20.2005 FM4703 (1)
SP-18
06A 副走査部 1
SUB-SCANNING UNIT 1
副走査部 1
SUB-SCANNING UNIT 1 06A
D 1 350N2981 カバー Cover 1 -
D 2 405N3245 銘板 Label 1 -
D 3 405N3299 銘板 Label 1 -
D 4 386N1311 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 4 -
FPCZ0611.AI
D 6 350N2983 カバー Cover 1 -
E 7 313N1281 ステー Stay 1 -
E 8 313N1280E ステー Stay 1 -
D 9 386N1240D 防振ゴム Shock Absorber 4 -
D 10 362N0805 受 Support 1 -
D 11 362N0804 受 Support 1 -
D 12 362N0802D 受 Support 1 -
D 13 362N0803 受 Support 1 -
D 14 332N0654 ストッパ Stopper 1 -
D 15 357N1550E 台 Base 1 -
D 21 332N0653 ストッパ Stopper 3 -
D 22 332N0652C ストッパ Stopper 2 -
D 23 345N1882 遮光布 Shading Cloth 1 -
006-267-03
11.20.2005 FM4703 (1)
SP-19
06B 副走査部 2
SUB-SCANNING UNIT 2
副走査部 2
SUB-SCANNING UNIT 2 06B
D 1 309S0075 座金 Washer 2 -
D 2 334Y3218C/D ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 2 {MC:6.2}
D 4 322SF227 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 2 -
FPCZ0612.AI
D 5 334N3629 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 -
D 6 343N0075 フック Hook 1 -
D 7 323N1264B 平ベルト Belt 1 {MC:6.2}
D 8 324N1036 平ベルト車 Belt Wheel 2 -
D 9 339N0027 ハンドル Handle 1 -
{MC:6.2}
D 10 308N0244 特殊ねじ Special Screw 3
{MC:6.4}
D 11 388N2581 引張りコイルばね Tension Spring 2 -
D 12 341N1156C アーム Arm 1 -
D 13 388N1239A 圧縮コイルばね Compression Spring 2 -
D 14 322SP213 ころがり軸受 Ball Bearing 4 -
D 15 324N1042 平ベルト車 Belt Wheel 2 -
D 16 341Y0355 アーム Arm 2 -
D 17 322N1003 軸受 Bearing 4 -
D 18 308N0241 特殊ねじ Special Screw 2 -
D 19 824Y0117 駆動部 Drive Unit 1 -
D 21 401N0894D 押え板 Pressure Plate 1 -
D 22 401N0895D 押え板 Pressure Plate 1 -
D 23 323N1265A 平ベルト Belt 1 {MC:6.4}
D 24 324N1038 平ベルト車 Belt Wheel 1 {MC:6.4}
D 25 341N1155 アーム Arm 1 -
D 28 812Y0071 検出部 Sensor Unit 1 SE1 (SED16A) {MC:6.5}
D 29 118YA184A パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 ME1 {MC:6.3}
D 30 386S1089 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 1 -
D 31 360N0509F/G ハウジング Housing 1 -
D 32 324Y1002E 平ベルト車 Wheel 1 -
D 33 309S0127 座金 Belt Wheel 1 -
D 34 401N0911 押え板 Pressure Plate 1 -
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5079
SP-20
07 光学部
SCANNING OPTICS UNIT
光学部
SCANNING OPTICS UNIT 07
DR 1 839Y0060/A 光学部 Scanning Optics Unit 1 {MC:7.1}
FPCZ0711.AI
006-267-03
11.20.2005 FM4703 (1)
SP-21
08A 熱現像部 1
HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 1
熱現像部 1
HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 1 08A
D 3 327N0224D 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 -
D 4 322N5133A すべり軸受 Bushing 3 -
FPCZ0811.AI
D 6 319N4281A 軸 Shaft 1 -
D 8 310S1028 平行ピン Straight Pin 1 -
D 9 118SX202B パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MG1 {MC:8.5}
D 10 327Y0016 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 -
D 11 350N3105 カバー Cover 1 -
D 12 350N3106A カバー Cover 1 -
D 13 405N3008 銘板 Label 1 -
D 14 339N0022A ハンドル Handle 1 -
D 15 347N2015B スペーサ Spacer 1 -
D 16 347S0829 スペーサ Spacer 1 -
D 17 319N4291A 軸 Shaft 1 -
D 18 347N2014B スペーサ Spacer 1 -
D 19 363N2625D ガイド板 Guide Plate 1 {MC:8.6}
D 20 320N0027A 軸継手 Shaft Coupling 1 -
D 21 347N2013A スペーサ Spacer 1 -
D 22 362N0829 受 Support 1 -
D 23 146S0086 ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 1 SG1 {MC:8.7}
D 24 356N9844E ブラケット Bracket 1 -
D 25 363N2626C ガイド板 Guide Plate 1 -
D 27 319N4403A 軸 Shaft 1 -
D 28 334N1193 ローラ Roller 31 -
D 30 322N1041A すべり軸受 Bushing 2
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5079
SP-22
08B 熱現像部 2
熱現像部 2
HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 2 08B
D 1 334Y0096 ローラ Roller 10 -
D 2 322N1003 軸受 Bearing 20 -
E 3 319N4389 軸 Shaft 1 -
D 4 350N2993D カバー Cover 1 -
FPCZ0812.AI
D 5 115Y0041A サーミスタ Thermistor 1 THG10 -
E 6 356N9087 ブラケット Bracket 1 -
E 7 356N10462A/B ブラケット Bracket 1 -
E 8 356N10463 ブラケット Bracket 2 -
FANG1,
D 9 119Y2030/A 電動ファン Electric Fan 3 FANG2, {MC:8.1}
FANG3
006-267-03
11.20.2005 FM4703 (1)
SP-23
08C 熱現像部 3
熱現像部 3
HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 3 08C
D 1.1 802Y0132 現像ラック部 Rack Unit 1 100-120VAC {MC:8.3}
D 2 350Y100429 カバー Cover 1 -
D 3.1 117Y10019 ヒータ Heater 1 100-120VAC -
FPCZ0813.AI
D 3.2 117Y10021 ヒータ Heater 1 200-240VAC -
D 4 334N3558A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 4 {MC:8.4}
D 5 310N0720 ピン Pin 2 -
D 6 327N1081801A 歯車 Gear 4 -
D 7 348Y0193 側板 Side Plate 1 -
D 8 322NF006 転がり軸受け Ball Bearing 8 -
D 10 310N0684 ピン Pin 2 -
E 11 350N2958B カバー Cover 1 -
D 12 115N100002 感熱スイッチ Thermal Protector 2 -
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5079
SP-24
08D 熱現像部 4
熱現像部 4
HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 4 08D
D 2 350Y100430 カバー Cover 1 -
D 3.1 117Y10020 ヒータ Heater 1 100-120VAC -
FPCZ0814.AI
D 3.2 117Y10022 ヒータ Heater 1 200-240VAC -
D 4 334N3558A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 6 {MC:8.4}
D 5 310N0720 ピン Pin 2 -
D 6 327N1081801A 歯車 Gear 6 -
D 8 322NF006 転がり軸受け Ball Bearing 12 -
D 10 310N0684 ピン Pin 2 -
E 11 350N2959B カバー Cover 1 -
D 12 115N100002 感熱スイッチ Thermal Protector 2 -
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5079
SP-25
09A 排出部 1
FILM RELEASE UNIT 1
排出部 1
FILM RELEASE UNIT 1 09A
D 1 118YX275 パルスモータ Assy Stepping Motor 1 -
D 2 118SX209/A パルスモータ Stepping Motor 1 MJ1 -
D 3 386S1089 緩衝機材 Shock Absorber 1 -
D 4 319N4407 軸 Shaft 1 -
FPCZ0911.AI
D 6 309S0131 プラワッシャ Washer 1 -
D 7 305S0134 ナット Nut 1 -
D 11 327N1122006 平歯車 Spur Gear 1 -
D 12 356N9956F ブラケット Bracket 1 -
D 13 322NY156 転がり軸受け Ball Bearing 4 -
D 14 322N1004 軸受 Bearing 8 -
D 17 319N4287A 軸 Shaft 2 -
D 18 334N2404 樹脂ローラ Resin Roller 4 -
D 19 334N3641A/B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 -
D 20 334N3640A ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 -
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5079
SP-26
09B 排出部 2
FILM RELEASE UNIT 2
排出部 2
FILM RELEASE UNIT 2 09B
D 1 313N1284B ステー Stay 1 -
D 2 113Y1531B LED15A LED15A 1 {MC:9.2}
D 4 363N2647D ガイド板 Guide Plate 1 -
FPCZ0912.AI
D 6 113Y1532B PDD15A PDD15A 1 -
D 8 338N0505 リング Ring 1 -
D 10 356N10016 ブラケット Bracket 1 {IN:6.3}
D 12 363N2657D ガイド Guide 4 -
D 14 313N1285E ステー Stay 1 -
D 15 363N2658D ガイド Guide 5 -
D 16 346N7004B 補助板 Auxiliary Plate 1 -
D 17 128S0971 マイクロスイッチ Micro-Switch 1 SJ3 -
D 18 363N2368A ガイド Guide 1 -
D 20 316S3133 ラッチ Latch 1 -
D 21 322FC308E すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 1 -
D 22 313N1286E ステー Stay 1 -
D 23 146S0086 ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 2 SJ1, SJ2 -
D 25 387N0165 帯電防止材 Antistatic Material 1 -
D 26 405N3008 銘板 Label 1 -
D 27 319N4242A 軸 Shaft 1 -
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
SP-27
10A 制御部 1
CONTROLLER 1
制御部 1
CONTROLLER 1 10A
CR 1 113Y1774D/E SND24A SND24A 1 -
CR 2.1 125Y0066/A 電源 Power Supply 1 100-120VAC -
CR 2.2 125Y0067/A 電源 Power Supply 1 200-240VAC -
D 3 119Y0062 電動ファン Electric Fan 1 -
FPCZ1011.AI
D 4 364S0005 ガード Guard 1 -
D 5 345N1748 シールド材 Shield Plate 1 -
C 6 114Y5133101A 磁気ディスク部 Strage Unit 1 HDD {MC:10.3}
D 7 347S0329A スペーサ Spacer 4 -
D 8 318S1232 ブッシュ Bushing 1 -
CR 12 113Y1780A MTH24A MTH24A 1 {MC:10.4}
CR 14 113Y1601G/H MCT16A MCT16A 1 {MC:10.5}
CR 15 113Y1600D/E PRN16A PRN16A 1 -
D 17 363S0012 ガイドレール Guide Rail 2 -
D 19 357N1548C 台 Base 1 {MC:10.2}
D 20 113S0185B ボードアセンブリ Printed Circuit Board 1-2 DIMM {IN:6.2}
D 21 363S0014 ガイドレール Guide Rail 2 -
D 22 363N2675 ガイドフレーム Guide Frame 2 -
C 24 113Y1776A PNL24B PNL24B 1 -
D 25 357N1557C 台 Base 1 -
D 26 316S0261 止め具 Stand 3 -
CR 27 113Y1775B/C HTD24A HTD24A 1 -
D 28 350N3157 カバー Cover 1 -
D 29 308N0272 特殊ねじ Screw 4
A 30 137S1178 ヒューズ Fuse 1 AC/DC48V 1A
A 33 137S1350 ヒューズ Fuse 2 AC250V 10A
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5079
SP-28
10B 制御部 2
CONTROLLER 2
制御部 2
CONTROLLER 2 10B
D 1 350Y1767F カバー Cover 1 -
CR 2 845Y0117D パネル部 Panel 1 PNL24A -
D 4 113Y1778B PNL24D PNL24D 1 -
FPCZ1012.AI
D 5 407N0137B 反射板 Reflection Plate 1 -
D 6 113Y1777A PNL24C PNL24C 1 -
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5079
SP-29
11A ソータ 1
SORTER 1
ソータ 1
SORTER 1 11A
D 1 350N3008A カバー Cover 1 {MC:11.1}
D 2 350N3010A カバー Cover 1 {MC:11.1}
D 3 350N3009A カバー Cover 1 {MC:11.1}
D 4 350N3040A カバー Cover 1 {MC:11.1}
FPCZ1111.AI
海外向けのみ
D 5 405N3370 銘板 Label 1 -
For overseas
D 6 362Y0116B 受 Support 3 -
D 7 362N0799A 受 Support 1 -
D 8 364N0118A ガード Guard 1 -
D 10 367N2064A 脚 Foot 1 -
D 11 362Y0117A 受 Support 3 -
D 12 362N0800A 受 Tray 1 -
D 13 364N0119A ガード Guard 1 -
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
SP-30
11B ソータ 2
SORTER 2
ソータ 2
SORTER 2 11B
D 1 387N0165 帯電防止材 Antistatic Material 3 -
D 2 146S0086 ホトインタラプタ Photo Interrupter 3 ST1, ST2, ST3 -
D 4 313N1290D ステー Stay 2 -
FPCZ1112.AI
D 5 313N1296D ステー Stay 1 -
D 6 322FC308E すべり軸受 Plain Bearing 3 -
D 7 319N4242A 軸 Shaft 3 -
D 9 363N2657D ガイド Guide 12 -
D 12 338N0505 リング Ring 3 -
D 14 313N1295C ステー Stay 1 -
D 15 363N2671B ガイド Guide 4 -
D 18 128S0971 マイクロスイッチ Micro-Switch 1 ST4 -
D 19 346N7004B 補助板 Auxiliary Plate 1 -
D 20 363N2672A ガイド Guide 5 -
D 21 405N3280 銘板 Label 1 -
D 23 316S3125 キャッチ Catch 1 -
D 24 350N3011B カバー Cover 1 -
D 25 316S3144 キャッチ Catch 1 -
SOLT1,
D 26 107Y0186A ソレノイド Solenoid 3 -
SOLT2, SOLT3
D 27 341N1163D アーム Arm 2 -
D 28 388N2589A 引張りコイルばね Tension Spring 3 -
D 30 341N1160C アーム Arm 1 -
006-267-03
11.20.2005 FM4703 (1)
SP-31
11C ソータ 3
SORTER 3
ソータ 3
SORTER 3 11C
D 3 327N1123002D 平歯車 Spur Gear 2 -
FPCZ1113.AI
D 5 327N1123202A 歯車 Gear 1 -
D 7 334N3669 ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 3 -
D 8 322N1004 軸受 Bearing 16 -
D 10 334N2404A 樹脂ローラ Resin Roller 10 -
D 11 319N4287A 軸 Shaft 5 -
D 13 334N3641A/B ゴムローラ Rubber Roller 1 -
D 14 347Y0009B 調整板 Adjustment Plate 1 {MC:11.2}
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5079
SP-32
12 装置固定部材
FIXTURES
装置固定部材
FIXTURES 12
E 1 350N3117A/B カバー Cover 1
E 2 356N10066B ブラケット Bracket 1
E 3 347N1929 スペーサ Spacer 2 1mm
FPCZ1211.AI E 5 356N10065B/C ブラケット Bracket 2
E 6 347N2081 調整板 Spacer 4 3.2mm
E 7 356N10246A/C ブラケット Bracket 1
E 9 350N3118A/B カバー Cover 1
D 10 304S1001240 六角ボルト Bolt 10 R12x40
D 11 309S0220012 ばね座金 Washer 10 SW12
D 12 309S0120012 平座金 Washer 10 W12
D 13 305S0061 ナット Nut 8 Anchor nut
006-267-03
11.20.2005 FM4703 (1)
SP-33
13 ケーブル
CABLE
RANK REF. PART NO. PART NAME QTY. REMARKS CONNECTION DIAGRAM
国内一般仕様
E 1 136N0445 ケーブル Cable 1 2/12
For Japan
国内医療仕様
E 2 136N0446A ケーブル Cable 1 2/12
For Japan
欧州仕様
E 3 136N0449 ケーブル Cable 1 For EU 2/12
(230VAC)
英国仕様
E 4 136N0450 ケーブル Cable 1 For UK 2/12
(240VAC)
E 5 136N0451 ケーブル Cable 1 3/12
E 6 136S1248 ケーブル Cable 1 3/12
E 7 136Y8567D ケーブル Cable 1 3/12
E 8 136Y9067C ケーブル Cable 1 6/12
E 9 136Y9069A ケーブル Cable 1 9/12
E 10 136Y9070A ケーブル Cable 1 9/12
E 11 136Y9073A ケーブル Cable 1 9/12
E 12 136Y9075B ケーブル Cable 1 7/12
E 13 136Y9076C ケーブル Cable 1 7/12
E 14 136Y9077 ケーブル Cable 1 10/12
E 15 136Y9078A ケーブル Cable 1 10/12
E 16 136Y9079 ケーブル Cable 1 10/12
E 17 136Y9080A ケーブル Cable 1 10/12
E 18 136Y9081A ケーブル Cable 1 8/12
E 19 136Y9082C ケーブル Cable 1 11/12
E 20 136Y9083B ケーブル Cable 1 8/12
E 21 136Y9084B ケーブル Cable 1 7/12
E 22 136Y9085B ケーブル Cable 1 4/12
E 23 136Y9086A ケーブル Cable 1 8/12
E 24 136Y9087B ケーブル Cable 1 8/12
E 25 136Y9088A ケーブル Cable 1 11/12
E 26 136Y9094B ケーブル Cable 1 2/12
E 27 136Y9095/A ケーブル Cable 1 2/12
E 28 136Y9096B ケーブル Cable 1 11/12
E 29 136Y9097C ケーブル Cable 1 2/12, 5/12, 9/12, 10/12
E 30 136Y9098C ケーブル Cable 1 4/12, 11/12
2/12, 4/12, 5/12, 6/12, 7/12,
E 31 136Y9099C ケーブル Cable 1
8/12
E 32 136Y9100F ケーブル Cable 1 2/12, 3/12, 4/12, 5/12
E 33 136Y9103 ケーブル Cable 1 10/12
米国医療仕様
E 34 136Y9138/A ケーブル Cable 1 For USA 2/12
(100-120VAC)
国内 200V 仕
E 35 136Y9319A ケーブル Cable 1 様 2/12
For Japan
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5079
SP-34
14 回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
��
��
��
�� 1
�� 1 �� . . .
A . 5 �� A
2 �� . . .
. 2
3 �� . .
6
�� 4
.
�� . .
. 3 .
�� 5 �� . . ��
. �� 7 .
�� 6 �� . .
. 4 ��
�� 7
�� 8
.
��
��
.
8
.
�� . .

�� . �� 1 ��
�� 9 �� .
. 7 ��
�� 10 �� 1 �� .
. . 2 ��
�� 11 �� 2 .
B �� . . 8 �� B
12 . ��
L �� L �� . 3 ��
N
.
��
.
N �� 9
.
��
. . .
G �� G �� 4 �� 1
. . . . . .
�� 1 �� 1 �� 10 �� 4 ��
. . . . . .
2 �� 2 5 �� 2
. . . . .
11 �� 5
. . .
6 �� 3 .
�� . . . ��
12 �� 6 �� .
. . .
��
� ��
C �� 1 �� C
.
�� 7 ��
. ��
�� 2 �� 1 ��
. .
�� 8 2 ��
. .
�� 3 3 ��
. .
�� 9 4 ��
. .
�� 4 5 ��
. .
�� 10 6 ��
. .
�� 5
.
�� 11
.
D �� 6 D
.
�� 12 ��
.
��
��
�� 1 �� 1 ��
. .
�� 6 4 ��
. .
�� 2 2 ��
. .
�� 7 5 ��
. .
�� 3 3 ��
. .
�� 8 6 ��
��
. .
E �� 4 E
.
�� 9
. ��
5 ��
. �� 1 ��
�� 10 .
. 5 ��
.
2 ��
�� 6
.
��
.
�� 3 ��
� �� .
�� 1 �� 7 ��
. .
�� 2 4 ��
. .
8 ��
F .
�� F
��
��
� ��
�� 1 �� 1 ��
. .
�� 2 2 ��
. .
�� 3 3 ��
. .
�� 4 4 ��
. .
�� 5
.
�� 6
.
�� 1
G �� 6
. G
.
�� 2
� �� 1 �� 7
.
. .
�� 3 3
. .
�� 2 8
. .
�� 4 4
. .
9
.
5
.
10 機種 5133 ユニット -
.
H 名称回路図補助名称 DRYPIX 4000 H
コード Z22Y0005133 Rev. 2

頁
2
12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
006-267-04
10.02.2006 FM4992
SP-35
14 回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
�� 1 ��

. ��
�� 2 �� 1 ��
�� . .
� 3 2 ��
. .
MCT16A 4 �� 4 �� 3 ��
. �� .
A � 5 �� 4 �� A
�� 6
.
5
.
.
�� .
�� 7 �� 6 ��
. �� .
�� 8 ��
.
�� 9
.
�� 10 ��
.
�� PRN16A 4 � 11 ��
.
�� 12 �� 1 ��
�� . .
�� 13 �� 2
�� . .
�� 14
�� . �� 1 ��
B � 15 �� . B
. 2 ��
�� 16 .
. �� 3 ��
� 17 � �� .
. �� 1 ��
�� 18 .
. �� 2
�� 19 �� .
�� . �� 3 ��
�� 20 .
. �� 4
�� 21 .
�� 22
. ��
.
�� 23
.
�� 24 ��
�� .
C �� 25 �� 1 �� C
. .
�� 26 �� 2
. . �� 1 ��
��
�� 3 .
�� . 2 ��
�� 4 .
�� . 3 ��
�� 5 .
. 4 ��
�� 5
.
��
�� 1 �� 1 .
. .
�� 6 ��
2 �� 2 .
. . �� 7 ��
3 �� 3 1 .
��
. 1 .
. . ��
4 �� 4 2 . . 2
. . ��
D
5 �� 5 3 . . 3 D
. . ��
6 �� 6 4 .
��
�� . 4 ��
. . ��
7 �� 7 5 . . 5
. . ��
8 �� 8 6 .
��
. 6 ��
. . ��
�� 9 7 .
��
. 7
. ��
�� 10 8 . . 8
. ��
�� 1 �� 11 9 .
��
�� . 9 ��
. . ��
2 �� 12 10 . . 10
. . ��
3 �� 13 11 . �� . 11 �� 1 �� 1 ��
. . �� . .
4 �� 14 12 .
��
. 12 2 �� 2
. . �� . .
�� 15 13 . . 13 3 �� 3
E . �� . . E
�� 16 14 .
��
. 14 4 �� 4 ��
. �� . .
17 15 . . 15 5 �� 5
. . .
18 6 �� 6 ��
��
.
. . .
�� 19 �� 7 �� 7
. . .
20 ��
�� 8 �� 8
. �� . .
�� 1 ��
.
� 2 ��
�� 3
.
�� 1 ��
. .
�� 4 �� 2
� �� . .
F �� 5 �� 3 F
. 1 . .
�� 6 �� 4
. 11 . .
�� 7 �� 5
. 2 . .
��
�� 8 ��
. 12 .
�� 9 ��
�� . 3 .
�� 10 ��
��
. 13 .
��
��
. 4 � � � � �
� ��
��
. 14
��
��
. 5 � . . �
��
. 15 � . . �
G
�� G
��
. 6 � . . �
� ��
��
. 16 � . . � � � � � �
��
��
� ��
. 7 ��
��
. 17 �� . . ��
��
�� . 8 �� . . ��
��
��
. 18 �� . . ��
��
��
. 9 �� . . ��
��
��
. 19
� ��
�� . 10 機種 5133 ユニット -
� �� 1 ��
�� . 20 ��
.
H �� 2 名称回路図補助名称 DRYPIX 4000 H
��
.
�� 3
��
.
4 コード Z22Y0005133 Rev. 2
��
.
� �� 頁
3
12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
006-267-04
10.02.2006 FM4992
SP-36
14 回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
��
� ��
�
��
. � ��
�
�� . � ��
��
※３ ��
. �
A
�
. � -
MCT16A 3 �� A
��
��
. ��
��
��
. ��
�
��
. ��
� ��
. ��
��
��
1 ��
�� .
�� 2
� �� .
�� 3
B . B
�� 4
�� .
�� 5
.
�� 6
.
�� 7
.
�� 8
.
9
.
10
. ��
11
.
12
. �� 1 �� 1 ��
�� 13 . .
C . 2 �� 2 C
14 . .
. 3 �� 3
15 . .
. 4 �� 4
16 . .
. 5 �� 5
�� 6
.
��
.
6 ��
. .
7 �� 7 ��
�� 8
.
��
.
8
. .
9 �� 9
�� ※３ 10
.
��
.
10
. .
11 �� 11
. .
D
�� 1 �� 1 �� 12 �� 12 D
. . . .
2 �� 2 13 �� 13
. . . .
3 �� 3 14 �� 14
. . . .
4 �� 4 15 �� 15
. . . .
5 �� 5 16 �� 16
-
PRN16A 3 6 .
��
.
6 17
.
��
.
17
. . . .
7 �� 7 18 �� 18
�� 8
.
��
.
8
. .
. .
9 �� 9
. .
10 �� 10
. .
��
E E
�� ※３ �� 1 �� 1 ��

. .
�� 2 �� 2
�� .. . �� . .
3 �� 3 ��
.
�� . .
4 �� 4
. . ��
�� ※３ �� 1 ��
.
�� 2
.
�� 3 ��
.
�� 4 ��
F �� . F
�� 1 �� 1 �� 1 ��
� . �� . .
�� 2 2 �� 2
. � . . �� 1 �� 1 ��
※３ �� 3 3 �� 3 . .
. �� 1 �� . . 2 �� 2
�� 4 . 4 �� 4 . .
. �� 2 . . 3 �� 3 ��
�� 5 . 5 �� 5 . .
. �� 3 . .
�� 4 �� 4
��
.
6 ��
.
4
6
.
��
.
6
5
.
��
.
5 ��
��
.
5
7
.
��
.
7 �� . .
. 8 �� 8
�� 6 . .
.
�� 7
.
�� 8
G G
.
��
��
11
※３
��
�� 1 �� 1 � �� 1 ��
. . . .
2 �� 2 � �� 2
. . . .
3 �� 3 � �� 3
. . . .
�� 機種 5133 ユニット -
��
コード Z22Y0005133 Rev. 2

頁
4
12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
006-267-04
10.02.2006 FM4992
SP-37
14 回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
�� ※３
��
� �� 1 ��
A . A
�� 4
.
�� 2
.
�� 5
.
�� 3
.
�� 6
.
SND24A
6,7,8,9,10,11,12
�� ※３
B
�� B
��
� �� 1 ��
.
�� 2
.
�� 3
.
�� 4
.
�� 5
.
�� 6
.
�� 7
.
�� 8
.
�� 9 �� ※３
C . �� C
�� 10
. �� 1 �� 1 � ��
�� 11 . . .
. 2 �� 2 � ��
�� 12 . . .
. 3 �� 3 � ��
�� 13 . . .
��
. 4 �� 4 � ��
�� 14 . . .
. 5 �� 5 � ��
�� 15 . . .
. 6 �� 6 � ��
�� 16 . . .
. 7 � ��
�� 17 . .
. 8 � ��
�� 18 . .
.
�� 19
.
D �� 20 D
.
��
��
��
� �� 1 ��
.
�� 2 �� ※３ ��
.
�� 3 �� 1 �� 1 � ��
. . . .
E �� 4 2 �� 2 � �� E
. . . .
�� 5 3 �� 3 � ��
. . . .
�� 6 4 �� 4 � ��
��
. . . .
�� 7 5 �� 5 � ��
. . . .
�� 8 6 �� 6 � ��
��
.
9
. .
7
.
� ��
. . .
�� 10 8 � ��
. . .
�� 11
.
�� 12
.
�� 13
.
F �� 14 F
.
�� ※４
��
� �� 1 ��
.
�� 5
.
�� 2
.
�� 6
G G
.
�� 3
.
�� 7
.
�� 4
.
�� 8
.
機種 5133 ユニット -
コード Z22Y0005133 Rev. 2

頁
5
12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
006-267-04
10.02.2006 FM4992
SP-38
14 回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
��
�� ※３ ��
A �� 1 �� 1 � �� 1 A
2
.
��
.
2
.
� ��
.
2 ��
. . . .
3 �� 3 � �� 3
4
.
��
.
4
.
� ��
. ��
. . .
5 �� 5 � ��
. . .
6 �� 6 � ��
- SND24A 7
.
��
.
7
.
� ��
. . . 1
5,7,8,9,10,11,12 8 .
��
.
8
.
� �� .
2 ��
9 �� 9 � �� .
�� . . . 3
10 �� 10 � �� . ��
. . .
B 11 �� 11 � �� B
. . .
12 �� 12 � ��
. . . ��
13 ��
.
14 �� 1
15
.
��
.
2 ��
. .
16 3
17
. . ��
. ��
18
.
��
1
C
.
1
��
.
2 �� C
2 .
. 3
3 . ��
. ��
D D
��
�� ※３ ��
�� 1 �� 1 � �� 1
2
.
��
.
2
.
� ��
.
2 ��
. . . .
3 �� 3 � �� 3
4
.
��
.
4
.
� ��
. ��
. . .
5 �� 5 � ��
. . .
6 �� 6 � ��
. . .
7 �� 7 � ��
. . . 1
E 8
.
��
.
8
.
� �� .
2 �� E
9 �� 9 � �� .
. . . 3
10
.
�� 10
. .
� �� . ��
11 �� 11 � ��
. . .
12 �� 12 � ��
. . . ��
13 ��
.
14 �� 1
15
.
��
.
2 ��
. .
16 3
17
. . ��
. ��
F 18 F
.
��
1
.
1
��
.
2 ��
2 .
. 3
3 . ��
. ��
G G
コード Z22Y0005133 Rev. 2

頁
6
12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
006-267-04
10.02.2006 FM4992
SP-39
14 回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
�� ※３ ��

�� 1 �� 1 � �� 1
A
2
.
��
.
2
.
� ��
.
2 �� A
. . . .
3 �� 3 � �� 3
4
.
��
.
4
.
� ��
. ��
. . .
5 �� 5 � ��
. . .
6 �� 6 � ��
. . . 1
7 �� .
��
. 2
8 �� .
. 3
SND24A 9 �� . ��
- .
10 ��
5,6,8,9,10,11,12 11 .
��
B . B
�� 12 �� 1 � �� 1
13
.
��
.
2
.
� ��
.
2 ��
. . . .
14 �� 3 � �� 3
15
.
��
.
4
.
� ��
. ��
. . .
16 �� 5 � ��
. . .
17 �� 6 � ��
. . . 1
18 �� 7 � �� .
��
. . . 2
19 �� 8 � �� .
. . . 3
20 �� 9 � �� . ��
. . .
21 �� 10 � ��
C . . . C
22 11 � ��
. �� . .
12 � �� 1
.
13
.
� ��
.
2 ��
. . .
14 � �� 3
.
15
.
� ��
. ��
. .
16
�� . . ��
1
2
3 ��
D
4 D
5 ��
6 ��
E E
�� ※３ ��
�� 1 �� 1 � �� 1 ��
. . . .
2 �� 2 � �� 2
. . . .
3 �� 3 � �� 3 ��
. . . .
4 �� 4 � ��
. . .
5 �� 5 � ��
. . .
6 �� 6 � ��
. . .
7 �� 7 � ��
. . .
8 8
. �� . .
9
F �� .
10
. �� F
. .
1 ��
.
2
.
3 ��
.
4
.
��
G G
コード Z22Y0005133 Rev. 2

頁
7
12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
006-267-04
10.02.2006 FM4992
SP-40
14 回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
�� ※3 ��

�� 1 �� 1 � ��
. . . .
2 �� 2 � ��
��
A . . . . A
3 �� 3 � ��
. . .
4 �� 4 � ��
. . .
5 �� 5 .
6
.
��
.
6
.
�� .
��
. . .
7 ��
-
SND24A 8
.
��
.
5,6,7,9,10,11,12 9 .
��
10 ��
�� 11
.
��
��
12
.
��
1 ��
��
B . � B
13 �� . . .
14
.
�� .
2
.
� ��
.
��
. 3 � ��
15 �� . .
. 4 � ��
16 �� . .
. 5 .
.
6
.
�� .
��
. .
C C
��
1 � ��
. . .
.
2
.
� ��
.
��
��
1 � ��
. . .
.
2
.
� ��
.
��
D D
�� ※3 ��

�� 1 �� 1 � �� 1
2
.
��
.
2
.
� ��
.
2 ��
. . . .
3 �� 3 � �� 3
4
.
��
. . . ��
.
5 ��
.
6 ��
.
7 �� 1 � �� 1
8
.
��
.
2
.
� ��
.
2 ��
E . . . . E
9 �� 3 � �� 3
10
.
��
.
4
.
� ��
. ��
. . .
11 �� 5 � ��
. . .
12 �� 6 � ��
. . . 1
13
.
�� .
2 ��
14 �� .
. 3
15
.
�� . ��
16 ��
.
17 ��
.
18 ��
F . F
19 ��
.
20 1 � �� 1 � �� 1
. �� .
2
.
� ��
.
2
.
� ��
.
2 ��
. . . . .
3 � �� 3 � �� 3
.
4
.
� ��
.
4
.
� ��
. ��
. . . .
5 � �� 5 � ��
. . . .
�� 1 6 � �� 6 � ��
. . .
��
. .
��
1
�� 2
. .
7
.
�
��
.
7
.
�
��
.
2 ��
3 8 � 8 � .
. . .
��
. .
��
3
4
. .
9
.
�
.
9
.
� . ��
G G
10 10
. . �� . . ��
11
�� .
12
. ��
1
. . .
2 ��
.
3
オプション　ソータ . ��
��
コード Z22Y0005133 Rev. 2

頁
8
12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
006-267-04
10.02.2006 FM4992
SP-41
14 回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
�� ※４ ��
�� 1 �� COM NC ��
. . .
A
2 ��
A
.
3 ��
.
4 ��
.
5 �� 3 � ��
. . . .
6 �� 2 � ��
. . . . ��
7 �� 1 � ��
. . . .
8 ��
.
SND24A 9 ��
- . ��
10 ��
5,6,7,8,10,11,12 11 . �� 1 � ��
�� . . . �
. 2 � ��
�� 12 �� . . . �
B . 3 � �� B
13 �� . . ��
. 4 � ��
14 �� . . 1
. . . .
15 �� 2 ��
. �� . . �� .
16 �� 3
. . .
��

�� 1 � ��
. . .
2 � ��
.
.
3
.
.
� ��
.
.
� ��
4 � ��
. . .
C 5 � �� C
. . . ��
6 � ��
. . .
�� ※４
��
�� 1 �� COM NC ��
. . .
2 ��
.
3 ��
.
4 ��
.
5 �� 3 � ��
. . . .
6 �� 2 � ��
. . . . ��
D
7 �� 1 � ��
D
. . . .
8 ��
.
9 ��
��
. ��
10 ��
. �� 1 � ��
11 �� . . . �
. 2 � ��
12 �� . . . �
. 3 � ��
13 �� . . ��
. 4 � ��
14 �� . . 1
. . . .
15 �� 2 ��
. �� . . �� .
16 �� 3
. . .
��
E E
�� 1 � ��
. . .
2 � ��
.
.
3
.
.
� ��
.
.
� ��
4 � ��
. . .
5 � ��
. . . ��
6 � ��
. . .
�� ※４ ��

F �� 1 �� 1 � �� F
. . . .
2 �� 2 � ��
3
.
.
��
.
.
3
.
.
� ��
.
.
� ��
4 �� 4 � ��
. . . .
5 �� 5 � ��
. . . . ��
6 �� 6 � ��
. . . .
7
. .
�� 8 ��
. .
�� ※４ ��

G G
�� 1 �� 1 � ��
. . . .
2 �� 2 � ��
3
.
.
��
.
.
3
.
.
� ��
.
.
� ��
4 �� 4 � ��
. . . .
5 �� 5 � ��
. . . . ��
6 �� 6 � ��
. . . .
7
. .
�� 8 ��
. .
コード Z22Y0005133 Rev. 2

頁
9
12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
006-267-04
10.02.2006 FM4992
SP-42
14 回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
�� ※４ ��
�� 1 �� 1 � ��
. . . .
A 2
.
��
.
2
.
� ��
.
�� A
3 ��
.
4 ��
.
5 ��
.
6 �� 1 � ��
. . . .
7 �� 2 � ��
8
.
.
��
.
.
3
.
.
� ��
.
.
� ��
9 �� 4 � ��
. . . .
SND24A 10 �� 5 � ��
- . . . .
11 �� 6 � ��
B
5,6,7,8,9,11,12 12
.
��
. . .
B
.
�� 13 ��
.
14 ��
. ��
15 ��
. 1 � ��
16 �� . . .
. 2 � ��
17 ��
18
.
��
��
�
� ��
.
.
3
.
.
� ��
.
.
� ��
. 4 � ��
19 �� . . .
. 5 � ��
20 �� . . .
. 6 � ��
21 . . .
.
C 22 �� C
.
�
.
�
.
.
� ��
�
.
� ��
.
�
.
D D
��
�� 1 �� 1 ��
. .
2 �� 2 �� ※４ ��
. .
3 �� 3 �� 1 � �� 1 � �� 1 ��
E . ＮＣ . . . . . E
4 �� 2 � �� 2 � �� 2
5
.
�� 3
.
� ��
.
3
.
� ��
.
3 ��
. . . . .
6 �� 4 � �� 4 � �� 4
7
.
�� 5
.
� ��
.
5
.
� ��
.
5 ��
. 1 �� . . . .
8 �� .
. 2
.
3
.
4
.
5 ��
.
6
F
.
7 �� F
.
8 ��
.
�� 9
.
10
. ��
��
.
G G
コード Z22Y0005133 Rev. 2

頁
10
12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
006-267-04
10.02.2006 FM4992
SP-43
14 回路図
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
��

�� 1 �� 1 � �� COM NC ��
. . . . .
A 2 �� 2 � �� A
. . .
3 ��
. ��
4 �� COM NC ��
. . .
5 ��
-
SND24A 6
.
��
. ��
5,6,7,8,9,10,12 7 ��
. COM NO ��
8 �� . .
�� . ��
9 �� COM NO ��
. . .
10 ��
.
B B
�
.
�
.
.
� ��
�
.
�
. ��
�
.
C C
��
�� 1 �� 1 � �� COM NC ��
. . . . .
2 �� 2 � ��
. . .
��
COM NC ��
. .
��
�� 1 ��
.
2 ��
.
D 3 �� D
.
4 �� 1 � �� 1 赤 ��
. . . . . .
5
.
��
.
2
.
� ��
.
2
.
黒 ��
.
��
6 �� 3 � ��
. . .
7 �� 4 � ��
. . .
8 �� 5 � ��
. . .
9 �� 6 � �� 1 赤 ��
. . . . . .
10 �� 2 黒 ��
. . . .
11 ��
.
12 ��
. ��
E 13 �� E
. 1 赤 ��
14 �� . . .
. 2 黒 ��
. . .
��

�� 1 �� 1 � �� COM NO ��
. . . . .
�� 2 �� 2 � ��
. . .
�� 3 �� 3 � ��
F
�� 4
.
��
.
4
.
� �� F
. . .
5 �� 5 � �� 1 青 ��
. . . . . .
6 �� 6 � �� 2 ��
. . . �� . . �� .
7 �� 7 � �� 3 青 ��
. . . . .
8 �� 8 � ��
. . .
��
�� 1 青 ��
. . .
�� 1 �� 2 ��
. �� . . ��
.
�� 2 �� 3 青
. . .
�� 3
G �� 4
. G
. ��
5 ��
. 1 青
6 �� . . .
. 2 ��
7 �� . . �� .
8
. オプション　ソータ .
3
.
青 ��
. ��
コード Z22Y0005133 Rev. 2

頁
11
12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
006-267-04
10.02.2006 FM4992
SP-44
15 部品番号検索表
PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE
部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番部品番号 INDEX No.- 図番
107Y0184 03A-6 136N0450 13-4 146S0086 09B-23 316S3125 11B-23 322N1041A 08A-30 327N1121616A 11C-4
107Y0185 05A-19 136N0451 13-5 146S0086 11B-2 316S3132 01A-3 322N5133A 08A-4 327N1121617B 09A-15
107Y0186A 11B-26 136S1248 13-6 304S1001225 12-10 316S3133 09B-20 322NF006 08C-8 327N1121617B 11C-1
113S0185B 10A-20 136Y8567D 13-7 304S1001230 02B-14 316S3142 01B-17 322NF006 08D-8 327N1122006 09A-11
113Y1531B 09B-2 136Y9067C 13-8 305S0061 12-13 316S3142 01B-26 322NY156 09A-13 327N1123002D 11C-3
113Y1532B 09B-6 136Y9069A 13-9 305S0134 09A-7 316S3144 11B-25 322SF227 06B-4 327N1123202A 11C-5
113Y1600D/E 10A-15 136Y9070A 13-10 308N0241 06B-18 317N5011B 04B-39 322SP213 05A-36 327N1123807A 09A-9
113Y1601G/H 10A-14 136Y9073A 13-11 308N0244 06B-10 318S1232 10A-8 322SP213 06B-14 327N1124805B 11C-2
113Y1774D/E 10A-1 136Y9075B 13-12 308N0272 10A-29 319N4149B 05A-5 322SP217 04B-9 327Y0016 08A-10
113Y1775B/C 10A-27 136Y9076C 13-13 308S0320 04C-11 319N4172A 03A-13 322SY223 04B-20 328N0061A 04C-10
113Y1776A 10A-24 136Y9077 13-14 308S0511 03B-8 319N4173B 03A-16 322SY223 09B-7 329N0174A 04B-3
113Y1777A 10B-6 136Y9078A 13-15 309S0075 06B-1 319N4186B 03B-7 322SY223 11B-11 329N0175A 04B-4
113Y1778B 10B-4 136Y9079 13-16 309S0120012 12-12 319N4242A 09B-27 323N1264B 06B-7 332N0600 01A-10
113Y1780A 10A-12 136Y9080A 13-17 309S0127 06B-33 319N4242A 11B-7 323N1265A 06B-23 332N0652C 06A-22
114Y5133101A 10A-6 136Y9081A 13-18 309S0131 09A-6 319N4281A 08A-6 324N1036 06B-8 332N0653 06A-21
115N100002 08C-12 136Y9082C 13-19 309S0220012 12-11 319N4287A 09A-17 324N1038 06B-24 332N0654 06A-14
115N100002 08D-12 136Y9083B 13-20 310N0684 08C-10 319N4287A 11C-11 324N1042 06B-15 332N0667C 04C-13
115Y0041A 02B-1 136Y9084B 13-21 310N0684 08D-10 319N4291A 08A-17 324Y1002E 06B-32 332Y0057E 05A-13
115Y0041A 08B-5 136Y9085B 13-22 310N0720 08C-5 319N4389 08B-3 327N0215B 04A-8 334N0072C 05B-9
117Y10019 08C-3.1 136Y9086A 13-23 310N0720 08D-5 319N4403A 08A-27 327N0223A 09A-8 334N0072C 05C-17
117Y10020 08D-3.1 136Y9087B 13-24 310S1028 08A-8 319N4407 09A-4 327N0224D 08A-3 334N0072C 05D-3
117Y10021 08C-3.2 136Y9088A 13-25 313N1267C 05A-22 319Y1172 04A-2 327N0226A 05A-1 334N0072C 09B-11
117Y10022 08D-3.2 136Y9094B 13-26 313N1269C 05C-14 320N0027A 08A-20 327N0227A 05A-26 334N0072C 11B-10
118SX202B 05A-23 136Y9095A 13-27 313N1280E 06A-8 322FC308E 09B-21 327N0228A 05A-28 334N1187B 05A-8
118SX202B 08A-9 136Y9096B 13-28 313N1281 06A-7 322FC308E 11B-6 327N0229A 05B-15 334N1189A 05D-7
118SX208/A 04A-13 136Y9097C 13-29 313N1284B 09B-1 322N0048 05C-3 327N1081801A 08C-6 334N1191 05C-4
118SX209/A 09A-2 136Y9098C 13-30 313N1285E 09B-14 322N1003 04A-5 327N1081801A 08D-6 334N1193 08A-28
118SX210 05B-11 136Y9099C 13-31 313N1286E 09B-22 322N1003 05A-4 327N1081803B 04A-25 334N2396C 04B-6
118YA184A 06B-29 136Y9100F 13-32 313N1288D 05C-15 322N1003 05B-2 327N1081803B 05D-8 334N2397A 03A-14
118YX275 09A-1 136Y9103 13-33 313N1290D 11B-4 322N1003 05D-9 327N1081804A 04A-22 334N2404 09A-18
119Y0062 10A-3 136Y9138/A 13-34 313N1292C 05D-1 322N1003 06B-17 327N1082201A 04A-23 334N2404A 05C-5
119Y2030/A 08B-9 136Y9319A 13-35 313N1295C 11B-14 322N1003 08B-2 327N1082301B 08A-7 334N2404A 11C-10
125Y0066/A 10A-2.1 137S1178 10A-30 313N1296D 11B-5 322N1004 09A-14 327N1082502B 05B-16 334N3558A 08C-4
125Y0067/A 10A-2.2 137S1277 10A-31 313Y0060D 05A-6 322N1004 11C-8 327N1083201B 04A-19 334N3558A 08D-4
128S0971 02A-6 137S1280 10A-32 314N0073B 01B-14 322N1006C 05A-9 327N1083401A 04A-10 334N3626E 05A-12
128S0971 03A-2 137S1350 10A-33 314N0075B 01A-6 322N1020B 04A-6 327N1083801B 04A-12 334N3629 06B-5
128S0971 09B-17 146N0010A 03A-17 314Y0008E 02A-18 322N1023B 04B-8 327N1084201B 05B-14 334N3630E 05B-4
128S0971 11B-18 146N0010A 05A-31 314Y0009D 02A-19 322N1024A 05A-11 327N1085001B 05B-17 334N3633D 04A-18
128Y0317 02A-4 146S0029/A 03A-7 314Y0010B 02A-10 322N1025C 05A-7 327N1101906B 05A-15 334N3634B 04A-3
133Y2034B/C 04B-16 146S0029/A 04B-32 316N0484C 04B-23 322N1026C 05A-3 327N1102020A 04A-14 334N3635B 04A-4
134S0058/A 04B-18 146S0029/A 04C-6 316N0485C 04B-27 322N1029B 11B-16 327N1102101D 05B-5 334N3636C 05D-10
136N0445 13-1 146S0029/A 05A-14 316N0506 01B-6 322N1030B 11B-13 327N1103613A 04A-17 334N3637C 04B-28
136N0446A 13-2 146S0086 05C-18 316S0261 10A-26 322N1035 05D-6 327N1121615A 09A-5 334N3639B 09A-22
136N0449 13-3 146S0086 08A-23 316S3097 01B-18 322N1038B 05A-33 327N1121616A 09A-10 334N3640A 09A-20
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5079
SP-45
334N3640A 11C-12 345N1737 04A-1 350N2940C 01C-3 356N10065B/C 12-5 356N9939B 10B-7 362N0810D 03A-8
334N3641A/B 09A-19 345N1746D 01A-9 350N2941C 01C-7 356N10066B 12-2 356N9940C 10B-3 362N0829 08A-22
334N3641A/B 11C-13 345N1748 10A-5 350N2958B 08C-11 356N10084A 01A-14 356N9945F/G 01C-1 362N0841A 05A-32
334N3642B 09A-23 345N1753B 05D-5 350N2959B 08D-11 356N10085D 01A-13 356N9953C 11B-29 362Y0116B 11A-6
334N3648A 09A-21 345N1754C 01A-20 350N2981 06A-1 356N10131 08A-5 356N9955C 11B-3 362Y0117A 11A-11
334N3648A 11C-6 345N1755C 02A-11 350N2983 06A-6 356N10147 09B-19 356N9956F 09A-12 363N2368A 09B-18
334N3669 11C-7 345N1794 05D-11 350N2986B 01A-16 356N10246A/C 12-7 356N9957C 11B-31 363N2433B 09B-3
334Y0096 08B-1 345N1823A/B 01B-3 350N2987B 01A-19 356N10462A/B 08B-7 356N9976C 01B-16 363N2453B 02A-8
334Y0097F 05C-8 345N1823A/B 01D-11 350N2993D 08B-4 356N10463 08B-8 356N9977B 01B-19 363N2623G 04C-1
334Y0098 03B-15 345N1882 06A-23 350N2999C 05D-12.2 356N10526 08A-29 356N9985C 01B-25 363N2624G 04C-2
334Y0099 05D-17 345Y0341A 01B-2 350N3002C 01C-9 356N10527 08A-26 356N9988A 05C-20 363N2625D 08A-19
334Y3218C/D 06B-2 346N1490C 01B-12 350N3003C 01C-8 356N8945A 09B-5 356N9993 05A-24 363N2626C 08A-25
334Y3220 04B-30 346N1491A 01B-22 350N3004B 01C-6 356N8994B 01C-4 356N9995B 11B-17 363N2628B 05B-8
334Y3221 04B-29 346N7004B 09B-16 350N3005C 01C-11 356N9062A 10A-13 356N9996 06B-20 363N2629C 05B-6
334Y3225 05A-34 346N7004B 11B-19 350N3008A 11A-1 356N9063B 10A-18 356Y0341C 04B-11 363N2633G 05A-10
338N0505 09B-8 347N1928 12-4 350N3009A 11A-3 356N9064A 10A-16 356Y0344D 04B-10 363N2634C 05C-11
338N0505 11B-12 347N1929 12-3 350N3010A 11A-2 356N9066 10A-9 356Y0345 04B-2 363N2635 05C-2
339N0022A 08A-14 347N1930 12-8 350N3011B 11B-24 356N9087 02B-2 356Y0349D 05B-20 363N2636C 05C-13
339N0027 06B-9 347N1946C 04B-13 350N3017C 01C-5 356N9087 08B-6 356Y0360B 04A-9 363N2637B 05C-16
340N0267A 05B-10 347N1988A 02A-5 350N3019B 01D-1 356N9674B 03A-1 356Y0361C 04A-20 363N2638A 05C-12
340Y0044 03B-11 347N2013A 08A-21 350N3040A 11A-4 356N9676C 03A-12 356Y0362 04A-11 363N2639C 05B-1
341N1144C 04A-15 347N2014B 08A-18 350N3105 08A-11 356N9763D 10A-10 356Y0364C 03A-4 363N2647D 09B-4
341N1145E 04A-16 347N2015B 08A-15 350N3106A 08A-12 356N9778B 04C-8 356Y0381B 05A-20 363N2648 02B-16
341N1146C 04B-12 347N2081 12-6 350N3117A/B 12-1 356N9779B 04B-31 356Y0382A 05B-3 363N2649F 03B-4
341N1147B 04B-19 347S0281A 04C-12 350N3118A/B 12-9 356N9783B 04C-5 356Y0383B 05A-27 363N2650E 03B-3
341N1148C 05A-18 347S0329A 10A-7 350N3157 10A-28 356N9799D 05A-30 356Y0384B 09B-13 363N2651C 03B-2
341N1155 06B-25 347S0829 08A-16 350N3158A/B 01B-5 356N9801D 05B-19 356Y0384B 11B-8 363N2654C 03B-6
341N1156C 06B-12 347Y0009B 11C-14 350N3158A/B 01D-2 356N9804B 04B-17 356Y0387 04A-21 363N2657D 09B-12
341N1160C 11B-30 348N1290F 05A-16 350Y100429 08C-2 356N9805B 04B-15 356Y0393 05A-29 363N2657D 11B-9
341N1162D 05C-10 348N1303D 05D-15 350Y100430 08D-2 356N9831B 04A-24 356Y0408A 02A-13 363N2658D 09B-15
341N1163D 11B-27 348N1304D 05D-14 350Y1751 01A-1 356N9832A 08A-1 356Y0456 05B-24 363N2659A 05D-4
341N1164C 05C-7 348Y0171E 05A-25 350Y1757 01B-15 356N9836 06B-3 357N1548C 10A-19 363N2660B 05D-2
341N1175B 05B-18 348Y0192 08C-9 350Y1766 01B-24 356N9837 06B-26 357N1550E 06A-15 363N2661A 05D-18
341Y0350D 04B-5 348Y0193 08C-7 350Y1767F 10B-1 356N9838D 06B-27 357N1557C 10A-25 363N2665C 02A-17
341Y0351 04B-1 348Y0194 08D-9 352N0685D 02B-11 356N9844E 08A-24 359Y0062 03B-5 363N2666A 03B-16
341Y0355 06B-16 348Y0195 08D-7 355N0731E 05A-17 356N9845C 08A-2 360N0509F/G 06B-31 363N2667B 05D-13
342N0150 05C-1 350N2926C/D 01D-9 355N0732F 05B-12 356N9846C 03A-18 360N0526A 02A-3 363N2669C 05D-16
343N0067C 03B-1 350N2927G/H 01D-10 356N10009B 10A-11 356N9847A 03A-15 360N0531B 05B-13 363N2670A 01A-5
343N0075 06B-6 350N2928D/E 01B-1 356N10010B 09B-9 356N9869H/J 02A-9 362N0799A 11A-7 363N2671B 11B-15
343N0088 01D-3 350N2930D/E 01D-12 356N10016 09B-10 356N9886A 09B-24 362N0800A 11A-12 363N2672A 11B-20
345F0606 02A-14 350N2935B 01A-8 356N10039B 05C-9 356N9916C 05C-19 362N0802D 06A-12 363N2675 10A-22
345N1481 01A-15 350N2936C 01A-17 356N10040B 05C-6 356N9929B 10B-8 362N0803 06A-13 363N2676B 11A-9
345N1662A 02A-2 350N2938D 01C-2 356N10049C 11B-22 356N9930B 10B-9 362N0804 06A-11 363N2690D 04C-3
345N1730C 02B-3 350N2939B 01C-10 356N10051 05D-12.1 356N9938C 10A-23 362N0805 06A-10 363N2691C 04C-4
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5079
SP-46
363N2692A 04C-7 382N1738 01B-7 398Y0065 01D-4 852N0025F 02A-1
363N2693A 04C-9 382N1739 01B-10 401N0894D 06B-21 899Y0298 01A-11
363S0012 10A-17 382N1740A 01B-11 401N0895D 06B-22 899Y0299 01A-12
363S0014 10A-21 382N1741 01B-20 401N0911 06B-34
364N0118A 11A-8 382N1742A 01B-21 405N2505/A 02B-18
364N0119A 11A-13 382N1743 01A-21 405N2972 03B-12.1
364N0124 01D-5 382N1754 01D-13 405N2973 03B-12.2
364N0125 01D-6 386N1240D 06A-9 405N2974 03B-12.3
364N0127 03B-9 386N1311 06A-4 405N2975 03B-12.4
364S0005 10A-4 386N1312 06A-16 405N2976 03B-12.5
365N0106A 03A-11 386N1313 06A-17 405N2977 03B-12.6
366N0063B 04B-14 386N1314 06A-19 405N2978 03B-12.7
366N0066A 01A-4 386N1315 06A-18 405N2979 03B-12.8
366S0006 02A-7 386N1316 06A-20 405N2980 01D-7
366S0011 03A-3 386N1318 06A-5 405N3006 03B-12.9
367N2064A 11A-10 386S1089 06B-30 405N3007 03B-12.10
367S1109/A 02A-25 386S1089 09A-3 405N3008 08A-13
367S1109/A 02B-15 387N0165 09B-25 405N3008 09B-26
367S2066 02A-24 387N0165 11B-1 405N3039A 02B-17
369F3710E 02A-12 388N0044A 05B-7 405N3245 06A-2
370N0405 04B-34 388N1233A 04B-22 405N3247 05B-22
370N0406 04B-38 388N1236A 01A-18 405N3248 05B-21
370NB032 04B-33 388N1239A 06B-13 405N3249 05B-23
370NB084 04B-36 388N1242A 05A-38 405N3250 01B-23
371N0123A 04B-25 388N1253 05A-35 405N3279 01B-13
372N0008 04B-35 388N2081 09A-16 405N3280 11B-21
372S0280 04B-37 388N2081 11C-9 405N3299 01C-12
376N0238 01A-7 388N2579B 04A-7 405N3299 02A-15
376N0238 01B-4 388N2581 06B-11 405N3299 06A-3
382N1696 02B-4 388N2583C 03A-5 405N3370 11A-5
382N1697 02B-7 388N2589A 11B-28 405N3433 03B-17
382N1699A 02B-6 388N2591B 05A-37 405N3434 03B-10
382N1700 02B-5 388N2605B 04B-7 405Y0182 03B-12.11
382N1701A 02A-23 388N5393B 03A-10 405Y100014 01A-2
382N1702 02A-22 388N5394B 03B-14 407N0137B 10B-5
382N1703 02B-9 388N5395B 03A-9 603N0253C 03B-13
382N1704 02B-8 388N5396D/E 02A-16 802Y0132 08C-1.1
382N1705 02A-20 388N5401B 05A-21 802Y0133 08D-1.1
382N1706A 02A-21 388Y5009 05A-2 802Y0134 08C-1.2
382N1708 02B-13 390N0041A 04B-26 802Y0135 08D-1.2
382N1709 02B-12 392N0012B 04B-24 812Y0071 06B-28
382N1724 02B-10 392Y0025 04B-21 824Y0117 06B-19
382N1736 01B-9 393N0011 01A-22 839Y0060/A 07-1
382N1737 01B-8 398N0070B/C 01D-8 845Y0117D 10B-2
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5079
SP-47
16. 16 締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表
List of Service Parts for Securing and Wiring
1. Service Parts for Securing and Wiring Reference information
Symbol Parts code
 Screws, stopper rings, washers, nuts, wiring parts, etc. used in a large Shape Parts name Material/treatment, etc.
number are provided as service parts. A2.6x16 Cross recessed Steel
pan head screw Zinc plating/White trivalent
A3x4
with spring washer chromating
 Clearly indicate the part code and quantity required when ordering service A3x6 Color: Light white
parts. Service parts can be ordered in sets of 100.
A3x8
 The table in “5. [Parts Code] to [Symbol] Conversion Table” is provided for A3x15
converting the parts code of delivered service parts to the symbols used A4x8
in the service manual. A4x10
{SP:16_5. [Parts Code] to [Symbol] Conversion Table} A4x40

B2x5 Cross recessed Steel
2. Screws B2.5x5
pan head screw Zinc plating/White trivalent
with spring and chromating
B3x4 plain washers Color: Light white
 Iron screw treatment has been changed from chromate treatment to zinc
plating/white trivalent chromate treatment. B3x6
B3x8
 Chromate treated screws will be no longer provided for new models. B3x10
However, in some models already shipped, chromate treated screws will B3x12
continue to be supplied. Other screw treatments will be as usual.
B3x16
 The following is an example of how screws in the service parts table are B3x18
described. This description method is the same as that in this Service B3x20
Manual. B3x30
B3x35
B4x8
B4x10
B4x30
B4x35
B4x45
006-267-03
11.20.2005 FM4703 (1)
SP-48
16 締結用および配線用のサービス部品一覧表
Reference information Reference information

Symbol Parts code Symbol Parts code
Shape Parts name Material/treatment, etc. Shape Parts name Material/treatment, etc.
BR3x6 308S0401 Cross recessed Steel *N2x4 301S2000204 Cross recessed Stainless steel
hexagon head Zinc plating/White trivalent pan head screw Passive state treatment
BR3x8 308S0402 *N2x10 301S2000210
screw with spring chromating
BR3x10 and plain washers Color: Light white *N3x6 301S2000306
BR3x12 308S0404 *N3x8
BR3x16 308S0405 *N3x10
BR3x32 *N4x10 301S2000410
BR3x35 PK2.5x3 Hexagon socket Steel
BR4x6 set screw with cup Black oxide treatment
PK3x10
point
BR4x8 308S0406 PK4x16
BR4x10 308S0407 PK6x5
BR4x12 308S0408 Ps3x6 306S0151 Hexagon head Steel
BR4x15 tapping screw for Zinc plating/White trivalent
resin chromating
BR4x16 Ps3x8 306S0152 Color: Light white
BR4x20
BR4x25 Q3x10 Hexagon socket Steel
head bolt Black oxide treatment
BR4x30 Steel Q3x12
Chromating Q4x6
BR4x35 308S9420435
BR4x40 308S9420440 Q4x8
BR5x10 308S9420510 Q4x10
BR5x12 308S9420512 Q4x12
BR6x12 308S9420612 Q4x14
DT3x6 306S0101 Hexagon head Steel Q4x30
deltight screw Zinc plating/White trivalent Q6x12
DT3x8
chromating
DT4x8 Color: Light white Q6x25
DT4x12 Q8x20
*S3x5 Cross recessed Stainless steel
flat head screw Passive state treatment
*S3x10
006-267-03
11.20.2005 FM4703 (1)
SP-49

Symbol Parts code Symbol Parts code
Shape Parts name Material/treatment, etc. Shape Parts name Material/treatment, etc.
*T3x4 301S3000304 Cross recessed Stainless steel WP3x3 303S0101 Hexagon socket Steel
truss head screw Passive state treatment head set screw Zinc plating/Phosphate
*T3x6 WP3x4 303S0102
(double -point) treatment
*T3x8 301S3000308 WP3x5 303S0103
*T4x4 301S3000404 WP3x6 303S0104
*T4x5 WP3x8 303S0105
*T4x6 WP3x10 303S0106
*T4x8 WP4x4 303S0107
*T4x10 WP4x5 303S0108
*T4x12 WP4x6 303S0109
*T4x16 301S3000416 WP4x8 303S0110
*T4x25 WP4x10 303S0111
*T4x35 301S3000435 WP4x12 303S0112
TP3x6 308S0414 Cross recessed Steel WP4x16 303S0113
hexagon head TP Zinc plating/White trivalent
TP4x6 308S0416 WP5x5 303S0114
screw chromating
TP4x8 308S0424 Color: Light white WP5x6 303S0115
*V3x6 301S4000306 Bind screw Stainless steel WP5x8 303S0116
Passive state treatment
WP5x10 303S0117
*V3x10
WP6x6 303S0118
WP6x8 303S0119
WP6x10 303S0120
006-267-03
11.20.2005 FM4703 (1)
SP-50
3. Stopper Rings, Washers, Nuts
Reference information
Symbol Parts code
Shape Parts name Material/treatment, etc.
E3 E ring Steel
Zinc plating/White trivalent
E4
chromating
E6 Color: Light white
*E3 315S3050030 Stainless steel
Passive state treatment
*E4 315S3050040
*E6 315S3050060
KL4 K-CL ring Steel
chromating
KL6
Color: Light white
SW3 Spring washer Steel

SW4 chromating
SW12 Color: Light white
W3 Plain washer Steel

W4
chromating
W5 Color: Light white
W12
*W5 309S0120005 SUS304
Na3 Hexagon nut Steel
chromating
Color: Light white
006-267-03
11.20.2005 FM4703 (1)
SP-51
4. Wiring Parts
Symbol Parts code Approx. external Symbol Parts code Approx. external
Shape Parts name Shape Parts name
dimensions (mm), etc. dimensions (mm), etc.
EDS-0607U Cord clamp 14x9x4 (WxHxD) LAMS-05 Cord clamp 9x23x5 (WxHxD)
LWS-3S VO 316S1242 Cord clamp 13x10x29 (WxHxD)

LWS-3S-2W 15x13x2 (WxHxD)
EDS-17L Cord clamp 55x26x5 (WxHxD) VO
LWS-5S-2W 318S1130 15x18x2 (WxHxD)
VO
EDS-25L 316S2028 75x32x5 (WxHxD)
LWS-8S- 318S1195 15x25x3 (WxHxD)
2.5W VO
EDS-2 Cord clamp 20x10x5 (WxHxD) PCB-3S 316S0268 Cord clamp 15x13x7 (WxHxD)
FGC-8 Cord clamp 10x10x25 (WxHxD) SB-2718 318S1032 Cord clamp 35x26x6 (WxHxD)
SB-4025 316S0029 48x33x6 (WxHxD)
KFCS-3002 316S1244 Cable clamp 53x10x15 (WxHxD)

SNP-1-HSO Hose clamp 12x12x4 (WxHxD)
KGES-4 Cord clamp 11x20x10 (WxHxD)

T18R 316S1001 Cable tie 100x2.5 (LxW)
T30R 316S1002 152x3.5 (LxW)
T50R 316S1003 202x4.7 (LxW)
006-267-03
11.20.2005 FM4703 (1)
SP-52
5. [Parts Code] to [Symbol] Conversion Table
Use this table for converting the parts code of delivered service parts to the symbols
used in this Service Manual.
 Screws
Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol
301S2000204 *N2x4 303S0105 WP3x8 Q4x14 A3x6 308S9420440 BR4x40
*N3x8 303S0108 WP4x5 Q6x25 A4x8 308S9420612 BR6x12
*N3x10 303S0109 WP4x6 Q8x20 A4x10 BR3x32
301S2000410 *N4x10 303S0110 WP4x8 306S0101 DT3x6 A4x40 BR3x35
301S3000304 *T3x4 303S0111 WP4x10 DT3x8 A2.6x16 BR4x6
*T3x6 303S0112 WP4x12 DT4x8 B2x5 BR4x15
301S3000308 *T3x8 303S0113 WP4x16 DT4x12 B3x4
301S3000404 *T4x4 303S0114 WP5x5 306S0151 Ps3x6 B3x6
*T4x5 303S0115 WP5x6 306S0152 Ps3x8 B3x8
*T4x6 303S0116 WP5x8 308S0401 BR3x6 B3x10
*T4x8 303S0117 WP5x10 308S0402 BR3X8 B3x12
*T4x10 303S0118 WP6x6 BR3x10 B3x16
*T4x12 303S0119 WP6x8 308S0404 BR3x12 B3x18
301S3000416 *T4x16 303S0120 WP6x10 308S0405 BR3x16 B3x20
*T4x25 PK3x10 308S0406 BR4x8 B3x30
301S3000435 *T4x35 PK4x16 308S0407 BR4x10 B3x35
301S4000306 *V3x6 PK6x5 308S0408 BR4x12 B4x8
*V3x10 PK2.5x3 BR4x16 B4x10
*S3x5 Q3x10 BR4x20 B4x30
*S3x10 Q3x12 BR4x25 B4x35
303S0101 WP3x3 Q4x6 308S0414 TP3x6 B4x45
303S0102 WP3x4 Q4x8 308S0416 TP4x6 B2.5x5
303S0103 WP3x5 Q4x10 308S0424 TP4x8 BR4x30
303S0104 WP3x6 Q4x12 A3x4 308S9420435 BR4x35
006-267-03
11.20.2005 FM4703 (1)
SP-53
 Stopper Rings, Washers, Nuts  Wiring Parts

Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol Parts code Symbol
Na3 SW3 315S3050040 *E4 316S0029 SB-4025 FGC-8 EDS-17L
309S0120005 *W5 SW4 315S3050060 *E6 KGES-4 316S1242 LWS-3S VO 318S1130 LWS-5S-2W VO
W3 SW12 E3 316S0268 PCB-3S 316S1244 KFCS-3002 LAMS-05
W4 KL4 E4 316S1001 T18R EDS-0607U LWS-3S-2W VO
W5 KL6 E6 316S1002 T30R 316S2028 EDS-25L 318S1195 LWS-8S-2.5W
VO
W12 315S3050030 *E3
316S1003 T50R SNP-1-HSO
EDS-2 318S1032 SB-2718
006-267-03
11.20.2005 FM4703 (1)
CONTROL SHEET

04.25.2005 02 Revised (FM4589) 1-7, 12, 14-31
02.28.2006 03 Revised (FM4704) 7, 17, 17.1, 17.2, 28
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

02.28.2006 FM4704
PM-1
1. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE Refer
to
Maintenance Work Intervals
Work time
(Min.)
Remarks
ITEMS 3.7 Cleaning/Replacing Filters

• Lower front inside cover filter
1Y 5 Replace if dirty
Vacuum cleaner
• Louver Vacuum cleaner
<INSTRUCTIONS>
Reinstalling filters –
Safety provided by grounding is assured by properly establishing power cable 3.8 Cleaning the Removal Unit, Clean- 1Y 30 Wet cloth, cleaning cloth,
and additional protective ground wire connections and by securing the parts ing Inside the Equipment vacuum cleaner
with retaining screws. To maintain safety, ensure that the parts and retaining
3.9 Checking/Cleaning the Rubber Belt, 3Y 5 Wet cloth, clean with etha-
screws removed for servicing purposes are restored to the original states upon Cleaning Sub-scanning conveyance nol
installation. After the parts and retaining screws are restored to the above- roller
mentioned states, follow the procedures set forth in this service manual to verify 3.10 Cleaning the Density Measurement 1Y 3 Clean with ethanol using
that the retaining screws are securely tightened to properly secure the parts. Section cotton swab
Removing the film cooling section 5 –
3.11 Cleaning the Heat development 1Y 80 –
1.1 List of Preventive Maintenance Items Unit
Refer Work time • Heat plate Clean with ethanol
Maintenance Work Intervals Remarks
to (Min.) • Rubber roller Clean with ethanol
Power ON 15 Power switch • Heat development unit periphery Vacuum cleaner
Starting the M-Utility – Start during initialization Installing the heat development 20 –
3.1 Checking, Saving, and Deleting Er- 1Y 5 M-Utility (Log Files) rack assembly, film cooling section
ror Logs 3.12 Reinstalling/Cleaning Covers 1Y 5 –
3.2 Printing/Checking Conveyance/ 1Y 5 • Reinstalling covers –
Checking Images • Reinstalling the cleaning roller –
• Grid pattern (Output Film) • Cleaning covers Wet cloth
• Check density (F. D. C.) • Cleaning sorter bins Wet cloth
3.3 Checking the Interlock Function 1Y 10 Power ON Power switch
• Upper front cover, Upper right (MD1, Check Scanner) 3.13 Checking the DC Voltage 1Y 5 Tester
cover, Lower right cover
Reinstalling the lower front inside 1 –
• Upper small cover (MJ1) cover
• Film tray (Other Actuators, MB12/ Starting the M-Utility – M-Utility
MB22)
3.14 Final Operation Checks/Checking 1Y 15
• Sorter right cover (MJ1) Images
3.4 Checking the Fan Operations 1Y 1 (Fan operation, Power sup- • Grid pattern (Output Film)
ply fan)
• AUTO F. D. C. (F. D. C.)
Ending the M-Utility – –
• Check Density (F. D. C.)
3.5 Checking the Tray Periphery 1Y 5 –
3.15 Setting Date and Time 1Y 1 (Set Date/time)
• Checking the traylock Check lock state
Power OFF – –
• Checking the traylock mechanism Check for shaking
3.16 Checking for Improper Protective 1Y 5 –
Power OFF – – Grounding
3.6 Cleaning/Replacing the Cleaning 1Y (3Y) 5 Clean with ethanol after 3.17 Work Completion Report – –
Roller, Removing the Cover washing. Replace every
three years.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
DRYPIX 4000 Service Manual PM-1
PM-2
1.2 Symbols on Maintenance Cycle 1.3 Precautions on Periodic Maintenance
In this chapter, the following symbols are indicated for every maintenance item. Before
beginning the respective maintenance work, be sure to confirm the cycle indicated by CAUTION
the symbols. Do not clean the barcode reader filter attached to the film tray using ethanol, as
the filter will be damaged with time if the ethanol penetrates inside.
: Maintenance to be performed every year.
: Maintenance to be performed every three years.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
PM-3
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE FLOW
START A
3.1 Checking, Saving, and Deleting Error Logs 3.12 Reinstalling/Cleaning Covers
3.2 Printing/Checking Conveyance/Checking Images 3.13 Checking the DC Voltage
3.3 Checking the Interlock Function 3.14 Final Operation Checks/Checking Images
3.4 Checking the Fan Operations 3.15 Setting Date and Time
3.5 Checking the Tray Periphery 3.16 Checking for Improper Protective Grounding
3.6 Cleaning/Replacing the Cleaning Roller, Removing the 3.17 Work Completion Report
Cover
END
3.7 Cleaning/Replacing Filters
3.8 Cleaning the Removal Unit, Cleaning Inside the

Equipment
3.9 Checking/Cleaning the Rubber Belt, Cleaning Sub-

scanning Conveyance Roller
3.10 Cleaning the Density Measurement Section
3.11 Cleaning the Heat development Unit
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
PM-4
3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 4. Refer to each error code displayed to confirm if serious errors have
occurred.
3.1 Checking, Saving, and Deleting Error Logs 5. [QUIT]
 Saving Error Logs
Check whether errors have occurred using the M-Utility. If errors have occurred, 1. [System Management] → [Log Files] → [Store Log Files]
correct them appropriately. If necessary, save the error logs in the internal HD of the
equipment, and delete those error logs. 2. [Store]
 Procedure → The corresponding file is saved in the HD.
 Checking Error Logs

3. [QUIT]
<REMARKS>
2. Start the M-Utility during initialization. • Text file of error logs and various settings information
• Communication logs (external input, formatter, formatter to printer, printer
3. [System Management] → [Log Files] → [Display Error Log] ISC)
→ The error log window appears. execution.
<REMARKS>
The following shows an example of the error log display.  Deleting Error Logs
1. [System Management] → [Log Files] → [Clear]
2. [YES]
→ Clears all log data.
3. [TOP]
→ Returns to the M-Utility top menu.
To correct the errors, refer to “TROUBLESHOOTING, 2.3 Error Code Table” for
meanings of error codes, suspected causes, and remedies. To analyze error
codes, refer to detailed information on errors in “TROUBLESHOOTING, 2.2
Format of Detailed Information”.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
PM-5
3.2 Printing/Checking Conveyance/Checking
Images
Print from each film tray using the M-Utility (grid pattern, 17-steps pattern), and check
the recorded image format, density correction function, and there are no unevenness
on the images and scratches. Also check that the mechanism and conveyor system
are operating normally during film conveyance.
 Procedure
 Printing Grid Pattern
Print grid pattern from each film tray, and check the operations of the mechanism
system and conveyor system, recorded image format, and also check for unevenness
and scratches on the images.
1. Check that the equipment is in the standby state.
2. [Output Film] → [Grid] → [TRAY 1] → [ENT]
3. Select Dmax → [ENT]
4. [Copies]: “1” → [ENT]

5. Check the following.

• If there are abnormal sounds and smell from the equipment.
• If film jam has occurred.
• If the format of the recorded image is correct.
• If there are unevenness on the images and scratches.
{Specified Values for Each Film Size (Grid Pattern)}
6. Perform the same procedure when tray 2 is provided.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
PM-6
 Specified Values for Each Film Size (Grid Pattern)
(Unit: mm)
B 27.0±1.0 32.3±1.0 51.1±1.0 50.5±1.0
C 300.0±1.2 300.0±1.2 200.8±1.2 200.0±1.2
D, E 14.5±1.0 27.5±1.0 25.8±1.0 26.0±1.0
| D–E | ≤1.2 ≤1.2 ≤1.2 ≤1.2
F 413.0±1.2 226.5±1.0 225.5±1.0 225.5±1.0
| F–G | ≤1.0 ≤1.0 ≤1.0 ≤1.0
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
PM-7
 17-steps Pattern 6. Touch [QUIT] to return to the top menu of M-Utility.
The data of the 17-steps pattern measured by the density measurement section is
displayed on the operation panel. Check from this data that the density value is within Step Dmax 2.64 Dmax 3.0 Dmax 3.3 Dmax 3.6
the specification.
1 fog fog fog fog
1. [F.D.C.] → [Check Density] → [TRAY 1] → [ENT] 2 Density should be between densities of step 1 and step 3.

4 0.30±0.05 0.30±0.05 0.30±0.05 0.30±0.05
When Dmax setting is set to “4.0 enable” for main unit software 5 0.48±0.05 0.48±0.05 0.48±0.05 0.48±0.05
version V2.0 or later, select [3.6] from [Dmax].
6 0.66±0.05 0.66±0.05 0.66±0.05 0.66±0.05
→ The 17-steps pattern is printed, and the x100 value of the 17-steps data is
displayed on the operation panel. 7 0.84±0.05 0.84±0.05 0.84±0.05 0.84±0.05
8 1.02±0.05 1.02±0.05 1.02±0.05 1.02±0.05
3. Check that the measured values are within the specified values shown
9 1.20±0.05 1.20±0.05 1.20±0.05 1.20±0.05
below.
10 1.38±0.05 1.38±0.05 1.38±0.05 1.38±0.05
When Dmax setting is set to “4.0 enable” for main unit software
11 1.56±0.05 1.56±0.05 1.56±0.05 1.56±0.05
version V2.0 or later, check that the density of the 17th step is 4.0 or
higher using the external densitometer. 12 1.74±0.05 1.74±0.05 1.74±0.05 1.74±0.05
13 1.92±0.05 1.92±0.05 1.92±0.05 1.92±0.05
4. [QUIT]
14 2.10±0.07 2.10±0.07 2.10±0.07 2.10±0.07
5. Perform the same procedure when tray 2 is provided. 15 2.28±0.07 2.40±0.10 2.40±0.10 2.43±0.10
16 2.46±0.07 2.70±0.10 2.70±0.10 2.95±0.10
17 2.64±0.07 3.00±0.10 3.30±0.20 3.60±0.20
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
PM-8
3.3 Checking the Interlock Function 3.3.1 Checking the Upper Front Cover/Upper Right Cover/
Lower Right Cover Interlock
Interlocks are provided at the upper front cover (SK1, SK2), upper right cover (SK3,  Driving System
SK4), lower right cover (SK5), upper small cover (SJ3), upper/lower film loading unit
(SA12, SA22), and sorter right cover (ST4).
Whether the interlock is functioning normally can be checked by opening a cover while
1. [Check Mechanism] → [Motor Operation] → [Motor Operation] → [MD1]
executing the M-Utility. 2. [Action]: [CCW]
3. [Speed]: [Low Speed] → [ENT]

→ The MD1 drives.
4. Open the upper front cover.
Check that the operating sound of the MD1 stops.
5. Close the upper front cover.
Check that the operating sound of the MD1 can be heard.
7. Close the upper right cover.
8. Open the lower right cover.
9. Close the lower right cover.
10. [Action]: [STOP] → [ENT]

11. Touch [QUIT] to return to the top menu of M-Utility.
006-267-00
02.28.2005 FM4426 (1)
PM-9
 Scanner System 11. Open the lower right cover.
CAUTION 12. [Initial Check]
Do not place anything which reflects light (screwdriver, etc.) in the equipment
when checking interlock functions. The self-diagnosis of the scanner is executed, and the message
“Failed” appears with error code. This allows the interlock function
to be checked if it is normal.
1. [Check Scanner] → [Diagnosis] → [Initial Check]
13. [TOP]
The scanner self-diagnosis is executed, and if it ends normally, the
message “Completed.” will be displayed. (Takes about 30 seconds) 14. Close the lower right cover.
2. [QUIT]
4. [Initial Check]
The self-diagnosis of the scanner is executed, and the message

to be checked if it is normal. (Takes about 15 seconds)
5. [QUIT]
8. [Initial Check]

9. [QUIT]
006-267-00
02.28.2005 FM4426 (1)
PM-10
3.3.2 Checking the Upper Small Cover Interlock 3.3.3 Checking the Film Tray Interlocks
1. [Check Mechanism] → [Motor Operation] → [Motor Operation] → [MJ1] <NOTE>

The procedure for checking the interlock function is the same for both the upper
2. [Action]: [CW] and lower film trays. Check for both trays by replacing [SOLA11] and [MB12]
with [SOLA21] and [MB22] in the procedure shown below.
→ The MJ1 drives. 1. Insert the shutter into the film tray.
4. Open the upper small cover.
2. [Check Mechanism] → [Other Actuators] → [SOLA11]
Check that the operating sound of the MJ1 stops.
3. [Action]: [ON] → [ENT]
5. Close the upper small cover.
4. Pull out the film tray.
Check that the operating sound of the MJ1 can be heard.
5. [Action]: [OFF] → [ENT]
7. [Check Mechanism] → [Motor Operation] → [Motor Operation] →
[MB12]
8. [Action]: [CCW]
Check that no operating sound of the MB12 can be heard.
10. Close the film tray.

Check that operating sound of the MB12 can be heard.

12. Pull out the shutter.
006-267-00
02.28.2005 FM4426 (1)
PM-11
3.3.4 Checking the Sorter Right Cover Interlock
1. [Check Mechanism] → [Motor Operation] → [Motor Operation] → [MJ1]
2. [Action]: [CW]

→ The MJ1 drives.
4. Open the sorter right cover.
5. Close the sorter right cover.
006-267-00
02.28.2005 FM4426 (1)
PM-12
3.4 Checking the Fan Operations 1. [Heat-Developer] → [Temp. Control] → [OFF] → [ENT]
2. [QUIT]
Altogether operations of four fans need to be checked.
3. [Fan Operation]
4. [Group]: [Group A] → [ENT]
5. [Voltage for driving fan]: [24V] → [ENT]
Check the operation and wind direction of the FANG1 and FANG3.
7. [Action]: [intermittent] → [ENT] → [QUIT] → [QUIT]
8. [Group]: [Group B] → [ENT]

Check the operations and wind direction of the FANG2.
11. [Action]: [intermittent] → [ENT] → [QUIT] → [QUIT] → [QUIT]

12. [Temp. Control] → [ON] → [ENT] → [QUIT] → [QUIT]
14. Put a hand over the louver on the rear cover to check for the operation
and wind direction of the power supply fan.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
PM-13
3.5 Checking the Tray Periphery
Check the traylock and traylock mechanism.
 Procedure
2. Check that when the film tray is locked, it cannot be pulled out to the
front.
3. Move the film tray to and fro, and check that it does not shake. At the
same time, check that the film tray interlock function does not function
due to shaking of the film tray when attaching it.
006-267-00
02.28.2005 FM4426 (1)
PM-14
3.6 Cleaning/Replacing the Cleaning Roller, 5. Leave the cleaning roller to dry until the completion of maintenance
work.
Removing the Cover
6. Remove all covers.
Inspect the cleaning roller, wash away dirt with water, and clean with absolute
ethanol.
<NOTE>
Replace the cleaning roller every three years.
 Procedure
1. Remove the cleaning roller.
2. Wash the cleaning roller removed using water or warm water.
3. Wipe the cleaning roller dry with a dry cloth.
4. Clean the cleaning roller with a cloth moistened adequately with

absolute ethanol.
Wiping with absolute ethanol helps vaporize the water remaining on the
cleaning roller.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
PM-15
3.7 Cleaning/Replacing Filters 3. Remove the louver installed to the rear cover and controller unit right
cover, and clean with a vacuum cleaner.
Clean and replace the air filter attached to the lower front inside cover and louver
attached to the rear cover and controller unit right cover.
<NOTE>
Check if the filter is dirty. If dirty, replace the filter.
 Procedure
1. Clean the filter attached to the lower front inside cover using a
vacuum cleaner.
4. Reinstall the louver.
2. Reinstall the air filter.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
PM-16
3.8 Cleaning the Removal Unit, Cleaning Inside 3. If there are two trays, remove the drive conveyance gear assembly.
the Equipment
Clean the suction cup and rubber roller of the removal unit, and clean inside the
equipment.
 Procedure
CAUTION
Do not clean the barcode reader filter attached to the film tray using ethanol, as
the filter will be damaged with time if the ethanol penetrates inside.
 Cleaning the Removal Unit

Clean the removal unit after removing the removal unit/film loading unit.
1. Release the tray lock manually, and remove the film tray.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
PM-17
4. Remove the removal unit/film loading unit. <NOTE>
To disconnect the connectors (faston terminal) of SA12/SA22, press in the
unlocking latch located on the connector (faston terminal) as shown below.
5. Clean the suction cup and removal conveyance rollers (upper/lower)

with a cloth moistened with water.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
PM-17.1
 Cleaning Inside the Equipment
1. Remove the dusts and dirt in the equipment such as frame,

mechanism unit, and inside the controller section, etc. with a cleaning
cloth or vacuum cleaner, etc.
2. Check the inside of the mechanism unit visually, and clean if dirty.
3. Reinstall the removal unit/film loading unit.

<NOTE>
When connecting the connectors (faston terminal) of SA12/SA22, ensure
that they are facing as shown below. Otherwise, the faston terminal will be
hard to disconnect when performing periodic maintenance, etc.
4. Reinstall the film tray to its original position.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
DRYPIX 4000 Service Manual PM-17.1
PM-17.2
BLANK PAGE
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
DRYPIX 4000 Service Manual PM-17.2
PM-18
3.9 Checking/Cleaning the Rubber Belt, 2. Clean the rubber belt with a cloth moistened with water.
Cleaning Sub-scanning Conveyance Roller
Check and clean the rubber belt, and clean the sub-scanning conveyance rollers.
 Procedure
 Checking/Cleaning the Rubber Belt
1. Remove the belt cover of the sub-scanning unit.
3. Clean the rubber belt at the rear side of the sub-scanning unit with a
cloth moistened with water.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
PM-19
 Cleaning the Sub-scanning Unit Conveyance Roller 2. Remove the fixing bracket of heat development rack assembly (lower).
3. Remove the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyance unit fixing bracket.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
PM-20
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
PM-21
5. Draw the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyance unit.
<REMARKS>
and draw it towards the front.
<NOTE>
When moving the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyance unit, hold the
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
PM-22
6. Clean the sub-scanning unit conveyance rollers with a cloth
moistened with ethanol.
7. Return the sub-scanning unit/upper conveyance unit to its original

position.
8. Reinstall the fixing bracket of heat development rack assembly (lower)

and heat development unit entrance guide.
9. Reinstall the belt cover.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
PM-23
3.10 Cleaning the Density Measurement Section 3. Clean the light-receiving surface of the PDD board with a cotton swab
moistened with absolute ethanol.
Clean the density measurement section light-receiving surface.
 Procedure
1. Remove the ejection cover.
2. Remove the film release unit upper guide bracket.
4. Reinstall the film release unit upper guide bracket, and ejection cover.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
PM-24
3.11 Cleaning the Heat Development Unit 3. Clean the heat plate and rubber roller with a cloth moistened with
ethanol.
Clean the heat development unit heat plate and rubber roller.
CAUTION
Because the heat plate inside the heat development rack assembly is very hot,
wait more than 60 minutes after turning OFF the power of the equipment before
cleaning to allow the heat plate to cool down completely.
 Procedure

[MC:8.3_Heat Development Rack Assembly}
2. Remove the adiabatic cover and heater assembly from the heat
development rack assembly.
[MC:8.4_Heat Development Roller}
<NOTE>
Rubber rollers and bearings may drop if the heat development rack
assembly is tilted with the heater assembly removed.
4. Assemble the heat development rack assembly.
<NOTE>
When installing the adiabatic cover, make sure that the cables do not get
caught.
5. Clean the periphery of the heat development unit of this equipment

with a vacuum cleaner.
6. Reinstall the heat development rack assembly to the heat development

unit.
<NOTE>
Make sure that the thermistor cable is not damaged by the screw with
grounding.
7. Reinstall the left inside cover, and heat development unit fan
assembly.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
PM-25
3.12 Reinstalling/Cleaning Covers
Wipe covers with a moist cloth. Inspect the covers for missing screws and gaps with
the equipment.
 Procedure
1. Reinstall all covers.
2. Reinstall the cleaning roller.
3. Wipe the covers with a moistened cloth.
4. If sorter is mounted, clean the sorter bins with a cloth moistened with
water.
5. Check that no cover screws are missing and that there are no spaces
between the cover and equipment.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
PM-26
3.13 Checking the DC Voltage  Specified Voltage Value
Voltage Measuring point (Power supply unit CN12) Specified value
+5VS +5VS – GND +5V±2% (+4.90 to +5.10V)
Using a tester, measure each DC output voltage. If outside the specification, adjust
with the adjusting volume on the power supply unit. +5V +5V – GND +5V±2% (+4.90 to +5.10V)
CAUTION +3.3V +3.3V – GND +3.3V±2% (+3.23 to +3.37V)
Observe the following to prevent electrical hazards. +12V +12V – AGND +12V±2% (+11.76 to +12.24V)
• Use the tester lead to prevent short-circuiting.
-12V -12V – AGND -12V±2% (-11.76 to -12.24V)
• Do not touch the voltage terminal and tester lead.
+12VD +12VD – GND +12V±2% (+11.76 to 12.24+V)
 Procedure +24V +24V – AGND +24V±2% (+23.52 to +24.48V)
1. Remove the lower front cover and lower front inside cover.  Measuring Point/Adjustment Volume
3. Measure the voltage at the voltage measuring points.

If the voltage differs from the specified value, turn the voltage adjusting volume
in front of the power supply unit and adjust.
<REMARKS>
There is an output monitor LED in front of the power supply unit which lights up
even if the output is not the rated voltage to enable visual checking of whether
each DC voltage is output easily.
4. After checking/adjusting the DC voltage, turn OFF the power of the

equipment.
5. Reinstall the lower front inside cover and lower front cover.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
PM-27
3.14 Final Operation Checks/Checking Images  Density Correction
1. [F.D.C.] → [AUTO F.D.C.]→ [TRAY 1] → [ENT]

Perform final operation check after completing preventive maintenance by printing the → The 24-steps pattern is printed, and automatic density correction is performed.
grid pattern and 17-steps pattern, and perform automatic density correction, and re-
check the format of the recorded image, density correction function, and check that 2. [QUIT]
there are no unevenness on the image and scratches. Also check that the mechanism
and conveyor system are operating normally during film conveyance. 3. Perform the same procedure when tray 2 is provided.
{PM:3.2_Printing/Checking Conveyance/Checking Images}
 Procedure
 Printing Grid Pattern
2. Start the M-Utility after the equipment is in the standby state.
3. [Output Film] → [Grid] → [TRAY 1] → [ENT]
5. [Copies]: “1” → [ENT]

6. Check the following.

• If there are abnormal sounds and smell from the equipment.
• If film jam has occurred.
• If the format of the recorded image is correct.
• If there are unevenness on the images and scratches.
{PM:3.2_Printing/Checking Conveyance/Checking Images}
8. [TOP]
→ Returns to the M-Utility top menu.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
PM-28
 17-steps Pattern 6. Touch [QUIT] to return to the top menu of M-Utility.
Print 17-steps patterns from each film tray, and check the density according to tone
type (Dmax.).
1. [F.D.C.] → [Check Density] → [TRAY 1] → [ENT] 1 fog fog fog fog

2
3
Density should be between densities of step 1 and step 3.
Density should be between densities of step 2 and step 4.
version V2.0 or later, select [3.6] from [Dmax].
5 0.48±0.05 0.48±0.05 0.48±0.05 0.48±0.05
→ The 17-steps pattern is printed, and the x100 value of the 17-steps data is
displayed on the operation panel. 6 0.66±0.05 0.66±0.05 0.66±0.05 0.66±0.05
7 0.84±0.05 0.84±0.05 0.84±0.05 0.84±0.05
3. Check that the measured values are within the specified values shown
8 1.02±0.05 1.02±0.05 1.02±0.05 1.02±0.05
below.
9 1.20±0.05 1.20±0.05 1.20±0.05 1.20±0.05
When Dmax setting is set to “4.0 enable” for main unit software
10 1.38±0.05 1.38±0.05 1.38±0.05 1.38±0.05
version V2.0 or later, check that the density of the 17th step is 4.0 or
higher using the external densitometer. 11 1.56±0.05 1.56±0.05 1.56±0.05 1.56±0.05
12 1.74±0.05 1.74±0.05 1.74±0.05 1.74±0.05
4. [QUIT]
13 1.92±0.05 1.92±0.05 1.92±0.05 1.92±0.05
5. Perform the same procedure when tray 2 is provided. 14 2.10±0.07 2.10±0.07 2.10±0.07 2.10±0.07
15 2.28±0.07 2.40±0.10 2.40±0.10 2.43±0.10
16 2.46±0.07 2.70±0.10 2.70±0.10 2.95±0.10
17 2.64±0.07 3.00±0.10 3.30±0.20 3.60±0.20
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
PM-29
3.15 Setting Date and Time
Check the system date and time, and reset the date and time if incorrect.
 Procedure
1. [System Management] → [System Config.] → [Set Date/time]

→ The current system date and time are displayed.
2. If the date and time are wrong, change the date and time, then touch
[TOP].
If the date and time are correct, touch [QUIT] to return to the top menu
of M-Utility.
3. End the M-Utility, and turn OFF the power of the equipment.
4. Clean the touch panel with a cloth moistened with absolute ethanol.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
PM-30
3.16 Checking for Improper Protective
Grounding
1. Check that the power cable and additional protective ground wire
connections are established in the same manner as for installation.
2. Check that the parts and cables removed for servicing purposes are
secured and connected in the same manner as for installation.
3. Check that the removed screws are properly tightened.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
PM-31
3.17 Work Completion Report
After completing preventive maintenance, notify the user that the density tone curve
has changed because density correction was carried out.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
CONTROL SHEET

04.25.2005 02 Revised (FM4589) 3, 4, 6, 10, 13-15, 17-19, 26-28,
32-36, 41, 47, 49, 55-58, 60, 62-64,
DRYPIX 4000 SERVICE MANUAL 02.28.2006 03 Revised (FM4704)

68, 70, 77, 79-87, 95-103
2, 6-8, 11, 18, 19, 25, 31, 33, 35, 36,
38-40, 51-53, 53.1, 53.2, 54, 58, 61,
62, 71, 72, 74-80, 84, 85, 87-89, 91,
92, 94, 95, 97, 99, 100
10.02.2006 04 Revised (Change of corporate name and 12, 81
02.15.2007 05 Revised (Revision for main unit software version 24, 51, 53.1, 53.2, 74-76, 79, 80, 84,
V3.0, DI Tool version V3.0, etc.) (FM5080) 86-89, 91, 92, 94
INSTALLATION (IN)

02.15.2007 FM5080
IN-1
1. INSTALLATION CONDITIONS
1.1 Equipment Dimensions and Weight
 Dimensions  When Sorter is Mounted

600 mm x 585 mm x 1340 mm (W x D x H)
 DRYPIX 4000
600 mm x 585 mm x 1040 mm (W x D x H)
006-267-01
02.28.2005 FM4555
DRYPIX 4000 Service Manual IN-1
IN-2
 Weight 1.2 Means to Move and Secure Equipment
 DRYPIX 4000
 Move
Four wheel caster (omni-directional, with no brake)
 When Sorter is Mounted
 Securing
Adjustable feet : 2 (front)
Fixtures : 1 set (Option)
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
IN-3
1.3 Environmental Requirements  Floor (installation surface) Vibration Requirement
Frequency : 10 to 55 Hz
 Temperature, Relative Humidity and Atmospheric Pressure Amplitude : 0.0075 mm or less
 Floor Levelness
 Operating
10 mm/m (1/100 of inclination) or less all around
Temperature/Relative humidity : 15 ˚C (40 to 70 %RH) to 30 ˚C (15 to 70 %RH)
Atmospheric pressure : 700 to 1060 hPa  Floor Flatness
Heat generation : Approximately 1800 kJ (Printing)
10 mm or less
 Static Magnetic Field

DC 100 Gauss or less
 Non-operating
Temperature : 0 to 45 ˚C (No freezing)
 Transit or Storage
Temperature : -10 to 50 ˚C
 Exhaust Air of Equipment

 Maximum Exhaust Air in Standby State
20 m3/hour
 Maximum Exhaust Air in Printing
23 m3/hour
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
IN-4
1.4 Electrical Requirements 1.5 Other Specifications
 Frequency  Noise
50 - 60 Hz Ready : Approximately 45 dB
Acceptable variation: ±3% Printing : Approximately 50 dB (excluding transient noises)
 Line Voltage  Start-up Time

100 - 120/200 - 240 VAC Approximately 15 minutes (When ambient temperature is 25 ˚C)
Single-phase (2 lines or 3 lines)
 Capacity
1.5 kVA
 Rated Current
100 - 120 VAC : 12 A
200 - 240 VAC : 6 A
 Power Consumption
Maximum 1.5 kW
 Electric Energy
Printing : Approximately 500 Wh
Ready : Approximately 280 Wh
Stand-by : Approximately 200 Wh
Sleep mode : Approximately 120 Wh
Remote standby mode : Approximately 10 Wh
 Maximum Heat Generation

Printing : Approximately 1800 kJ
Ready : Approximately 1000 kJ
 Grounding Resistance
100 Ω or less
 Overload Protection
100 - 120 VAC : 15 A
200 - 240 VAC : 10 A
 Power Cable
3m
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
IN-5
1.6 Equipment Installation Space 1.6.2 Space Required for Maintenance Work
 When Not Fixed with Fixtures

1.6.1 Installation Space
<REMARKS>
 When Not Fixed with Fixtures To rotate the equipment, one side requires more than 1000 mm of space.

 Space for Removing Fixtures
 Maintenance Space after Removing Fixtures

The same space as “ When Not Fixed with Fixtures” is required.
006-267-01
02.28.2005 FM4555
IN-6
2. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FLOW
START A
3. WORK BEFORE INSTALLATION 5.5 Installing Options
3.1 Precautions on Installation 6.1 Installing Additional Film Tray
3.2 Preparing the DI Tool 6.1.1 Checking Components
3.3 Cautions on Electromagnetic Waves 6.1.2 Removing Covers
3.3.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) 6.1.3 Removing the Cushioning Material/Changing Film
Tray Size
4. TEMPORARY INSTALLATION
6.1.4 Installing the Barcode Reader
4.1 Unpacking and Unloading
6.1.5 Changing the Suction Cup Arm (For Setting Film
4.2 Carrying Sizes Other Than 20 x 25 cm)
4.3 Temporary Placement 6.1.6 Installing the Lower Removal Unit/Film Loading Unit
4.4 Checking Components 6.1.7 Installing the Lower Conveyor Unit
5. INSTALLATION 6.1.8 Internal Wirings
5.1 Removing External Packaging of the Equipment Main Body 6.1.9 Installing Covers
5.2 Removing Covers 6.2 Installing Additional Image Memory Board
5.3 Removing Fixtures 6.3 Installing the Sorter
5.4 Changing the Film Size 5.6 Connecting Network Cable
5.4.1 Changing the Film Tray Size 5.7 Connecting the Power Cable
5.4.2 Changing the Installed Position of the Barcode Reader 5.7.1 Checking the Resistance of the Power Cable
5.4.3 Changing the Suction Cup Arm (20 x 25 cm Size)

B
A
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
IN-7
B C
5.8 Reinstalling Covers 8.5 Checking the Interlock Function
7. SETTING OF THE EQUIPMENT 8.5.1 Checking the Upper Front Cover/Upper Right Cover/
7.1 Power ON and Starting the M-Utility
8.5.2 Checking the Upper Small Cover Interlock
7.1.1 Power ON
8.5.3 Checking the Film Tray Interlocks
7.1.2 Starting the M-Utility
7.2 System Settings
8.6 Checking Fan Operations
7.2.1 System Management/System Config.
8.7 Settings for U-Utility
7.2.2 System Management/Set Main Panel
9. INSTALLATION OF MULTIPLE SETS
7.2.3 Heat-Developer/Power Supply Voltage
10. SETTING CLIENTS
7.2.4 System Management/Network
10.1 Connecting the PC for Servicing to the Network
8. CHECKING EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS
10.2 Starting the DI Tool/Connecting DI Tool to
8.1 Checking Automatic Density Correction and Conveyance the Equipment
Operations
10.2.1 Starting the DI Tool
8.2 Checking Density
10.2.2 Connecting DI Tool to the Equipment
8.3 Checking Recording Image Format, and for Image Unevenness
and Scratches 10.3 Importing Individual Data
8.4 Checking Conveyance and Scratches on Film Image When the

Sorter is Connected
C D
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
IN-8
D E
10.4 Settings by Client 12.2 Checking, Saving, and Deleting Error Logs Which Occur at
Installation
10.4.1 Registering Clients
12.2.1 Checking the Error Log
10.4.2 Client Settings
12.2.2 Saving Error Logs
10.4.3 Settings by Client
12.2.3 Deleting Error Logs
10.5 Adding and Registering Printers
12.3 Installing the Equipment
10.6 Sending Data on Setting to the Equipment
12.3.1 Installing the Equipment without Using Fixtures
12.3.2 Installing the Equipment and Securing with Fixtures
10.8 Ending the DI Tool and the Equipment
12.4 Cleaning the Equipment
11. CHECKING NETWORK CONNECTION
11.1 Checking the Start-up of the Equipment

END
11.2 Checking Film Output and Images from Connected Equipment
11.3 Checking the Termination of the Equipment
12. INSTALLING THE EQUIPMENT
12.1 Backing Up Individual Data
12.1.1 Saving Individual Data in the Equipment HD
12.1.2 Saving Individual Data in the PC for Servicing
12.1.3 Saving Individual Data on the FD
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
IN-9
3. WORK BEFORE INSTALLATION  Additional Protective Grounding
Additional protective grounding will be required if installing this equipment in the
patient environment with the connected equipment in a non-medically used room. This
3.1 Precautions on Installation installation work should only be performed by persons certified to handle electrical
facility construction.
The machine installation site must satisfy the “ Installation Site Requirements” below. Definitions of “patient environment”, “medically-used room”, and “non-medically used
Also be sure to complete procedures beforehand for necessary construction work, room” are given below.
electrical utility, and air-conditioning system installation.
Note that UL/TÜV is not effective when used as mobile type because usage of this
 Patient Environment
equipment as mobile type has not been applied for with UL/TÜV-PS. Patient environment is the area for the patient to receive medical procedures (treatment,
tests, diagnosis, monitoring). It is the space measuring 2.5 m in all four directions and
 Installation Site Requirements 2.5 m in height from the area of the patient’s body.
It excludes the space traveled by the patient to reach the medically-used room.
Avoid the following installation sites.
• Places where the temperature drastically changes.  Medically-Used Room
• Places near heat sources such as heaters. Room equipped with protective grounding (medical use outlet or medical use
• Places where water leakage or equipment submersion may occur. grounding terminal) implemented by the medical grounding method. The protective
• Places where the equipment may be exposed to any corrosive gas. grounding inside the medically-used room is equipotential, and the protective
• Dusty places. grounding of this medically-used room is equipotential to that in the other medically-
• Places where the equipment is subject to constant or excessive vibration or shock. used room.
Generally, a portion of the medically-used room is the patient environment.
• Places that are exposed to direct sunlight.
• Places which do not meet the following ventilation conditions:  Non-Medically Used Room
Ventilation conditions: Areas outside the medically-used room are considered the non-medically used room.
The ventilation capacity of this equipment is 23 m3/hour. The room installing this
equipment must therefore have at least equivalent capacity as this equipment or  Network Connection
above. Generally any room allowing general ventilation is appropriate.
As the equipment needs to be connected to the network, prepare network materials
<REMARKS> and parts and complete constructions beforehand.
The approximate ventilation frequency of building rooms is 10 times/hour or above. Prepare the network materials and accessories according to the place of installation
This means that ventilation equivalent to ten times the cubic capacity of the room is as they are not designated parts.
performed every hour.
The ventilation frequency shall be conformed to the ASHRAE (American Society of  Board and Optical Unit Handling Precautions
Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers). Be sure to wear a wristband for grounding when performing maintenance of boards
and optical unit.
Otherwise static electricity in the body may cause damage to electronic parts on the
 Power Supply and Grounding boards and optical unit.
Check that the outlet for connecting the power cable of this equipment is
independently wired from the switch-board. Connect only this equipment to this outlet.
Do not connect other devices.
006-267-01
02.28.2005 FM4555
IN-10
 Embedding Anchor Nuts  Drilling Holes for Embedding Anchor Nuts
To secure the equipment to the floor with fixtures, embed the anchor nuts beforehand. <NOTE>
 Floor Fixutre Position of the Equipment Fixture Bracket (8 Positions) • “ Drilling Holes for Embedding Anchor Nuts” and “ Embedding Anchor
Nuts” below are the examples of when securing with anchor nuts, which are
supplied with the optional fall prevention fixture kit.
• Use a drill that is suitable for floor hole drilling.
<REMARKS>
Drill prepared holes with a drill bit having a diameter of 6 to 8 mm in order to prevent
the resulting anchor holes from being decentered.
 Relation of the Equipment and Fixtures

 Embedding Anchor Nuts
<NOTE>
• Remove the cuttings that are stuck in the holes.
• To protect the anchor nut bolt insertion holes, embed the anchor nuts while
disposable bolts (M12x30 to M12x50) are attached to the anchor nuts.
• Embed the anchor nuts until their upper surface is 0.5 to 1 mm below the floor
surface.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
IN-11
3.2 Preparing the DI Tool
The service tool software DI Tool is required for setting clients (image output device)
connected to the network, sorter settings, and saving equipment data. Prior to
beginning installation, install the DI Tool in the PC for servicing and set the FTP site
directory.
Perform DI Tool work preparations beforehand on the Service Center, etc.
{MU:4.2_Preparations for Using the DI Tool}
<NOTE>
• DI Tool is an integrated service tool software package for Fuji medical dry
imagers containing “DPX7 PC Tool” and “DPX PC Tools”.
For this equipment, “DPX7 PC Tool” contained in DI Tool is used.
• In this manual, the entire service tool software package is referred to as “DI
Tool”, and an individual function used on this equipment is referred to as
“DXP7 PC Tool function” in the descriptions of functions, etc.
• The 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX straight cable is required for connecting the PC
for servicing.
<REMARKS>
equipment via the network, but it is also possible to directly connect the PC for
servicing to this equipment using the 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX crossing cable.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
IN-12
3.3 Cautions on Electromagnetic Waves Guidance and manufacturer's declaration - electromagnetic emissions
The DRYPIX 4000 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The
3.3.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) customer or the user of the DRYPIX 4000 should assure that it is used in such an environment.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for medical Emissions test Compliance Electromagnetic environment - guidance
devices to the IEC60601-1-2 : 2001, Medical Device Directive 93/42/EEC.
RF emissions The DRYPIX 4000 uses RF energy only for its
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful CISPR 11 internal function. Therefore, its RF emissions
interference in a typical medical installation. Group 1
are very low and are not likely to cause any
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not interference in nearby electronic equipment.
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference
to other devices in the vicinity. RF emissions
Class A
CISPR 11
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular The DRYPIX 4000 is suitable for use in all
installation. Harmonic emissions establishments other than domestic and those
Class A
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to other devices, which can be IEC 61000-3-2 directly connected to the public low-voltage
determined by tuning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to power supply network that supplies buildings
Voltage fluctuations/ used for domestic purposes.
correct the interference by one or more of the following measures; flicker emissions Complies
• Reorient or relocate the receiving device. IEC 61000-3-3
• Increase the separation between the equipment.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the
other device(s) are connected.
Consult the manufacturer or field service technician for help.
 Further Information for IEC60601-1-2:2001

• Medical electrical equipment needs special precautions regarding EMC and needs
to be installed and put into service according to the EMC information described as
follows.
• Portable and mobile RF communications equipment can affect medical electrical
equipment.
• The use of accessories, transducers and cables other than those specified, with the
exception of transducers and cables sold by FUJIFILM Corporation as replacement
parts for internal components, may result in increased emissions or decreased
immunity of the DRYPIX 4000.
List of Cables
FUJIFILM
Name General specification
parts code
I/F Cable - TIA/EIA-568 Cat5 or more.
Straight cable of UTP type.
• The DRYPIX 4000 should not be used adjacent to or stacked with other equipment.
If adjacent or stacked use is necessary, the DRYPIX 4000 should be observed to
verify normal operation in the configuration in which it will be used.
006-267-04
10.02.2006 FM4992
IN-13
Guidance and manufacturer's declaration - electromagnetic immunity Guidance and manufacturer's declaration - electromagnetic immunity
The DRYPIX 4000 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The The DRYPIX 4000 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The
customer or the user of the DRYPIX 4000 should assure that it is used in such an environment. customer or the user of the DRYPIX 4000 should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Electromagnetic Immunity IEC 60601 Compliance
Electromagnetic environment - guidance
Immunity test IEC 60601test level Compliance level environment - test test level level
guidance
Conducted RF 3 Vrms 3 Vrms Portable and mobile RF communications
Electrostatic discharge ±6kV contact ±2kV contact Floors should be equipment should be used no closer to any
(ESD) ±4kV contact wood, concrete or ce- IEC 61000-4-6 150kHz - part of the DRYPIX 4000, including cables,
±8kV air ±6kV contact ramic tile. 80MHz than the recommended separation distance
IEC 61000-4-2 If floors are covered calculated from the equation applicable to the
±2kV air with synthetic materi- frequency of the transmitter.
±4kV air al, the relative humid-
±8kV air ity should be at least Recommended separation distance
30%.
Radiated RF 3 V/m 3 Vrms d = 1.2
Electrical fast ±2kV for power supply ±2kV for power supply Mains power quality
transient/burst IEC lines lines should be that of a IEC 61000-4-3 80MHz - d = 1.2 80 MHz - 800 MHz
±1kV for input/output ±1kV for input/output typical commercial or 2.5GHz
61000-4-4 lines lines hospital environment. d = 2.3 800 MHz - 2.5 GHz
Surge IEC 61000-4-5 ±1kV differential mode ±1kV differential mode Mains power quality where P is the maximum output power rat-
should be that of a ing of the transmitter in watts (W) according
±2kV common mode ±2kV common mode typical commercial or to the transmitter manufacturer and d is the
hospital environment. recommended separation distance in metres
(m).
Voltage dips, short < 5 % UT < 5 % UT Mains power quality
interruptions and (>95% dip in UT) (>95% dip in UT) should be that of a
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters,
voltage variations on for 0.5 cycle for 0.5 cycle typical commercial or
as determined by an electromagnetic site
power supply input hospital environment.
survey,a should be less than the compliance
lines 40 % UT 40 % UT If the user of the
level in each frequency range.b
(60% dip in UT) (60% dip in UT) DRYPIX 4000 re-
IEC 61000-4-11 for 5 cycles for 5 cycles quires continued op-
Interference may occur in the vicinity of
eration during power
equipment marked with the following symbol:
70 % UT 70 % UT mains interruptions,
(30% dip inUT) (30% dip in UT) it is recommended
for 25 cycles for 25 cycles that the DRYPIX 4000
be powered from an
< 5 % UT < 5 % UT uninterruptible power
NOTE 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
(>95% dip in UT) (>95% dip in UT) supply or a battery.
NOTE 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is af-
for 5 s for 5 s
fected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.
Power frequency 3 A/m 3 A/m Power frequency mag- a
Field strength from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) tele-
(50/60 Hz) magnetic netic fields should be
phones and land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broad-
field at levels characteristic
cast cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environ-
of a typical location in
ment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If
IEC 61000-4-8 a typical commercial
the measured field strength in the location in which the DRYPIX 4000 is used exceeds the
or hospital environ-
applicable RF compliance, the DRYPIX 4000 should be observed to verify normal operation.
ment.
If abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as reori-
NOTE: UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level. enting or relocating the DRYPIX 4000.
b
Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strength should be less than 3 V/m.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
IN-14
Recommended separation distances between Portable and mobile RF communications
equipment and the DRYPIX 4000
The DRYPIX 4000 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF
disturbances are controlled. The customer or the user of the DRYPIX 4000 can help prevent
electromagnetic interference by maintaining a minimum distance between portable and mobile
RF communications equipment (transmitters) and the DRYPIX 4000 as recommended below,
according to the maximum output power of the communications equipment.
Rated maximum Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter
output power of m
transmitter
W 150 kHz - 80 MHz 80 MHz - 800 MHz 800 MH - 2.5 GHz
d = 1.2 d = 1.2 d = 2.3
0.01 0.12 0.12 0.23
0.1 0.38 0.38 0.73
1 1.2 1.2 2.3
10 3.8 3.8 7.3
100 12 12 23
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separa-
tion distance d in metres (m) can be estimated using the equation applicable to the frequency
of the transmitter, where P is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W)
according to the transmitter manufacturer.
NOTE 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range ap-
plies.
NOTE 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is af-
fected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
IN-15
4. TEMPORARY INSTALLATION 1. Cut the bands, and remove the slope and cardboard box.
2. Remove the separately packaged items and bands for fixing the slope.
4.1 Unpacking and Unloading 3. Cut the bottom part of the protective material covering the equipment
to expose the fixtures.
<REMARKS>
The following space is required for lowering the equipment from the carrier pallet.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
IN-16
4. Remove the four fixtures. 5. Install the slope to the carrier pallet, and secure it with the band for
fixing it.
<NOTE>
Secure the slope firmly so that it does not dislocate from the carrier pallet
when lowering the equipment.
6. Lower the equipment from the carrier pallet.
006-267-01
02.28.2005 FM4555
IN-17
4.2 Carrying 4.3 Temporary Placement
CAUTION 1. Ensure sufficient work space for installation.
• When delivering the equipment by means of its two-wheel casters, raise the {IN:1.6_Equipment Installation Space}
adjustable feet all the way up.
• When carrying the equipment, support it so that it does not turn over. 2. Lower the adjustable foot of the equipment to secure the equipment.
• When moving the equipment over any bumps, move it slowly to avoid shock.
1. Clear the delivery path of the equipment and carry the equipment to
the installation site.
To ensure that the equipment can be carried out safely to the installation
site, move any obstacle out of the way at the delivery entrance, in corridors
and corners. Also make sure that the elevator is made available to move the
equipment.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
IN-18
4.4 Checking Components  Options
In accordance with the PACKING LIST contained in each carton box, check to ensure No. Product Code Parts No. Remarks
that the contents of the installation package comply with the LIST. DPX 4000 TRAY Additional option tray 898Y1094 20 x 25 cm size
The service personnel should always retain the Inspection Data Sheet. #/E tray setting
 Equipment Main Body DPX 4000 SRT Additional option sorter 809Y0052 -
#/E
Name Qty. Remarks DPX BASE FBM Expanded frame buffer memory 113S0185A 256MB (Common
256MB #/E to DRYPIX 7000)
Equipment main body 1
DPX 4000 FLOOR Fall prevention fixture kit 898Y1126 For securing
FIX KIT #/E equipment
 Accessories
 Additional Option Tray
No. Name Qty. Remarks
1 Label 1 or 2 (*1) Label for positioning film pack No. Name Qty. Remarks
2-11 Label 1 or 2 each (*1) Film size label 1 Removal unit/film loading 1
unit
12 Label 3 IEC60825-1:2001/EN60825-1:2002
Class 3B panel label #2 2 BCR assembly 1
13 Cutter 1 or 2 (*1) 3 Lower conveyor unit 1
14 Screw (T4x35) 2 Guide pin for changing film size in tray 4 Guide assembly 4
15 Shaft 2 5 Pinch roller 4
16 Guide 2 6 Gear cover 1
17 FD 2 • Scanner unit data FD 7 Drive conveyance gear 1

• Individual data FD assembly
18 CD-R 1 Main unit software CD-R 8 Spring 4
19-22 Fuse 2 1A/2A/5A/10A 9 Light shield plate 1

each 10 Shutter 1
23 Power cable 1 11 Shield assembly 1
24 Inspection data sheet 1 12 Screw (TP3x6) 8
25 Operation manual 2 13 Screw (BR3x8) 4
26 Guide 1 Guide plate for changing film size in 14 Screw (DT3x6) 11
tray
27 Screw (BR4x8) 2 (35 x 43 cm/26 x 36 cm 2-tray specifi- 15 Label 1 Label for positioning film pack
cations only)
16-25 Label 2 each Film size label
*1: “1 or 2” in the “Qty” column means that the number depends on whether the equipment 26 Cutter 1
is 1-tray model or 2-tray model.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
IN-19
 Additional Option Sorter  Fall Prevention Fixture Kit
No. Name Qty. Remarks No. Name Qty. Remarks
1 Sorter main body 1 1 Cover 1 Front cover & front side securing bracket
2 Cover 1 Sorter front cover 2 Cover 1 Rear cover & reart side securing bracket
3 Cover 1 Sorter rear cover 3 Bracket 2 Side bracket
4 Cover 1 Sorter lower right cover 4 Spacer 12 For rear side t = 2 mm
5 Cover 1 Sorter bin support 5 Spacer 2 For rear side t = 1 mm
6 Bin 3 6 Spacer 12 For front side t = 2 mm
7 Solenoid assembly 1 7 Anchor nut 8 For M12 (L=50)
8 Arm 1 Hexagonal bolt (R12x40) 10 M12x40
9 Spring 1 8 Spring washer (SW12) 10
10 Drive conveyance gear 1 Washer (W12) 10
11 Gear 1 9 Spacer 4 t = 3.2 mm
12 Cable assembly 1
13 Clamp 3
14 Screw (TP3x6) 22
15 Screw (BR4x8) 2
16 Label 1 Sorter caution label
 Expanded Frame Buffer Memory

No. Name Qty. Remarks
1 Expanded memory board 1 256 MB
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
IN-20
5. INSTALLATION 5.2 Removing Covers
1. Remove the rear cover and lower front cover.
5.1 Removing External Packaging of the
Equipment Main Body
1. Remove the tape securing the cover.
006-267-01
02.28.2005 FM4555
IN-21
5.3 Removing Fixtures  Upper Right Cover
 Lower Front Cover 1. Open the upper right cover, and remove the tape and the cushioning
material.
1. Remove the tape.
2. Reinstall the lower front cover.
006-267-01
02.28.2005 FM4555
IN-22
 Upper Front Cover  Lower Right Cover
1. Open the upper front cover, and remove the tape. 1. Open the lower right cover, and remove the tape.
2. Close the upper front cover and upper right cover.

006-267-01
02.28.2005 FM4555
IN-23
 Film Loading Unit 4. Remove the screw, and remove the fixture securing the lower
squeezing roller.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
For 2-tray models, perform the same procedure for the upper and lower trays.
1. Release the tray lock at the back of the equipment with your hand.
<NOTE>
2. Pull out the tray, and remove the tape securing the tray shutter.
Although the removed fixture and screw are not reused, save them for
3. Pull out the shutter towards you and remove. repacking the equipment in the future.
5. Push in the tray into the equipment.
006-267-01
02.28.2005 FM4555
IN-24
5.4 Changing the Film Size 5.4.1 Changing the Film Tray Size
To change the film size set at shipment, the attaching position of the guide plate and 1. Change the installed position of the guide plate and guide pin in the
guide pin in the film tray, as well as the attaching position of the barcode reader need film tray according to the film size used.
to be changed.
To change to the 20 x 25 cm size, the attaching positions of the suction cup arm parts
also need to be changed.
<NOTE>
Even if not changing the film size, paste the label for positioning the film pack
in step 2. of “5.4.1 Changing the Film Tray Size”.
<REMARKS>
At shipment, each film tray is set as follows;
• 1-tray model: Tray 1/35 x 43 cm
• 2-tray model: Tray 1/35 x 43 cm, Tray 2/26 x 36 cm or 20 x 25 cm
2. Set the film pack of the film size used on the film tray, and paste the
label for positioning the film pack (arrow mark) facing the red label
indicating the inserting direction.
<NOTE>
Paste at the back for the 26 x 36 cm film size and on the guide plate for
other sizes.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
IN-25
5.4.2 Changing the Installed Position of the Barcode Reader  Changing Procedure
Change the installed position of the barcode reader (BCR) according to the film size
used. 1. Remove the BCR assembly.
 Installed Position <NOTE>

Arrow marks are imprinted at positions for attaching screws.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
IN-26
2. Change the attaching position of the BCR. 5.4.3 Changing the Suction Cup Arm (20 x 25 cm Size)
To change to the 20 x 25 cm size, refer to the following and change the attaching
positions of suction cup arm parts.
{MC:4.3_Changing Film Size to 20 x 25 cm Size}
3. Reinstall the BCR assembly in the reverse order of removal.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
IN-27
5.5 Installing Options
If installing options, install at this point referring to the following.
{IN:6_INSTALLING OPTIONS}
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
IN-28
5.6 Connecting Network Cable 2. Connect the network cable to the connector at the back of the
equipment.
CAUTION <NOTE>
• Do not connect telephone lines to the network cable connector of this
Use the 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX cable (UTP or STP) for the network cable.
equipment. Only IEC60950/UL1950 specification cables are suitable for
connection to this connector.
• At this time, do not connect to the network device. <REMARKS>
When performing system settings of the equipment, prevent external STP: Shielded type
intrusions which may interfere with network security by rebooting only the UTP: Unshielded type
equipment after completing various settings and then connecting to the
network equipment.
1. Check that the main power switch of the equipment is at OFF position
(O).
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
IN-29
5.7 Connecting the Power Cable 3. Measure the resistance between the terminals of the power plug using
a tester.
5.7.1 Checking the Resistance of the Power Cable
CAUTION
• Use the power cable provided with this equipment.
• Do not connect the power plug to the outlet at this point.
1. Connect the power cable to the equipment.
Terminal L-N L-E N-E

Resistance 500 kΩ or more ∞Ω ∞Ω
4. Set the main power switch of the equipment to OFF position (O).
2. Set the main power switch of the equipment to ON position ( I ).
006-267-01
02.28.2005 FM4555
IN-30
5.8 Reinstalling Covers
1. Open the upper front cover, and upper right cover.
2. Remove the conveyor unit upper right cover.
3. Re-paste three IEC60825-1:2001/EN60825-1:2002 Class 3B Panel Label

#2 according to the language of the installed site.
4. Reinstall all covers removed.
5. Hook the shutter to the hooks of the left cover and rear cover.
006-267-01
02.28.2005 FM4555
IN-31
6. INSTALLING OPTIONS 6.1.2 Removing Covers
The following options are available for this equipment. 1. Remove the lower front cover.
• Film tray {IN:6.1_Installing Additional Film Tray}
• Image memory board {IN:6.2_Adding Image Memory Board} 2. Remove the lower front inside cover.
• Sorter {IN:6.3_Installing the Sorter}
The following describes the installing procedure for each option.
Perform the procedure of the desired option.
6.1 Installing Additional Film Tray

Perform the following procedure to install additional film tray.
The procedure differs according to the film size of the tray.
<REMARKS>
The optional additional film tray is set to the 20 x 25 cm size.
6.1.1 Checking Components
1. In accordance with the PACKING LIST contained in carton box, check

to ensure that the contents of the installation package comply with the
LIST.
{IN:4.4_Checking Components}
2. After removing the Reinforcement Plate, remove the optional

additional removal unit/film loading unit from the packaging boards.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
IN-32
3. Remove the upper film tray, then return the rails back into the 4. Open the upper front cover.
equipment.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
IN-33
6.1.3 Removing the Cushioning Material/Changing Film Tray 2. Install the barcode reader (BCR) to the equipment.
Size
<NOTE>
1. Pull out the shutter and film tray from the optional removal unit/film Arrow marks are imprinted at positions for attaching screws.
loading unit.
2. Remove the cushioning material from the film tray.
3. If changing the film size, set the film tray size.

{IN:5.4.1_Changing the Film Tray Size}
<NOTE>
Even if not changing the film size, paste the label for positioning the film
pack in step 2. of “5.4.1 Changing the Film Tray Size”.
6.1.4 Installing the Barcode Reader
1. To use the additional film tray installed for 35 x 43 cm size, change the
installed position of the barcode reader (BCR).
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
IN-34
6.1.5 Changing the Suction Cup Arm (For Setting Film Sizes
Other Than 20 x 25 cm)
To use the added removal unit/film loading unit for large sizes other than 20 x 25 cm
size, change the attaching position of the suction cup arm parts.

<NOTE>
Remove the screws fixing the suction cup arm while holding the suction
cup arm from below with the hand.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
IN-35
2. Remove the suction cup unit at the rear side. 3. Reattach the straight hose to the position for the large size.
<NOTE>
Be careful not to lose the springs.
<REMARKS>
Remove while pushing down the bearing.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
IN-36
4. Attach the suction cup unit to the position for large size. <INSTRUCTIONS>
When connecting the suction cup unit hose to the solenoid valve side, align
the hose parting line (mold parting line) to the protrusion on the side of the
solenoid valve hose slot. If the lines are not aligned properly, the suction
cup unit will tilt, resulting in suction faults.
As the parting line on the hose is thin and vague, if difficult to see, change
the angle of view.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
IN-37
5. Remove the removal unit conveyance roller (upper) assembly.
6. Reinstall the removal unit conveyance roller (upper) assembly to the

position for large size.
7. Reinstall the suction cup arm.
006-267-01
02.28.2005 FM4555
IN-38
6.1.6 Installing the Lower Removal Unit/Film Loading Unit 6.1.7 Installing the Lower Conveyor Unit
1. Install the lower removal unit/film loading unit. 1. Remove the lower right cover holding belt, and open the lower right
cover.
2. Remove the light shield bracket.

<NOTE>
Although the removed light shield bracket is not reused, the screw is used
again for reinstalling the gear cover in step 3.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
IN-39
3. Install the lower conveyor unit.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
IN-40
4. Install the drive conveyance gear assembly to the upper removal unit/ 6.1.8 Internal Wirings
film loading unit.
1. Connect the connectors to the lower removal unit/film loading unit.
5. Install the lower right cover holding belt, and close the lower right
cover.
<NOTE>
When connecting the connector (faston terminal) of SA22, ensure that they
are facing as shown below. Otherwise, the faston terminal will be hard to
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
IN-41
6.1.9 Installing Covers
1. Install the light shield plate to the film loading unit cover.
2. Install the film loading unit cover.
4. Install the lower front inside cover.
5. Install the lower front cover.
6. Insert trays.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
IN-42
6.2 Installing Additional Image Memory Board
At shipment, one image memory board (256 MB) is provided with the equipment. To
add another one to increase the memory to 512 MB, perform the following procedure.
1. Remove the left cover.
2. Insert the image memory board into the slot of the MTH board.
<NOTE>
• Take note of the attaching direction of the image memory board.
• Insert until the image memory board is secured by the hooks on both
sides of the slot.
3. Reinstall the left cover.
006-267-01
02.28.2005 FM4555
IN-43
6.3 Installing the Sorter 3. Remove the controller unit right cover and upper small cover.
1. In accordance with the PACKING LIST contained in carton box, check 4. Open the upper front cover, and remove the upper cover.
to ensure that the contents of the installation package comply with the
LIST.
{IN:4.4_Checking Components}
2. Open the protective material covering the sorter unit, and remove the
sorter unit from the packaging boards.
<NOTE>
• The screws, nuts, spring washers, and washers securing the sorter unit
are not reused, so make sure they do not get mixed with the screws
provided with the sorter unit.
• At this point, do not remove the other fixtures (tape, etc.) securing the
sorter unit.
006-267-01
02.28.2005 FM4555
IN-44
5. Open the upper right cover, and remove the following covers. 6. Close the upper right cover and upper front cover.
<NOTE> 7. Connect the cable ( ) provided with the sorter unit.
Remove covers in the order of (1) to (5).

006-267-01
02.28.2005 FM4555
IN-45
8. Remove the turn guide fixing plate at the back of the film release unit. 9. Install the three clamps ( ) provided to the front of the film release
unit.
<NOTE>
Although the removed fixing plate and screw are not reused, save them for
the future removal of the sorter.
10. Install the arm ( ) and solenoid assembly ( ).
006-267-01
02.28.2005 FM4555
IN-46
11. Install the sorter unit ( ) to the equipment. 13. Connect the two connectors at the front of the film release unit.
<NOTE> 14. Install the spring ( ) to the solenoid.
Make sure that cables do not get caught.
12. Remove the fixtures from the sorter.
006-267-01
02.28.2005 FM4555
IN-47
15. Connect the connector at the back of the film release unit. 16. Install the gear ( ), and temporarily secure the drive conveyance gear
( ).
<NOTE>
The front and back sides of the gear differ, but the gear can be installed at
whichever side.
17. Rotate the gear of the film release unit shown in the figure in the arrow
direction with your hand, and secure the drive conveyance gear at the
position where the flange touches the gear.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
IN-48
18. Install the sorter bin support ( ). 19. Open the upper front cover and upper right cover, and install the
following covers.
<NOTE>
Install covers in the order of (1) to (6).

• (5) Upper cover
20. Close the upper right cover and upper front cover.
006-267-01
02.28.2005 FM4555
IN-49
21. Install the sorter lower right cover ( ). 22. Open the sorter right cover, and install the following covers.
• Sorter rear cover ( )
• Sorter front cover ( )
• Film release unit upper cover (removed in step 5)
Affix the sorter caution label on the film release unit upper cover.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
IN-50
24. Install the extension bin to the bin ( ). 26. Disconnect the short connector connected at shipment from CN23 on
the SND board, and connect the connector of the cable wired inside
<NOTE> the equipment for the sorter into CN23.
Install according to the film size ejected.
<REMARKS>
• For large size: 35 x 43 cm size
• For small size: 26 x 36 cm/25 x 30 cm/20 x 25 cm size The short connector is a dummy connected to prevent errors from occurring in
the sorter right cover interlock when no sorter option.
25. Install the bin ( ).

<NOTE>
• Install from the lower bin (bin 2).
• As the attached and secured part of the bin will move slightly up and
down, attach slightly downwards.
• After attaching, check that each bin is not touching the ejection roller.
27. Install the controller unit right cover.

CAUTION
To move the equipment after installing the sorter, push the corners of the body
and not the sorter.
<REMARKS>
After completing installation of the sorter, there should be two spare TP3x6 screws
remaining.
006-267-01
02.28.2005 FM4555
IN-51
7. SETTING OF THE EQUIPMENT 7.1.2 Starting the M-Utility
When installing the equipment, the date and system parameters need to be set.
Use the M-Utility to set these.
7.1 Power ON and Starting the M-Utility  Starting the M-Utility During Initialization
7.1.1 Power ON 1. After turning ON the power of the equipment, the startup screen will
be displayed for about 1 minute and 30 seconds, after which the
Start the equipment and start the M-Utility.
software version number will be displayed for about 15 seconds.
1. Connect the power plug to the outlet.
Start-up the M-Utility while this software version number is displayed.
2. Set the main power switch on the equipment to ON position ( I ). <NOTE>
→ The power lamp on the operation panel lights up. The equipment will not have Touching the touch panel after the software version number disappears is
started up at this point. invalid. If the M-Utility cannot be started during initialization, wait until the
<NOTE> equipment has completed starting up or restart the equipment.
Normally, leave the main power switch at ON.
3. Press the power ON switch on the operation panel.

→ The startup screen appears on the touch panel.
<REMARKS>
The power ON switch of this equipment is a software switch whose ON/OFF state
cannot be distinguished from the outside.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
IN-52
7.2 System Settings  Set Tray
Using the M-Utility, perform the following system settings of the equipment. Skip items Set the film used for each film tray.
which can be left at their default values when operating the equipment. 1. [Set Parameters] → [Set Tray]
7.2.1 System Management/System Config. 2. Touch [TRAY1].
 Set Date/time Select the film size and film base color used in film tray 1.
Set the system date and time. • Film size
• [14x17 (35x43 cm)]
1. [System Management] → [System Config.] → [Set Date/time] • [14x14 (35x35 cm)]
→ The current system date and time are displayed. • [10x14 (26x26 cm)]
• [10x12 (25x30 cm)]
2. If the system date and time are correct, touch [QUIT]. To change the • [8x10 (20x25 cm)]
system date and time, enter the desired values using the numerical • [Disable]
keys.
• Film base color
<IMPLEMENTATION OF CHANGES> • [Clear base /HL]
The changes made will be effective from the time they were made. • [Blue base /HL]
• [Blue base /ML]
<NOTE>
• Do not select [14x14 (35x35 cm)].
• [Blue base /ML] is available from main unit software version V2.0 or later.
• Set the [Set ML Dmax] when the [Blue base /ML] is selected.
3. [ENT] → [QUIT]
4. Perform the same procedure when film tray 2 is provided.
5. Touch [QUIT] continuously to return to the [Set Parameters] menu.

006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
IN-53
 Set ML Dmax  Sorter Setting
When [Blue base /ML] is selected for the film base color of any tray, select of whether Set whether to use the sorter or not.
to print based on the tone type (Dmax) of the incoming image. <DEFAULT>
<NOTE>
[Without Sorter]
1. [Sorter Setting] → [Sorter Connection]
<DEFAULT>
2. Select whether the sorter is used or not.
[3.6], [Reject] • [With Sorter] : Sorter is used
• [Without Sorter] : Sorter is not used
1. [Set ML Dmax]
3. [ENT]
2. Select the maximum density value for printing on DI-ML film when a
request for printing with Dmax 3.6 or above.
• [3.6] : Prints in Dmax3.6 <IMPLEMENTATION OF CHANGES>
• [4.0] : Prints in Dmax4.0
3. If the DI-HL film is empty, select whether or not to use DI-ML film when
a request for printing with Dmax below 3.6.
• [Accept] : Uses DI-ML film
• [Reject] : Uses DI-HL film
In absence of DI-HL film, “Film Empty” is detected.
4. [ENT]

006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
IN-53.1
 Option 4. Set whether to enable selection of the test print of “User Settable” at
Set software options as desired. [TEST PATTERN] of the U-Utility.
• User Settable
CAUTION
• [Disable]
[Mobile] in the [Option] setting menu is intended for use in Japan only. Do not • [Enable]
change the default value [Stationary].
If changed, “02D2” error occurs, and the equipment will not start. <NOTE>
For the equipment shipped with the main unit software version V3.0 or
<DEFAULT> later, the grid pattern for Mammo QC is set as the default image of User
• Automated F.D.C. :
[By each film lot No.] Settable pattern. For the equipment with earlier version, the SMPTE pattern
is set. To output any User Settable image, save User Settable images in the
• 17-Steps Pattern :
[Disable] equipment beforehand.
• User Settable :
[Disable] {MU:5.4_Setting Output of User Settable Images}
• Save DICOM Image :
[Disable]
• Operation After Film Loading :
[Enable]
• QC :
[Enable] 5. Using [TEST-PATTERN] of the U-Utility, set whether to import User
• Film Information :
[Upper Left]
Settable image data.
• Warning at system start :
[Enable] (For main unit software version V1.1 or • Save DICOM Image
later) • [Disable]
• Recognize position on 8x10 (20x25) • [Enable]
: [Disable] (For main unit software version V1.1 or <REMARKS>
later)
• Spatial Resolution : [Disable] (For main unit software version V2.0 or • The data of the first frame of the first DICOM-printed image after setting
later) to [Enable] is input as User Settable image. After input, this setting will
automatically be set to [Disable].
• [Mammo.QC] : [Disable] (For main unit software version V3.0 or
later) • It is also possible to use the DPX7 PC Tool function [Data Transfer-User
Settable] menu to input User Settable images.
1. [Option]
2. Select the timing for executing automatic density correction. 6. [NEXT]

• Automated F.D.C.
• [By each film lot No.]
7. If a film pack different from the base color set is set, set whether to
enable resetting of the film.
• [By each film pack.]
• Operation After Film Loading
• [None]
• [Disable] : Displays the warning window and using this film.
3. Set whether to enable selection of the 17-steps pattern at [TEST • [Enable] : Displays the warning window and enables resetting.
PATTERN] of the U-Utility.
• 17-Steps Pattern
• [Disable]
• [Enable]
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
DRYPIX 4000 Service Manual IN-53.1
IN-53.2
8. Set the enable/disable of the image QC function. 12. Set whether to disable or to enable the left/right recognize function for
• QC 8x10 film size image.
• [Disable] • Recognize position on 8x10 (20x25)
• [Enable] • [Enable]
• [Disable]
<NOTE>
<NOTE>
If set to [Enable], there is a need to register the user ID using DPX7 PC Tool
function. When setting [Enable], RMI (Rotate Mammo Image) mode must separately
{MU:5.1_Registering User ID} be set at “[1-4-5] Set Mammo” of M-Utility for each client sending Mammo
images.
{MU:3.3 [1-4-5]_Set Mammo}
9. Set the position of the information to be printed on the film. Ensure that this setting is made after completing “10. SETTING CLIENTS”
• Film Information because clients to be connected must be registered beforehand.
• [Upper Left]
• [Upper Right] 13. Set whether to enable selection of the spatial resolution pattern at
• [Lower Left] [TEST PATTERN] of the U-Utility.
• [Lower Right] • Spatial Resolution
10. [NEXT] • [Disable]
• [Enable]
11. Set whether to warn the user of any shutter present during startup 14. Set whether to enable the Mammo QC function of U-Utility. Also set
prompting to pull it out, or to continue to boot the equipment disabling
the tray in question without warning. the value (NEMA/EUREF) when enabled.
• Mammo.QC
For the equipment with main unit software version V3.0 or later, • [Disable] : Disable
the equipment can be started without disabling use of the film tray • [NEMA] : For U.S.A. (National Electrical Manufacturers Association)
because the shutter presence check can be skipped.
• [EUREF] : For EU (European Reference Frame)
• Warning at system start
• [Disable] : Starts the equipment without warning disabling the tray in 15. [ENT]
question.
• [Enable] : Displays the warning window prompting the user to pull out the 16. Touch [QUIT] continuously to return to the [System Management]
shutter. menu.
• [Ignore] : Ignore the shutter
<NOTE>
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
DRYPIX 4000 Service Manual IN-53.2
IN-54
7.2.2 System Management/Set Main Panel
 Size Information
Set the type of film size displayed on the operation panel.
<DEFAULT>
[inch]
1. [Set Main Panel] → [Size Information]
2. Select the type to be displayed.

• [inch] : Film type will be displayed in inches.
• [cm] : Film type will be displayed in cm.
• [Japanese] : Film type will be displayed in Japanese.
3. [ENT] → [QUIT]
→ Returns to the [Set Main Panel] menu.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
IN-55
 Set Alarm  Date Format
Set the alarm type. Set the format of the date displayed on the operation panel.
<DEFAULT> <REMARKS>
Alarm: [ON], Volume: [HIGH] This setting applies to all screens displaying date and not to the PC for servicing and
file date.
1. [Set Alarm]
<DEFAULT>
2. Select the alarm type and volume. [yyyy/MM/dd]
• Alarm:
• [ON] : Alarm is sounded. 1. [Date Format]
• [PULSE] : Alarm sounds for about 3 seconds and then stops.
• [OFF] : No alarm is sounded. 2. Select the date display type.
• Volume: • [yyyy/MM/dd]
• [HIGH] : Loud • [MM/dd/yyyy]
• [MEDIUM] : Medium • [dd/MM/yyyy]
• [LOW] : Low
3. [ENT] → [QUIT]
3. [ENT] → [QUIT] → Return to the [Set Main Panel] menu.
→ Returns to the [Set Main Panel] menu. <IMPLEMENTATION OF CHANGES>
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
IN-56
 Select Language 7.2.3 Heat-Developer/Power Supply Voltage
Set the language of the operation panel. Set the power voltage of the heat development heater.
<DEFAULT> <DEFAULT>
[English] • 100 - 120V models : 100V
• 200 - 240V models : 200V
1. [Select Language]
1. [Heat-Developer] → [Power Supply Voltage]
2. Select the language.
• Japanese • English 2. Select the input power voltage.
• German • French • [100V] • [110V] • [120V]
• Italian • Swedish • [200V] • [220V] • [230V] • [240V]
• Spanish • Danish <NOTE>
• Norwegian • Portuguese
• Greek • Finnish • As 100V models are equipped with a different heater from 200V models,
even if 200V/220V/230V/240V is set, there are not risks of overheating of
• Dutch • Chinese (Simplified) the heater.
• Chinese (Traditional) • Korean • If the wrong voltage is set, the equipment may set into the Ready state
3. [ENT] → [TOP]
earlier or later than expected, resulting in change in recording density for
the first few films immediately after Ready.
→ Returns to the top menu of the M-Utility.
<IMPLEMENTATION OF CHANGES> <REMARKS>
The changes made will be effective after the equipment is rebooted. This equipment performs heat development control by changing the pulse width
of the heater ON time according to the voltage selected.
3. [ENT]
→ The screen for checking the selected voltage appears.
4. [YES] → [TOP]
→ Return to the top menu of the M-Utility.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
IN-57
7.2.4 System Management/Network  AE-title
CAUTION Set the name of the printer for 10 pix/mm recording used in the DICOM protocol.
<DEFAULT>
• Perform the following network settings without connecting the equipment to
the network. “DRYPIX4000”
Connect after completing settings and rebooting the equipment. If [Set
TCP/IP] menu settings have been performed, the security will be vulnerable
temporarily. 1. [System Management] → [Network] → [Set DICOM]
• If changing the [Set TCP/IP] menu settings (IP address, subnet mask, gateway
address) and enabling those changes, be sure to touch [ENT] on the [Set
2. [AE-title]
TCP/IP] menu screen to end.
Touching [ENT] displays the [Updating network settings.] screen, after which
the equipment reboots automatically. As a result, changes of the [Set TCP/IP] <REMARKS>
menu are reflected in the equipment correctly.
• Select the type of characters to change the screen.
• After changing the setting items of the [Set TCP/IP] menu, if [QUIT] is touched
to end, and the equipment is rebooted by power OFF/ON or from the reset • If the number of digits entered does not add up to 16, spaces are set for the
menu of the equipment, menu changes will not be reflected in the equipment remaining number of digits.
correctly. • Characters which can be entered for the AE Title are symbols from 20h to 7Eh
In this case, the IP address will return to the default value set at shipment in the 1-byte code table.
temporarily after the equipment is rebooted, and depending on the network • The following are not accepted.
environment of the installed site, IP address duplicate error may occur when • All spaces
the equipment is started up. • Space for the first digit
<INSTRUCTIONS>
4. [ENT]
administrator of the installation site. → Returns to the [Set DICOM] menu.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
IN-58
 Fine PRT AE-title  Port No.
Set the name of the printer for 20 pix/mm recording used in the DICOM protocol. Set the port number used for the network.
<DEFAULT> <DEFAULT>
“DRYPIX4000HIGH” “104”
1. [Fine PRT AE-title] 1. [Port No.]
2. Enter the AE Title (fixed at 16 digits). 2. Enter the port number (decimal/5 digits).
<REMARKS> <NOTE>
• Select the type of characters to change the screen. Do not set the following port numbers as they are reserved.
• If the number of digits entered does not add up to 16, spaces are set for the • 23 : Telnet port
remaining number of digits. • 135, 445, 5000 : OS port
• Characters which can be entered for the AE Title are symbols from 20h to 7Eh • 20051, 20052 : DI Tool port
in the 1-byte code table.
• The following are not accepted. <REMARKS>
• All spaces
Input range: 0 to 65535
• Space for the first digit
3. [ENT]
3. [ENT]
→ Returns to the [Set DICOM] menu.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
IN-59
 Hostname  IP Address
Set the host name used for the network. Set the IP address used for the network.
<DEFAULT> <DEFAULT>
“drypix4000” “172.016.001.060”
1. [Hostname] 1. [Set TCP/IP] → [IP Address]
2. Enter the host name (maximum 16 digits). 2. Enter the IP address (decimal).
<REMARKS> <REMARKS>
• Select the type of characters to change the screen. • Input range: 000 to 255
• Characters which can be entered for the host name include alphabets (upper • Values cannot be entered in the following way.
and lower case), numerals, and hyphen “-”. • “000.000.000.000”
• The following are unaccepted. • “255.255.255.255”
• Space • No value is entered.
• First character is a number
3. [ENT]
→ Returns to the [Set TCP/IP] menu.
3. [ENT]
4. [QUIT]
→ Returns to the [Network] menu.
The settings made at [Set DICOM] menu will be effective after the equipment is
rebooted.
006-267-01
02.28.2005 FM4555
IN-60
 SubnetMask  Gateway
Set the subnet mask used for the network. Set the gateway address used for the network.
<DEFAULT> <DEFAULT>
“255.255.000.000” None
1. [SubnetMask] 1. [Gateway]
2. Enter the subnet mask (decimal). 2. Enter the gateway address (decimal).
<REMARKS> <REMARKS>
• Input range: 000 to 255 • Input range: 000 to 255
• If no value is entered, it will be unaccepted. • Invalid input: “255.255.255.255”
• If no value is entered or “000.000.000.000” is entered, it will be taken as
incomplete setting.
3. [ENT]
3. [ENT]
The settings made at [Set TCP/IP] menu will be effective after the equipment is
rebooted.
4. After checking all settings, touch [ENT] on the [Set TCP/IP] menu
screen.
→ The [Updating network settings.] screen appears, and the equipment reboots
automatically.
<REMARKS>
After this rebooting, the various new system settings will be effective.
5. After rebooting the equipment, connect the network cable of the

equipment to the network.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
IN-61
8. CHECKING EQUIPMENT
OPERATIONS
8.1 Checking Automatic Density Correction

and Conveyance Operations
Output the 24-steps pattern for each tray, and perform automatic density correction
for each tray according to the density data measured by the density measurement
section.
At the same time, check that there are no problems in film conveyance from each tray.
1. Check that the equipment is in the standby state, touch [UNLOCK

TRAY] button of the U-Utility, and pull out the film tray.
2. Load film, and push in the film tray.

<REMARKS>
Any film loading failure is detected by BCR and displayed as an error.
3. Start the M-Utility.
4. [F.D.C.] → [AUTO F.D.C.] → [TRAY 1] → [ENT]

→ The 24-steps pattern is printing on film, and automatic density correction is
performed.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
At the same time, check that film conveyance operations are normal.
5. [QUIT]
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
IN-62
8.2 Checking Density 6. Touch [QUIT] to return to the top menu of M-Utility.
The data of the 17-steps pattern measured by the density measurement section is
displayed on the operation panel. Check from this data that the density value is within
the specification. 1 fog fog fog fog
1. [F.D.C.] → [Check Density] → [TRAY 1] → [ENT]. 2 Density should be between densities of step 1 and step 3.
2. Select Dmax → [ENT] 4 0.30±0.05 0.30±0.05 0.30±0.05 0.30±0.05
version V2.0 or later, select [3.6] from [Dmax]. 6 0.66±0.05 0.66±0.05 0.66±0.05 0.66±0.05
→ The 17-steps pattern is printed, and the x100 value of the 17-steps data is 7 0.84±0.05 0.84±0.05 0.84±0.05 0.84±0.05
displayed on the operation panel.
8 1.02±0.05 1.02±0.05 1.02±0.05 1.02±0.05
3. Check that the measured values are within the specified values shown 9 1.20±0.05 1.20±0.05 1.20±0.05 1.20±0.05
below. 10 1.38±0.05 1.38±0.05 1.38±0.05 1.38±0.05
version V2.0 or later, check that the density of the 17th step is 4.0 or 12 1.74±0.05 1.74±0.05 1.74±0.05 1.74±0.05
higher using the external densitometer.
13 1.92±0.05 1.92±0.05 1.92±0.05 1.92±0.05
4. [QUIT] 14 2.10±0.07 2.10±0.07 2.10±0.07 2.10±0.07
15 2.28±0.07 2.40±0.10 2.40±0.10 2.43±0.10
16 2.46±0.07 2.70±0.10 2.70±0.10 2.95±0.10
17 2.64±0.07 3.00±0.10 3.30±0.20 3.60±0.20
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
IN-63
8.3 Checking Recording Image Format, and for 4. Measure the recording image format of the film.
Image Unevenness and Scratches <REMARKS>
Print grid patterns from each tray, and check that the recording image format is If the recording image format is out of the specifications, perform “[4-3-1]
within the specifications shown in the following figure. Also check that there are no Scanning Width”, “[4-3-2] Scanning Position”, and “[5-2-2] Adjusting Subscanner”
unevenness and scratches on the output film. of “SERVICE MODE Volume”.
{MU:3.3 [4-3-1]_Scanning Width}
1. [Output Film] → [Grid] → [TRAY 1] → [ENT] {MU:3.3 [4-3-2]_Scanning Position}
2. Select Dmax → [ENT] {MU:3.3 [5-2-2]_Adjusting Subscanner}
3. [Copies]: “1” → [ENT] 5. Check that there are no problems in the output film image.
6. [QUIT]
(Unit: mm)
B 27.0±1.0 32.3±1.0 51.1±1.0 50.5±1.0
C 300.0±1.2 300.0±1.2 200.8±1.2 200.0±1.2
D, E 14.5±1.0 27.5±1.0 25.8±1.0 26.0±1.0
| D–E | ≤1.2 ≤1.2 ≤1.2 ≤1.2
F 413.0±1.2 226.5±1.0 225.5±1.0 225.5±1.0
| F–G | ≤1.0 ≤1.0 ≤1.0 ≤1.0
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
IN-64
8.4 Checking Conveyance and Scratches on
Film Image When the Sorter is Connected
Output a cleaning film, and check that the film is conveyed normally, and there are no
scratches on the film image.
1. [Output Film] → [Film out to Sorter]
2. [Tray]: Select the maximum film size → [ENT]
3. [Start-Bin #]: “1” → [ENT]
4. [End-Bin #]: “4” → [ENT]
5. [Copies]: “4” → [ENT]

→ Cleaning film is output to each bin.
<NOTE>
Check the following.
• No abnormal noise or smell is produced from the sorter.
• No film has jammed.
• No scratches on the film image.
6. [TOP]
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
IN-65
8.5 Checking the Interlock Function 8.5.1 Checking the Upper Front Cover/Upper Right Cover/
Interlocks are provided at the upper front cover (SK1, SK2), upper right cover (SK3,
SK4), lower right cover (SK5), upper small cover (SJ3), upper/lower film loading unit
(SA12, SA22), and sorter right cover (ST4).  Driving System
Whether the interlock is functioning normally can be checked by opening a cover while
executing the M-Utility. 1. [Check Mechanism] → [Motor Operation] → [Motor Operation] → [MD1]
2. [Action]: [CCW]

→ The MD1 drives.
8. Open the lower right cover.

006-267-01
02.28.2005 FM4555
IN-66
 Scanner System 11. Open the lower right cover.
CAUTION 12. [Initial Check]
Do not place anything which reflects light (screwdriver, etc.) in the equipment
when checking interlock functions. The self-diagnosis of the scanner is executed, and the message
1. [Check Scanner] → [Diagnosis] → [Initial Check]
13. [TOP]
The scanner self-diagnosis is executed, and if it ends normally, the
message “Completed.” will be displayed. (Takes about 30 seconds) 14. Close the lower right cover.
2. [QUIT]
4. [Initial Check]

to be checked if it is normal. (Takes about 15 seconds)
5. [QUIT]
8. [Initial Check]

9. [QUIT]
006-267-01
02.28.2005 FM4555
IN-67
8.5.2 Checking the Upper Small Cover Interlock 8.5.3 Checking the Film Tray Interlocks
1. [Check Mechanism] → [Motor Operation] → [Motor Operation] → [MJ1] <NOTE>

The procedure for checking the interlock function is the same for both the upper
2. [Action]: [CW] and lower film trays. Check for both trays by replacing [SOLA11] and [MB12]
with [SOLA21] and [MB22] in the procedure shown below.
→ The MJ1 drives. 1. Insert the shutter into the film tray.
4. Open the upper small cover.
2. [Check Mechanism] → [Other Actuators] → [SOLA11]
5. Close the upper small cover.
4. Pull out the film tray.
5. [Action]: [OFF] → [ENT]
7. [Check Mechanism] → [Motor Operation] → [Motor Operation] →
[MB12]
8. [Action]: [CCW]
Check that no operating sound of the MB12 can be heard.
10. Close the film tray.

Check that operating sound of the MB12 can be heard.

12. Pull out the shutter.
13. Perform the same checks for lower film tray.
006-267-01
02.28.2005 FM4555
IN-68
1. [Check Mechanism] → [Motor Operation] → [Motor Operation] → [MJ1]
2. [Action]: [CW]

→ The MJ1 drives.
4. Open the sorter right cover.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
IN-69
8.6 Checking Fan Operations 1. [Heat-Developer] → [Temp. Control] → [OFF] → [ENT]
Altogether operations of four fans need to be checked. 2. [QUIT]
3. [Fan Operation]
4. [Group]: [Group A] → [ENT]
Check the operation and wind direction of the FANG1 and FANG3.
7. [Action]: [intermittent] → [ENT] → [QUIT] → [QUIT]
8. [Group]: [Group B] → [ENT]

Check the operations and wind direction of the FANG2.
11. [Action]: [intermittent] → [ENT] → [QUIT] → [QUIT] → [QUIT]

12. [Temp. Control] → [ON] → [ENT] → [QUIT] → [QUIT]
14. Put a hand over the louver on the rear cover to check for the operation
and wind direction of the power supply fan.
006-267-01
02.28.2005 FM4555
IN-70
If the image QC function is set to “enable”, and if additional removal unit is installed or
the film tray size is changed, enter the format baseline value of the image QC function.
{MU:2.3 [14-3-3]_FORMAT}
<REMARKS>
Format baseline values by film size (Allowable range: 5%)
35 x 43 cm: Format A; 304.0 mm, Format B; 406.0 mm
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
IN-71
9. INSTALLATION OF MULTIPLE SETS
To install multiple sets of this equipment, perform “5. INSTALLATION” to “8.
CHECKING EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS” for each set and complete all settings and
operation checks of each set.
After completing these operations for all sets, perform “10. SETTING CLIENTS”
onwards and perform the settings of each client collectively for all sets using the DI
Tool (DPX7 PC Tool function).
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
IN-72
10. SETTING CLIENTS 10.1 Connecting the PC for Servicing to the
Network
 Outline of Client Setting To connect the PC for servicing to the network, set the IP address and subnet mask of
<NOTE>
Before performing the following settings, install the DI Tool in the PC for
servicing, and check that the FTP site directory settings have been completed.
{MU:4.2_Preparations for Using the DI Tool}
1. Connect the network cable of the PC for servicing to the network to

which the equipment is connected.
2. Turn ON the power of the PC for servicing.
3. From the Windows taskbar, click [Start] → [Settings] → [Control

Panel].
4. Double-click [Network and Dial-up Connections] → Right-click [Local

Area Connection] → [Properties] → [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)].
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
IN-73
5. Set [IP Address] and [Subnet Mask].
<INSTRUCTIONS>
administrator of the installation site.
6. [OK] → [OK]
7. Close all windows.
006-267-01
02.28.2005 FM4555
IN-74
10.2 Starting the DI Tool/Connecting DI Tool to 10.2.2 Connecting DI Tool to the Equipment
the Equipment 1. Check that the equipment is in the standby state.
Start the DI Tool (DPX7 PC Tool function) and complete connections for
communicating with this equipment. 2. Right-click [Hospital Name] → [Add].
10.2.1 Starting the DI Tool
1. Click [Start] from the Windows taskbar → [Program] → [Fujifilm] → [DI

Tool].
→ The DI Tool main screen appears.
2. Click [NET] in [DRYPIX 7000/DRYPIX 5000/DRYPIX 4000] displayed on

the DI Tool main screen.
→ The DPX7 PC Tool function starts.
The DPX7 PC Tool function screen appears after the startup.
→ The screen for entering the printer name (Host Name) to be registered
appears.
3. Enter the Host Name entered on this equipment at “7.2.4 System

Management/Network”.
4. Select [DRYPIX 4000] for model.
5. [OK].
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
IN-75
6. [Network]. 8. Click the function button (ex. [Control] button) at the top of the DPX7
PC Tool function screen.
→ Communication with this equipment starts. When all connections with this
equipment have completed, the operation panel of this equipment switches
to the following screen, activating the various commands from DPX7 PC Tool
function.
<NOTE>
If communications become disabled, the [LOGIN Failure] message appears
on the DPX7 PC Tool function.
→ The [HostInformation] screen appears.
7. Enter the IP address and the subnet mask entered on this equipment
at “7.2.4 System Management/Network”, and click [OK].
→ This completes preparations for enabling communications between this
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
IN-76
10.3 Importing Individual Data → After import ends, the [File transfer is completed.] message appears, and the
data is saved in the HD in the PC for servicing.
Import individual data into the DPX7 PC Tool function, and change the various
parameters of the data as necessary.
1. “Printer name importing individual data” → [Control] → [File Save/

Load] → [Save from the printer] → [Execute]
→ Reading of individual data starts.
2. [OK]
→ The [Control] screen is returned.
3. To change the system settings set using the M-Utility, perform the
following procedure.
“Printer name importing individual data” → [Setting] → [Config]
→ The system setting screen of the printer appears.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
IN-77
4. Set various parameters according to the following printer system Item Function Value
setting list, and click [Update]. Auto FDC Automatic density correction ex- 2: None
ecution timing when film is loaded 1: Everylot
For details of each function, refer to “SERVICE MODE 4.7 [PC1-2] 0: Everypack
Config”. Set Alarm Whether to sound alarm or not 2: PULSE
{MU:4.7 [PC1-2]_Config} 1: ON
0: OFF
Bold: Default
Set Alarm Tone Setting of alarm sound type 500: Low
Item Function Value 1200: Medium
Version Displays the equipment version, 2400: High
serial No., power voltage informa- Set Key Touch Whether to sound panel touch 1: ON
tion buzzer 0: OFF
Protocol Information Protocol information Set Key Touch Tone Setting of panel touch buzzer type 500: Low
Protocol Protocol used for communication DICOM (Fixed) 1200: Medium
2400: High
AE-title DICOM AE Title (For 10pix/mm DRYPIX4000
recording) Language Setting of operation panel display ja: Japanese
language en: English
Fine PRT AE-title DICOM AE Title (For 20pix/mm DRYPIX4000HIGH de: German
recording) fr: French
Role Role on DICOM protocol SCP (Fixed) it: Italian
sv: Swedish
Port No. TCP port No. used for communi- 0 - 65535 (104) es: Spanish
cation da: Danish
Data Transfer Timeout Standby time setting when data is 30 - 3600 (300) no: Norwegian
suspended pt: Portuguese
(Becomes error when setting time el: Greek
is exceeded) fi: Finnish
nl: Dutch
Association Count Maximum number of accesses to 1 - 10 (10) zh: Chinese(Simplified)
the equipment at the same time tw: Chinese(Traditional)
by DICOM communication ko: Korean
Logging DICOM DICOM communication log level 0: none Sorter Setting of sorter presence/ab- 1: Enable
setting 1: normal sence 0: Disable
2: detailed
Size Information Setting of film size display type 1: Cm
Default Client Whether to use or not the [default] 0: Yes displayed on the operation panel 2: Inch
setting of the [Client:] list for un- 1: No 3: Japanese
registered clients
User Settable Setting of U-Utility [User Settable] 1: Enable
Real Dmax on film Setting of Dmax at the highest 0: 3.6 image output enable/disable 0: Disable
density 1: 4.0
BackupLog Setting of user operated log ac- 1: ON
Requested Dmax less Than Whether to accept density Dmax 0: Reject quisition function enable/disable 0: OFF
3.6 3.6 or below 1: Accept
Printer
Model Printer manufacture model name DRYPIX4000
Manufacturer Printer manufacturer name FUJI PHOTO FILM CO.,LTD.
Option Software option setting unique to
equipment
17-Steps Pattern Whether to display 17-steps pat- 1: Enable
tern for the U-Utility test pattern 0: Disable
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
IN-78
Item Function Value {MU:4.7 [PC1-2]_Config}
QC Setting of U-Utility [QC] function 1: Enable
enable/disable 0: Disable
Enabling Step4 Whether to use step edge pattern 1: Enable
[Density 4] or not 0: Disable
Set Target Density Setting of target density of each
tray
Tray1/Tray2 Each tray setting
Density1 Setting density of [Density 1] 20 - 250 (<Density2) (48)
Density2 Setting density of [Density 2] 20 - 250 (<Density3) (120)
Density3 Setting density of [Density 3] 192 - 250 (192)
Film Information Setting of film information printing 1: Upper Left
position 2: Upper Right
3: Lower Left
4: Lower Right
Date Format Setting of date display format dis- 0: yyyy/MM/dd
played on operation panel 1: MM/dd/yyyy
2: dd/MM/yyyy
Mobile Setting for use in Japan only 1: Mobile
(Do not change default value) 0: Stationary
Warning at system start Setting of whether to warn the 0: Disable
user of any shutter present during 1: Enable
startup prompting to pull it out, or
to continue to boot the equipment
disabling the tray in question with-
out warning
Tray1/Tray2 Tray setting
Size Film size setting 0: OFF
1: 14*17
2: 14*14
3: 10*14
4: 10*12
5: 8*10
(Tray1: 14*17/Tray2: 14*17)
Color Film base color setting blue: blue (HL)
clear: clear (HL)
ML: blue (ML)
(Tray1: blue (HL)/
Tray2: blue (HL))
Sorting by Film Size Whether to implement sorting by 1: Disable
film tray or not 0: Enable
Sorting by Film Tray1/ Setting of bin ejected to by film 1: Bin#1
Tray2 tray 2: Bin#2
3: Bin#3
4: Bin#4
(Tray1: Bin#1/Tray2: Bin#1)
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
IN-79
10.4 Settings by Client 1. [Setting] → “printer name” → [Add]
10.4.1 Registering Clients

Register the clients (image output device) connected to this equipment with the DPX7
PC Tool function.
<CAUTION>
The [Clients:] list is registered with a client named “WatchDRYPIXLink”.
Because this is the internal AE Title used for communications if the DRYPIX
Link is a client, do not change it. Changing it will disable communication when
DRYPIX Link and this equipment are connected.
<NOTE>
For equipment with main unit software version V3.0 or later at shipment,
“MammoQCTest” is registered as default. If the version has been upgraded from
an earlier version, read equipment data and add and register new clients.
<REMARKS>
FCR-CSL : Settings provided for connecting CR-IR346CL (console for FCR
XG-1) and CR-IR348CL (console for FCR5000 series). This settings
is applied to the clients of named [FCR-CSL].
Default : Settings for clients other than the above.
QC-TEST : Name of default client (AE Title) used in U-Utility QC test pattern
output.
MammoQCTest : Name of default client (AE Title) used in U-Utility Mammo QC test
pattern output.
→ The screen for entering the client name (AE Title) to be registered appears.
2. Enter the client name → [OK]

→ The new client is added to the [Clients:] list.
<NOTE>
Up to 16 characters can be entered for the AE Title.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
IN-80
 Deleting Clients 10.4.2 Client Settings
Perform the following procedure to delete registered clients. Set parameters for the registered client.
Set the following items according to the corresponding client settings in “Modality
1. Click the name of the client to be deleted from the [Clients:] list. Connection List”.
<NOTE>
2. Click [Delete] at the bottom of the [Clients:] list.
The default values for client parameters listed below are the values for a newly
→ A message to confirm the deletion of the client selected appears. registered client and differ from the default values set for “default”, “FCR-CSL”,
3. [OK].
“WatchDRYPIXLink”, “QC-TEST” and “MammoQCTest” in the [Clients:] list.
→ The selected client is deleted.

1. “Printer name” → “Registered client name”
 Correcting the Client Name → The screen for setting client parameters appears.
Perform the following procedure to correct the name of registered clients.
1. Double-click the name of the client to be changed from the [Clients:]

list.
→ The [ProtocolInformation] dialog of the client selected appears.
2. Change the name of the client.
3. [OK].
→ The name of the client selected changes.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
IN-81
2. Set various parameters according to the list of client settings below. Item Function Value
Use Max/Min Density Which minimum density/maxi- 0: printer
For details of each function, refer to “SERVICE MODE, 4.7 [PC1-3] mum density value is to be 1: modality
Clients”. used.
{MU:4.7 [PC1-3]_Clients} Logging Client DICOM communication log fil- 0: No
tering setting 1: Yes
Bold: Default Reprint Use reprint function or not 0: No
Item Function Value 1: Yes
Protocol Change Base Color Change base color or not 0: Disable
(Disable:110H[F]) 1: Enable
Attribute list error Send error message for unex- 0: not indicated
(0107H Warning) pected data received or ignore 1: indicated Define Film Size of 11x14" Whether to interpret 11x14 size 0: 27.9x35.6cm
warning description as 25.7x36.4 cm or 1: 25.7x36.4cm
as 27.9 x 35.6 cm
Attribute value out of range Send error message for out-of- 0: not indicated (The latter size is not used cur-
(0116H Warning) range data received or ignore 1: indicated rently)
warning
Image size is larger than Notify that images have been 0: not indicated {MU:4.7 [PC1-3-1]_Protocol}
imagebox (B604H Warning) reduced if too large to fit image 1: indicated
frame, or ignore warning
N-Event-ReportRQ Send event report or not 0: disabled
1: enabled
Use extention format Use expansion format or not 0: No
1: Yes
ID ID for differentiating EV (Philips Easy Vision)
HM (Hitachi DR2000/Cla-
vis view)
CR (XG-1/CR-Console)
CR (Synapse)
SM (Siemens)
Use Default Annotation Use Annotation or not 0: No
1: Yes
Change Film Change film or not
Enables film change. Can set 0: 0116H[W]
whether to send details of error
Details of errors are sent to the 272: 0110H[F]
client, without changing film
Details of errors (unique values 21317: 5345H[F]
for FUJIFILM systems) are sent
to the client,without changing
the film
Use System Timeout Set timeout of reception from 0: No
client or not 1: Yes
Presentation LUT Use LUT information sent from 0: No
client or not 1: Yes
Precede Picking Up Use precedent removal function 0: No
or not 1: Yes
006-267-04
10.02.2006 FM4992
IN-82
Item Function Value {MU:4.7 [PC1-3-2]_Magnify}
Magnify
Procedure Selection of enlargement/re- 0: A-VR
duction processing method 1: SSM
Default smoothing type Selection of smoothing type 1: SHARP
2: MEDIUM
3: SMOOTH
4: modality
Adjustment parameter
SHARP
Edge detection Perform enlargement/reduction 0: OFF
processing for edge or not 1: ON
Detection level Edge detection level setting 1 - 1023 (600)
Sharpness Sharpness adjustment param- -70 - 300 (130)
eter setting
Character color Character color setting 0: White
1: Black
MEDIUM
eter setting
1: Black
SMOOTH
eter setting
1: Black
Default Requested Decimate/ Magnification/reduction setting 1: DECIMATE
Crop Behavior if client does not send informa- 2: CROP
tion when images are reduced 3: FAIL
4: modality
Magnification Type Set the image enlargement/re- 0: NONE
duction processing type 1: CUBIC
2: modality
Requested Image Size Specify the length of line to be 0 - 8800 (0)
(0=None) printed on the image for one
frame
Default Requested Image Which requested image size is 0: printer
Size to be used 1: modality
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
IN-83
Item Function Value
LUT
Procedure Selection of tone correction 0: SAR
processing method 1: BAR
Default LUT Selection of LUT number used 1 - 8 (1)
as default
Configuration Information Which LUT number is to be 0: printer
(Default LUT#) used 1: modality
Adjustment parameter
LUT1 - LUT8 Setting of LUT1 to LUT8
γ table No. Selection of γ table number of 11 - 99 (BAR: 1 - 10)
LUT *1, *3
Max. Density Maximum density value (x100 0 - 300, 330, 360
for SAR, BAR is % value) (BAR: 0 - 100) *2, *3
Min. Density Minimum density value (x100 0 - 300 *3
for SAR, No setting for BAR)
Contrast Contrast setting (x100, No set- (BAR: 10 - 400) (100)
ting for SAR)
Number of Tuning No. of fine adjustment points for 0 - 5 (0)
Points SAR
Point1 - Point5 Setting of fine adjustment

points 1 to 5
Density Setting of x100 of density value 1 - 300 (120)
to be finely adjusted
Shift Setting of x100 value of move- -100 - 100 (0)
ment density value
Contrast Setting of x 100 of contrast of 10 - 400 (100)

points to be finely adjusted
Dmax 3.6 Setting of tone correction type 0: Standard
for Dmax 3.6
Illumination Lighting 0 - 65535 (2000) *4
Default Illumination Which lighting setting is to be 0: printer
used 1: modality
Reflective Ambient Light Reflected peripheral light 0 - 65535 (10) *4
Default Ambient Light Which reflected peripheral light 0: printer
is to be used 1: modality
*1: Up to 20 can be entered for BAR but enter between 1 and 10.
*2: When entering density exceeding 300, enter 330 or 360.
*3: The default value differs in LUT1 to LUT8.
*4: The Illumination and Reflective Ambient Light setting value total must be within 4000.
{MU:4.7 [PC1-3-3]_LUT}
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
IN-84
Item Function Value Item Function Value
Output Format Resolution Setting of image resolution (20 0: Standard
pix/mm or not) 1: High
Border Density Background density (x100 of 0 - 300 (300) 2: modality
actual value)
Default Film Destination Setting of the priority of film 0: printer
Default Border Density Which background density is to 0: printer discharge destination 1: modality
be used 1: modality
Film Destination Film discharged destination set-
Polarity (Pos./Neg.) Reverse the black/white of the 1: normal (Pos.) ting
image 2: reverse (Neg.)
3: modality PROCESSOR Discharge to output film tray on 0: not use
the equipment 1: use
Trim density Image trim density (x100 of ac- 0 - 300 (0)
tual value) Bin No. 1 - Bin No. 4 Discharge to specified bin 0: not use
(Bin No. 1 is same as PRO- 1: use
Trim Whether there is image trim 0: OFF CESSOR)
1: ON
2: modality
{MU:4.7 [PC1-3-4]_Output Format}
Trim Width Width of the trim (pixels) 1 - 9 (1)
Number of Copies Default number of print copies 1 - 99 (1)
Default Number of Copies Which number of printed film is 0: printer
to be used 1: modality
Margin Between Image Setting of image frame intervals 0 - 50 (20)
(Unit: pixel)
Image Layout Setting of image layout method
Positioning to film center 0: concentration
Center of remaining segment 1: spread
set with frame interval value
Default Film Size Film size priority 0: printer
1: modality
Film Size Setting of default film size 1: 8IN*10IN
2: 10IN*14IN
3: 14IN*14IN
4: 14IN*17IN
5: 10IN*12IN
Default Medium Type Film base color priority 0: printer
1: modality
Medium Type (base color) Setting of default film base 1: blue
color 2: clear
Film Orientation Setting of film orientation 1: PORTRAIT
2: LANDSCAPE
3: modality
Mirror Setting of film back/front 0: OFF (Normal)
1: ON (Mirror)
Processing Type Setting of density processing 0: Type1
calculation method 1: Type2
Print Priority Setting of print priority 1: HIGH
2: MEDIUM
3: LOW
4: modality
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
IN-85
Item Function Value <NOTE>
Annotation Sorter setting depends on settings by client above, as well as settings of
Annotation Height Setting of magnification de- 1 - 4 (1) [Sorting by Film Size] in [Config] settings of the printer. The settings of
gree of annotation printing area 5: modality [Sorting by Film Size] have priority over the above client settings [Default
along character height Film Destination] and [Film Destination] in [Output Format] settings.
Annotation Font Setting of font type of annota- System: System
tion Film ejection bin priority order:
Annotation Size Setting of font size of annota- 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, (1) [Sorting by Film Size]=[Enable]
tion 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, Outputs to the bin specified at [Sorting by Film Tray 1/2] regardless of the
36, 48, 72 (point)
[Default Film Destination] and [Film Destination] settings and whether or not
Upper Left/Upper Center/ Setting of annotation position, the bin is specified by the client.
Upper Right/Lower Left/ and entering
Lower Center/Lower Right (2) [Sorting by Film Size]=[Disable]
Outputs to the bin when [modality] is selected at [Default Film Destination]
{MU:4.7 [PC1-3-5]_Annotation} and the bin number is specified by the client (Also applies to [PROCESSOR]
specification. Note that when the specified bin number is 5 or above, the
destination is the same as when [PROCESSOR] is selected because the
sorter of this equipment is a 4-bin specification model).
3. To set the sorter, perform steps 4. to 5. below. (3) [Sorting by Film Size]=[Disable]
4. [Output format] → [ Default Film Destination] Outputs to the bin specified at [Film Destination] when the [modality] is
selected at [Default Film Destination] but the bin number is not specified by
Set the priority of destination to which film is to be discharged when the client, or when [printer] is selected at [Default Film Destination].
using the sorter by selecting [printer] (printer side) or [modality] (client
side). 6. [Update]
5. [Output format] → [Film Destination] → The changed settings are saved in the HD in the PC for servicing.
After selecting [PROCESSOR] or [Bin No. 1] to [Bin No. 4], set the
discharge destination of the film.
• [0: not use] : Discharge destination is not set from the corresponding client
• [1: use] : Discharge destination is set from the corresponding client
<NOTE>
Though the film destination can be set to more than one of [Bin No.1] to [Bin
No.4], select only one of them.
When multiple destinations are set, the actual discharge destination is the
bin with the lowest number.
<REMARKS>
When [PROCESSOR] is set as the discharge destination, film will be discharged
to the output film tray on this equipment. At this time, it will not be possible to set
other bins as the discharge destination.
When set to [Bin No. 1], films will be discharged to the same destination as when
set to [PROCESSOR].
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
IN-86
10.4.3 Settings by Client 10.4.4 Setting Client [MammoQCTest]
1. If connecting several clients to this equipment, repeat the “10.4.1 Perform the following procedure to use the mammo QC function.
Registering Clients” procedure and register all clients connected to <NOTE>
this equipment.
• This menu is effective for DI Tool software version V3.0 or later.
<NOTE> • This function is effective for equipment whose main unit software version is
It is not possible to register clients with the same name on one printer. V3.0 or later.
Clients with the same name can be registered on different printers, however • Added client [MammoQCTest] cannot be deleted.
if these printers exist within the same establishment, the settings of • To use the mammo QC function in equipment whose main unit software
additional clients registered will be the same as existing clients. version has been upgraded from V2.0 or earlier to V3.0 or later, add the client
Changing the name and settings of one client will make the same changes [MammoQCTest] beforehand.
in the other clients as well. {MU:5.13_Settings for Using MammoQC Function After Upgrading Main Unit
{MU:4.5_Registering and Deleting Clients} Software Version from V2.0 or Earlier to V3.0}
<REMARKS>
1. Import the individual data.
Up to 64 clients can be registered including [default], [FCR-CSL],
[WatchDRYPIXLink], [QC-TEST] and [MammoQCTest]. 2. Set LUT2 to 8 of client [MammoQCTest].
For LUT2, set the same value as the LUT of the mammo system used in the
2. Perform “10.4.2 Client Settings” for all clients registered. hospital. If there are several mammo systems in the hospital, set the LUT value of
one of these systems to LUT2, and those of the other systems to LUT3 to LUT8
respectively.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
IN-87
10.5 Adding and Registering Printers 3. Perform “10.3 Importing Individual Data” and “10.4 Settings by Client”
for each set.
To install several sets of this equipment within one establishment, register all sets, and
perform “10.3 Importing Individual Data” and “10.4 Settings by Client” for each set.
<REMARKS>
Up to 32 printers can be registered for one establishment.
1. Right-click [Hospital Name] → [Add]
→ The screen for entering printer name (HostName) to be registered appears.

<NOTE>
Printer can also be added and registered by right-clicking printer name
which have already been registered, and selecting [Copy] and [Paste]. The
clients registered with this printer are also copy-registered at the same
time.
<NOTE>
Names already registered with the establishment, names exceeding 16
characters, blanks, names starting with a number, and names consisting of
2-byte characters only cannot be registered.
→ The new printer is registered at [Equipment list].
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
IN-88
10.6 Sending Data on Setting to the Equipment 10.7 Settings for U-Utility
Send individual data set using the DPX7 PC Tool function to the HD of the equipment. If the following U-Utility functions have been enabled, perform the settings
corresponding to each function.
1. “Printer name to send data” → [Control] → [File Save/Load] → [Load
to the printer] → [Execute]  Image QC function
Register user ID.
 Reprint function
Register user ID, and set macro (%REPRINT%) in annotation settings.
{MU:5.2_Setting Reprint}
 User settable image output function

Save user settable image to the equipment.
{MU:5.4_Setting Output of User Settable Image}
→ The individual data set using the DPX7 PC Tool function is sent to the selected
printer.
After transfer of individual data ends, the [File transfer is completed] message
appears, and the individual data is saved in the HD of the equipment.
2. Send each individual data to all printers registered.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
IN-89
10.8 Ending the DI Tool and the Equipment
1. Reboot the equipment for the transferred individual data to be valid.
“Printer name” → [Control] → [System Config] → [Reboot] → [Power
OFF] → [Reset]
→ The equipment starts termination operation, and the power goes OFF.
2. End the DPX7 PC Tool function by clicking the [EXIT] button.
3. End the DI Tool by clicking the [Exit] button on the DI Tool main
screen.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
IN-90
11. CHECKING NETWORK
CONNECTION
11.1 Checking the Start-up of the Equipment

1. Press the power ON switch on the operation panel.
2. Check that the equipment starts up.
11.2 Checking Film Output and Images from

Connected Equipment
1. Ask the user to output images from a device on the network connected
to this equipment, and check that films are output normally.
Check the following.
• Images are output without errors.
• Images are normal.
11.3 Checking the Termination of the Equipment

1. Shutdown the equipment by touch panel operation.
2. Check that the equipment starts termination operations and its power
goes OFF.
006-267-01
02.28.2005 FM4555
IN-91
12. INSTALLING THE EQUIPMENT 12.1.1 Saving Individual Data in the Equipment HD
After completing the various system settings, save them as system settings
immediately after installation in the HD of the equipment.
12.1 Backing Up Individual Data 1. Start the DI Tool and then startup the DPX7 PC Tool function.
 Flow of Data When Backing Up Iindividual Data 2. “Printer name saving individual data” → [Control] → [System Config]
→ [Save Config.] → [Recover] → [Memory]
→ The current system settings are saved in the HD of the equipment.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
IN-92
12.1.2 Saving Individual Data in the PC for Servicing 12.1.3 Saving Individual Data on the FD
Save the individual data saved inside the equipment as backup data in the PC for Save the individual data saved in the PC for servicing to a backup FD.
servicing.
1. Insert a backup FD to the FDD of the PC for servicing.
1. “Printer name saving individual data” → [Control] → [File Save/Load]
→ [Save from the printer] → [Execute] 2. “Printer name” → [Data Transfer] → [Indv] → [All] → [Backup]
→ Individual data is sent to the PC for servicing and saved in the HD.
When the data transfer is completed, the [File transfer is completed.] message
appears. → The [Backup] window for selecting the folder for saving the individual data
appears.
<REMARKS>
The individual data is saved in the “Indv” folder of the registered printer name
folder in the “C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\DRYPIX\Printers” folder.
In the above example, the individual data is saved in the “C:\Program Files\
Fujifilm\DRYPIX\Printers\Hospital Name_DPX4000-1\Indv” folder.
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
IN-93
3. Select “Drive A” → [OK]
→ The individual data is copied to the FD. When the data copy is completed, the
[File transfer is completed.] message appears.
4. Remove the FD.
006-267-01
02.28.2005 FM4555
IN-94
12.2 Checking, Saving, and Deleting Error Logs 12.2.1 Checking the Error Log
Which Occur at Installation 1. “Printer name confirming error logs” → [Control] → [File Save/Load]
Check if errors have occurred during installation using the DPX7 PC Tool function,
→ [Display Error Log] → [Execute]
then save the errors in the HD of the equipment and HD of the PC for servicing as
necessary, and delete then error logs.
 Flow of Data When Saving Error Logs
→ The error log display screen appears.
2. Refer to each error code displayed to confirm if serious errors have

occurred.
3. Close the error log display by clicking [OK].
006-267-05
02.15.2007 FM5080
IN-95
12.2.2 Saving Error Logs 12.2.3 Deleting Error Logs
1. [Save IOT Log] → [Execute] 1. [Clear Error Log] → [Execute]
→ The data for analysis is saved in the HD of the equipment. → All log data inside the equipment are cleared.
When the data is saved, the [Save IOT Log completed.] message appears.
2. End the DPX7 PC Tool function by clicking the [Exit] button.
2. [Transfer Analysis Log] → [Execute]
3. End the DI Tool by clicking the [EXIT] button on the DI Tool main
screen.
original settings.
→ The saved data for analysis is sent to the PC for servicing, and saved on the
HD.
When the data transfer is completed, the [Transfer Analysis Log completed.] 6. Turn OFF the power of the equipment.
message appears.
<REMARKS> 7. Disconnect the network cable of the PC for servicing from the network
• Text file of error logs and various settings information
• Communication logs (external input, formatter, formatter to printer, printer
ISC)
• The error log data is saved under the filename “AppEvt.txt”.
execution.
• The analysis data is saved in the “LOG” folder of the registered printer name
folder in the “C:\Program Files\FujiFilm\DRYPIX\Printers” folder.
3. To copy only the data of the error log from the PC for servicing to the
FD, open the above “LOG” folder, and copy “AppEvt.txt”.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
IN-96
12.3 Installing the Equipment
Move the equipment to the place of installation to enable use by the user.
12.3.1 Installing the Equipment without Using Fixtures
1. Ensure the required installation space around the equipment.
2. Rotate the two adjustable foots of the equipment with the hand and
ground to the floor.
3. Rotate the lower nut of the adjustable foot with a spanner and adjust
the height.
Rotate the two nuts equally. Adjust the amount the nut is adjusted so that even
load is applied to the adjustable foot.
<NOTE>
Lift the equipment until the casters rise above ground.
4. Rotate the upper nut of the adjustable foot and push against the
equipment to secure.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
IN-97
12.3.2 Installing the Equipment and Securing with Fixtures 1. Install the side brackets on both sides of the equipment.
 Main Parts of Fixtures <NOTE>

• Press the side brackets against the equipment and retain them.
• Secure the nuts with tools.
<REMARKS>
Shapes of the side brackets, which are to be installed on the left and right sides
of the equipment, are the same.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
IN-98
2. Install the rear side bracket approximately 300 mm in front of where 3. Press the brackets downward and insert together with the spacers of
the equipment is installed. 2 mm and 1 mm for rear side. Confirm the height of the bracket.
<REMARKS> <INSTRUCTIONS>
The shape of the brackets which are to be installed on the equipment is defferent Make sure that the rear side bracket is higher than that of the side.
for the front side and rear side.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
IN-99
4. Secure the spacers and rear side bracket with bolts. 6. Move the equipment to the fixing position.
CAUTION
When setting the equipment to the floor fixture, be careful not to have the power
cable and network cable caught by the fixture.
<NOTE>
If the equipment cannot be placed against the fixing brackets when moving
the equipment to the fixing position, follow the procedures 3. to 5. again to
adjust the height of the bracket.
5. Install the rear cover.
7. Install the front side bracket on the front of the equipment.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
IN-100
8. Press the front side bracket downward, and install the 2 mm spacers 10. Install the front cover.
for front side.
<INSTRUCTIONS>
Insert the 2 mm spacers up to the point where the 2 mm spacers do not fit.
9. Secure the front side bracket with bolts.
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
IN-101
12.4 Cleaning the Equipment
1. Clean all covers with a moist cloth.
2. Hook the shutter to the hooks of the left side cover and rear cover.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
IN-102
APPENDIX 1 ADDITIONAL PROTECTIVE  Connection Locations of Cables for Additional Protective
Grounding of the Equipment and Clamp Locations
GROUNDING
<INSTRUCTIONS>
Additional protective grounding will be required if installing this equipment in the Please use power supply cord and clamp (which is required for keeping the
patient environment with the connected equipment in a non-medically used room. additional protective ground cord in position) approved by the electrical
Refer to Medical System Standard, IEC60601-1-1. standard of the country to which the equipment is to be installed.
However, there may be cases where additional protective grounding is not possible.
(For example in cases like non-metallic faceplate screws as well as boxes and
isolated supply systems etc.) If this should happen, please refer to “Counter-measures <Counter-measures for additional protective grounding>
for additional protective grounding” on the next page. 1. Engage the services of a professional to make the necessary preparations for the
This installation work should only be performed by persons certified to handle connection of additional protective grounding.
electrical facility construction. 2. If the connected device possess a hospital grade earth terminal and is mobile, move
Definitions of “patient environment”, “medically-used room”, and “non-medically used the connected device and replace with a power supply plug which has hospital
room” are given below. grade earth terminal.
 Patient Environment 3. Install a isolating transformer to the connected device. In this way, the power supply
from the connected device will be separated from the main power supply.
Patient environment is the area for the patient to receive medical procedures (treatment,
tests, diagnosis, monitoring). It is the space measuring 2.5 m in all four directions and
2.5 m in height from the area of the patient’s body.
It excludes the space traveled by the patient to reach the medically-used room.
 Medically-Used Room
Room equipped with protective grounding (medical use outlet or medical use
grounding terminal) implemented by the medical grounding method. The protective
grounding inside the medically-used room is equipotential, and the protective
grounding of this medically-used room is equipotential to that in the other medically-
used room.
Generally, a portion of the medically-used room is the patient environment.
 Non-Medically Used Room
Areas outside the medically-used room are considered the non-medically used room.
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
IN-103
BLANK PAGE
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
CONTROL SHEET

04.25.2005 02 Revised (FM4589) 1, 2, 3
02.28.2006 03 Revised (FM4704) 2-4
PERFORMANCE CHECK (PC)

02.28.2006 FM4704
PC-1
INSTALLATION OF THE DRYPIX 4000 - Checklist
Checklist  3. WORK BEFORE INSTALLATION
 4. TEMPORARY INSTALLATION
The purpose of this checklist is to document the steps preformed and record the  4.4 Checking Components
values determined at the time a DRYPIX 4000 is installed at a site. This document is
not intended to replace the installation checklist located in the DRYPIX 4000 Service  5. INSTALLATION
Manual but to be followed concurrently.  5.1 Removing External Packaging of the Equipment Main Body
Before passing over this equipment to the customer, check the system connection and
output image (from section 8 on) after service as well as at installation.  5.2 Removing Covers
 5.3 Removing Fixtures
Installation Information  5.4 Changing the Film Size
 5.5 Installing Options
Serial Number : ___________________ Software Ver. : ____________________  6.1 Installing Additional Film Tray
Site Name : ___________________ Installed by : ____________________  6.2 Installing Additional Image Memory Board
 6.3 Installing the Sorter
Site Number : ___________________ Signature : ____________________
 5.6 Connecting Network Cable
Room Number : ___________________ Date Completed : ____________________  5.7 Connecting the Power Cable
 5.7.1 Checking the Resistance of the Power Cable
• Record resistance value measured:
Resistance between L and N : ________Ω
Resistance between L and E : ________Ω
Resistance between N and E : ________Ω
 5.8 Reinstalling Covers
 7. SETTING OF THE EQUIPMENT

 7.1 Power ON and Starting the M-Utility
 7.2 System Settings
 7.2.1 System Management/System Config.
 7.2.2 System Management/Set Main Panel
 7.2.3 Heat-Developer/Power Supply Voltage
 7.2.4 System Management/Network
006-267-02
04.25.2005 FM4589
DRYPIX 4000 Service Manual PC-1
PC-2
 8. CHECKING EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS
 8.1 Checking Automatic Density Correction and Conveyance Operations
• Check for film jamming (tray 1)  Pass  Fail
• Check for film jamming (tray 2)  Pass  Fail
 8.2 Checking Density
• Record density value displayed:
Check that the measured values are within the specified values.
When Dmax setting is set to “4.0 enable” for main unit software version V2.0 or later,
check that the density of the 17th step is 4.0 or higher using the external densitometer.
Specified values Tray 1 displayed value Tray 2 displayed value

Step
Dmax 2.64 Dmax 3.0 Dmax 3.3 Dmax 3.6 Dmax: Dmax:
1 fog fog fog fog
4 0.30±0.05 0.30±0.05 0.30±0.05 0.30±0.05
5 0.48±0.05 0.48±0.05 0.48±0.05 0.48±0.05
6 0.66±0.05 0.66±0.05 0.66±0.05 0.66±0.05
7 0.84±0.05 0.84±0.05 0.84±0.05 0.84±0.05
8 1.02±0.05 1.02±0.05 1.02±0.05 1.02±0.05
9 1.20±0.05 1.20±0.05 1.20±0.05 1.20±0.05
10 1.38±0.05 1.38±0.05 1.38±0.05 1.38±0.05
11 1.56±0.05 1.56±0.05 1.56±0.05 1.56±0.05
12 1.74±0.05 1.74±0.05 1.74±0.05 1.74±0.05
13 1.92±0.05 1.92±0.05 1.92±0.05 1.92±0.05
14 2.10±0.07 2.10±0.07 2.10±0.07 2.10±0.07
15 2.28±0.07 2.40±0.10 2.40±0.10 2.43±0.10
16 2.46±0.07 2.70±0.10 2.70±0.10 2.95±0.10
17 2.64±0.07 3.00±0.10 3.30±0.20 3.60±0.20
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
PC-3
 8.3 Checking Recording Image Format, and for Image Unevenness and Scratches
• Check for image unevenness and scratches:  Pass  Fail
• Measure recording image format:
Check that the measured values are within the specified values.
Specified values Tray 1 Tray 2

B 27.0±1.0 32.3±1.0 51.1±1.0 50.5±1.0
C 300.0±1.2 300.0±1.2 200.8±1.2 200.0±1.2
D, E 14.5±1.0 27.5±1.0 25.8±1.0 26.0±1.0
| D–E | ≤1.2 ≤1.2 ≤1.2 ≤1.2
F 413.0±1.2 226.5±1.0 225.5±1.0 225.5±1.0
| F–G | ≤1.0 ≤1.0 ≤1.0 ≤1.0
 8.4 Checking Conveyance and Scratches on Film Image When the Sorter is Connected
• Check for abnormal sounds and smell  Pass  Fail
• Check for film jamming  Pass  Fail
• Check for scratches  Pass  Fail
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
PC-4
 8.5 Checking the Interlock Function Summary Test:  Pass  Fail
 8.5.1 Checking the Upper Front Cover/Upper Right Cover/Lower Right  Leave the final film at the customer site.
Cover Interlock
Test equipment: _________ Model:_________ S/N: _______ Calibration Due:_________
 • Driving System
 • Scanner System
 8.5.2 Checking the Upper Small Cover Interlock
 8.5.3 Checking the Film Tray Interlocks
 • Tray 1
 • Tray 2
 8.5.4 Checking the Sorter Right Cover Interlock
 8.6 Checking Fan Operations
 8.7 Settings for U-Utility
 9. INSTALLATION OF MULTIPLE SETS

 10. SETTING CLIENTS
 10.1 Connecting the PC for Servicing to the Network
 10.2 Starting the DI Tool/Connecting DI Tool to the Equipment
 10.3 Importing Individual Data
 10.4 Settings by Client
 10.5 Adding and Registering Printers
 10.6 Sending Data on Setting to the Equipment
 10.7 Settings for U-Utility
 10.8 Ending the DI Tool and the Equipment
 11. CHECKING NETWORK CONNECTION

 11.1 Checking the Start-up of the Equipment
 11.2 Checking Film Output and Images from Connected Equipment
 11.3 Checking the Termination of the Equipment
 12. INSTALLING THE EQUIPMENT

 12.1 Backing Up Individual Data
 12.2 Checking, Saving, and Deleting Error Logs Which Occur at Installation
 12.3 Installing the Equipment
 12.4 Cleaning the Equipment
006-267-03
02.28.2006 FM4704
PC-5
BLANK PAGE
006-267-01
02.28.2005 FM4555

Drypix4000 E05 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Drypix4000 E05 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FUJI MEDICAL DRY LASER IMAGER

Copyright © 2004-2007 by FUJIFILM Corporation

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced,

Document No. 006-267-05

 Notation of Cautions, Warning, etc.

1. SAFETY PRECAUTION ................. SAFETY PRECAUTION-1

2. LABELS ........................................ SAFETY PRECAUTION-4

3. PROTECTIVE HOUSING FOR

4. CONNECTABLE PERIPHERALS .. SAFETY PRECAUTION-11

5. CLASSIFICATION ....................... SAFETY PRECAUTION-11

1. SPECIFICATIONS ............................... SPECIFICATIONS-1

DISCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT (MD)

1. OUTLINE OF EQUIPMENT .................................. MD-1 3.2 Removal Unit ..........................................................................MD-22

3.8 Sorter ......................................................................................MD-34 5.3 Normal Processing .................................................................MD-56

1. TROUBLESHOOTING METHOD .......................... MT-1 5. CLEARING FILM JAMS ................................... MT-100

2. ERROR CODE ..................................................... MT-2 6. TROUBLESHOOTING REFERENCE ................ MT-101

REMOVAL AND ADJUSTMENT (MC)

PRECAUTIONS ON INSPECTIONS, 4.4 Removal Drive Cam ...............................................................MC-33

SERVICE MODE (MU)

1. OUTLINE OF SERVICE MODE ...........................MU-1 [14] QC ............................................................................................... MU-12

3. M-UTILITY (MAINTENANCE UTILITY) .............MU-18 [1-3] Log Files ........................................................................... MU-32

4. DI Tool ..............................................................MU-75 [PC1-1-5] MacAddress ......................................................... MU-101

[PC1-2-10] Tray1/Tray2 ........................................................MU-111.1 [PC1-3-3] LUT ...................................................................... MU-121

[PC1-3-5] Annotation ............................................................ MU-131 [PC7-6] Uniformity ........................................................................ MU-163

[PC9] Control ...................................................................................... MU-188 5. SETTING METHOD BY PURPOSE ..................MU-204

APPENDIX 1 PRECAUTIONS AND SETTINGS

SERVICE PARTS LIST (SP)

INDEX ........................................................................SP-2 06A SUB-SCANNING UNIT 1 ..................................SP-18

01A COVER 1 ...........................................................SP-3 06B SUB-SCANNING UNIT 2 ..................................SP-19

01B COVER 2 ...........................................................SP-4 07 SCANNING OPTICS UNIT ...............................SP-20

01C COVER 3 ...........................................................SP-5 08A HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 1 ........................SP-21

01D COVER 4 ...........................................................SP-6 08B HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 2 ........................SP-22

02A FRAME 1 ...........................................................SP-7 08C HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 3 ........................SP-23

02B FRAME 2 ...........................................................SP-8 08D HEAT DEVELOPMENT UNIT 4 ........................SP-24

04A REMOVAL UNIT 1 ...........................................SP-11 10A CONTROLLER 1 ..............................................SP-27

04B REMOVAL UNIT 2 ...........................................SP-12 10B CONTROLLER 2 ..............................................SP-28

04C REMOVAL UNIT 3 ...........................................SP-13 11A SORTER 1 .......................................................SP-29

05A CONVEYOR UNIT 1 .........................................SP-14 11B SORTER 2 .......................................................SP-30

05B CONVEYOR UNIT 2 .........................................SP-15 11C SORTER 3 .......................................................SP-31

05C CONVEYOR UNIT 3 .........................................SP-16 12 FIXTURES .......................................................SP-32

14 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM .........................................SP-34

15 PARTS NOS. SEARCH TABLE .........................SP-44

16. List of Service Parts for Securing

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

1. INSTALLATION CONDITIONS ............................. IN-1 5. INSTALLATION .................................................. IN-20

4. TEMPORARY INSTALLATION ............................ IN-15

6. INSTALLING OPTIONS ...................................... IN-31 8. CHECKING EQUIPMENT OPERATIONS ........... IN-61

PERFORMANCE CHECK (PC)

INSTALLATION OF THE DRYPIX 4000 - Checklist....PC-1

11.05.2004 00 New release (FM4426 (1)) All pages

006-267-04 DRYPIX 4000 Service Manual

1. SAFETY PRECAUTION  Adjustable Foot Anchorage

1.1 General Precautions  Optical Parts Handling Precautions

 Interlock Release Jig

1.2 Precautions Against Laser Radiation  Laser Output Circuit Interlock

To avoid laser radiation exposure, observe the following precautions.

2.1 Laser Caution Labels

 Locations of Laser Caution Labels

 List of Laser Caution Labels  IEC60825-1:2001/EN60825-1:2002 Class 3B Panel Label #1

 HHS Certiﬁcation and Identiﬁcation Label

 IEC60825-1:2001/EN60825-1:2002 Class 3B Panel Label #2

2.2 Other Labels

 Locations of Other Labels